Loading...
Long Beach Police Department Training Bulletins Long Beach Police Department Training Bulletins Effective January 5, 2024 Wally Hebeish Chief of Police LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETINS TABLE OF CONTENTS TB TITLE TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 – Department Report Revised March 2004 4 – LGBTQ Terminology Revised January 2018 8 – Psychological Aspects of Crowd & Mob Behavior Revised May 2002 10 – Dead Body Calls Revised June 2017 Reviewed July 2019 11 – Suicides Revised August 2019 12 – SUICIDE BY COP Revised April 2020 13 – Report Writing REVISED August 2023 14 – U-Visa REVISED July 2023 17 – Canine Unit REVISED October 2023 18 – Field Interview Card REVISED May 2017 REVIEWED June 2019 21 – Courtroom Testimony REVISED March 2020 22 – Solicitors on Private Property Open to Public Access REVISED December 2011 27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles REVISED May 2004 28 – Stolen Vehicle Handling Procedures REVISED January 2021 30 – Vehicle Handling Procedure – Abandoned Vehicle REVISED August 2001 31 – Firearms Safety REVISED February 2000 Reviewed January 2020 Training Division 32 – Civil Disputes REVISED February 2001 36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control REVISED November 2017 37 – Drill Instructions REVISED May 2017 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations REVISED April 2004 40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Squad Vehicle Formations REVISED May 2004 41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics – Citizen Rescue REVISED July 2004 42 – Impact Weapons Revised April 2020 43 – Persons Exhibiting Erratic Behavior REVISED January 2024 45 – Crime Lab Field Unit Requests REVISED January 2003 48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence REVISED October 2008 50 – Wellness Program REVISED March 2021 56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers REVISED April 2002 57 – Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR) REVISED January 2018 58 – Aircraft Accidents REVISED January 2002 59 – Firearms Evidence REVISED May 2006 62 – Mentally Ill Persons REVISED May 10, 2023 65 – Communications Radio Transmission Procedure REVISED May 2017 67 – Arrest and Control Techniques REVISED January 2017 REVIEWED January 2020 68 – Prowlers REVISED April 2001 70 – Investigative Follow-up Procedures REVISED January 2011 71 – Community Relations REVISED February 2001 72 – Gangs REVISED February 2022 73 – Robbery – Arrival at Scene & Broadcast Procedure REVISED August 2001 74 – Robbery – Deployment and Search REVISED August 2001 75 – Robbery – Corpus Delicti REVISED January 2020 76 – Burglary Investigations REVISED November 2000 78 – Sex Crimes – Indecent Exposure REVISED January 2022 79 – Sex Crimes – Forcible Rape REVISED September 2022 81 – Beach Operation - SUV/Quad/ATV REVISED January 2007 82 – Operation of Emergency Vehicles REVISED August 2000 Patrol Bureau 84 – Defensive Driving Techniques REVISED August 2000 Patrol Bureau 85 – CNS Depressants REVISED July 2000 Investigations Bureau 86 – CNS Stimulants REVISED September 2019 REVIEWED September 2019 Investigations Bureau 87 – Marijuana REVISED September 2019 Investigations Bureau 88 – Narcotic Analgesics REVISED January 30, 2020 89 – Hallucinogens REVISED November 2019 Investigations Bureau 90 – Under the Influence Investigations and Arrests REVISED September 2003 91 – Citizen’s Arrest REVISED May 2003 Patrol Bureau 94 – DUI REVISED December 2000 Patrol Bureau 95 – Tow Truck Requests REVISED September 2000 98 – Implied Consent Law REVISED May 2003 Patrol Bureau 99 – Traffic – Following too closely REVISED May 2001 Patrol Bureau 100 – Financial Responsibility Laws REVISED June 2001 Patrol Bureau 101 – Traffic Hand Signals REVISED September 2002 Patrol Bureau 102 – Collisions – Metro A-Line Revised March 2021 Support Bureau 103 Public Transportation Safety Revised March 2021 104 – Crimes in International Waters REVISED January 2004 Investigation Bureau 106 – Disturbing the Peace REVISED March 2004 Patrol Bureau 107 – Intoxilyzer 5000 REVISED February 2003 investigations Bureau 108 – Special Incidents REVISED October 2001 Patrol Bureau 111 – Juvenile Booking Procedures REVISED September 2000 112 – Juvenile Procedures Truancy REVISED April 2000 Investigations Bureau 113 – Fraudulent Document Report REVISED April 2001 Investigations Bureau 115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon REVISED November 2022 Support Bureau 116 – Terrorism – Homicide Bombers REVISED February 2005 Support Bureau 117 – Robbery – The Report REVISED August 2019 Investigations Bureau 118 – Solicitors REVISED February 2002 Investigations Bureau 119 – Bunco Related Crimes REVISED March 2001 Investigations Bureau 120 – Bomb Scene Investigations REVISED September 2005 Investigations Bureau 121 – Explosives REVISED January 2000 Investigations Bureau 122 – Traffic Collision Reporting REVISED February 2002 Patrol Bureau 123 – Misdemeanor Citations REVISED March 2001 124 – Credit Card Investigation REVISED March 2001 128 – Homicide Investigations REVISED March 2020 129 – Stolen Aircraft REVISED November 2003 Investigation Bureau 131 – Counterfeit Currency REVISED March 2001 Investigations Bureau 132 – Community Services Assistant Incidents Involving Self-Defense REVISED September 2023 Community Services Bureau 133 – Security Guards & Private Patrol Operators REVISED February 2003 Investigations Bureau 134 – Firearms Qualification REVISED September 2022 Support Bureau 136 – Shoplifting Theft REVISED September 2002 Investigations Bureau 140 – Bar Inspections REVISED April 2004 Investigations Bureau 141 – Security of Information REVISED August 2001 Investigations Bureau 144 – Clandestine Laboratories & LAIMPACT Clandestine Lab Team REVISED September 2019 Investigations Bureau 145 – Vehicle Stops REVISED March 2005 Support Bureau 146 – High-Risk Vehicle Stops REVISED October 2004 Patrol Bureau 147 – One Officer Patrol Unit REVISED January 2003 Patrol Bureau 148 – Parking Citation Books REVISED January 2002 Patrol Bureau 149 – Child Abuse REVISED September 2022 Investigations Bureau 150 – Flares and Flare Patterns REVISED April 2002 Patrol Bureau 151 – Licensed Health Facilities REVISED January 2002 Patrol Bureau 152 – DV Restraining Orders REVISED November 2021 Investigations Bureau 154 – DMV Re-Examination REVISED April 2001 Patrol Bureau 155 – Child Abductions REVISED October 2022 156 Sexual Assault Investigations Part 1 REVISED March 2021 157 Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2 REVISED March 2021 158 – Hazardous Materials, Wastes & Chemical Dumping REVISED February 2001 Patrol Bureau 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity REVISED January 2003 Office of the Chief of Police 162 – CA Driver’s License and ID Card REVISED January 2003 Patrol Bureau 163 – Child Sexual Abuse Material REVISED September 2022 Investigations Bureau 164 – At-Risk Missing Person REVISED March 2021 Investigations Bureau 166 – Report of Property REVISED September 2003 Investigations Bureau 167 – Carotid Restraint Support Bureau 168 – Mexican Vehicle Registration REVISED August 2002 Investigations Bureau 169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines REVISED August 2018 Patrol Bureau 170 – Searching Techniques REVISED May 2019 Support Bureau 174 – Photographic Lineups REVISED May 2020 175 – LB Transit Bus Video Evidence Review & Collection REVISED November 2005 177 – Reserve Police Officer Duties REVISED May 2004 Patrol Bureau 178 – Court Appearances REVISED February 2001 179 – Communicable Diseases REVISED January 2023 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis REVISED December 2000 Administration Bureau 182 – Elder/Dependent Adult Abuse REVISED September 2022 Investigations Bureau 186 – Communicating with the Deaf or Hard of Hearing REVISED June 2012 Support Bureau 187 – Tactical Communication REVISED January 2001 191 – Hazards of Approaching Suspects REVISED August 2019 Support Bureau 192 – Foot Pursuits REVISED February 2021 Support Bureau 195 – Vessel Collision Responses REVISED February 2022 Patrol Bureau 196 – Vessel Report REVISED January 2021 197 – Officer & Employee Involved Traffic Collisions REVISED June 2002 Patrol Bureau 198 – Parolees REVISED April 2021 200 – Mandatory Helmet Law REVISED May 2002 Patrol Bureau 201 – Recognizing and Handling Alzheimer’s Victims REVISED December 2001 Patrol Bureau 204 – Field Shotgun Inspections REVISED February 2002 Reviewed January 2020 Support Bureau 205 – Proper Handling of Prisoners Property REVISED July 2000 Support Bureau 211 – Unloading Firearms REVISED September 2004 Reviewed January 2020 Support Bureau 212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employees REVISED September 2001 Investigations Bureau 213 – 14602.6 CVC – 30 Day Impounds REVISED July 2013 Patrol Bureau 216 – Computer Crimes REVISED May 2003 Investigations Bureau 218 – Sex Offender Status – Megan’s Law REVISED March 2004 Investigation Bureau 221 – Tire Deflation Device REVISED June 2017 Patrol Bureau 222 – Hate Crimes REVISED July 2019 Investigations Bureau 1 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 3 – Department Report Revised March 2004 DEPARTMENT REPORTS INTRODUCTION The Long Beach Police Department utilizes a computer Records Management System (RMS). This system consolidates several existing computer programs into one comprehensive package. Your investigative and statistical gathering abilities are enhanced via the RMS system. In order for the system to work to its fullest potential, it is imperative that all information collected is accurate, complete and received in a timely manner. To facilitate the filing of complete, accurate reports, all reports forms are designed in a uniform manner. POLICY In all cases, the initial decision to file a report rests with the investigating Department employee. Employees are required to file all reports in a complete, accurate, and timely manner. Department Record #s (DR#s) shall be obtained through the use of a Mobile Digital Terminal (MDT) or any computer terminal for all incident/informational reports. Any unused DR# requires a cancellation memo, "Request to Void DR# or SUPP#", addressed to "Administrator, Records Division" explaining the reason for the cancellation. In this system, there is only one DR# assigned per incident with supplement numbers issued for all connecting or follow-up reports. An example of a DR# on the officer's work sheet would be DR#960012345 SUPP 000 or 001. When to use a Supplemental Number (SUPP#) Patrol - An officer is dispatched to an armed robbery of a truck driver driving a tractor- trailer loaded with five vehicles. This is one incident with one reportable crime. As per Training Bulletin #194, Hierarchical Report of Crimes, the 215(A) PC carjack would be the primary crime and would be entered into the CRIME CLASS field on the DR. The tractor, tractor-trailer and each vehicle would require that a Vehicle form be completed and receive its own SUPP#. Detectives – Any type of follow-up will require a "Follow-up Report/Arrest Incident Worksheet", PD 2310.001(K) to be used. The INCIDENT INFORMATION section should be completed and attached to the narrative follow-up. TB3 – Department Reports 2 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents DEPARTMENT REPORT (DR) – FORMS/SECTION USAGE MATRIX LBPD form PD 10000.00, "Long Beach Police Department Incident Report Worksheet", is mandatory for all reporting. Additional forms will be added, as needed depending on the circumstances of the crime. The Property Report, PD 2240.009(A), is the only Department form that can be filed by itself when used for found property only. An "X" indicates that the section is a minimum requirement for the listed report type. Other SECTIONS may be necessary depending on the information available to the Department Employee. Yellow Forms Pink Forms Blue White Report Type Inci info Per/ Bus MO codes Veh sect Narra tion Fraud doc Bike Rpt Prop Rpt Loss Rpt Vessel Rpt Veh Form Follow up X X Found Property X Veh stolen X Veh stored simple X Veh impound X Veh Rec local X Veh Rec Foreign X Fraud X X X X X *Bike stolen X X X X X Bike stored X Bike impound X Bike found X Bike recovered X X Vessel stolen/emb X Vessel stored X Vessel impound X Vessel recovered X *Bike attachment – goes with incident as loss for stolen bike (PD3200.003(B) "BICYCLE REPORT CONTINUATION") in 212 or 459. Stand-alone abbreviated 484 or 487 only with no suspects; use PD 3200.003(A); when the only loss is the bike "Bicycle Report." The following form facsimiles are meant to serve only as examples. There are many other forms, including but not limited to: TB3 – Department Reports 3 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Fraudulent Document • Bicycle Report • Vessel Report • Loss Report • Property Report • Vehicle Report • Arrest Report All of these forms are set up so the information required can be entered quickly and accurately. It is incumbent upon the filing officer to print clearly, check all appropriate boxes and file complete reports. 1. INCIDENT VICTIM PD Form 2310.001 (A) or PD Form 10000.00 DR # SUPP NO REPORT TYPE REPORT DATE REPORT TIME CALL NO DISP PRIMARY CRIME CLASS LOCATION CITY ZIP UNIT # FROM DATE FROM TIME TO DATE TO TIME DID#1 DID #2 SUPV. CONF TOTAL LOSS USE OF FORCE RNB SUPV NOTIFY – REMARKS VEH REPORT ATTACHED LAB REQUESTED LAB RESPONDED SFST EXAM DRE EXAM DOMESTIC VIOLENCE ELDER ABUSE SOC FORM PROPERTY REPORT LOSS REPORT VICTIM INJURED PHOTOS TAKEN SUSPECT IN CUSTODY JUVENILE ARRESTED DIAGRAM HATE CRIME REMARKS PERSON INVOLVEMENT VIC TYPE NAME SEX RACE HAIR COLOR EYE COLOR HEIGHT WEIGHT DOB AGE CONFIDENTIAL TYPE ID NUMBER ST TYPE ID NUMBER ST TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT TYPE EMPLOYER/SCHOOL OCCUPATION FROM/TO WORK HOURS DAYS OFF LOCATION CITY ST ZIP CODE CONTACT TYPE PHONE NO EXT REMARKS On the reverse side of this form officers will find PD form 2310.001(B), a list of MO Codes. Each crime investigated and reported requires that MO Codes be identified. Officers are required to check the boxes next to the appropriate codes for each crime investigated. MO Codes are also found on the Abbreviated Incident Report Form PD 2310.001(O). On the reverse side PD 2310.00(T). TB3 – Department Reports 4 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT CONTINUATION/PERSON WORKSHEET This is a continuation or page two of PD Form 2310.001 (E) PERSON INVOLVEMENT SUSP # TYPE NAME SEX RACE HAIR COLOR EYE COLOR HEIGHT WEIGHT DOB AGE CONFIDENTIAL FROM HEIGHT TO HEIGHT FROM WEIGHT TO WEIGHT FROM AGE TO AGE TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT TYPE ADDRESS CITY S T ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT TYPE ID NUMBER ST TYPE ID NUMBER ST TYP E ID NUMBER BOOKING # GEN APPEARANCE BUILD HAIR DESC FACIAL FEATURES CHARACTERISTICS SPEECH DEMEANOR DISGUISE GLASSES WEAPON TYPE CALIBER BARREL LENGTH COLOR CLOTHING ALIAS NAME SEX RACE ALIAS NAME SMT LOCATION DESCRIPTION SMT LOCATION DESCRIPTION TYPE EMPLOYER/SCHOOL OCCUPATION WORK HRS DAYS OFF LOCATION/ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CONTACT PERSON TYP E PHONE NO EXT REMARKS LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT CONTINUATION/PERSON WORKSHEET This is also a continuation of PD Form 2310.001 depending on the number of vehicles involved. VEHICLE INVOLVEMENT INVL DATE TYPE LICENSE NO STATE LIC YEAR LIC TYPE VEH YEAR MAKE MODEL STYLE COLOR WINDOW TYPE MODIFICATIONS DAMAGE #OCCUPANTS SPECIAL FEATURES REMARKS TB3 – Department Reports 5 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents ABBREVIATED INCIDENT REPORT This is PD Form 2310.001(O) DR # SUPP NO REPORT TYPE REPORT DATE REPORT TIME CALL NO DISP PRIMARY CRIME CLASS LOCATION CITY ZIP UNIT # OCCURRED ON DATE TIME BETWEEN DATE TIME DID#1 DID #2 CONFIDENTIAL TOTAL LOSS REMARKS PERSON INVOLVEMENT TYPE NAME SEX RACE HAIR COLOR EYE COLOR HEIGHT WEIGHT DOB AGE TYPE ID NUMBER ST SOCIAL SECUIRTY NO TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT TYPE ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TYPE PHONE NO EXT TYPE EMPLOYER/SCHOOL OCCUPATION FROM/TO WORK HOURS DAYS OFF REMARKS VEHICLE INVOLVEMENT INVL DATE TYPE LICENSE NO STATE LIC YEAR LIC TYPE YEAR MAKE MODEL STYLE COLOR VALUE VIN TB3 – Department Reports 6 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents FOLLOW-UP REPORT/ARREST INCIDENT WORKSHEET This is PD Form 2310.001(K). FOLLOW – UP REPORT FOLLOW – UP AND ARREST ARREST ONLY RNB INVOLVED DR SUPP DATE RPTD TIME RPTD PRIMARY CRIME CLASS LOCATION OF OCCURRENCE CITY DID #1 OFF #1 DID #2 OFF #2 UNIT ID VICTIM SUSPECT/DEFENDANT BOOKING# CALL# DOMESTIC VIOLENCE GANG INVOLVEMENT JUVENILE ARRESTED USE OF FORCE NAME/DID# OF SUPV NOTIFIED (RNB ONLY) REMARKS/MODUS OPERANDI PERSON INVOLVEMENT INVOLV DATE NAME SEX RACE DOB HGT WGT HAIR EYE SKIN OP LIC# STATE SSN ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP PHONE HOM MSG ( ) BUSINESS NAME TYPE OF BUSINESS SUSPECT INFORMATION SUSP#________ AGE _______ CLOTHING IN-CUSTODY BOOKING#_____________________________ TYPE EMPLOYER/SCHOOL OCCUPATION WORK HRS DAYS OFF LOCATION/ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CONTACT PERSON TYPE PHONE NO EXT REMARKS REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Administration Bureau . 7 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 4 – LGBTQ Terminology Revised January 2018 LESBIAN, GAY, BISEXUAL, TRANSGENDERED, QUEER or QUESTIONING (LGBTQ) TERMINOLOGY INTRODUCTION The City of Long Beach is home to a large population of people who identify as lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgendered, queer or questioning (LGBTQ). People who are unfamiliar with these terms are often hesitant to engage in conversation regarding a person’s sexual orientation or gender expression out of fear of using the incorrect term. Employees will likely encounter members of this community during their professional contacts or the investigation of crimes, community partnerships, and within the workplace. In order to communicate more effectively, and serve the needs of those who identify as LGBTQ, employees of the Long Beach Police Department should become familiar with the following terminology: DEFINITIONS Ally | A person who is not LGBTQ, but shows support for the LGBTQ people and promotes equality in a variety of ways. Androgynous | Identifying or presenting as neither distinguishably masculine, nor feminine. Asexual | The lack of a sexual attraction or desire for other people. Biphobia | Prejudice, fear or hatred directed toward bisexual people. Bisexual | A person emotionally, romantically or sexually attracted to more than one sex, gender, or gender identity, though not necessarily simultaneously, in the same way or to the same degree. Cisgender | A term used to describe a person whose gender identity aligns with those typically associated with the sex assigned to them at birth. Closeted | Describes an LGBTQ person who has not disclosed their sexual orientation or gender identity. Coming out | The process in which a person first acknowledges, accepts and appreciates his or her sexual orientation, or gender identity, and begins to share that with others. TB4 LGBTQ Terminology 8 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Gay | A person who is emotionally, romantically, or sexually attracted to members of the same gender. Gender dysphoria | Clinically significant distress caused when a person's assigned birth gender is not the same as the one with which they identify. According to the American Psychiatric Association's Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM), the term - which replaces Gender Identity Disorder - "is intended to better characterize the experiences of affected children, adolescents, and adults." Gender-expansive | Conveys a wider, more flexible range of gender identity or expression, than typically associated with the binary gender system. Gender expression | External appearance of one's gender identity, usually expressed through behavior, clothing, haircut or voice, and which may or may not conform to socially defined behaviors and characteristics typically associated with being either masculine or feminine. Gender-fluid | According to the Oxford English Dictionary, a person who does not identify with a single fixed gender; of or relating to a person having or expressing a fluid or unfixed gender identity. Gender identity | One’s innermost concept of self as male, female, a blend of both, or neither – how individuals perceive themselves and what they call themselves. One's gender identity can be the same or different from their sex assigned at birth. Gender non-conforming | A broad term referring to people who do not behave in a way that conforms to the traditional expectations of their gender, or whose gender expression does not fit neatly into a category. Genderqueer | Genderqueer people typically reject notions of static categories of gender and embrace a fluidity of gender identity and often, though not always, sexual orientation. People who identify as "genderqueer" may see themselves as being both male and female, neither male nor female, or as falling completely outside these categories. Gender transition | The process by which some people strive to more closely align their internal knowledge of gender with its outward appearance. Some people socially transition, whereby they might begin dressing, using names and pronouns or be socially recognized as another gender. Others undergo physical transitions in which they modify their bodies through medical interventions. Homophobia | The fear and hatred of, or discomfort with, people who are attracted to members of the same sex. Lesbian | A woman who is emotionally, romantically or sexually attracted to other women. LGBTQ | An acronym for “lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender and queer.” TB4 LGBTQ Terminology 9 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Living openly | A state in which LGBTQ people are comfortably out about their sexual orientation or gender identity – where and when it feels appropriate to them. Outing | Exposing someone’s lesbian, gay, bisexual or transgender identity to others without their permission. Outing someone can have serious repercussions on employment, economic stability, personal safety, or religious, or family situations. Queer | A term people often use to express fluid identities and orientations. Often used interchangeably with "LGBTQ." Questioning | A term used to describe people who are in the process of exploring their sexual orientation or gender identity. Same-gender loving | A term some prefer to use instead of lesbian, gay or bisexual to express attraction to, and love of, people of the same gender. Sexual orientation | An inherent or immutable enduring emotional, romantic, or sexual attraction to other people. Transexual | A person who has undergone treatment or surgery to acquire the physical characteristics of the opposite sex. Transgender | An umbrella term for people whose gender identity or expression is different from cultural expectations based on the sex they were assigned at birth. Being transgender does not imply any specific sexual orientation. Therefore, transgender people may identify as straight, gay, lesbian, bisexual, etc. Transphobia | The fear and hatred of, or discomfort with, transgender people. Source: http://www.hrc.org/resources/glossary-of-terms CONCLUSION Long Beach Police Department employees are challenged with unique and sensitive interactions when people need police services. The understanding of common terminology, allowing for a shared language to be spoken, will enhance positive relationships between law enforcement and the LGBTQ community. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 10 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 8 – Psychological Aspects of Crowd & Mob Behavior Revised May 2002 PSYCHOLOGICAL ASPECTS OF CROWD AND MOB BEHAVIOR INTRODUCTION An unruly crowd bent on destruction can be a frightening thing. The more an officer knows about the characteristics of a crowd or mob, the better equipped the officer will be to handle the problem. MOBS Mobs come together with different motives, and often they exist in combination. These mobs include: • Aggressive Mob - Riots and terrorizes, as in the case of race riots, lynching, political riots and prison riots • Escape Mob - Is in a state of fright or panic. Members have lost their power to reason • Acquisitive Mob - Is motivated by a desire to acquire something. Food riots and looting are examples • Expressive Mob - A mob expressing fervor or revelry, such as religious activity, sporting events, etc. MOB PANIC Panic is over powering fright, creating highly emotional behavior. Panic mobs are extremely difficult to control. When people become violent, they cease to think rationally; their actions can be dangerous not only to themselves, but to others. There are four main factors involved in a panic-producing situation: • A perceived threat - It may be physical or psychological or both. It is regarded as imminent and the only alternative is to escape • Partial entrapment - There is only one, or at best limited escape routes from the situation • Partial or complete breakdown of the escape route • Front to rear communications failure - The false assumption that there is still an escape route leads people at the rear to exert forces forward. This, of course, causes those at the front to be smothered, crushed, or trampled TB8 – Psychological Aspects of Crowd and Mob Behavior 11 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents INFLUENCES THAT WORK IN FAVOR OF THE AGITATOR A mob leader who whips emotions to a peak can induce mob behavior in crowd members through suggestion and exhibited behaviors, as well as agitation. These behaviors and suggestions include: • Novelty - When people are faced with new and strange circumstances, their normal habits no longer govern their actions. The lessons of previous experience may not be applied. Some people welcome the break and react enthusiastically to new circumstances • Anonymity - People can lose themselves in a mob and feel that they will not be held accountable for their actions, whatever they may be • Release of repressed emotions - In a mob, a person's prejudices, dissatisfactions, and desires that are normally held in reserve are released. This causes the person to do things that may not be desired or might not have been dared to do • Force of numbers - A mob gives people a sense of power and a desire to use it. This feeling is enhanced by a feeling of irresponsibility. These two, a sense of power and a feeling of irresponsibility, are a dangerous combination. People under normal conditions control their anger, but when they are supported in their actions by many and they all share this anger, they feel whatever they do collectively is justified • Suggestion - A group will accept the leadership of a dominant personality and his ideas • Contagion - People become emotionally stimulated by actions of others. They may not even share the grievance. It may start in sympathy • Imitation - People copy or imitate others. Only those with strong convictions can resist conformity. In an emotional crowd or mob, which is likely to turn its anger against a dissenter, this pressure to conform is strong POLICE PROBLEMS Deaths, injuries, and damage to property may be expected as the result of riots. Verbal abuse, in the form of obscene remarks, taunts, ridicule, and jeers can be expected from a mob. Officers trained and well-disciplined will continue to carry out their orders, paying no attention to the psychological persuasion being used. Officers can expect the mob to throw filth, trash, or missiles of various kinds at them. Rioters have used vehicles, barrels, rocks, dynamite, weapons, etc., against the police. The squad leader, in accordance with principles of applying force, should deal with these attacks. Officers should avoid staying close to high buildings due to the threat of missiles dropped by rioters. To successfully meet the situations presented requires careful, intelligent effort and constant vigilance to detect attacks. CONCLUSION TB8 – Psychological Aspects of Crowd and Mob Behavior 12 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents In order to exercise control, an officer must have knowledge of how a crowd or mob reacts, and be able to maintain an impartial and professional approach. If an officer should panic or lose his temper, he could very well aggravate instead of control the problem. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 13 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 10 – Dead Body Calls Revised June 2017 Reviewed July 2019 DEAD BODY CALLS INTRODUCTION Police officers have a major responsibility when called upon to investigate a sudden or violent death. Officers represent the deceased; it is their duty to protect the decedent’s interests. If, through careless investigation, an improper interpretation is made, a spouse or family member may be deprived of benefits and property, or a murderer could go free. REPORTING PROCEDURE All deaths reported to the Police Department require the issuance of a department record (DR) number and the filing of a Dead Body Report; in most incidents, a Coroner’s case number will be issued. When filing the dead body report, officers will classify the death type as one of the following: • Natural • Accidental • Suicide • Homicide • Undetermined • Traffic Accident The Coroner’s Office is notified in all of the above, except when the death is of natural causes, and a doctor has treated the decedent within the past twenty days, and the doctor is willing to sign the death certificate. If the amount of time between the decedent’s most recent visits to the doctor exceeds twenty days, the Coroner must be notified; the Coroner then determines if the doctor can sign the death certificate. The following is a checklist of information, if available, to include in the narrative to ensure a thorough investigation: • How officers received the call; • Facts regarding the scene such as, position of the body, appearance of the room, clothing on the decedent, or other observations that seem pertinent; • Any facts known about the decedent such as, health issues, and attending physician; • If there is a doctor willing to sign the death certificate, include the doctor’s name, address, phone number and information about the illness and treatment; TB10 – Dead Body Calls 14 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Coroner’s case number, the name and identification number of the Coroner’s Office employee issuing the Coroner’s Case number; • The name of the mortuary receiving the decedent; • Name, address and phone number of next of kin; • If there are prescription drugs, list each drug and note any abnormal amount missing, i.e. bottle of 30 pills, only 2 left; • The contents of a suicide note if one is present. If an officer is dispatched to a hospital regarding a dead body, the officer should ultimately return to the location where the body was transported and document any additional facts surrounding the death investigation in the report. Officers should interview all parties having any information regarding the decedent. CORONER’S CASES In order to alert Coroner’s Office staff that they may need assistance in removing the decedent, or to expedite their response in the event the decedent is in public view, officers should collect all pertinent information prior to calling the Coroner’s Office. When officers notify the Coroner’s Office, they should communicate the following information: • Whether or not the decedent is in public view, such as on a sidewalk or a roadway; • The physical condition of the decedent such as, decomposed or overweight; • Any location issues such as stairs, unusual terrain like sand or the river bed; • Any weather considerations. The investigating police officer will remain on the scene until a Coroner’s Investigator arrives. Police officers will not disturb, move or search a decedent unless first approved by the Coroner’s investigator (Government Code 27491.2(b). The Coroner’s Investigator is responsible for inventory of the decedent’s property. Whenever the Coroner’s Investigator provides a list of the decedent’s property to the investigating officer, this list must be booked as evidence. DEATH NOTIFICATION In situations where a doctor has been contacted, and is willing and able to sign a death certificate, family members are usually aware of the death. This is because arrangements have been made by family members for a private mortuary to receive the body. When a doctor is unable or unwilling to sign a death certificate, and at any time the Coroner’s Office is notified and responding to the death investigation, the handling patrol officer shall coordinate with the Coroner’s Investigator which agency will make the death notification to the next of kin. When requested by the Coroner’s Office, and when the next of kin resides in the City of Long Beach, the investigating officer will make the death notification. In the event of a homicide or fatal traffic accident, the handling detective is responsible for coordinating the death notification with the Coroner’s Office. Notifications to next of kin residing outside the City of Long Beach are handled by the Coroner’s Office. If the next of kin resides in the immediate surrounding area of the City of Long Beach, at the request of the Coroner’s Officer, a field supervisor may authorize the notification. TB10 – Dead Body Calls 15 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The following will assist an officer in performing a death notification with professionalism and sensitivity: • Utilize tact and diplomacy with notifying family or friends of a death; • Use courtesy and compassion when making a death notification; • Use consideration when informing an individual who is elderly or in poor health; • When appropriate, have the individual seated prior to notification; • Pertinent instructions (who to contact, where, when, or phone numbers) should be provided in writing to the next of kin only after making an in person notification. For further, see LBPD Manual § 7.1.28 DEATH NOTIFICATION. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 16 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 11 – Suicides Revised August 2019 SUICIDES INTRODUCTION Suicide is the act or instance of ending one’s own life voluntarily or intentionally. In all dead body investigations, the first officer on scene should look for signs of foul play or movement of the body after death. Never assume the deceased died a natural death. The scene must be investigated and an attempt made to determine whether the death was natural, homicide, suicide, undetermined, or accidental. The Homicide Detail responds to any death where foul play is suspected or suspicious circumstances exist. INVESTIGATIVE PROCEDURE Before a conclusion of suicide is reached, a careful study should be made of the following: • Type of injury; • Presence of a weapon or death instrument; • Body positioning relative to physical evidence associated with or believed associated with the incident: • Existence of motive and the elimination of death by murder; • Accident or natural causes. The following will assist a patrol officer with their investigation: • Note the type of injury and attempt to determine if the injury is self-inflicted; • Note the presence of a tool or device used to cause injury or inflict death, do not overlook poisons or drugs; • Ask witnesses or relatives about the decedent’s behavior prior to death to obtain background information about motive and intent; • Look for a suicide note. The same process used to investigate homicides should apply to suicides. Murders have been committed and arranged to mislead law enforcement into concluding that a death is a suicide. During a suicide investigation, as with any other investigation, officers must be careful to preserve the scene and ensure that: • The body is left in its original position until the Coroner’s investigator arrives; • Evidence is not handled, moved or otherwise disturbed. LOS ANGELES COUNTY CORONER’S OFFICE (CORONER) TB11 -- Suicides 17 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents When a suicide is suspected, the Coroner’s Office is notified and will investigate. The Coroner will collect any suicide notes or poison and drugs that may have been used, while the investigating officer photographs or copies the note, and collects, packages and photographs all other evidence. TYPES OF SUICIDE DEATHS Gun Shot Gunshot wounds in a possible suicide can be classified in a variety of wound types including contact, near-contact, intermediate, and distant wounds. Officers should describe the wound location but not classify the wound type or whether it is an entrance or exit wound. Specific training and expertise are necessary for classifying and identifying wound types. Cutting The throat, wrists, chest and femoral artery are the parts of the body most commonly cut in a suicide. The location of the wound must have been accessible to the victim. Small superficial cuts near the main wound, or hesitation marks may be seen in a suicide caused by cutting. Cadaver spasms may also be present in self-inflicted cuttings, causing the victim to tightly clench the cutting instrument in his or her hand. The location of the body should also make sense. Toxicity – Poisoning Carbon monoxide poisoning is a common type of fatal poisoning. Carbon monoxide is a toxic gas, but being colorless, odorless, and tasteless it is difficult for people to detect. Carbon monoxide poisoning occurs after breathing in too much carbon monoxide (CO). It has also commonly been used as a method to commit suicide, usually by deliberately inhaling the exhaust fumes of a running vehicle. Modern automobiles that run on gasoline, diesel, methane or other carbon-based fuels and tools, gas heaters, and cooking equipment powered by carbon-based fuels such as propane, butane and charcoal produce levels of carbon monoxide which will kill in an enclosed space or if the exhaust path is obstructed. Symptoms of mild acute poisoning include lightheadedness, confusion, headache, feeling like the world is spinning, and flu-like effects. Larger exposures can lead to toxicity of the central nervous system and heart, and death. Death due to poisoning may have the following effect on the body after death: • Carbon monoxide and cyanide can create a livid cherry red color over large areas of the body; • Acids or common household poisons can create burns around the mouth and nose. Drowning When a person drowns, death is caused by asphyxia. Signs of drowning include the presence of mucus or vomit, violent struggling, and foam exuding from the nose and mouth of the victim. In the case of drowning deaths, Homicide Detectives should be TB11 -- Suicides 18 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents notified in accordance with LBPD Manual § 8.2.1.2 HOMICIDE DETAIL CALL-OUTS – NOTIFICATIONS. Hanging Death caused by hanging can be suicidal, but at times can be accidental. A particularly dangerous form of masochism called autoerotic asphyxia manifests itself by a subject attempting to heighten sexual arousal by oxygen deprivation. The person may also bind his hands and feet. Subjects employing autoerotic asphyxia may pass out and become unable to release themselves from the hanging device. In the absence of another person to release the subject, accidental death may result. In the case of an accidental death by hanging, or a suicide by hanging, it is not necessary that the body be suspended entirely off the ground for death to occur. The body may be half prone or in a sitting or kneeling position. Death may be caused by several circumstances: • Asphyxia; • Occlusion or tightening of the great vessels of the neck; • Inhibition of the heart due to pressure on the vagus nerve; • Fracture or dislocation of the spine. It is important that in this type of incident, barring any attempts at life saving measures, the hanging device remain untouched. Examination of the hanging device and details related to the knot may become a critical part of the evidence. End of Life Option Act – Health and Safety Code § 443 The End of Life Option Act creates a provision where physicians can prescribe aid-in- dying drugs to terminally ill patients. Prior to a doctor prescribing end of life drugs, a patient must satisfy a list of specific requirements. These requirements include demonstrating that they have the capacity to make medical decisions in their best interest. Additionally, the doctor must file forms with the State Department of Health documenting that the requirements have been met and the patient has made an informed decision. State law provides immunity from civil and criminal liability to a person who is simply present when a qualified patient self-administers an aid-in-dying drug. The law makes it a felony to deliberately aid, advise, or encourage a person to obtain or ingest aid-in-dying drug. A person may assist a qualified patient in any preparation of an aid-in-dying drug so long as they do not assist with ingestion. Officers encountering a scene where they believe a person died after ingesting an aid-in- dying drug prescribed by a physician should handle the death as a natural death. The physician should be contacted to sign the death certificate as the Coroner will not respond. The scene should be documented and witnesses interviewed to determine their role, if any, in the death. If the investigation shows someone administered aid-in-dying drugs to the decedent or any foul play is suspected then refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.1.2 HOMICIDE DETAIL CALL OUTS - NOTIFICATIONS. A qualified patient is required to complete a final attestation form at least 48 hours prior to choosing to self-administer the drugs. Officers investigating a potential End of Life Option death should make note of any paperwork they find related to the decision to use or the prescribing of an aid-in-dying drug. These forms are required to be submitted to TB11 -- Suicides 19 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents the state by the physician, so officers should leave the originals and document such forms by making copies or taking photos. State law specifically says death resulting from self-administering of an aid-in-dying drug, by a qualified patient, is not suicide and therefore prohibits health and insurance coverage from being exempted on that basis. Officers should code their report as DEAD BODY - EOL (End of Life Option) and not as a suicide. THE REPORT While this does not cover every possibility or scenario of a death by suicide, the following list will assist officers is filing a comprehensive report: • Describe the scene; • Describe the position of the body, clothing, and the location of any wounds, etc.; • Describe any physical evidence; • Include any information from friends, neighbors and relatives-concerning possible motive and intent; • Include any facts believed to relevant; • Include what was written in any suicide note. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 12 – Suicide by Cop Revised April 2020 12 – SUICIDE BY COP Revised April 2020 INTRODUCTION A Suicide by Cop (SbC) incident is an encounter in which a suicidal person attempts to die by forcing a law enforcement officer to use deadly force. The defining characteristics of SbC incidents are that the subject threatens the life of the officer or another person or attempts to make the officer believe the subject poses such a threat in order to give the officer no choice but to use lethal force to stop the threat. HOW TO RECOGNIZE AN SbC INCIDENT The following are some indicators of a possible SbC incident: • The subject says “kill me” or “shoot me” or otherwise expresses a desire to die. • The subject appears to be depressed or in a mental health crisis. • The subject is not behaving like a criminal offender (for example, the subject does not attempt to leave the scene). • The subject is behaving aggressively toward the police for no apparent reason. • The subject is exhibiting strange behavior, such as committing random acts of vandalism or ramming a police car. • The calling party may describe the subject as distraught, mentally ill, or a danger to themselves or others. RESPONDING TO A POTENTIAL SbC INCIDENT An important objective in responding to SbC calls is to reduce the subject’s level of anxiety and buy time for further communication. Officers must ensure their safety and that of the public. Only when safety is established can officers begin a process of asking the suicidal subject questions and looking for ways to de-escalate the situation. To increase your available time: • Keep a safe distance and use tactical repositioning to protect yourself whenever possible. • Slow things down and use whatever time is feasible so you can convey a sense of calm for the suicidal person. • Speak slowly to convey to the suicidal person that you are not in a hurry and that you have time to listen. Weapons If the suicidal subject has a firearm, it is a high-risk situation and should be handled like other situations involving a subject with a firearm. Responding officers should maintain TB12 – Suicide by Cop 21 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents a safe distance behind cover, use extreme caution, and warn arriving units of the safest approach. If you can establish that the suicidal person is unarmed or armed with a weapon other than firearm (such as a knife or blunt object), and if you can use distance and cover to protect yourself, you will have a wider range of possible tactics. Resources The response to SbC incidents is greatly improved when additional resources can be called to the scene including assisting units, a supervisor, Mental Evaluation Team (MET), and a K-9 Unit. Contact and Cover Ideally if there are two or more officers at the scene, one officer can be the contact officer while the other officer(s) provide cover. • The contact officer’s role is to communicate with the subject, establish a relationship of trust, and attempt to defuse the incident without use of deadly force. • To ensure the messages are clear and consistent, communication with the subject should be exclusively the contact officer’s function. Avoid multiple officers speaking to the subject at the same time. • The cover officer’s role is to protect the contact officer and the public. • If the contact officer is unable to establish a connection with the subject, the two officers can switch roles, or another officer can take over the contact role. Gather Information If there is no imminent danger described by a calling party, officers may be able to first contact the calling party and gather information regarding the subject. The caller may know if the subject has immediate access to a weapon or if the subject is acting in a threatening manner. The caller may have information about any specific issues, such as a divorce, loss of employment, relationship issues, mental health status, history of drug abuse or topics that should be avoided that may agitate the subject. COMMUNICATIING DURING AN SbC INCIDENT Non-Verbal Communication Officers should be aware that pointing a gun at a potentially suicidal person may increase his or her anxiety, exacerbate the situation, and hinder communication. An officer who says, “I’m here to help you,” while pointing a firearm at the suicidal person sends a conflicting message. In some situations, after distance and cover have been established, officers should consider keeping their firearms unholstered and in a low ready position. The low-ready position can seem much less threatening to the suicidal person. Pointing a firearm at a suicidal person can make it difficult to establish trust and communications. Verbal Communication TB12 – Suicide by Cop 22 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Establishing a personal connection and a relationship of trust with a suicidal person is the most effective way of defusing a SbC incident. The following are ways an officer can better communicate to someone who is suicidal: • Establish a rapport – introduce yourself and ask the person for his or her name, then use the name as you converse. • Speak simply – say one thing at a time and wait for a response. • Encourage conversation but don’t dominate the conversation or lecture the person. • Ask a lot of questions and listen carefully to the answers. • Use language the person can understand and avoid police jargon. • Aim for a tone of peacefulness and calm, not tension and chaos. • Be patient - never give ultimatums or deadlines. • Do not minimize what they are feeling. • Offer reassurance and allow the suicidal person to save face. • Be truthful – if you are caught in a lie, you may not be able to recover credibility. • Don’t go silent – keep the conversation going as much as possible. • If you say something and it has no effect, try saying something different. Do not repeat the same thing again and again, expecting a different response. • Avoid barking orders and instead make small requests, one at a time. In SbC situations, the difference between making a request and yelling an order can determine whether the subject complies. For example, if the subject has his hands behind his back, an officer yelling, “Show me your hands!” can raise the subject’s anxiety level, which is counter-productive. Instead, make a request rather than issuing an order such as, “Will you do me a favor and show me your hands? I want to make sure you don’t have a weapon, so we can take some time and talk. I want to talk to you about what’s going on with you today, but first I need to know you’re unarmed.” If the subject has a weapon, ask him or her to put the weapon down. If you get a person to respond to one request, you establish a precedent of cooperation and can ask another single request. For example: • “Hey, what’s going on? Can you do me a favor and move the knife away from your throat?” • If the person complies, thank him and make an empathetic comment before making another request. • “Good, thank you. I appreciate you doing that for me. I hope you will trust me, so we can talk a bit now. Do you think you could sit down on that bench for a minute and tell me what’s going on? I’d like to know what’s happening with you.” Attempt to keep the person from focusing on their thoughts about suicide by asking positive questions. Examples of questions include: • “Is there something in your life that you really enjoy?” If the answer is “no,” go to the future such as, “If you had your way, what would you like to do someday?” • Avoid “why” questions such as “Why do you want to die?”, “Why do you feel bad?” These types of statements keep the subject focused on negative thoughts. TB12 – Suicide by Cop 23 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Ask “what” questions such as, “Hey, what’s going on with you? What can I do to help you?” • Keep the conversation positive by asking, “What you told me must make you feel bad. Let’s talk about how to fix it”, “Tell me something good in your life or something you’d like to do some day.” Persons with Mental Illnesses Persons who are psychotic, schizophrenic, or who have a delusional disorder, present additional communication challenges. • If someone is having visions, do not discount what they are seeing or ignore the person’s hallucinations, but don’t buy into them as if they are real. • Acknowledge what they are seeing and how frightening that is for them by saying, “That must feel scary. I don’t see what you are describing, but I believe that you are and that must be frightening for you. I’m here to help you.” • Try to change the subject to something positive. CONCLUSION Incidents involving people who are suicidal are unpredictable and at times difficult to manage. Officers should always ensure their own safety and the safety of the public as of the utmost importance. When possible, officers should use the communication and strategies specific to SbC incidents to better assess and control SbC situations with the goal of achieving a peaceful outcome. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 13 – Report Writing REVISED August 2023 REPORT WRITING INTRODUCTION As much as 40% of a police officer’s work involves writing, most often writing incident reports. Other Department employees may also be tasked with taking incident reports as part of their duties. To ensure an employee’s thorough investigation is accurately reflected by the report filed, employees must present their findings, observations, and actions with clear and concise writing as a permanent record of that incident. An investigative report is a written document, prepared by an officer or other Department employee tasked with taking reports, that details that employee’s observations and actions as they relate to a specific event or incident. The judicial process cannot function without the investigative reports written by the investigating employee with direct knowledge of the criminal incidents. Investigative reports ensure officers, investigating employees, prosecutors, and judges have sufficient evidence to initiate or continue the judicial process and successfully prosecute or exonerate a suspect. CRIME REPORTING AND LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS State and federal statutes mandate that law enforcement agencies report certain events and incidents to the Department of Justice (Penal Code § 11107). These reports should describe the nature and character of each crime, note all particular circumstances of that crime, and include all additional or supplemental information pertaining to the suspected criminal activity. All incident reports should be based on thorough investigations and should not include assumptions or known false information. Any employee who knowingly files a false report will be guilty of a crime (Penal Code § 118.1). Local Law Enforcement Agencies also have a duty to inform victims of violent crimes about the California Victim Compensation Program (for further see Manual § 7.1.14 Victims of Violent Crimes Notification Requirements). CHARACTERISTICS OF AN EFFECTIVE INVESTIGATIVE REPORT No matter what type of investigative report is being written (e.g., arrest report, incident report, collision report) the report should have the following six characteristics: 1) Factual – Objective account of relevant facts related to the event or incident 2) Accurate – Consistency between what took place and what is documented in the report TB13 – Report Writing 25 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 3) Clear – Free of doubt or confusion on the part of the reader as to what the investigating officer is reporting 4) Concise - Brief and yet contain all relevant information the readers will need to understand the details of the incident 5) Complete - Contain all relevant information and facts 6) Timely - Reports should be filed in a timely manner, ensuring that any and all action required to be taken because of the report, can proceed without unnecessary delay NARRATIVE FORMAT AND CONTENT The 10-Part Investigative Report 1) Introduction - Explain how the incident came to your attention (e.g., dispatched, flagged down, officer initiated). 2) While En Route - Include what updated information was received from the Communications Center while responding. Not every dispatch will have “while en route” information. 3) The Location - If needed, provide a word picture of the location as it would look prior to the crime (e.g., the building structure, layout of property, location of items). 4) Upon Arrival - Statements - Statements from other people (e.g., victim, witness, suspect) and observations you made during the investigation, including your reasonable suspicion for a detention and/or your probable cause for arrest if appropriate. When relevant, describe observations of the suspect made by the officer (e.g., injuries, whether new or pre-existing, lack of injuries, under the influence, mental health or other crisis, body language or comments). All the elements of your crime must be met and logically understood. 5) Descriptions - Descriptive information about persons, places, and things (e.g., suspect description, description of loss, inspection of crime scene) that were mentioned in the statements. 6) Evidence - Document what was found, how it was found, and the chain of custody of that evidence. Include a detailed description of each item of evidence. Include if photographs were taken and who took them. Ensure any injuries of officers, victims, or arrestees are photographed as evidence. The lack of injuries should also be documented and photographed when appropriate. 7) Additional Resources - This section should include other resources, notifications, responses, or forms that are part of the overall investigation (e.g., lab units, detective notifications or response, medical transportation or treatment, towed vehicles, and supplemental forms). 8) Conclusion - Clarify what your investigation revealed based on the facts. Do not give opinions during the conclusion statement. TB13 – Report Writing 26 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 9) The Ending - Note what legally mandated forms and/or resource forms were provided to the victim, and if the victim desires prosecution if the suspect is located. Sample Investigative Report Outline 1) On DATE at TIME, my partner (Officer NAME #DID) and I (Officer NAME #DID) were dispatched to NAME OF PLACE at ADDRESS regarding a CRIME DISPATCH (call #XXXX). Our call further stated ... Unit XXXX (Officers NAME #DID and Officer NAME #DID) assisted us on the call. 2) While en route, dispatch advised us ... (UPDATED INFO FROM DISPATCH) 3) This location is a ... (LOCATION DESCRIPTION) 4) Upon arrival, I noticed ... (SCENE DESCRIPTION) 5) I contacted (NAME), and they stated the following: CHRONOLOGICAL TIMELINE OF EVENTS 6) The victim described the suspect as a ... The victim CAN/CAN NOT identify the suspect if he/she is seen again. The victim described the loss as ... I inspected the crime scene and noticed ... 7) I NOTICED/LOCATED/FOUND ... (EVIDENCE)I kept the item in my possession until placing it into evidence. 8) Lab Unit LXX (NAME #DID) responded and processed the scene. 9) My investigation revealed that the suspect ... 10) I gave the victim a Report Receipt and a Marsy’s Card, and they desire prosecution. The 10-Part Arrest Report 11) Consent - If the contact started as a consensual encounter, explain in detail how the subject was free to leave at any moment. 12) Detention - Clearly describe your reasonable suspicion to lawfully detain the subject. Detentions must be reasonable in scope and duration. 13) Identification - After the subject was detained, state how they were properly identified as the suspect (officer observed the crime, probable cause existed, a field show-up was conducted). 14) Arrest - Document as many specific and detailed facts to support your probable cause for the arrest. Ensure the elements of the crime were met before the arrest. Include who took the suspect into custody and any details about and how they were taken into custody and transported to jail. TB13 – Report Writing 27 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 15) Custodial Care - Describe any medical care or treatment required including type of injury (pre-existing or not), Fire Department response, any medical aid provided by an officer, or treatment at a hospital. 16) Search and Seizure - Document your legal authority for your search of a person, vehicle, or property, including who or what was searched, and the type of search conducted (e.g., pat down, consent, parole/probation). 17) Statements - Include the suspect’s statements after their arrest and if they were spontaneous statements or obtained under Miranda. 18) Ending - The report should end with the final disposition of the suspect being either arrested, cited, or released. 19) Juveniles - Juveniles should not be referred to as “suspect” or “defendant” in your report. They can be referred to as minor or juvenile or by name. Include notifications made to parent or guardians, and document compliance with criteria for custodial interrogation of juveniles. 20) Use of Force - For any use of force (controlling force, intermediate force, or deadly force), ensure the reader knows the facts of the incident, details of your mindset throughout the incident, and the reasons for your actions. Document if a verbal warning was given, and if it was not given, why it was not feasible in that situation. Include the conduct of the subject leading up to the use of force, attempts at gaining voluntary compliance, tactics used, and all attempts at de-escalation that occurred throughout the incident. Each application of force should be documented and justified. If a force option outside of the Department training is used, fully articulate the circumstances and why Department trained force options were not utilized. Note any medical aid provided, and, when necessary, who medically evaluated the subject prior to booking. Additionally, document what supervisor was notified of the use of force. For further on use of force, see LBPD Manual § 10 – USE OF FORCE. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 28 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 14 – U-Visa REVISED July 2023 U VISA INTRODUCTION In 2000, Congress passed the Victims of Trafficking and Violence Protection Act (VTVPA), establishing the “U Visa Program”. U Visa petitioners are required to submit the U Visa Nonimmigrant Status Certification Form (I-918, supplement B), which is a certification of helpfulness from a qualified certifying agency. The official signing this form is certifying the petitioner meets the following criteria: • Has been a victim of a qualifying criminal incident. • Possesses credible and reliable information, including specific facts about the criminal activity(ies) or events leading to the victimization. • Has been, is being, or will likely be helpful to the criminal law enforcement investigation or prosecution. The U Visa is issued by the United States Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS) and has the dual purpose of protecting noncitizen victims of serious crimes and promoting cooperation between law enforcement and victims. The U Visa provides lawful status for up to 4 years, employment authorization (work permit), and may provide lawful status to qualifying family members. QUALIFYING CRIMES Abduction Obstruction of Justice Abusive Sexual Contact Peonage Blackmail Perjury Domestic Violence Prostitution Extortion Rape False Imprisonment Sexual Assault Felonious Assault Sexual Exploitation Female Genital Mutilation Slave Trade Hostage Stalking Incest Torture Involuntary Servitude Trafficking Kidnapping Unlawful Criminal Restraint Manslaughter Witness Tampering Murder Other related crimes 29 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Other related crimes include incidents with crime elements that are substantially similar to those listed above. It also includes attempts, conspiracy and solicitation related to the crimes listed above. Victims have an ongoing responsibility to be helpful to the certifying agency while in U Visa Nonimmigrant Status. If a victim fails to be helpful with reasonable investigative and prosecutorial requests, the victim’s U Visa Nonimmigrant Status can be disavowed by the USCIS. A U Visa certification can be denied if the victim was not helpful/cooperative during the investigation or prosecution of a certifying crime. Helpfulness is determined pursuant to Penal Code § 679.10 (h), which states, there is a rebuttable presumption that a victim is helpful, has been helpful, or is likely to be helpful to the detection, or prosecution of that qualifying criminal activity if the victim has not refused or failed to provide information and assistance reasonably requested by law enforcement. Under USCIS guidelines, certifying agencies may choose to run background and criminal history checks on a petitioner and document the findings on the USCIS Form I-918. The fact that a victim has a criminal history does not automatically preclude approval of a U Visa certification. QUALIFYING FAMILY MEMBERS Once a victim has an approved U Visa Nonimmigrant Status, certain family members may be eligible for a derivative U Visa based on their relationship to the victim. A person may be eligible for a derivative U Visa if the following requirements are met: • If the victim is age 21 or older at the time the qualifying crime was committed, their spouse and unmarried children under age 21 may qualify. • If the victim is under age 21 at the time the qualifying crime was committed, their spouse, unmarried children under age 21, parents, and unmarried sibling under age 18 may qualify. • If the victim is unable to assist law enforcement because they are either, deceased due to murder or manslaughter; or they are incompetent or incapacitated because of injury, trauma, or age, a family member who is an indirect victim and meets the above listed criteria may still be eligible for a derivative U Visa. APPROVAL OR DENIAL OF U VISA CERTIFICATION Only a certifying official may sign an approved U Visa certification or Letter of Denial. Certifying officials include the Information Management Division Administrator and investigating detail supervisors approved by the Chief of Police. U Visa Certification Procedure 30 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • The Department has 30 days to process a USCIS Form I-918 (If the petitioner is in removal proceedings the Department has 7 days to process the USCIS Form I- 918). • Information Management Division creates a tracking number and forwards the USCIS Form I-918 and supporting documents to the assigned investigative detail. • After reviewing the USCIS Form I-918 the certifying official will either approve or deny the petition. • The certifying official completes and signs the USCIS Form I-918 approving the petition or completes a Letter of Denial indicating the reason the Department was unable to certify the petition. • The certifying official submits the signed USCIS Form I-918 or the Letter of Denial to the Divisional Lieutenant, Divisional Commander and Deputy Chief of the Investigations Bureau for review. • Investigations Bureau forwards the approved and reviewed USCIS Form I-918 or Letter of Denial to the Information Management Division for tracking and statistical purposes. • Information Management Division mails the approved USCIS Form I-918 or Letter of Denial to the petitioner, attorney, or accredited representative. PETITIONING FOR A U VISA CERTIFICATION Petitioners requesting U Visa certification from the LBPD need to submit a formal request in writing to LBPD Information Management Division. To help process the request in a timely manner, please include the following: • Name of victim and any “other names used” • Victim’s date of birth • Government issued identification • LBPD DR number or supporting documents • Name of suspect, if known • Suspect’s date of birth, if known • Indicate if you are in removal proceedings A victim, their guardian or legal representation can submit a USCIS Form I-918 for U Visa certification. If a U Visa certification is approved and returned to the petitioner, it is the petitioner’s responsibility to return the approved certification to USCIS. Review Responsibility The Investigation Bureau will ensure the information in this Training Bulletin is current. 31 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 17 – Canine Unit REVISED October 2023 CANINE UNIT GENERAL INFORMATION Police canines can provide a variety of services to assist police officers in the apprehension of criminals or the investigation of crimes. In general terms, the Canine Unit (CU) provides the following categories of canines: • Patrol canines • Detection canines a) Narcotic Detection Canine b) Explosive Detection Canine Each of the above categories of canine provides a specialized tool and service. In the following sections, this bulletin will discuss each specialty and what officers can do to optimize this service. The goal of the CU is to support officers in the field by making their jobs easier and safer by implementing the advantage of time and distance. CANINE UNIT CATEGORIES Patrol Canines Patrol canines are used to locate felony or dangerous suspects who are hiding from the police. Patrol canines are trained to search an area or building and locate human scent. Once the canine finds the scent, it will attempt to isolate the scent and locate the suspect. In many cases, the use of a patrol canine as a backup is an effective psychological tool. The mere presence of a police canine has been known to prevent crimes, prevent potentially violent situations from getting out of hand, and deter acts of violence toward police officers. Patrol canines may be used to assist in crowd control formations. For crowd control, patrol canines are best used as additional linebackers and to protect the flanks and rear of the formation. Additionally, the canine can be used as a force option on a directed apprehension for a specific target. The use of a canine on a directed apprehension with contact is a use of force and must meet deployment policy criteria. 17 – Police Service Dog Unit 32 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents GUIDELINES Building and Area Searches A patrol canine is an effective tool for searching buildings or areas for concealed suspects. The canine is trained to search an area, and when a suspect is located, alert by barking if the suspect is not accessible. When the suspect is accessible, the canine is trained to detain and apprehend the suspect until officers can safely place the suspect under arrest. This search is more effective and safer than a search conducted by officers alone because it provides time and distance between the search team and the suspect. When a patrol canine is used to search for a concealed suspect, the following conditions should be considered: • Prior to the arrival of the handler, ensure there is a secure containment of the building or area. The containment should not be entered unless necessary to prevent injury to an officer or citizen. • Before searching an area or building, the handler gives a verbal warning that a police canine is being released to search and is intended to give any suspects hiding an opportunity to surrender. • A cover officer remains with the handler during a search of an area or building. Directed Contacts A patrol canine is a force option and can be commanded to pursue or apprehend persons suspected of committing criminal acts or those resisting arrest according to the deployment criteria. A patrol canine may be directed to contact a violent felony suspect or if there is imminent danger or potential for great bodily harm to a police officer or citizen. Evidence Searches A patrol canine can be effectively used to search for evidence or property within a defined area. The canine works on scent transferred to any object touched by a human and will alert on any such object. It is extremely important the search area is not disturbed to give the canine the best conditions in which to work. Therefore, officers should not attempt to search the area before the patrol canine. Officers should secure the area and prevent pedestrian or vehicle entry. DETECTION CANINE Detection canines are trained to locate items emitting particular odors. Examples include illicit drugs, explosives, firearms, cadavers, and arson accelerants. Generally, canines specialize in one area; however, cross-training in multiple areas is possible. When in doubt, ask the handler about the capabilities of each canine. If a detection canine is not on duty the Incident Commander or Watch Commander can request one to be called out. NARCOTIC DETECTION CANINE (NDC) Narcotic detection canines are trained to locate the following odors: • Heroin • Cocaine • Methamphetamine 17 – Police Service Dog Unit 33 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Before the arrival of the NDC, it is important to secure the scene and avoid scent contamination. Fourth Amendment laws, rules, regulations, and policies that generally apply to police officers also apply to NDC searches. To maximize the effectiveness of the NDC, consider letting the canine search prior to officers searching. It is better for the NDC to search an area that has not been disturbed by a search team. EXPLOSIVE DETECTION CANINE (EDC) The EDC operates as a support police unit, and provides searches for explosives for the following general and specialized law enforcement services: a) Threat of an explosive device b) Securing the command post during a bomb squad call-out c) Checking for secondary explosive devices d) Sweeping events for explosives (e.g., Grand Prix, LB Marathon, concerts) e) Responding to calls of suspicious and unattended items f) Providing EDC support for Metro, Airport, Port, Transit, cruise lines, and school systems g) Depending on the situation, EDCs can be used to find guns EXPLOSIVE DETECTION CANINE DEPLOYMENT • When requesting an EDC to conduct searches based solely on a bomb threat the CU supervisor should be notified. The decision to deploy will be evaluated based on factual intelligence and at the discretion of the CU supervisor or the EDC handler. • EDC is not authorized for use to assess, examine, or clear items already identified as suspected explosive devices. INJURED HANDLER If the handler is injured and down, the canine will likely stand guard to prevent anyone from approaching. If a handler is injured, the following information will help officers assist in securing the canine: • Do not rush in on the handler or canine. • If the handler is able, they will take control of the canine. • Request the assistance of another handler or CU Supervisor. • Request the assistance of Animal Control. • Position the handler’s vehicle close to the handler and open the back door. − If the handler is unable to direct the canine into the vehicle, call to the canine and try to direct him into the vehicle. − After the canine is inside, close the vehicle door. − Once the canine is secured, another handler will take responsibility of the canine. FOREIGN JURISDICTIONS AND THE CANINE UNIT 17 – Police Service Dog Unit 34 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The training and experience of police canine teams from foreign jurisdictions can vary significantly. Similarly, the deployment and force policies of other departments can be different from our own. Per LBPD policy, the use of CUs from other law enforcement agencies should only be requested when LBPD CUs are unavailable, or fully committed (for further see LBPD Manual § 7.7.11.1 Use of Foreign Jurisdiction Canines). OUTSIDE SPECIALIZED DETECTION CANINE Requests for other specialized detection canines, such as cadaver and arson canines, should be made through the CU supervisor. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 35 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 18 – Field Interview Card REVISED May 2017 REVIEWED June 2019 FIELD INTERVIEW CARD INTRODUCTION The Field Interview Card (FI card) is an extremely valuable tool for officers and detectives. On numerous occasions, the information on an FI card has aided investigators in the identification, apprehension and conviction of suspects in criminal cases. FI cards can be used to establish a person’s association with another person, to document a person’s presence at a specific location at a specific date and time, or to connect a person to a vehicle. The information officers gather and record on cites and FI cards is entered into a records management system (RMS). Officers can search FI card data through RMS, and receive a quick response to the inquiry. Inquires may be made using partial names and license numbers, nicknames, descriptions of suspects, clothing descriptions, physical oddities, etc. COMPLETING THE FIELD INTERVIEW CARD The success of investigative searches of RMS is dependent upon the quality of information it contains. For this reason, it is imperative that field officers record all available information clearly, accurately and completely on the FI card. The FI card contains numerous, self-explanatory fields into which information is recorded. Fill out each field, if the information is available, and be sure to submit your completed FI card for entry into RMS. If an officer wishes to keep an FI card for his or her own work records, that employee should make and keep a copy before submitting the FI card for entry into RMS. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 36 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 21 – Courtroom Testimony REVISED March 2020 COURTROOM TESTIMONY INTRODUCTION The success of a criminal prosecution is determined not solely by the quality or quantity of evidence but by the manner it is presented in court. An officer’s appearance, demeanor, attitude, and ability to accurately convey evidence in a fair and professional manner are essential to bringing any case to a just conclusion. This training bulletin applies not only to testifying in criminal court, but also civil court, depositions and other quasi-judicial hearings. PREPARATION Prior to testifying, Officers should review case documentation to ensure familiarity with the basic facts; date, time, location, names, and circumstances.; Take a copy of your report so you may refresh your recollection on any details. View the CA POST resource, How to Review a Crime Report. Another important preparation step is meeting with the attorney assigned to prosecute the case. View the CA POST resource, How to Meet with the DA. Discussing the case with officers who assisted with the investigation, the assigned detective, and the assigned Deputy District Attorney, City Prosecutor, or City Attorney is not only permissible and legal, but essential. When asked under cross-examination if you discussed the case with anyone, answer “yes.” Retrieve any evidence required for court and bring it with you if ordered. APPEARANCE and ATTIRE Ensure you are punctual; and if unable to attend court due to illness or other reason, notify Court Affairs so they can inform the detective, and the Deputy District Attorney, City Prosecutor, City Attorney. While in court and waiting for proceedings to begin, avoid mannerisms that might imply disrespect for the court, such as reading, texting, talking, chewing gum, etc. Courtrooms are traditional and conservative environments and not the best place to exhibit current fashion trends or styles. LBPD Manual § 3.23.5.3 MANNER OF DRESS IN COURT specifies that “appearance in court is a duty assignment; when appearing in court, employees must wear a Department approved uniform, specific to the employee’s 21 – Courtroom Testimony 37 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents duty assignment, or a coat with a dress shirt and tie for male employees and business attire for female employees,” unless the prosecuting attorney requests you wear specific clothing relevant to the case. DIRECT and CROSS EXAMINATION Testifying is a skill which can improve with practice. Officers can apply the following principles of effective testimony: 1) Have a general attitude of confidence, but not cockiness. 2) Officers convey an air of authority and respect; therefore, they should maintain composure and dignity, remembering their job is to present facts and evidence. 3) Body language is important. Sit up straight, if a microphone is present sit close enough so you do not lean over every time you speak. 4) Tone of voice is very important. Officers should present a professional image while speaking and avoid attempts at sarcasm and humor. 5) Treat opposing counsel with respect and dignity being sure to not show bias against them. 6) Reports and documents necessary for court should be neatly organized in front of you so you can easily find documents without fumbling through an unorganized stack of paper. The prosecutor is the first to speak to you and will ask questions such as name, occupation, assignment, and agency name. These questions are asked to put you at ease, to enter the information in the court minutes and establish your background. A defense attorney’s basic purpose in cross-examination is to raise doubts in the minds of the jury about the accuracy of your testimony. The defense attorney may employ a variety of tactics to accomplish this goal. If you recognize the tactics, you can respond in ways that address the question and allow you to counter the strategy and avoid the pitfall.1 Common tactics include questions with absolute language, questions with embedded assumptions, compound questions, confusing questions, rapid fire questions, repetitious questions, or aggressive questioning. View the CA POST resource, How to Avoid Cross- Examination Pitfalls. When testifying, wait for the attorney to finish asking a question before you answer it. This allows for an objection by either attorney. In the event an objection is made, wait until the judge has ruled on the objection. A sustained decision means you DO NOT answer the question. An overruled decision means you MUST answer the question. If you are confused by the question, you may ask for clarification prior to answering. Use common labels to identify individuals, such as “the defendant,” or “the victim,” and avoid the use of pronouns. If you use the name of a person or a street, spell out the name. If you use a non-verbal gesture to describe an item, describe your action for the court reporter. For example, if you use your hands to describe the size of a knife, state the size that you are describing in addition to making the hand gesture. 1 CA POST Learning Portal Courtroom Testimony for Law Enforcement 21 – Courtroom Testimony 38 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents CREDIBILITY Different witness behaviors affect a jury’s perception of witness credibility. They fall into three types: 1) How the witness communicates non-verbally, through body language, such as posture, gesture and facial expressions: • Avoid fidgeting, • Maintain an open attentive posture, • Use appropriate eye contact with both attorneys, • Remain calm under cross-examination. 2) How the witness communicates verbally: • Use plain language, no police jargon, • Speak clearly, volume, pace, articulation, • Answer questions confidently, • Address all parties with equal respect, • Explain answers in an organized way. 3) The quality of the witness’s responses to questions. This includes elements such as content of answers as well as word choice: • Know the key facts of the case, • Answer the question asked, but not more, • Admit mistakes, when appropriate, • Ask for clarification, when appropriate, • Admit when uncertain of answer. HEARSAY and PROP 115 Hearsay is a statement, made out of court, that is offered in court to prove the truth of the matter asserted. Proposition 115 allows an officer associated with a case to testify at a preliminary hearing to statements made or actions taken by the victim, witnesses or other police employees. An officer is Proposition 115 qualified in one of two ways: • Accruing five years’ work experience as a police officer in the State of California, or • Completion of the CA POST Proposition 115 course. Proposition 115 affects the following areas of police work: • Investigation – Officers should be thorough in their interviews with witnesses, victims and suspects. • Report writing – Instead of becoming a “memory refresher” for an officer familiar with the case, the report becomes a stand-alone document from which any other officer can testify. Statements of victims, witnesses, or defendants, Miranda warnings, consent for search must all be included. The report must contain details regarding the way the suspect was identified. The chain of custody of any and all evidence must be well documented. • Testifying in court – The finding of probable cause may be based in whole or part upon the sworn testimony of a law enforcement officer relating the statement of declarants made out of court offered for the truth of the matter asserted. 21 – Courtroom Testimony 39 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents EXPERT TESTIMONY An officer may qualify to give expert opinion if they meet the following criteria: • The subject matter the officer’s testimony relates to is sufficiently beyond common experience, • An expert opinion would be helpful in determining the facts, • The officer has special knowledge on the subject. The judge decides who is qualified as an expert witness. An officer’s opinion should be given in court only when the officer is called upon and is qualified as an expert witness. Unless you have been qualified, you cannot testify to conclusions or opinions. COURT RECESS Avoid discussing the case while at the courthouse, especially when jurors, the defendant, or defense attorneys might overhear. During periods when court is not in session, do not become friendly with defendants, their counsel, jurors or prospective jurors. If contact cannot be avoided, do not discuss the case or anything connected with it, politely explain the court has ordered you not to speak about the case. AFTER TESTIMONY Debrief the case with the detective, Deputy District Attorney, City Prosecutor, or City Attorney so you may use the experience to learn for the next trial. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 40 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jim McDonnell, Chief of Police 22 – Solicitors on Private Property Open to Public Access REVISED December 2011 SOLICITORS ON PRIVATE PROPERTY OPEN TO PUBLIC ACCESS INTRODUCTION The rights of solicitors have been the basis for many civil rights lawsuits filed not only in California, but the United States. Much of what is followed today with regards to free speech of solicitors was established in the 1979 case of Pruneyard Shopping Center v. Robins. The Pruneyard case did not establish, rather emphasized “reasonable time, place and manner” (TPM) restrictions as set by the property owner. The Court explained that shopping centers may impose TPM restrictions in order to avoid interference with business activities; however, they must still ensure that the solicitor’s right to circulate is reasonably accommodated. In 2010, Target Corporation v. Canvass for a Cause became a catalyst for renewed questions involving the rights of solicitors versus private property owners. In early 2011, the Court reached a decision in the Target case, which did not change case law, rather re-affirmed what was established in Pruneyard. The Court has determined that shopping centers are perceived as the modern day “Time Square,” providing a meeting place and entertainment for the general public. These centers are technically private property, but when a property owner, for their advantage, opens up the property for use by the public in general, the more their rights become limited by the constitutional rights of those people who use it (Marsh v. Alabama, 326 U.S. 501 (1946)). Political activists have found that the modern day “Time Square,” provides a large, diverse audience where they can garner support for various political issues. Stand-alone stores, such as a Target or Costco with no other shopping or entertainment options on site, have slightly broader rights with restricting access to the property. These sites have a specific purpose and do not encourage groups to meet and communicate at the property; therefore, owners are able to set greater restrictions. PRIVATE PERSON’S ARREST The Court has determined that solicitors have a First Amendment right to be present at the location in order to garner support for their cause. A solicitor or petitioner who is 22 -- Solicitors on Private Property Open to Public Access 41 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents interfering with a business i.e., blocking access to a business, aggressively following and harassing customers may be subject to enforcement actions. However, the property owner/agent must sign a Private Person’s Arrest (PPA) and be willing to go to court. Private citizens unaffiliated with the business may also sign a PPA, if they are willing to be a victim. In the event that a PPA is signed, an officer should issue a citation to the violator. As with any situation involving a PPA where probable cause does not appear to be present, an officer may exercise judgment as to the acceptance of questionable arrests to reduce the risk of liability. If the solicitors or petitioners however are not blocking entrances, acting aggressively or harassing customers then the issue is a civil matter. If a property owner believes their private property interests are being violated; such party must seek court action. The courts may set an injunction halting the activity or limiting the actions of the petitioners. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 42 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles REVISED May 2004 IMPOUNDING & STORING OF VEHICLES INTRODUCTION Vehicles ordered to the Police Tow Yard by officers fall into two classes: stored vehicles and impounded vehicles. STORED VEHICLES Stored vehicles are towed to the Police Tow Yard and do not require follow-up investigation by police. A stored vehicle, as opposed to an impounded vehicle, does not require authorization from the police department to be released. The stored vehicle is released to the owner by the Tow Yard upon verification of ownership, without further police involvement. Officers shall advise the tow truck driver that the vehicle is being stored, which will enable the tow truck driver to enter it as such on the work invoice. Stored vehicles are available for release daily from 0800 to 0000 hours (midnight). Officers shall store all vehicles removed from the highway under authority of Vehicle Code Section 22651. Fleet Services will determine current registration and ensure only licensed drivers are permitted to drive vehicles off the City lot. Officers shall file a Vehicle Report (PD Form 2310.010) for vehicles they have stored and obtain a separate number for each vehicle. The officer shall conduct a full inventory of each vehicle towed. This includes the glove compartment, trunk and all containers in the vehicle; i.e., bags, cases, purses, etc. Items located during the inventory shall be noted in the narrative portion of the Vehicle Report form. When a citizen requests to have a vehicle stored and does not express a desire for a particular tow service, Police Tow will be called. This is considered a private tow. No supplemental number or report is required. FIELD RELEASE OF VEHICLES Prior to releasing a vehicle to a person other than the driver, a careful evaluation of the risk should be considered by officers in the field. A vehicle SHALL NOT be released to another person at the scene under the following circumstances: 27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles 43 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • When there is no evidence of current registration and the last registered owner is not at the scene • When the person to whom the vehicle is to be released has no valid driver's license or appears to be under the influence of any substance that would impair his/her driving ability When a vehicle is released at the scene of an arrest, the Incident Report shall indicate the disposition of the vehicle including the name, driver's license number, address and telephone number of the person to whom the vehicle was released. Recovered, stolen vehicles released to owners in the field shall have, in addition to the appropriate reports, an All Units Broadcast issued to advise field officers that the owner has possession of the vehicle. IMPOUNDED VEHICLES Impounded vehicles are towed to the Police Tow Yard for additional investigation when the impounding officer has reason to believe the vehicle either contains evidence, or is evidence in a criminal matter. The Tow Yard will not release impounded vehicles without an official release from the assigned investigator, Division Commander or Watch Commander. When a vehicle is impounded, a separate report number shall be obtained for each vehicle and the report shall indicate the arrest charge or Code Section for which the vehicle is impounded. In such cases, an Impound Report shall be filed. Tow invoice numbers shall also be noted on the Vehicle Report as well as the Supplemental Report number(s) of connecting reports. The below guidelines shall be followed: • If the driver of the vehicle is arrested or cited for misdemeanor Hit and Run (20002 CVC), it is not necessary to store or impound the vehicle, if it can be legally parked at the scene • Vehicles used in all felony crimes shall be impounded. However, recovered stolen vehicles should be stored unless extenuating circumstances exist • Vehicles involved in a traffic fatality shall be impounded unless otherwise directed by the on-scene investigator from the Accident Investigation Detail RELEASING IMPOUNDED VEHICLES • The "Hold" on impounded vehicles will automatically expire after the vehicle has been impounded for 10 calendar days • It shall be the responsibility of any investigator desiring to hold a vehicle longer than the time prescribed above to notify the Tow Yard and place a permanent hold on the vehicle by completing PD form 4210.005 "Vehicle Impounds – Hold Instructions to Towing Operations" • Only the investigator placing this hold, or a higher-ranking officer assigned to the same Division may remove the hold 27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles 44 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • A 10-day "Hold" may be removed by an investigator assigned to the case any time prior to the automatic expiration of the "Hold." The Watch Commander may remove the "Hold" on a vehicle not yet assigned for investigation, if, after reviewing the circumstances of the impoundment, it would not be necessary to hold the vehicle for the assigned Detail. The Watch Commander who authorizes the "hold" removal shall file a memorandum to the Division Commander of the investigative Detail assigned the case, stating the date, time and reason for the "Hold" removal The Vehicle Code directs the return of an impounded vehicle without charge to the owner when the vehicle is towed for evidence under Section 22655.5 CVC. If a vehicle is towed to Fleet Services and the "Hold" is placed by a Detective, per Section 22655.5 CVC, all storage fees from that date forward are waived, but the owner will still be charged for tow fees and one day storage. When recovering a stolen vehicle, placing it on hold is not necessary unless it requires some type of inspection, such as a VIN check, fingerprinting, photos, etc., and then Section 22655.5 CVC should be used. If Section 22651 CVC is used, a hold should not be placed on the vehicle. This Section is used for recovered vehicles without extenuating circumstances. CVC Sections 22655.5 and 22651 should not be used interchangeably. Correct usage of the CVC Sections will lessen unnecessary police holds. When recovering a stolen vehicle from a foreign jurisdiction, do not place it on hold because the Crime Lab does not normally examine for latent fingerprints under these circumstances. If a suspect is arrested driving a stolen vehicle, processing the vehicle is not necessary. When an officer places a vehicle on hold for prints or photos, the officer must write out a Request for Technician form for the Lab. The vehicle will not be processed or photographed without this form. When the hold is removed, the owner of the vehicle is given 24 hours to claim the vehicle before charges begin for storage. The owner of a vehicle impounded for the commission of a crime is not liable for towing and storage fees unless the alleged perpetrator of the crime used the vehicle with the express or implied permission of the owner. 30-DAY STORAGE (SECTION 14602.6 CVC) Vehicles impounded under this Section will be held for 30 days. A licensed passenger in a vehicle impounded under Section 14602.6 CVC WILL NOT be authorized to drive the vehicle for the unlicensed driver. NOTE: Officers must identify the driver by completing the “person” block of the Vehicle Report in these situations. Hearings are available pursuant to Section 22852 CVC. The Accident Investigation Detail (AID) will process the release of 30 day impound vehicles. NOTIFYING AUTO RECORDS 27 – Impounding & Storing Vehicles 45 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents When any vehicle is recovered, stored, or impounded, the officer taking the report shall notify the Auto Records desk as soon as practicable to ensure prompt entry into the Stolen Vehicle System (SVS). When a recovered vehicle is released to the owner, the releasing officer shall, as soon as practicable, notify Auto Records for removal of the vehicle from the SVS. NOTE: The Stolen Vehicle System is a computerized statewide system that tracks stolen, missing, recovered, stored and impounded vehicles. This includes vehicles stored by private tow companies. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 46 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 28 – Stolen Vehicle Handling Procedures REVISED January 2021 STOLEN VEHICLE HANDLING PROCEDURES INTRODUCTION Officers dispatched to take a stolen vehicle report should not assume the vehicle was stolen. Like any other investigation, officers need to keep an open mind until all the facts are presented. Question the reporting party carefully and in a manner that will leave little doubt whether the car was stolen, repossessed or is being used by a relative or friend. VEHICLES POSSIBLY REPOSSESSED Officers should first rule out repossession. If the reporting party is the legal owner, ask if they have the title or if they are still making payments. If the legal owner is still making payments, ascertain if they are behind on any payments. If the vehicle has been repossessed, the repossessor must notify Auto Stats as soon as possible. Officers should check with Auto Stats if they believe the vehicle may have been repossessed. If there is any doubt, officers should direct the owner to contact the Auto Theft Detail during normal business hours to make the report. VEHICLE MAY BE STORED OR IMPOUNDED Before taking a stolen vehicle report, officers should check with Auto Stats and Records to ascertain if the vehicle was stored due to parking violations or impounded as evidence in a crime. STOLEN VEHICLES INVOLVED IN A HIT AND RUN During the investigation of a hit and run traffic collision with no suspect in custody, registered owners or reporting parties may claim the vehicle involved in a hit and run was stolen. When the registered owner is contacted by police or calls to report a vehicle stolen after the vehicle is involved in a hit and run, the reporting party should be referred to call the Auto Theft Detail to file a stolen vehicle report. Auto Theft Detectives should rule out possible insurance fraud by the vehicle owner. When an outside police agency contacts the Long Beach Police Department to confirm the status (if the vehicle is stolen) of a vehicle involved in a hit and run collision, where the registered owner claims the vehicle was stolen, the registered owner/reporting party should be referred to call the Auto Theft Detail to file a stolen vehicle report. Outside law 28 – Stolen Vehicle Handling Procedures 47 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents enforcement agencies will not release the Stolen Vehicle System (SVS) hold on vehicles impounded as a result of being involved in a hit and run. VEHICLE TAKEN FROM A DEALER’S LOT When an agent of a car dealership or lot gives a prospective customer permission to test drive a car and the driver fails to return it within six hours, a stolen report should be taken. If a prospective customer leaves a car with the dealer as security and the officer determines that car to be stolen, file a stolen report as soon as possible. RENTAL CAR AGENCY STOLEN VEHICLE Officers dispatched to a rental car agency for a vehicle theft should investigate as to the means the vehicle was stolen. Vehicles stolen from a rental car agency fall into four categories: • Fraud • Stolen off the lot • Stolen from the person that rented the vehicle • Embezzlement (overdue) The patrol officer should complete a stolen vehicle report (CHP180) for all stolen rental vehicles unless involved in an embezzlement. When a patrol officer determines the vehicle was embezzled, overdue, or not returned, the rental car agency representative should be referred to contact the Auto Theft Detail during regular business hours. VEHICLE TAKEN BY A RELATIVE OR CLOSE FRIEND Vehicles that are community property cannot be stolen by either party. However, if a judge in a divorce case awarded the vehicle to one of the parties and the other takes it without permission, the victim party should be referred to the Auto Theft Detail to make the report. A stolen vehicle report may be filed when a relative or a friend takes the victim’s vehicle without the victim’s permission and the victim has never extended permission in the past to this person. However, if the victim has extended permission for this person to use the car in the past, the victim should be advised to contact the Auto Theft Detail. The same rule applies in the case of an employee who takes a vehicle from their employer. THE STOLEN VEHICLE REPORT When filing a stolen vehicle report (Form PD 2310.010 rev.), legibly print the information requested on the report, making sure to fill in all the boxes. Describe the color of the vehicle by its basic color, clarifying by stating if it is light or dark. The narrative should explain the relationship between the registered owner and the reporting party if the reporting party is not present. 28 – Stolen Vehicle Handling Procedures 48 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents If the vehicle contained valuables at the time of the theft, list them in the narrative. A Property Report (Form PD 2240.009(A) should also be completed for a more detailed list of stolen items of value, including property with serial numbers. The victim/legal owner must sign the stolen vehicle report because it is important that they agree to prosecute. If there is any doubt as to whether or not the reporting party has the authority to agree to prosecute, or, if they do not wish to prosecute, they should be referred to the Auto Theft Detail. VEHICLE VALUE DETERMINATION Officers should make every effort to determine the current market value of the vehicle. Officers should inquire with the registered owner/reporting party concerning the purchase price of the vehicle, recent modifications, or mechanical work (new engine, transmission, paint, etc.). METHOD OF REPORTING TO AUTO STATS Once the report is finished and signed, the officers should immediately contact the Auto Stats desk and relay the following information needed for a computer entry: • License number and state • Year and make of vehicle • Model and color • Location stolen from • Any outstanding features of the vehicle • Vehicle identification number • Name and DID# of officer filing the report If the vehicle was recently stolen, the officer should request communications broadcast a description of the car. The first five bullets above are pertinent broadcast information. CONCLUSION Before completing the report, ensure the vehicle was stolen from the City of Long Beach, then double check phone numbers, the vehicle identification number and the license number for accuracy and legibility after the report is taken. We do not take reports on stolen vehicles from other cities, even as a courtesy. If there is any doubt about filing the report, refer the reporting party to the Auto Theft Detail. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 49 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 30 – Vehicle Handling Procedure – Abandoned Vehicle REVISED August 2001 VEHICLE HANDLING PROCEDURE - ABANDONED VEHICLES INTRODUCTION The following procedure is for those vehicles that are apparently abandoned or parked for excessive periods on City streets and does not preclude the storing or impounding of a vehicle for other criminal actions. LEGAL AUTHORITY §22523(a) CVC states "no person shall abandon a vehicle upon any highway, and (b) no person shall abandon a vehicle on public or private property without the express or implied consent of the owner or person in lawful possession or control of the property." §22669 CVC allows for removal of any vehicle from a highway or public or private property when an officer has reasonable cause to believe the vehicle has been abandoned. Under a section like this, the officer’s biggest problem is the determination of "reasonable cause". There are times when the owner of a vehicle will let his vehicle stand in front of his house, or upon a vacant lot, for several weeks without moving it. The accumulation of dust on top of the vehicle, the debris underneath the vehicle, would lead the officer to believe that it is abandoned when in fact it is not. The procedure used by this Department to remove abandoned vehicles and to eliminate the storing of vehicles upon the city streets is as follows: Whenever officers locate a vehicle which they have reasonable cause to believe is abandoned on a city street, they should notify Communications. Communications will notify the Traffic Detail, which will tag the vehicle for three-day removal. STORING VEHICLES UPON CITY STREETS The City of Long Beach also has an ordinance, LBMC §10.22.130, which prohibits the parking of a vehicle on the streets for 72 or more consecutive hours. Such a vehicle may not be considered abandoned, but it is being stored on a public street. Again, notify Communications to advise the Traffic Detail. This ordinance does not apply to areas leased to individuals or corporations such as the Marina, Harbor Department leases, Municipal Airport, etc. Vehicles are sometimes parked in these areas for as long as a month while their owners are away on a trip or on a cruise. 3- -- Vehicle Handling Procedure – Abandoned Vehicle 50 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents INFORMATION NEEDED BY TRAFFIC DETAIL • Exact location • Date and time noted by officer • Description of the vehicle, and the vehicle license number VEHICLE ABANDONED ON PRIVATE PROPERTY Occasionally, officers are dispatched to situations where vehicles have been abandoned or parked on private property. Though the Vehicle Code authorizes police to remove obviously abandoned vehicles from private property, Department policy states that officers will not remove vehicles from private property unless the vehicle is stolen (§22651c) or there is a municipal code violation, for example, weed abatement. The mere parking of a vehicle upon a person’s property is not a police problem. §22658 CVC allows property owners to remove vehicles abandoned or parked on their property, after following certain guidelines. If a citizen is plagued with vehicles parking on his property, officers should inform him of the provisions listed in §22658 CVC. Officers should be reminded that the person owning or in lawful control of the property stores the vehicle, not the Police Department. If the parking situation is a code enforcement issue, like weed abatement, the reporting party should be referred to public service. Public Service handles the removal of abandoned vehicles from private property under authority of LBMC 8.76.010, abatement and removal of vehicles. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 51 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 31 – Firearms Safety REVISED February 2000 Reviewed January 2020 FIREARMS SAFETY INTRODUCTION Law enforcement officers are taught gun safety from the beginning of their professional training. Firearms are one of the most visible “tools of the trade” for police officers and handling them in a safe manner becomes second nature to most of us. If we do not remind ourselves that they are to be handled as a deadly weapon and we become complacent, a tragic accident could happen. When we take our guns home, we also expose our spouses and children to possible disaster if we do not take the proper precautions to ensure gun safety. RULES OF FIREARM SAFETY • Handle all guns as though they are loaded • Never point a gun at anything unless willing to use deadly force • Keep your finger off the trigger until your sights are on the target • Be sure of your target and line of fire GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Always ensure that the one in possession of the firearm is responsible for it • Establish good safety habits and abide by them • Before handing a firearm to another person be sure that: – The weapon is unloaded (rounds removed from the cylinder, magazine removed, action open) – Safety is on, if applicable – Muzzle pointed away • When dry firing, always point the weapon in a safe direction in case of inadvertent discharge LOADING AND UNLOADING FIREARMS The following procedures apply to all situations except combat or an actual tactical event. • Load and unload a firearm in a “safe area” (e.g., sand barrel, ballistic box, etc.) • Visually inspect the firearm to make sure it is unloaded or properly loaded • Remember that the four rules of firearm safety apply to all handling situations CHILDREN AND GUNS Children are constantly exposed to guns and gun activity on television and in the movies. Often firearms are used and portrayed unrealistically in the media and children are led to 31 – Firearms Safety 52 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents believe that guns are less deadly than they are. A child’s curiosity may cause him/her to want to touch or hold dad or mom’s gun, even if they are forbidden from doing so. They may want to “show off” for friends, which could lead to tragic results. Officers should place their gun in a secured location. Never assume that any secure location other than a locked container is safe. Placing a gun on a high shelf out of reach of a small child is not safe and violates P.C. §12036 (b), which makes it a misdemeanor to leave a concealable handgun anywhere other than a locked container if a child may have access. GUN SAFETY – ON DUTY A gun should remain holstered unless the officer needs to use it. The unnecessary handling of any gun increases the possibility of an accident. If an officer must permit someone else to examine his or her firearm, it should be unloaded first. Careful unloading cannot be over emphasized! CONCLUSION An officer whose gun becomes a part of his/her clothing often has a natural but dangerous tendency to become less cautious while handling firearms. Perhaps the saying, “familiarity breeds complacency” should apply in the sense that most officers eventually take their guns for granted. Even expert shooters and firearm instructors have had gun accidents, not because they did not know the principles of gun safety, but because, through familiarity, they lost the necessary respect for firearms. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Training Division 53 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 32 – Civil Disputes REVISED February 2001 CIVIL DISPUTES INTRODUCTION An officer’s primary responsibility at the scene of a dispute is to keep the peace. In addition to peacekeeping, the officer will often also be called upon to determine if a crime has been committed, provide safety to individuals and property, attempt to find solutions to the problem and be tactful. KEEPING THE PEACE In many civil disputes, e.g., landlord/tenant, repossessions, neighbor disputes, etc., emotions run high and a responding officer may arrive at a very heated situation. Restoring order and diffusing the situation would be the first order of business. In many instances, all that is required is the calming influence of the officer to resolve the dispute. If the officer cannot resolve the dispute, he/she should not try to give disputing parties legal advice. Rather, the officer should refer the parties to the civil court process or to whatever community agency is best suited to the particular dispute. • If the elements of a crime exist, e.g., vandalism, battery, domestic violence, etc., and a citation or arrest will resolve the dispute, the officer should take the necessary action. In the absence of a crime, the dispute is purely a civil matter • Be concerned about your safety, the safety of other responding officers, disputants, witnesses and significant others • Always remember that the desired result is the peaceful resolution of the dispute. If the officer can help the parties decide on a mutually agreeable resolution, then the problem is solved • The public will often take your personal opinion as law. You are not qualified to give legal advice. Always advise parties that you are there to KEEP THE PEACE. Your prime considerations should be ensuring the safety of individuals and property LANDLORD/TENANT DISPUTES In general, when a landlord and a tenant enter into a contract, it is one in which the landlord gives the tenant temporary possession and use of the landlord’s property for a specified amount of money for a specific period of time. Problems arise when one of the parties is perceived by the other party to have violated some, or all, of the contract. Relevant Laws 32 – Civil Disputes 54 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Tenant Lock Out §418 Penal Code – Every person using or procuring, encouraging or assisting another to use, any force or violence in entering upon or detaining any lands or other possessions of another, except in the cases and manner allowed by law, is guilty of a misdemeanor. Example: The tenant is behind in his/her rent. The landlord changes the locks in an effort to prevent the tenant further use of the dwelling until the rent is paid. This constitutes a use of force and is a violation of §418 PC. The landlord needs to let the tenant in and attempt to resolve the dispute in court. In the above example, if the landlord does not attempt to lock the tenant out, he/she may attempt to seize the tenant’s possessions in payment for past due rent. This is also a violation of §418 PC. A landlord must have a court order to be able to seize personal property for past due rent. Example: A landlord removes the doors and windows of a tenant’s dwelling in an attempt to evict the tenant. Even though the landlord may be destroying his own property, courts have held that the tenant has a property in the premises. Destruction of property and/or removing the doors and windows can be a violation of §594 PC. Example: A landlord enters a tenant’s premises without permission from the tenant. The landlord’s purpose is to harass, snoop and otherwise annoy the tenant. This type of conduct would be a violation of §602.5 PC, constituting a trespass. Landlord’s Obligations for Property and Tenant A landlord has a general legal obligation to keep the rental premises in a condition fit for human occupancy and to repair all defects that make the premises uninhabitable. The landlord must provide an apartment that has: • Adequate weatherproofing, waterproofing and rodent proofing • A workable plumbing system • At least one working toilet, bathtub and bathroom sink • At least one working kitchen sink • Adequate heating facilities • Safe electrical wiring • Adequate garbage and trash storage and removal facilities • At least one working telephone jack The landlord cannot avoid these requirements by placing the burden to repair these facilities on the tenant as part of the conditions of the lease. However, if the tenant brings substandard conditions to the attention of an officer, the dispute is still civil. The tenant should be advised to seek the counsel of an attorney or legal aid society. EVICTION If a tenant fails to comply in some way with his/her rental agreement, the landlord does have the option of eviction. In order to lawfully evict a tenant, the tenant must first be given written notice to pay his/her rent or correct whatever problem is violating his/her 32 – Civil Disputes 55 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents lease agreement. If the tenant does not comply with the notice, a landlord must bring a civil suit, called an “unlawful detainer”. Once a judgment is ordered, only a marshal or sheriff may actually evict the tenant and restore the landlord to peaceful possession. Police officers cannot be the agents of eviction. The point of this discussion is not to encourage arrests, but to try to solve the conflict by explaining to the parties what conduct is not lawful and by suggesting alternative solutions that are lawful. In many instances the landlord may not be aware he/she is violating the law. Often a simple advisal by the officer that what the landlord is attempting to do is illegal will solve the problem. REPOSSESSIONS A conditional sales contract exists when an article is purchased on credit and the article is physically in possession of the buyer but the seller retains the title. Default on a conditional sales contract will cause repossession. Again, when dispatched to a dispute arising out of repossession, you are there to keep the peace, not to take sides. The seller has a right to repossess, and the buyer (buyer’s spouse has the same right as the buyer) has a right to protest or object to the repossession. If the buyer’s protest is so strong that the repossessor cannot take the property back without using force or threats, then the repossessor will have to resort to the legal process to regain possession of the property. However, the buyer’s protest must be made before the repossessor has taken possession of the object. For cars and other vehicles subject to registration under the Vehicle Code, repossession occurs when the repossessor gains entry to the vehicle or when the vehicle is connected to a tow truck. For property other than vehicles, repossession is complete when the repossessor exercises complete dominion and control over the property. The repossessor does have the right to go onto privately owned land to retake property, e.g., an automobile from a driveway or furniture from an open porch. But, in no event is he/she authorized to enter any building or enclosure without permission. Remember that repossession is strictly a civil matter and in no event are you authorized to give legal advice. Direct the parties to contact their respective attorneys for such advice. CONCLUSION Civil disputes can be messy and emotional. The officer must remember to keep the peace and remain a neutral third party. The ultimate goal is resolution without injury to any involved parties or damage to any property. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 56 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control REVISED November 2017 FUNDAMENTALS OF CROWD CONTROL INTRODUCTION Law enforcement officers are often required to manage large groups of people. When performing this task, officers must remember that the United States Constitution guarantees the right to lawful assembly and freedom of speech. Additionally, officers must balance the rights of the group with those of the people outside the group whose rights may be infringed upon. The goal is to manage a peaceful assembly, preserve the public peace, and protect property and lives. CROWD CONTROL The following steps will help to effectively manage a crowd control incident: • Identify the nature and the objective of the crowd and event; • Plan for contingencies and try to establish liaison with crowd leaders; • Have adequate officers available to handle the crowd, plus a reserve force for emergencies; • Set-up a command post away from the crowd; • Have the necessary equipment and vehicles at the command post; • Establish boundaries to control crowd movement and control ingress and egress; • Isolate and quickly remove law violators; • Establish a press information area away from the command post. CROWD DISPERSAL Once a crowd situation has escalated it must be contained and controlled, and if necessary, dispersed. Officers should first respond to the command post where a plan of action will be developed. This command post should be away from, and out of sight of the crowd. Once a plan has been formulated, officers should be sent to positions where they can control avenues of ingress and egress to the crowd. Once a crowd has been contained, dispersal can begin. IDENTIFYING DISPERSAL SECTIONS AND ROUTES Dispersal should be accomplished systematically. The area should be divided into sections and dispersed one section at a time. Once an area has been dispersed, it must 36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control 57 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents be controlled by an officer to prevent the return of the crowd. Tactics for dispersing areas are dictated by the terrain and the nature of the crowd. It is important to have a clear dispersal route(s) to allow the crowd to leave the area. Set a reasonable time limit based upon the size of the crowd and the availability of dispersal routes. Once the crowd begins to break up, separate those members who are unwilling to follow the dispersal order from those who are following instructions. Do not give a dispersal order unless you have the present ability to enforce it with arrests, if necessary. GIVING THE DISPERSAL ORDER Before attempting to break up any crowd, it is necessary for officers to give a dispersal order. The dispersal order provides the legal basis for any further action, and is one of the elements necessary for arrest for California Penal Code § 409. The order and any subsequent arrests should be viewed as a last resort when attempts to negotiate with crowd leaders have failed. The order shall be given over a public-address system to ensure that all crowd members are able to hear. When making the announcement, officers should be staged at all areas of the crowd (front, back and sides) to ensure that the announcement is audible. If the announcement was not audible in all areas it should be repeated until it can be heard clearly. It is helpful, for prosecution purposes, to have officers that can testify that the announcement was clear and audible. When possible, the order should be given over the radio so the Communications Center can record the order. If possible, tape record or video record the dispersal order. A copy of the dispersal order is contained within the Field Reference Guide and is listed below: “I am (rank and name), a peace officer for the Long Beach Police Department. I hereby declare this to be an unlawful assembly, and in the name of the People of the State of California, command all those assembled at (specific location) to immediately disperse, which means to break up this assembly. If you do not do so, you may be arrested or subject to other police action. Other police action could include the use of force which may inflict significant pain or result in serious injury. Penal Code section 409 prohibits remaining present at an unlawful assembly. If you remain in the area just described, regardless of your purpose, you will be in violation of Penal Code section 409. The following routes of dispersal are available (routes). You have (reasonable amount of time) minutes to disperse.” PASSIVE DEMONSTRATION ISSUES A crowd composed of passive demonstrators poses a different problem to law enforcement. Passive demonstrators will not offer active resistance to officers. The goal of a passive demonstrator is to gain publicity and sympathy for their cause from the media. They will typically try to gain attention through a staged demonstration. Passive demonstrators may try to interfere with lawful business or block a major thoroughfare. 36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control 58 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The demonstrators will attempt to occupy a large volume of police resources for as long as possible and culminate the demonstration through one or more arrests. Once authorities decide that business has been disrupted, or one or more laws have been broken, it is necessary to give a dispersal order. After giving this order and eliminating the possibility of negotiations with the crowd's leaders, officers must be prepared to make mass arrests. If it becomes necessary to make arrests, an emergency field booking unit should be in place. Before making arrests, officers should isolate the demonstrators; this can be done through the placement of officers, barricades and barrier tape. Isolating demonstrators makes the task of arresting passive demonstrators easier; as the demonstrators will be unable to receive outside support or reinforcements. Once the decision is made to make arrests, officers should be formed into arrest teams and, as needed, separator teams. Separator teams, composed of two to three officers and a supervisor should be skilled in the use of weaponless control techniques. The separator team will identify the next demonstrator to be arrested. If the demonstrators are linked together and are resisting, officers will separate them, using pain compliance techniques. Arrest teams will ideally consist of two officers and a supervisor. However, if a supervisor is not available, three officers will suffice. More officers may be added as needed to facilitate the carrying of demonstrators who refuse to walk. The role of the supervisor is to contact each demonstrator before his or her arrest and try to persuade the individual to cooperate with the arrest. There is no hurry in this arrest process; it is important that it appear as orderly as possible. It is also helpful to provide the media with a vantage point to observe these arrests. The public must view the actions of the officers as reasonable and professional. Arrestees, once in custody, will either be escorted or carried to the field booking area. EQUIPMENT Law enforcement officers at a crowd control scene require specialized equipment to perform their mission safely. These equipment items include the following: • Full uniform with badge and nametag; • Ballistic vests offer protection from blunt force trauma caused by thrown objects; • Baton, either a standard or a riot baton; • Handcuffs or flex-cuffs for arrests; • Department issued safety helmet with face shield; and, • Department issued gas mask. USE OF POLICE SERVICE DOGS Police service dogs (K-9) can perform valuable functions in assisting officers at the scene of crowd control incidents. The primary benefit of the K-9 is the psychological advantage that they provide. People in general are afraid of the K-9; this fear can be used to move a crowd. The limitation of the K-9 is that it is only deployed when officer safety is a primary 36 – Fundamentals of Crowd Control 59 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents concern. The on-scene supervisor makes the decision regarding the use of a K-9. The handler has the final authority to decide when and how the K-9 is deployed. EXAMPLES OF PROPER K-9 USE In a crowd control situation, the K-9 can be used behind a squad or platoon skirmish line to act as a back-up to the line. The threat of the K-9 prevents crowd members from penetrating the line. Any crowd member penetrating the line is viewed as a threat to officer safety and subject to K-9 apprehension. In a crowd control situation, the K-9 can be used on the flanks or sides of a squad or platoon formation. The threat of the K-9 prevents crowd members from moving against the sides of the formation, or to the rear of the formation. Any crowd member moving behind the formation is viewed as a threat to officer safety and subject to K-9 apprehension In a riot situation, the K-9 can be used as described above. Additionally, the K9 can be used as a less than lethal force tool on a directed apprehension for a specific target. The use of a K9 is a use of force and must meet deployment policy criteria. The goal when using the K-9 in crowd control is to enhance the effectiveness and safety of the officers, not as an apprehension tool, unless absolutely necessary. The K-9 can only be deployed to apprehend one member of the crowd at a time. Once the K-9 is deployed to apprehend, its psychological deterrence against other members of the crowd is greatly reduced, therefore use of a K-9 should be your last step for apprehension. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 60 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 37 – Drill Instructions REVISED May 2017 DRILL INSTRUCTIONS INTRODUCTION Military drill has been utilized for hundreds of years to control large groups of personnel in military parade and combat situations. These practices have been adapted by police agencies for similar purposes. Basic drill covers a number of advantages, which include: • Move a unit from one place to another in a standard orderly manner • Provide simple formation, from which crowd control formations may be assumed • Developing leadership skills by providing the opportunity to command troops • Build teamwork by encouraging officers to work as a unit • Create a uniform, professional appearance COMMANDS The unit leader always gives commands to a unit. The smallest unit normally used is that of a squad. A squad is normally composed of eleven officers with a sergeant as squad leader. Larger units, platoons, are composed of several squads working together. A lieutenant normally commands a platoon. Unit leaders position themselves in a location where they can best control their officers. Squad leaders are positioned at the front of their squads if in a platoon formation. Commands, or orders, given to a group of officers should be loud enough for all officers to hear them and respond. It is the responsibility of officers to listen for commands and be prepared to act upon them. Commands normally consist of separate parts. The first part, the Preparatory Command, identifies the unit that the leader is speaking to and the command that is about to be executed. The second part, the Command of Execution, tells the unit to complete the command described during the preparatory command. For example: to call a group to attention, the preparatory command is "Squad," and the command of execution is "Attention." Because the preparatory command causes anticipation, it is important that officers wait for the command of execution, and not anticipate any movement. Verbal commands are accompanied with visual signals, which are predetermined by the Long Beach Police Department. POSITION OF ATTENTION 37 – Drill Instructions 61 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The position of attention is the basic military position. It indicates that the officer is alert and ready to receive further commands. All commands are given from the position of attention. Upon receiving the command "Attention" the officer will: • Bring the left heel against the right. The heels will be on line and touching. The feet will be turned out equally, at an angle of 45 degrees • Legs will be straight, but not stiff at the knees. Weight will rest equally on both feet • Hips and shoulders will be level, the chest lifted, and shoulders pulled slightly back • Arms will hang naturally at the side, thumbs along the trouser seams, palms facing inward toward the sides, fingers in a natural curl • The head is erect, chin pulled in slightly • The officer will stand still, not talk, and look directly ahead When the squad leader wants to form the squad for the first time he will command "Fall In." Upon receiving this command the squad will form themselves standing side by side, one arm’s length distance between the officers, centered on the squad leader, and at the position of attention. ALIGNING THE SQUAD To align the squad after falling in the squad leader will command "Dress Right Dress." Upon receiving this command the squad will: • The extreme right officer in the line will raise his left arm, straight out from the side, parallel to the ground while looking straight ahead. This officer is the base of this movement; the other officers will guide themselves on him • The rest of the squad will also raise their left arm, but will look to the right and align themselves with the officer to the right. Officers will close together until their right shoulder touches the fingertips of the officer to the right. The officer at the left end of the formation does not raise his arm • The squad leader will move to the left end of the squad and look down the length of the squad. He will direct squad member's movement, front to back, to improve the alignment of the squad • Once the squad leader has completed this movement, he will return to the front, take a position three paces in front of the squad, face to the left and command "Ready Front" • Upon receiving this command, the squad will return their left arm to their side and look straight ahead If the formation is too long, or the squad leader wants a closer formation, he can command "At Close Interval, Dress Right Dress." The procedure for this movement is the same as described above except, instead of extending the arm straight out from the side, the squad members will place the palm of their left arm flat on their hip, with the elbow straight out from the side. Officers will close to the right until their right arm touches the elbow of the officer to the right. 37 – Drill Instructions 62 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents POSITIONS OF REST There are four positions of rest with which officers should be familiar. They are Parade Rest, At Ease, Rest, and Fall Out. Rest positions are executed from the halt and only while at the position of attention. These positions are described as follows: • "Parade Rest": The preparatory command is "Parade" and the command of execution is "Rest." Upon the command of execution, move the left foot twelve inches to the left of the right foot. Keep the legs straight with the body weight resting equally on each foot. Simultaneously, place the hands in the small of the back, palms to the rear. The right hand should be on top of the left hand, the thumbs clasping, and the fingers extended. Officers may not move in place, not talk, and must look directly ahead • "At Ease": Upon receiving the command "At Ease," the officers will keep their right foot in place. Officers may move in place but may not talk • "Rest": Upon receiving the command "Rest," officers are permitted to move about in place, but the right foot must remain fixed, as in the "At Ease" situation. Otherwise, officers may be relaxed and talk • "Fall Out": Upon receiving the command "Fall Out," officers may break or leave ranks; however, they must remain in the immediate area. During roll call inspection, officers, unless directed otherwise, will proceed to their regular duty assignment FACING MOVEMENTS Facing movements are used to change the direction of a formation, while standing still. The preparatory command is the direction of the movement, "Right, Left, or About," and the command of execution, officers will do the following: • "Right, Face": Raise the ball of the right foot and the heel of the left foot. Rotate 90 degrees to the right and then bring the left foot forward on line with the right foot. Remain at the position of attention and await further direction • "Left, Face": Raise the ball of the left foot and the heel of the right foot. Rotate 90 degrees to the left and bring the right foot forward and on line with the left foot. Remain at the position of attention and await further direction • "About, Face": Place the right foot to the rear and slightly to the left of the left foot. Raise the heel of the right foot and the ball of the left foot and rotate 180 degrees to the right. Once completed the heels should be on line. Remain at the position of attention and await further direction MARCHING MOVEMENTS Marching movements are used to place the formation into motion, halt the formation, or make changes in direction. These movements are as follows: • "Forward, March": Upon receiving this command the formation will begin marching with the left foot in the direction the formation is currently facing and in step 37 – Drill Instructions 63 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • "Route Step, March": Upon receiving this command the squad will begin marching in the direction the squad is currently facing. While marching at the route step the squad does not have to remain in step - only given while at the march • "Column Right, or Left, March": This movement is used to change the direction of movement of a formation, in column. Upon receiving the command of execution, the first officer will make a 90-degree turn in the direction specified in the preparatory command. The remaining squad members will continue to march forward until reaching the original pivot point, where they will also pivot 90 degrees, and continue to follow the lead officer • "Right, or Left Flank, March": This movement is used to change the direction of movement of the formation 90 degrees to the left or right. Unlike the column, the flank causes all officers to pivot at the same time. This movement should only be used for short distances as alignment is difficult to maintain • "To the Rear, March": This movement is used to change the direction of movement of the formation 180 degrees to the rear. Upon receiving the command of execution each officer will continue marching forward until placing the left foot on the ground. The officers will then rotate 180 degrees to the right and rear, and then continue marching in the new direction • "Squad/Platoon/Detail/Section, etc. Halt": Upon receiving this command all officers will bring the left heel to the right heel assuming the halted position of attention and remain at the position of attention REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 64 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations REVISED April 2004 SQUAD TACTICS AND FORMATIONS INTRODUCTION Officers deployed in small, well-organized teams, can be effective in controlling larger groups. The squad is the smallest unit used in crowd control formations. The squad normally is composed of twelve officers, consisting of a Squad Leader, an Assistant Squad Leader and ten squad members. SQUAD FORMATIONS Forming a Squad Normally, officers will initially move into an administrative formation at a command post or assembly area in order to receive instruction, equipment, and an inspection by the squad leader. Upon receiving the command "Fall In", squad members will stand side by side at close interval, facing the squad leader at the position of attention and await further instructions. When possible, the squad leader will select his two largest officers, who will serve as the lead officers in the Squad Column of Twos formation. When possible, a basic knowledge of the formations is a prerequisite for the lead officer assignment because these officers provide the base of movement for future formations. The squad leader should also assign linebackers. These officers assist the squad leader in controlling formations and movements. These officers also serve as grenadiers when gas is deployed, support Skirmish Line officers, and assist in the injured officer drill. Senior officers are a good choice for linebacker because of their experience. Consider a left handed officer as a linebacker because his baton swings will often conflict with right handed officers when on the same Skirmish Line formation. Squad Movement All movements made from non-tactical formations to tactical formations and back are made at double time. The squad leader will control movements by facing the squad and giving orders as indicated in the following example: Command "First Squad" (Squad identity) "Column of Twos" (Formation Desired) "On Me" (Location Desired) "Move" (Command of Execution) 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations 65 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Simultaneously, with the verbal command, the squad leader will also show the appropriate hand and arm signal. The squad leader will drop his arms to coincide with the command of execution. Movements in non-tactical formations are normally made with the baton drawn and at the positions of port arms. Movements made while in tactical formations are made with the baton drawn, body placed in a position of advantage and baton in a thrust position. Marching movements can be made at route step and are initiated by the squad leader commanding "Route Step, Move." The drag step is only used when in close proximity to the crowd. The squad leader commands "Drag Step, Move" and the squad members step forward with the left foot, make a thrusting movement with the baton, drag the right foot up even with the left foot and stop given further commands. SQUAD FORMATIONS SQUAD COLUMN OF TWOS (figure one) • Function: A non-tactical formation used to move personnel from one place to another • Advantage: Provides easy control for the squad leader, especially when moving over difficult or crowded ground • Command: "Squad One, Column of Twos, On Me, Move • Arm Signal: Both arms raised straight up Upon receiving the command of execution, the lead officers will move to a position directly in front of and facing the squad leader. The other squad members will fall in behind them with the linebackers being last. Other than the lead officers and the linebackers, there is not particular order to the other positions. Although this formation is not normally used for tactical purposes, it can be used to quickly divide a squad into two equal parts to provide for lateral support to both sides of a Skirmish Line. It can also be used to split a passive or cooperative crowd by marching down the center and dividing the crown into two halves. Figure one Squad Column of Twos Squad Leader Lead Officers Linebackers 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations 66 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents SQUAD SKIRMISH LINE • Function: A tactical formation used to move a crowd straight back or to deny access to an area • Advantage: A simple formation providing good mutual support for officers and easy to maintain control and supervision • Command: "Squad One, Skirmish Line, In Place, Move" • Arm Signal: Both arms straight out from the body, parallel to the ground The Skirmish Line is the most common crowd control formation and is the appropriate formation for the majority of situations. If necessary, linebackers can be used to provide additional officers on the line. Skirmish Line in place (figure 2) Squad Column of Twos moving to Skirmish Line (figure 3) Linebackers Squad Leader Squad Leader Movement to a Skirmish Line "In Place" from a Squad Column of Twos is done by the lead officers picking up their interval and the other officers fanning out to the left and right towards the crowd. Once in position, the squad will await further orders from the squad leader. Intervals between officers are dictated by the make-up of the crowd but are normally a baton plus one arm length (approximately five to six feet). For crowds that are more resistant, spacing should be moved closer. For crowds that are easier to disperse, spacing may be moved out to cover larger areas. Another way to deploy a Skirmish Line is by the squad leader ordering "Squad One, Skirmish Line, Fifteen Yards Out, Move." When this order is given, the squad will move forward at double time, as a unit, in a Squad Column of Twos. When the lead officers reach the designated distance, they will deploy, pick up spacing, and immediately begin the route step towards the crowd. As the lead officers deploy, the other officers will fan out to their positions at double time, pick up their interval and also begin the route step. CROSS BOW TO A SKIRMISH LINE (figures 4, 5 and 6) • Function: A transitional formation to move from a Column of Twos to a Skirmish Line through an existing Skirmish Line • Advantage: Rapid deployment up to a crowd 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations 67 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Command: "Squad One, Cross Bow to a Skirmish Line, Ten Yards Out, Move." • Arm Signal: Arms crossed, chest high, then straight out parallel to the ground. This formation is used to move a squad in a Column of Twos forward and through a squad deployed in a Skirmish Line. The squad continues forward of the first Skirmish Line until reaching a point designated by the squad leader. The officers then deploy into a Skirmish Line. There are now two squads deployed in a Skirmish Line, one in front of the other. The rear Skirmish Line leader will now order his squad into a Squad Column of twos and prepare to perform another Cross Bow if necessary. The advantage of this formation is that it allows two squads to work in close cooperation and keep close proximity to a crowd that is moving away. Squad leader Linebacker As the squad moves forward to the rear of the Skirmish Line, officers should call out to the other officers, "Coming Through," to warn the other officers of their approach. Linebacker Squad leader Crossbow (figure 4) Crossbow (figure 5) Squad leaders Linebacker Linebacker Skirmish Line 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations 68 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The Cross Bow is effective in moving close to a crowd. Its primary advantage is avoiding chasing groups while deployed as a Skirmish Line. It should not be used to trap crowd members between the two Skirmish Lines, because this is tactically unsafe. Crossbow to a Skirmish Line (figure 6) CROSS BOW TO AN ARREST/RESCUE CIRCLE (figures 7,8,9, and 10) • Function: A transitional formation to move from a Column of Twos to an Arrest or Rescue Circle through an existing Skirmish Line. • Advantage: Rapid deployment into a crowd • Command: "Squad One, Cross Bow to an Arrest Circle, the Man in the Red Shirt, Move." • Arm Signal: Arms crossed, chest high, then hands clasped over the head. This formation is used to move a squad in a Column of Twos, through a second squad deployed in a Skirmish Line, to effect an arrest or rescue. The squad continues forward of the first Skirmish Line until reaching the subject designated by the squad leader. The lead officers then take this subject into their custody, with the assistance of the squad leader, if necessary. Linebackers Squad leaders 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations 69 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Linebacker Crossbow to an Arrest/Rescue Circle (figure 7) The other officers continue forward and wrap around the lead officers, and squad leader, forming a circle. Linebacker Crossbow to an Arrest/Rescue Circle (figure 8) Once the officers have completed the wrap-around, they should be touching shoulder-to-shoulder and facing outward, providing three hundred sixty degree security. Crossbow to Arrest/Rescue Circle (figure 9) Once deployed in the Arrest Circle, the squad leader must decide if the squad will wait for the Skirmish Line to move forward and encircle them, placing them to the rear or if he will order "Recover to the Skirmish Line" (preparatory), and "Move" (execution). Squad leaders Linebacker Squad leader Linebacker 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations 70 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents When receiving this command, the squad will move slowly towards the Skirmish Line, taking six-inch steps. Officers must remain in their 360-degree security position. It is important to maintain the integrity of the circle for officer safety. Officers inside the circle may grasp the back of officers on the circle to assist in this procedure. Once behind the Skirmish Line, the arrestee or rescued person can be turned over to an arrest team or paramedics, as needed. If, while forward of the Skirmish Line and in the Arrest Circle, members of the crowd move too close, the squad leader has the option of ordering "Pulsate Move." Upon the command or execution, "Move," circle officers will move forward using two drag steps, simultaneously executing two baton thrusts, followed by a power stroke. Officers should then immediately move back to their circle position. If the Team is unable to take the suspect into custody, the lead officers should stop while the remaining officers form a 360 circle. "Pulsate, Move" (figure 10) INJURED OFFICER DRILL • Function: Response of Linebackers to an injured officer, who is deployed on a Skirmish Line • Advantage: Rapid recovery, while maintaining the integrity of the Skirmish Line • Command: "Officer Down." • Arm Signal: None Officers will occasionally be injured while deployed on a Skirmish Line. The natural tendency of officers is to immediately rush to the injured officers aid. This can violate the integrity of the line and jeopardize the safety of other officers. When an officer is injured, those officers that see it should immediately yell "Officer Down, Officer Down." The nearest linebacker will move forward and fill the hole in the line and the leader may order the squad to halt, if moving, while he evaluates the situation and decides how to reorganize the squad. 38 – Squad Tactics and Formations 71 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Injured Officer Drill (figure 11) FORMATIONS IN COMBINATION Many situations will require the deployment of more than one squad of officers to handle a situation. The formations provided within this Training Bulletin are designed to be flexible to meet the needs of a variety of situations. A supervisor may, at his discretion, deploy additional squads to assist with left and right flank support, arrest teams, or other related functions. The only limitations are the imagination of the supervisor and the tactical considerations of the problem REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau Linebacker Linebacker Squad Leader 72 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Squad Vehicle Formations REVISED May 2004 MOBILE FIELD FORCE TACTICS SQUAD VEHICLE FORMATIONS INTRODUCTION The advantage of the Mobile Field Force is that it provides an organized, rapid response to a variety of tactical situations. The Mobile Field Force formations that can be used to disperse crowds or deploy officers are: • In Trail • On Line • Bump • On Line Skirmish Although circumstances may dictate a different deployment strategy, these formations are normally deployed in the order listed above. The progression of these formations is such that the squad moves from one formation to the next, resulting in a greater degree of influence and force being deployed against the crowd. IN TRAIL (figure 1) • Function - A formation used to move personnel from one place to another and to patrol areas of disturbance • Advantage - Provides easy control for the squad leader • Command - "Squad One, In Trail, Execute" After receiving the command of execution, vehicle number one begins moving in a direction given be the squad leader. Vehicles number two and three then move in behind vehicle number one. The three vehicles will remain in this formation until given further instructions. The squad leader may at his discretion, give the command, "Code Three, Execute." Upon receiving this command the drivers will activate their red lights and siren. This tactic is especially useful when the squad is approaching a crowd. The use of the red lights and siren may cause the crowd to disperse without any further tactics. 40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Squad Vehicle Formations 73 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents IN TRAIL (figure 1) ON LINE (figure 2) • Function - Used to bring the squad from "In Trail" to "Abreast." Used to clear a non- resistant crowd from an area • Advantage - A simple formation that provides good strength to the front, allowing officers to move a crowd straight back • Command - "Squad One, On Line, Execute." ON LINE (figure 2) When a crowd fails to disperse when faced with a squad In Trail, the squad leader has the option to move to the next formation, "On Line." Upon receiving the command of execution, vehicle #1 will continue forward at approximately 25-40 miles per hour. Vehicle 40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Squad Vehicle Formations 74 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents #2 will accelerate and move to the side of vehicle #1, at least one car width away. Vehicle #3 will also accelerate and move to the right of vehicle #1. The three vehicles will continue forward, abreast, at 25-40 miles per hour, toward the crowd. It is important that the vehicles shall have their red lights and siren on. If the crowd fails to disperse as the squad approaches, the squad leader will command, "Brake, Brake, Brake." All three vehicles will brake rapidly, remaining On-Line," and stop approximately one car length from the crowd. BUMP • Function - Used to move a resistant crowd back • Advantage - Allows controlled movement of police vehicles to cause intimidation to the crowd and create dispersal • Command - "Bump, Execute" If a crowd fails to disperse when faced with both the "In Trail" and "On Line" formations, the "Bump" formation should be used. The "Bump" formation is initiated while displaying red light and siren in the "On Line" stopped position. Upon the command of execution, vehicle #1 rapidly accelerates and brakes, moving forward one car length. After vehicle #1 completes this move, vehicles #2 and #3 simultaneously accelerate and brake quickly, moving forward one car length, catching up with vehicle #1. Once vehicles #2 and #3 stop, vehicle #1 again accelerates and brakes quickly, moving forward one car length. This leap frog movement continues until, at the discretion of the squad leader, the squad leader commands either "On Line" or "In Trail." It is not the intention of the "Bump" movement to strike any member of the crowd. Should any member of the crowd be accidentally struck and injured by a police vehicle, it is the responsibility of the squad leader to return to the scene when practical, render aid to the citizen, and then file appropriate reports. BUMP (figure 3) ON LINE SKIRMISH (figure 4) • Function - Used to move a resistant crowd back 40 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Squad Vehicle Formations 75 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Advantage - Combines the use of officers and police vehicles to disperse an extremely resistant crowd • Command – "On Line Skirmish, Execute" Crowds may fail to disperse, even when the "Bump" movement is deployed. If this occurs, the squad leader should deploy officers onto the "On Line Skirmish." This movement is executed when the squad vehicles are stopped. Upon the command of execution, all officers, except the drivers and squad leader, will exit their vehicles and deploy at double time into a Skirmish Line immediately in front of their vehicles. The squad leader will use the vehicle public address system to control the squad. The squad leader can move the squad forward at either the route step or drag step. After the crowd is dispersed the squad leader commands "Recover to Vehicles, Execute." ON LINE SKIRMISH (figure 4) REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 76 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics – Citizen Rescue REVISED July 2004 MOBILE FIELD FORCE TACTICS – CITIZEN RESCUE INTRODUCTION Officers at the scene of civil disorder are often faced with the task of rescuing innocent citizens and downed officers that have been overcome by members of a mob. Many times officers will not have sufficient numbers available to move into an area and completely control the situation. This type of situation requires the use of specialized tactics involving the use of a squad of well-trained officers, who move quickly to the scene of a trapped citizen or officer, use aggressive tactics to temporarily put the crowd at bay, quickly rescue the citizen, and rapidly move out to a safe area. Equally important to the rescue is the need to close routes into a troubled area to prevent the continuing need to expose officers to the hazards of the crowd while attempting to rescue citizens or other officers. THREE CAR CITIZEN RESCUE (figure 1) • Function - A formation used to move into an uncontrolled area quickly, rescue citizens or officers and then quickly move out of the area to safety • Advantage - Rapid deployment, coupled with precise timing and execution, allowing for rescue in an uncontrolled area • Command - "Squad One, Citizen Rescue, Execute" (Figure 1) Three Car Citizen Rescue 41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue 77 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents A trained squad can rapidly accomplish this formation, without a great deal of planning. It is important, though, to have rehearsed this prior to attempting it. Each officer has a special function and area of responsibility that must be covered in order to make this movement as safe as possible. All citizen rescues are somewhat unsafe, in that they require officers to enter uncontrolled areas. This danger is reduced by both the elements of surprise and speed of the movement. This operation begins away from the rescue scene with officers inside their vehicles in a squad column. The squad leader, who is in the first vehicle, commands over the radio, "Squad One, Code Three, Execute," and then "Squad One, Citizen Rescue, Execute." The squad moves towards the rescue scene in column. As the squad approaches the rescue scene, the squad leader will evaluate the scene and determine where the majority of the crowd is located. The squad leader will direct his driver to drive to the side of the victim where most of the crowd members are located, thus separating the crowd from the victim. (figure 1) Vehicle #1 will drive close to the victim and then turn in front of the victim. Vehicle #2, the rescue vehicle, will drive along the same path as vehicle one, but will stop alongside and close to the victim. It is important the vehicle is not too close to the victim, as it will hamper the rescuing officers from exiting the vehicle. Vehicle #3 will follow vehicles #1 and #2 into the scene but will stop immediately behind the victim. Distances will vary depending upon the location, but vehicles #1 and #3 should be approximately one to one and one half car lengths from the victim. Vehicle #2 should be approximately one car width from the victim. Once the vehicles stop, rescuing officers will exit their vehicles and perform the following duties: Vehicle #1 • Driver – Remain in the vehicle, once the squad leader has designated the direction of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are in the vehicles, drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the area • Squad Leader/Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. Survey the scene and decide whether the squad will exit to the front, the preferred method, or to the rear. Once decided, signal with your arm, pointing the direction of exit and also tell the squad verbally either: "Front Exit" or "Rear Exit." Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and exit the scene • Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. You are responsible for squad security for the left side of the vehicle, from front to center of the squad. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and exit the scene • Right Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. You are responsible for squad security for the right side of the vehicle, from front to center of the squad. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and exit the scene 41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue 78 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Vehicle #2 • Driver – Remain in the vehicle; once the squad leader has designated the direction of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are in the vehicles, drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the area. • Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. Watch the squad leader and determine the direction of exit, then verbally relay this to your officers. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and exit the scene • Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit on the victim side of the vehicle, leaving the door open. Move quickly to the victim with the first officer going to the victim's furthest extremity. Using proper techniques, both officers lift and carry the victim head first to vehicle #2. The first officer pulls the victim inside on top of himself, while the second officer places the legs inside and secures the door. The second officer then moves to either vehicle #3, front exit, or vehicle #1, rear exit, and enters the back seat • Right Rear Passenger Officer – Exit on the victim's side of the vehicle, leaving the door open. Move quickly to the victim with the first officer going to the victim’s furthest extremity. Using proper techniques, both officers lift and carry the victim head first to vehicle #2. The first officer pulls the victim inside on top of himself, while the second officer places the legs inside and secures the door. The second officer then moves to either vehicle #3, front exit or vehicle #1, rear exit, and enters the back seat Vehicle #3 • Driver – Remain in the vehicle; once the squad leader has designated the direction of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are in the vehicles drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the area • Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. Watch the squad leader and determine the direction of exit, then verbally relay this to your officers. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene • Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. You are responsible for squad security for the left side of the vehicle, from front to center of the squad. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene • Right Rear Passenger – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jam area. You are responsible for squad security for the right side of the vehicle, from front to center of the squad. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene 41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue 79 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Three Car Citizen Rescue (Figure 2) TWO CAR CITIZEN RESCUE • Function - A formation used when a full squad is not available, move into an uncontrolled area quickly, rescue citizens or officers and then quickly move out of the area to safety • Advantage - Rapid deployment, coupled with precise timing and execution, allowing for rescue in an uncontrolled area • Command - "Squad One, Citizen Rescue, Execute" This rescue is performed when a full squad of three vehicles is not available, but necessity requires immediate action. Many of the techniques and training for the two-car citizen rescue are similar to those for a three-car rescue. This operation is started away from the rescue scene with officers inside their vehicles, and vehicles in a squad column. The squad leader, who is in vehicle #1, commands over the radio, first: "Squad One, Code Three, Execute," and then "Squad One, Citizen Rescue, Execute." The squad moves toward the rescue scene in column. As the squad approaches the rescue scene, the squad leader will evaluate the scene and determine on which side of the victim is the greatest amount of the crowd is located. The squad leader will direct his driver on that side of the victim, thus separating the crowd from the victim. 41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue 80 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents TWO CAR CITIZEN RESCUE (Figure 3) Vehicle #1 will pull forward and stop alongside the victim. Vehicle #2 will pull alongside and stop on the opposite side of the victim. Distances will vary depending upon the location, but vehicle #1 and #2 should be approximately one to two width from the victim. Once the vehicles stop, rescuing officers will exit their vehicles and perform the following duties: Vehicle #1 • Driver – Remain in the vehicle, once the squad leader has designated the direction of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are in the vehicles drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the area. • Squad Leader/Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jamb area. Survey the scene and decide whether the squad will exit to the front, the preferred method, or to the rear. Once decided, signal with your arm, pointing the direction of exit and also tell the squad verbally either: "Front Exit" or "Rear Exit." Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicles and leave the scene. • Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jamb area. You are responsible for squad security for the left side of the squad. Once the rescue is completed, enter the vehicle and leave the scene. • Right Rear Passenger Officer – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jamb area. You are responsible for squad security for the right side of the squad. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene. Vehicle #2 • Driver – Remain in the vehicle, once the squad leader has designated the direction of exit, place the vehicle in drive or reverse with the foot on the brake and wait for the rescue to be completed. Once the rescue is completed and all squad members are in the vehicles drive in the direction designated by the squad leader until clear of the area #1 #2 41 – Mobile Field Force Tactics Citizen Rescue 81 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Vehicle Commander – Exit the vehicle and remain in the door jamb area. Watch the squad leader and determine the direction of exit, then verbally relay this to your officers. Once the rescue is complete, enter the vehicle and leave the scene • Left Rear Passenger Officer – Exit on the victim side of the vehicle, leaving the door open. Move quickly to the victim, first officer goes to the victim's furthest extremity. Using proper techniques, both officers lift and carry the victim head first to vehicle #2. The first officer pulls the victim inside and on top of himself, while the second officer places the legs inside and secures the door. The second officer then moves to vehicle #1 and enters the back seat • Right Rear Passenger Officer – Exit on the victim side of the vehicle, leaving the door open. Move quickly to the victim, first officer goes to the victim's furthest extremity. Using proper techniques, both officers lift and carry the victim head first to vehicle #2. The first officer pulls the victim inside on top of himself, while the second officer places the legs inside and secures the door. The second officer then moves to vehicles #1 and enters the back seat REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 82 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 42 – Impact Weapons Revised April 2020 42 – Impact Weapons IMPACT WEAPONS Revised April 2020 The police baton, sap and police utility type flashlight are authorized for use as an impact weapon. Impact weapons are an intermediate force option and can be used in circumstances that do not necessitate the use of deadly force but require officers to apply more force than can reasonably be applied with weaponless control techniques. USE OF IMPACT WEAPONS The use of impact weapons carries with it the significant risk of injury and can lead to the perception of excessive force by members of the public. Therefore, use of impact weapons should be proportional to the seriousness of the suspected offense or the reasonably perceived level of actual or threatened resistance. An impact weapon is used to gain control of a suspect and is of little value if not carried with you. Facts tending to justify the use of an impact weapon include, but are not limited to: • The physical stature of the suspect as compared to the officer. • The suspect assumes an aggressive stance. • The inability to control the suspect by lesser means. • The need for immediate control of the suspect or situation due to a tactical consideration. • The officer's perception of the suspect's knowledge or apparent knowledge of a martial art form. • When an officer is a member of a tactical squad in a crowd or riot control formation, a baton may be used to move, separate, disperse or deny a person access to a structure or through an area. BATON TECHNIQUES Baton techniques are designed to allow the officer to move from one technique into another. This becomes particularly important in situations where you are faced with more than one suspect. Whether you use these techniques individually or in combination, they are techniques you will use every time when the baton is the proper weapon for the circumstances. The following are Department trained techniques: • Upper cradle • Two-hand low defense • Two-count modified 42 – Impact Weapons 83 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Two-count striking hand • Three-count from the ring • Five-count thrust baton • Baton retention and release Use only those portions of a baton technique that are appropriate and sufficient to control the situation. Although each technique is taught as a sequence of movements, they do not have to be used that way. Use your own good judgment. If you start a technique consisting of three counts, but your aggressor discontinues the assault at count 1 or 2, do not continue the technique. Stop, search, and handcuff. Your intention must never be to punish; it is only to control and defend. For further practical training application of the technique, refer to the Training Division. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 43 – Persons Exhibiting Erratic Behavior REVISED January 2024 RESPONDING TO INCIDENTS INVOLVING PERSONS EXHIBITING ERRATIC BEHAVIOR OVERVIEW Officers periodically encounter individuals exhibiting erratic, unpredictable, or violent behavior when handling calls for service or when patrolling in the community. These behaviors are often the result of an underlying medical condition such as physical illness, mental illness, disease, head trauma, alcohol intoxication, drug impairment or a combination of these factors. Officers should exercise caution when contacting individuals exhibiting these behaviors and should ensure they are using appropriate tactics and training to minimize the risk of injury to the members of the public, the individual, and themselves. SIGNS AND BEHAVIORS Officers contacting these individuals should be aware of the signs and behavioral indicators that these individuals exhibit so they can determine which resources can be utilized to safely address the situation. Some of the signs and behaviors the individual may exhibit are: • Aggressiveness • Agitation • Apathy • Attraction to glass • Confusion • Hallucinations • Heightened strength • Hyperactivity • Incoherent speech • Paranoia • Rage • Rambling speech • Shouting • Sudden calmness • Sweating • Unaware of surroundings • Unresponsive to painful stimuli • Muscle rigidity • Destroying property • Violence Officers should not attempt to diagnose these individuals but should be mindful of the dangers these signs and behaviors present to the officer, members of the public, and the individual exhibiting these behaviors. 43 – Persons Exhibiting Erratic Behavior 85 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents DISPATCHER ROLE When the Disaster Preparedness and Emergency Communication Department (Communications Center) receives a call involving an individual exhibiting the described behaviors, the call should be dispatched as a 647V-Intoxicated Person Potentially Violent or 5150V-Violent Mentally Ill Person. The dispatcher should initiate a dual response of both LBPD and Long Beach Fire Department (LBFD). This allows the individual to be medically treated quickly for any underlying issues contributing to the observed signs and behavior indicators. SCENE MANAGEMENT When officers respond to calls that involve individuals displaying these signs and behaviors, officers should use their training and tactics to maintain the safety of the public, the officer, and the individual. Officers should recognize that these individuals are often in need of immediate medical treatment. Officers should coordinate a rally point with fire resources and whenever possible, officers should wait for fire resources to arrive prior to taking action. Avoid staging fire resources since any delay in medical treatment could have more serious implications for the individual being detained. OFFICER ROLE When an officer encounters a subject exhibiting these signs and behaviors it is important to obtain medical assistance for the individual as soon as possible. An officer should request EMS/Fire and provide dispatch with the objective signs and behaviors observed. If the person does not pose an imminent threat to anyone's safety, contain the subject, and maintain a safe distance. Remove others who might be harmed by the subject from the immediate area and attempt to gain the person’s cooperation. If the officer determines it is appropriate to take the person into custody pursuant to Welfare and Institutions Code Section 5150 and/or for criminal conduct, one or more of the following tactics may help in gaining the person’s cooperation: • Attempt to talk to the person in a conversational and non-confrontational manner while projecting calmness and confidence. The statements should include reassurance that the officer is trying to help. If possible, determine if the person can answer simple questions, which will give the officers an idea of the person's level of coherence. • Remember that the person’s mind may be racing, or they may be delusional and/or suffering from hallucinations. Statements and questions may need to be repeated several times as the person may be fearful and extremely confused based on their psychological state. If the subject is contained and does not appear to pose an immediate threat, there is no rush. It may take some time for the subject to calm down. • Attempt to have the individual sit down, which may have a calming effect. 43 – Persons Exhibiting Erratic Behavior 86 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Refrain from maintaining constant eye contact, as this may be interpreted by the person as threatening. • If a family member or another person who has a rapport with the individual can safely participate, enlist their assistance in attempting to gain the individual’s cooperation. People experiencing these signs and behaviors are often prone to overexertion. Efforts should be made to minimize the intensity and duration of any physical struggle. If circumstances allow, officers should consider the use of hands-on techniques by multiple officers in a coordinated manner to restrain the subject. Officers should request that EMS/Fire respond directly to the scene when reasonably safe to do so rather than staging at a different location. Having EMS/Fire on scene allows officers to develop a coordinated plan to detain and quickly provide medical aid to the person. In the event fire resources are still enroute, monitor the person’s breathing and position the person to maximize their ability to breathe (e.g. avoid lying the person on their stomach or applying excessive downward pressure on the upper torso). Remember, the officer’s role in these encounters is to gain control of the subject in accordance with the law and agency policies. Officers are not medical professionals and should not attempt to influence the decisions of EMS/Fire personnel in any way. Officers may relay their objective observations to EMS/Fire personnel but should not request a specific course of treatment. DOCUMENTATION In adherence with 24402 H&S, “A peace officer shall not use the term excited delirium to describe an individual in an incident report completed by a peace officer. A peace officer may describe the characteristics of an individual’s conduct, but shall not generally describe the individual’s demeanor, conduct, or physical and mental condition at issue as excited delirium." The law also prohibits the use of other terms to describe an individual’s behavior including, but not limited to, “Excited delirium syndrome, excited delirium, hyperactive delirium, agitated delirium, and exhaustive mania.” When documenting an incident involving an individual exhibiting these signs and behaviors, officers should describe their observations, the individual’s behavior, and the individual’s response to officers and members of the public during and after the incident. Officers may gather and document information that may be useful to the investigation regarding medical and mental health history, prescription medication use, and excessive or illicit drug use. Officers should not attempt to make any medical diagnosis. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 87 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 45 – Crime Lab Field Unit Requests REVISED January 2003 CRIME LAB FIELD UNIT REQUESTS INTRODUCTION Police Officers have a responsibility to crime victims and to the Department to request a Crime Lab Field Unit when appropriate. A proper request leads to a proper response, which in turn will insure that all relevant evidence is collected and increase the probability of a quick solution to the crime. Under normal staffing conditions, there will be at least one Crime Lab Field Unit in the field during Watch II (0730 - 1600) and Watch III (1600 - 0030) every day. Each routine crime scene takes approximately one hour or more to process. Due to the caseload, the Crime Lab Field Unit will respond only to crime scenes where there is possible evidence that can lead to prosecution or aid in an investigation. GUIDELINES FOR LAB TECHNICIAN REQUEST • Felony crimes • All window entries • All cases where ransacking has taken place • All cases where the suspect has handled articles suitable for obtaining latent prints • All cases where pry marks, footprints or tire marks are present • All burglaries, robberies – other Part 1 crimes with suspects in custody • Malicious mischief of a high grade nature - $5,000 felony • Cars where photographs are required, such as car jackings, drive-by shootings and felonies where a vehicle was used in the commission of a crime When a Lab Technician should NOT be requested: • For public relations only • Where entry is questionable (e.g., door unlocked, no ransacking, unknown loss) • Where the articles or surfaces handled by the suspect are unsuitable for obtaining latent prints (e.g., concrete, rough, dirty, scaly wood, cloth or uneven surfaces, except where photographs can be used) • Where the article or surfaces handled by the suspect(s) have also been handled by other persons (e.g., door handles, drawer handles, counter tops, etc.). INCIDENT REPORTS 45 – Crime Lab Field Units 88 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents All Incident Reports contain a check off box indicating whether a lab unit has been requested or has responded to the crime scene. When the box is checked on the Incident Report, the detail assigned to the case is informed that the officer taking the report requested a Crime Lab Field Unit. Checking this box is not a request for a lab unit to respond. The filing officer, after checking the box on the face sheet of the report, must notify Communications that a Crime Lab Field Unit is needed, otherwise, no lab unit will respond. NOTIFICATION PROCEDURE In all instances, the investigating officer will fill out PD form 3000.002 (A) (Rev 04/99), “Request for Services”, when those services are needed. Forward or deliver the completed form to the Crime Lab. Officers will also notify the Communications Center to place the request on the computer lab request list. The only exception to this is when the investigating officer knows that the Crime Lab Field Unit has already responded to the scene. Lab units are available for dispatch between 0730 and 0030 hours. After that time, if the call meets the criteria for a call out stated in Section 8.3.1 of the Long Beach Police Department Manual, refer to the Lab on-call duty roster through Communications. Under no circumstances advise the victim that a Crime Lab Field Unit will be right out or respond by a certain time. Crime Lab Field Units are dispatched by a department approved priority criteria and it is not possible to give a victim an exact time of arrival. PRIORITY LAB REQUESTS All priority lab requests require a Watch Commander or laboratory supervisor approval. Examples of priority lab requests include: • Major crime scenes such as homicides, officer involved shootings, traffic fatalities, CPD, etc. • Where photographs are needed prior to removal of victim, suspects or evidence • When evidence or scene cannot be preserved or protected by reasonable means • When there is a significant loss (Minimum of $10,000) Priority calls need an explanation so that the Crime Lab Field Unit can evaluate if any special equipment may be needed at the crime scene (especially when the lab unit must respond to a remote area). Priority requests should not be made for vehicle processing. A suspect in custody, in itself, does not justify a priority lab. It is justified only if the crime scene cannot be preserved. Watch Commander approval is required prior to Communications notifying laboratory staff for all requests: • After normal business hours (0030 to 0730) which require overtime and/or a callout • When more than one Crime Lab Field Unit is needed at a crime scene POLICE OFFICER ASSISTANCE 45 – Crime Lab Field Units 89 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Many police officers and most K-9 officers have been trained to print vehicles and take photographs of domestic violence crime scenes. They may be requested through Communications to assist the filing officers on all watches. REQUESTS FOR PROCESSING VEHICLES If a vehicle is impounded for a felony, chalk the window with "hold for prints" and the invoice number. Note on the Impound Report Form that the vehicle is to be held for prints. It is the responsibility of the investigating detail to file a "Request for Services" PD form 3000.002 (A) (Rev 04/99) to assure that the vehicle is processed. If the vehicle is not drivable, the Crime Lab Field Unit will process the vehicle at the location. The officer should call the Communications Center and request to have the call put on the computer lab list and/or by completing a "Request for Services" form, PD 3000.002(A) (Rev 04/99) and forwarding the form to the crime laboratory. If a vehicle has been burglarized and meets the processing criteria, the victim should be instructed to call the Crime Lab at (562) 570-7205 and make an appointment. A Crime Lab Field Unit is usually available between the hours of 0730 and 1530 Monday through Friday for an appointment to process the vehicle at the laboratory. Vehicles involved in automobile burglaries will be processed only under the following circumstances: • When there is a suspect in custody • When the victim or witness obtained a license number or positive suspect identification • When property taken is positively identifiable by serial numbers or other identifiers • If the tow sheet is marked "Hold for Prints" (for 10851 CVC recovery only) is completed • At the request of an investigator or supervisor In cases where officers contact the victim in the field, PD form 3000.002(A) (Rev 04/99) will be filled out even if the victim indicates a willingness to drive to the laboratory. If the report is taken after regular business hours, the victim should be advised to protect the vehicle from outside contamination (foggy and inclement weather) and to call (562) 570- 7205 for an appointment. “REQUEST FOR SERVICES” FORM PD 3000.002 (A) (Rev 04/99) The Request for Service form was designed to provide essential service request information to the Crime Lab Field Unit. In cases where the articles, which might contain prints and must be used by the victim in the course of his/her business, such as a cash register, this information should be listed under “Special Instructions” on the written form so that the Crime Lab Field Unit can prioritize the field call. Be sure to include site information regarding back entry, upstairs, security doors, or other details that will assist the Crime Lab Field Unit properly handle the call. INFORMATION TO BE GIVEN TO VICTIM 45 – Crime Lab Field Units 90 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents If the Crime Lab Field Unit is not requested, inform the victim that the technician will not be requested and explain why. If a lab technician is requested; • Advise the victim to have someone at the scene to provide access for the Crime Lab Field Unit • Do not tell the victim that a Crime Lab Field Unit will arrive at a certain time unless a definite appointment has been made • Do not tell the victim the Crime Lab will call them. If the victim has questions or concerns relating to the field call, they can call the crime laboratory at (562) 570-7205 • Do not advise the victim to call the laboratory for an update on their case If, in the officer’s opinion, there are possible latent traces, he/she should advise the victim that there might be prints, so the victim will not smudge or destroy them. The officer should not tell the victim that there are fingerprints. Do not write in a report there is no chance of locating latent prints. CONCLUSION Before leaving the crime scene make sure the victim will protect and preserve the crime scene after investigating officers leave the scene. Officers should assist the victim in preserving articles to be processed for prints (smooth, hard, non-porous objects). Officers should not bring any evidence to the station to be fingerprinted unless it is an article that was left at the scene by the suspect and does not belong to the victim. There are possible exceptions, but generally we cannot immediately return articles to the victim and evidence can usually be better preserved if left at the scene. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 91 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence REVISED October 2008 COLLECTION AND PACKAGING OF PHYSICAL EVIDENCE INTRODUCTION Physical evidence recovered at a crime scene may lead to the identification of the person(s) involved in the incident. The evidence may provide useful information during a criminal investigation and can also indicate how, when, and where a crime was committed. Officers need to secure, preserve, protect, and collect the evidence. Once the evidence is carefully collected it must be properly packaged, documented and stored in Department approved locations. All evidence that cannot fit into the Departmental evidence lockers must be taken to the Evidence Control Section. If this occurs after hours, request Communications Division to notify the on-call Evidence Control Sergeant. CRIME SCENE EVIDENCE The first responding officer on scene must secure, preserve, and protect physical evidence as soon as they are able. Once the first task of identifying and protecting evidence is complete, it is equally important that the evidence be recovered, packaged, and stored correctly. Evidence could be accidentally overlooked or destroyed by the first officers to arrive at a crime scene. The following items are examples of evidence that officers should look for and be cautious of at a crime scene: • Latent prints • Tools and tool marks • Weapons, casings, bullets and fragments • Broken head lamp, glass, and paint chips • Narcotics • Biological fluids, including blood, semen and saliva • Bite marks • Trace evidence, including hairs and fibers • Duct tape • Torn clothing and broken buttons • Tire tracks and shoe impressions 48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence 92 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents If there is a suspect present at the crime scene, the suspect should be immediately removed from the crime scene. Bringing a suspect back to a crime scene, may contaminate evidence and diminish or eliminate its value. It is the responsibility of the officer in charge of a crime scene to secure the crime scene, safeguard potential evidence, prevent unnecessary handling of evidence, and to exclude all persons (sworn and non-sworn) from the area who are not directly involved with the investigation. DOCUMENTATION In order to be admissible in court, evidence must: • Be relevant • Be properly identified • Be properly collected • Be properly documented • Be properly preserved • Have a documented and continuous chain of custody • Not be collected in violation of a person’s constitutional rights The Report of Property must contain: • What type of evidence it is (including physical description of each item) • Who found the item • Where was it found (Be specific. Do not just state recovered from suspect) • Biohazard or other appropriate safety warning When evidence is collected it must be carefully handled as to not contaminate or destroy any trace, biological, or latent print evidence. Officers should not mark on the actual evidence that is to be examined for latent prints, or DNA, to preserve evidence that cannot be readily seen. The officer should place the evidence item(s) into an appropriate sized envelope, bag, or box, then label it with the case DR number and the item number and properly seal it with evidence tape. All evidence packages (paper bags, boxes, and envelopes) must be sealed with evidence tape. Openings must be sealed from end to end to prevent loss or tampering. When initialing the evidence tape, the officer’s initials and badge number should be written on the evidence tape that overlaps onto the actual packaging. The officer will be able to identify the evidence by the packaging that they have initialed. The Evidence Control Section and the Crime Laboratory cannot accept improperly sealed evidence. In court, the officer who found the item of evidence will testify to the identity of the evidence and the chain of custody. This testimony is needed to confirm that the item introduced is actually the item that was recovered. The officer will need to be able to describe where the evidence was found and what condition it was in. Complete and accurate reports will result in complete and accurate testimony. Anyone who handles the 48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence 93 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents evidence will become part of the chain of custody and documented proof of every transfer is required. Crime Laboratory personnel will not automatically examine evidence. A request form must be completed and sent to the Crime Laboratory to initiate any examination process. Any special instructions should be clearly indicated on the request form. Requests for Crime Lab Field Unit response should be made through the Communication Center. LATENT PRINTS When an officer at a crime scene observes objects having a solid, non-absorbent surface, such as glass, plastic, porcelain, metal or semi-absorbent surfaces, such as paper or cardboard, the officer should attempt to ascertain whether or not these items were touched by the suspect(s). Employees should wear protective gloves when searching, handling, and collecting evidence that potentially contain latent prints. When items containing latent prints must be picked up, touch as little as possible. Try to handle the areas least likely to contain identifiable latent prints, such as rough surfaces, edges, and cloth/fabric surfaces. Even when using latex gloves, fingerprints may accidentally be placed on the evidence. Gloves or other articles used to pick up evidence will frequently wipe off or smear any latent prints originally present. Careful and limited handling is required during the collection and packaging of the evidence. Even when latent prints are not visible, officers should collect the potential evidence or request a Forensic Specialist as directed by Department policy. Mark the box “Prints” on the Report of Property so all involved in the chain of custody minimize the unnecessary handling of the evidence. Marking this box does not mean the evidence will be processed by the Crime Laboratory. The Detective handling the case must submit a written request to the Crime Laboratory for processing. NARCOTICS AND DANGEROUS DRUGS When recovering large amounts of cash or narcotics, attempt to contact a member of the Narcotics Section. If no one is available, process all narcotics and dangerous drug evidence as directed by policy and this Training Bulletin. If drugs are loose, place them in a sealed coin envelope, Ziploc bag, or other small sealed envelope to prevent them from spilling out into the evidence envelope. Drugs that are loose in a narcotics evidence envelope are at risk for being lost. Multiple controlled substance evidence items from a single case can be placed in a single narcotics evidence envelope or package (size permitting). For example, a Ziploc bag of methamphetamine does not need to be packaged separately from a Ziploc bag of cocaine. Suspected narcotic evidence in liquid form must be packaged in a leak-proof container, such as a vial. Make sure the vial is capped tightly. 48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence 94 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The court requires that a photograph of the narcotics be brought to court instead of the actual evidence. Officers should complete the top portion of a narcotic photograph identification card and place it in the narcotic envelope or packaging. When the laboratory takes the photo, the identification card is included in the photo so the case can be easily identified. Only one photo card is necessary per evidence package. Do not fill out a photo card for each piece of evidence. Separate drug paraphernalia (especially glass pipes/glass tubes) from other suspected controlled substance evidence. Glass pipes easily break and have jagged edges; they should be placed in a heat-sealed plastic bag or smaller envelope before being placed in an evidence envelope. Property reports need to be completed to specifically indicate the evidence description and location where it was recovered. For example, Item – 1: One blue Ziploc bag containing plant material recovered from suspect’s shirt pocket. Clear descriptions allow Criminalists to distinguish multiple items in case. The Detective handling the case is required to submit a request to the Crime Lab for controlled substance analysis. Narcotic evidence is not automatically analyzed. NEEDLES AND SYRINGES Needles/syringes must be packaged in a plastic syringe tube so that those handling the evidence will not be injured. Needles and syringes are particularly dangerous due to the potential of biohazard contamination. Clearly mark the evidence package as containing “sharp/bio-hazard”. OSHA requires that a biohazard sticker be placed on the outside of the packaging. Indicate that the evidence is sharp and biohazard on the Report of Property form. Needles and syringes will not be accepted unless properly packaged. Exposure to Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV), Hepatitis, and other fatal diseases can occur from an accidental puncture to the skin. BIOHAZARD EVIDENCE FROM BODY CAVITIES Evidence found in any body cavity (including the mouth) must be carefully packaged and sealed to prevent biohazard exposure. Other forms of biohazard evidence include evidence recovered from a trashcan, toilet, underwear, or evidence with blood or other biological fluids on it. The package must be clearly marked BIOHAZARD using either a biohazard sticker or writing in obvious large letters on the package. Specifically write on the package or the Report of Property which body cavity the evidence was found. All biohazard evidence removed from body cavities must be packaged separately so it does not contaminate other evidence. DO NOT place gloves or paper towels used in evidence collection inside evidence packaging. BLOOD ALCOHOL AND URINE SAMPLES Blood/urine specimen collection kits are available at all Intoxilyzer stations (Booking and Youth Services) and the Crime Lab. Always collect specimens with LBPD kits. The LBPD lab may not analyze other collection containers. 48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence 95 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents When the concentration of drugs in the blood need not be determined, urine samples are sufficient evidence to prove elements of the crime 11550HS. Make sure urine bottles are screwed on tightly to prevent leaking. Do not package urine bottles or blood tubes in plastic. Do not seal the caps with tape. Seal the evidence in the evidence envelope provided. Do not cover any written information with tape. Place biohazard stickers on the lower front right-hand side of the blood/urine envelopes, where they do not cover any written information. Blood samples are needed to determine the level of intoxication from drugs. Always use LBPD blood kits. Try to obtain blood samples for use-of-force, sexual assault cases, DUI, or anytime drug intoxication of a suspect/victim is an issue. The law allows a peace office to obtain a blood sample for DUI cases when drug intoxication is suspected (23612 CVC). Always have the blood collection technician fill the blood tube completely. Toxicology analysis, and portions provided to the defense, will deplete the sample quickly. Cases will be dismissed if there is not enough blood to analyze. Always follow the directions for collection printed on the blood/urine kits to ensure a valid analytical result. Failure to do so may result in a case dismissal. DS 267A forms are no longer required by the DMV for DUI arrests. The crime lab will use the information listed on the blood/urine envelope to supply the DMV with an analytical report. Make sure the envelopes are filled out completely. ALCOHOL /BEVERAGE EVIDENCE Beverages in unopened bottles or cans should be properly packaged and placed into the evidence locker. Beverages in open bottles or cans that require a sample of the contents for analysis may be placed in a tightly capped plastic container. These containers are available in the LBPD booking area and at the each Division where evidence packaging is stored. The original bottle or can should be packaged and placed into evidence after the sample is obtained. Indicate in the report what type of container it was originally found in and the approximate total amount of liquid. Place the properly packaged plastic container and the original bottle in the evidence locker. Unopened alcoholic beverages that have no bearing on a case can be placed into the person’s property. Open containers not having any bearing on the case may be discarded. BIOLOGICAL FLUID/DNA EVIDENCE Biological fluid/DNA evidence is evidence that has blood or any body fluids on it (i.e. semen, saliva, sweat). DNA evidence can be collected from virtually anywhere. Biological evidence must be collected carefully due to the potential of hazardous pathogens and contamination issues. DNA evidence can be contaminated when DNA from one source gets mixed with DNA from another source. This can happen if someone sneezes or coughs on the DNA evidence or mishandles the evidence. A Forensic Specialist or Criminalist will assist with the collection of biological evidence at a crime scene such as homicides, rapes or other sensitive investigations. Officers will also be involved with the collection and packaging of evidence containing biological fluid. 48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence 96 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents All employees shall wear appropriate protection to prevent exposure to blood borne pathogens and protect evidence from contamination. Protective items such as nitrile gloves and surgical masks are appropriate. Even with this protection always clean up and wash your hands after handling any biological material. Nitrile gloves must be changed between handling of any suspect evidence and victim evidence. Employees investigating crimes with biological evidence should use the following guidelines: • Items of evidence in which the fluid is dry should be individually packaged in paper packaging (envelopes, boxes, bags) and identified for freezer storage by affixing tape labeled Freezer on each item • Items that are wet need to be marked with the officer’s initials for identification purposes. Each item will be individually placed in an open paper bag, labeled and the freezer tape affixed to the bag. Officers shall write AIR DRY on the outside of the bag • Always keep the victim and the suspect items separate to prevent cross- contamination. Each item; shirt, pants, shoe must be packaged separately • The officer shall indicate on the Report of Property which items were packaged and identified with freezer tape − Once dry, the item must be properly packaged, sealed and frozen without delay to prevent deterioration − The freezer tape shall also be affixed to sexual assault kits. Evidence that is saturated and dripping wet must never be placed in the Division storage lockers. If it is during normal business hours, bring the evidence directly to the Evidence Control Section. If the Evidence Control Section is closed contact the Evidence Control Sergeant through the Communication Center. CLOTHING The unnecessary handling of clothing should be avoided to preserve any particles of evidence that might be clinging to them, such as, paint chips, metal chips, hair or fibers, or any dried biological fluids. Carefully fold clothing and place it in a paper envelope, bag or box appropriately marked. It is important that each item that contains evidence be packaged separately in order to prevent cross contamination. The victim’s, and suspect’s, clothing must never be packaged together. Cross contamination of victim and suspect clothing, shoes or other items will diminish or eliminate the value of evidence that proves contact. HAIR AND FIBERS Place hair or fibers into a folded paper bindle or small envelope. Place the bindle into an envelope and seal before placing in the evidence locker. FLAMMABLE LIQUID 48 – Collection & Packaging of Physical Evidence 97 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Experience and good common sense should be exercised when handling explosive, incendiary, flammable, caustic items or hazardous material. The Watch Commander or field supervisor should always be contacted for appropriate disposition of these materials. Never place gasoline or other flammable liquid in the evidence locker or evidence room. Motorized equipment, such as lawn mowers, must have the gasoline removed for Evidence Control to accept it. The Evidence Control Section cannot accept car batteries, helium tanks, propane tanks, or fireworks. After normal business hours and on weekends, the officer shall contact communications to call the on-call Evidence Control Sergeant. FLAMMABLE EVIDENCE MATERIALS Long Beach Fire/Police arson investigators are equipped to obtain and package samples of flammable materials for evidentiary purposes. A sample of flammable material will be collected by the arson investigator and placed into a sterile airtight collection container for safe transport to the LASD Crime Lab. TRAFFIC CASES When a felony hit and run vehicle is located, impound it and request a Crime Lab Field Unit to respond to process the vehicle. The suspect vehicle should be towed on a flat bed. While at the scene collect any item(s) or debris, which may have come from the suspect vehicle, for later comparison. Collect and place into evidence items, which may have come from the suspect vehicle, such as glass and/or paint chips, or any item that may have fallen out of the suspect vehicle. Note the damage to the cars involved, such as paint transfer and the location of damage. CONCLUSION Before evidence is admissible in court, it must be relevant, properly collected and packaged, and the chain of custody must be clearly documented. The proper handling and documentation of evidence is critical for a criminal investigation. This will allow the successful prosecution of the perpetrator and to exonerate the innocent. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 98 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 50 – Wellness Program REVISED March 2021 WELLNESS PROGRAM INTRODUCTION The Wellness Program was implemented to encourage officers to monitor their individual health and achieve their highest level of strength, flexibility, and cardiovascular endurance. OVERVIEW The events in the Wellness Program are voluntary, and participants are monetarily compensated according to their fitness level achievements in each category of the evaluation. There are two phases in the evaluation and the monetary reward structure allows officers to participate in both phases of the evaluation, or at least partially, in the evaluation. All participants must complete Phase 1 before they perform the events in Phase 2. Phase I (Wellness) - The officer must complete an annual physical examination by their physician a minimum of every two years to participate in the program. Each officer must submit the Wellness-Fitness Medical Report completed by their physician indicating the following medical history: • Resting heart rate • Blood pressure reading • Total Cholesterol level If an officer’s total cholesterol is 200 or lower, the Wellness-Fitness Medical Report may be used for the next year’s evaluation, however, it will not have the 50 point value. To get the full point value, a medical report must be done for the current year of participation. Phase II (Physical Fitness) - The officer performs the following events to test their fitness level: • Body composition (given by the Department using a bioelectric impedance analysis machine) • Sit and reach – to test flexibility • Sit ups – to test abdominal strength • Pushups – to test overall body strength and endurance • 1 ½ mile run/walk – to test cardiovascular endurance 50 – Wellness/Fitness Program 99 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Each event is worth a certain amount of points based on the level of achievement; the highest level being Super Fit. The maximum score for both phases is 790 points. If the Super Fit level is reached, the officer will receive an additional 100 points for a total of 890 points. The monetary value for points will be based on the budgeted dollar amount and the number of participants and points earned. CONCLUSION Cardiovascular endurance, muscle strength/endurance, body composition/maintenance, and flexibility are several major benefits of participating in regular physical exercise. People who exercise regularly tend to lead healthier, happier lives. It is a worthy investment for the officer, their family, and the Department. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 100 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers REVISED April 2002 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS INTRODUCTION Vehicle theft is a tremendous crime problem. Each year vehicles worth more than $31,000,000 are stolen in the City of Long Beach alone. On an average day in Long Beach 15 vehicles are stolen and 10 are recovered. The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to assist officers in the investigation of vehicle thefts by explaining the various places a vehicle's identification number (VIN) is located and what the VIN should look like. GENERAL The first step officers take when they come across a suspected stolen vehicle is to check the license plate number by running a 10-29 on the plate. In many cases, this is sufficient, however, suspects often change license plates or alter the license plates on a stolen vehicle. If the return received doesn't match exactly, the vehicle deserves a closer look. A closer look may reveal a VIN switch or a stolen license plate. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS A positive way for the officer to obtain the most complete check on a vehicle suspected as stolen is to obtain the VIN and check this number along with the license number when running a 10-29. If the vehicle is stolen and has different plates, records will still indicate it stolen by use of the VIN. LOCATION OF VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS All US sold passenger vehicles since 1968 have the VIN placed on the driver's side window dash area. Some exceptions are the 1968 Ford passenger vehicles in which VIN's are located on the passenger side. As of 1981, all US sold light trucks have the VIN placed in the driver's side window dash area. All US sold passenger vehicles prior to 1968, light trucks prior to 1981, gray market vehicles (vehicles manufactured outside the US, not conforming to our standards, then imported), special construction vehicles etc., were not standardized regarding the location and the configuration of the VIN. In addition, there are several US manufactured and foreign imports that have the VIN plate affixed to the left side windshield post and top of the steering column, both visible through the windshield. Since 1970 the Department of Transportation has required that a sticker be attached to vehicles manufactured or imported into the United States listing the date of manufacture and certifying the vehicle complies with Federal standards. This sticker is the "self- destruct" type and any attempt to remove it will result in an obvious attempt at altercation. 56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers 101 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents This sticker, commonly called the "Federal Safety Standard Label," lists the VIN of the car. Comparison should always be made between the VIN and the Federal Safety Standard Label. Porsche The Porsche VIN may be located in the following places: • VIN plate is located on left door pillar post (through 1965) • VIN plate is located in luggage compartment near the gas tank or hood opening • VIN is die stamped into the floor of luggage compartment under the mat • Engine number is located below the generator Volkswagen Effective with the 1970 model year, all VWs have 10-digit serial numbers in compliance with Federal regulations. The first two digits of the serial number signify the model, the third digit is the last numeral of the model year, and the fourth to tenth digits indicate the consecutive production number within each type. The entire number is the VIN. On 1965 through 1969 models, a nine-digit chassis number was used. These numbers start with the first two digits of the model number, the third digit designated the model year. The remaining digits comprise the production numbers. All models prior to 1965 feature a seven-digit chassis number. • A sample VW VIN (1965-1969) Model Production Number 117043266 Year (’67) Included in this bulletin is a diagram and chart indicating the various locations of VINs on vehicles. When in doubt of a vehicle's identity, complete a field interview card (FI) on all occupants and contact the Auto Theft Detail. VIN SWITCH Method of Operation (salvage): A thief goes to a wrecking yard and purchases a totally destroyed vehicle. When he makes the purchase, he receives the following items from the wrecker: • A bill-of-sale for the wrecked vehicle showing the VIN • The actual vehicle containing the VIN plate and body frame containing the stamped VIN With these items, the thief is now ready to steal a like make and model vehicle and transfer the identity of the salvage vehicle to the stolen vehicle. Now he is in a position to sell it to some unsuspecting purchaser. 56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers 102 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents When conducting an investigation on a suspected stolen vehicle, check the VIN to determine if it has been switched, changed or altered. Compare VIN’s to determine if there is a difference and run a 10-29. If there is no make on the VIN, and the vehicle is still suspected to be stolen, complete an FI card on the occupants, obtain the engine number and other numbers and file a memo to the Auto Theft Detail. MOTORCYCLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS Recovering stolen motorcycles is more difficult than recovering automobiles. To be successful in recovering stolen motorcycles, officers must develop personal knowledge of motorcycles, motorcycle names and how to distinguish one from the other. Additionally, officers must have a working knowledge of serial numbers or other identification numbers on motorcycles. Detecting Stolen Motorcycles • Check for a valid registration • Check and see if license number, frame number or any other identifiable number matches the registration • Look for any evidence of altered numbers California Assigned VIN For any motorcycle or any other vehicle where the identification number has been destroyed or where a machine or motorcycle is rebuilt, a number is assigned by the Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV). The number will start with the letters CA and should be closely checked for proper ownership. General Information All motorcycles, except Harley-Davidson, are registered in Sacramento by the frame number. Harley Davidson's, prior to 1978, are registered by the engine number. However, inadvertently some dealers list the engine number on popular motorcycles, such as Honda, on their report of sale to DMV. This can result in the motorcycle being registered in Sacramento by this engine number. If in doubt, check both the frame and engine numbers and run them both through Auto-Stats. VIN Locations The majority of VINs will be found on the headstock (point where the front wheel pivots). Some manufacturers place the VIN on the lower frame. Older model Harley-Davidsons place the vin on the side of the engine. For further see attached chart. REPORTS When taking an impound or stored vehicle report, do not rely entirely upon the registration in the vehicle for the VIN. Check the VIN on the vehicle and compare it with the 56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers 103 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents registration. Be sure of the number before listing it on a report. Double-check this number and the license plate number. CALIFORNIA REGISTRATION Forged certificates of ownership (pink slips) and certificates of registration (white slips) have presented a serious problem in California. The descriptive data on genuine certificates usually is printed by a special IBM machine. The characters on this IBM machine are larger (type to the inch) than the characters on most typewriters in general use. The appearance of printing done by the IBM machine differs from typing in another respect: there is no visible depression on the paper. This makes the characters themselves peculiar to the IBM machine that cannot be duplicated by a typewriter. In some instances, however, valid registrations may be typewritten. Certificates for new cars and for out-of-state cars registered in California for the first time are usually typewritten. Duplicate certificates are also prepared on a typewriter. Officers should be particularly careful in checking typewritten registrations prepared on the IBM machine. A forgery may be detected by checking the seal in the upper left hand corner of the registration. The seal on a valid registration is clearly defined. On many forged registrations the seal is very dark and seems to be carelessly printed. The new rainbow colored certificates of ownership will show 4 bears when held up to the light. This indicates a good certificate. Conclusion It is imperative that a cooperative effort be implemented by all officers to reduce the current increase in vehicle thefts. Knowing what to look for when a VIN is altered and knowing where VINs are located is necessary if officers are to recover stolen vehicles and hopefully reduce the number of thefts. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau Appendix follows 56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers 104 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents VIN Locations AMC Rambler 1961-67 4 Avanti 1966-67 5 1963-64 2 Buick 1962-67 5 1961 5,7,11 Riviera 1964 7 1963 14 21 panel near hood lock 17 frame near front 15 inner fender panel 13 frame near axle 11 brace cowl to wheelhouse 9 steering column mast 7 firewall under hood 5 door hinge pillar post 22 DASH L/S 3 door lock pillar post 1 side-rail engine comp. 2 frame at front 4 top surface wheelhouse 6 inner side above spring 10 inner fender panel 12 cowl tab under hood 14 firewall under hood 16 glove box brace 18 top rear of transmission tunnel 20 interior brace rear taillight 8 frame between axle & cowl 19 frame cross member 56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers 105 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Cadillac 1965-67 2 1963-64 19 1961-62 17 El Dorado 1967 13 Checker 1965-67 7 Chevrolet 1961-1967 5 Camero 1967 5 Chevelle 1964-67 5 Chevy II 1962-67 5 Vans 1967 5 1962-66 3 Corvair 1965-67 1 1961-64 3 Corvette 1963-67 16 1961-62 9 Greenbrier 1965 3 1964 5 1961-63 3 Chrysler 1961-1967 5 Dodge 1961-67 5 Ford 1963-67 12 1961-62 8 Fairlane 1962-67 15 Falcon 1963-67 15 1961-63 11 Clb W & Bus 1967 18 1963-66 20 Mustang 1963-67 15 T-Bird 1967 12 1961-66 21 Bronco 1966-67 8 Imperial 1961-67 5 Jeep & Willys 1961-67 5,7,14 Lincoln 1966-67 6 1961-65 18 Mercury 1963-67 12 1961-62 8 Meteor 1962-63 15 Comet 1963-67 15 1961-63 11 Cougar 1967 15 1968-present 22 Oldsmobile 1961-67 5 Plymouth 1961-67 5 Pontiac 1961-67 5 Studebaker 1961-66 5 56 – Vehicle Identification Numbers 106 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Motorcycle ID Location The Locations given above are general and may differ somewhat on certain models. They represent VIN locations on most of the motorcycles sold in North America. The frame and engine numbers may or may not be the same and depends solely upon the particular make and model. The frame VIN is usually the number used for titling and registering motorcycles. Make Frame Location Make Frame Location BMW 3 BSA 6,4,10 Benelli 4,5 Bonanza 4 Bridgestone 1 Bultaco 3 Capriola 7 Cimatti 1 CZ 3 Ducati 4 Guazzone 6 Harley Davidson 1,4,5 Hodaka 3,8 Honda 4,6,9 Husqvarna 3 Indian 4 Jawa 4 Kawasaki 4 Laverda 2,4 Maico 3 Marusho 3 MB (Moto Beta) 5 Montessa 4 Moto Guzzi 4 Moto Morini 1 Norton 6 Ossa 4 Parilla 4 Royal Enfield 4 Suzuki 3 Triumph 3,4,10 Velocette 2 Vespa 6 Yamaha 5,6 Yankee 6 107 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 57 – Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR) REVISED January 2018 AUTOMATED LICENSE PLATE RECOGNITION (ALPR) INTRODUCTION A fundamental element of policing is finding vehicles that are wanted because the vehicle is stolen, wanted in connection with a crime, or driven by a subject who is wanted or suspected of committing a crime or otherwise of interest to law enforcement. The Long Beach Police Department utilizes Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR) technology to impact criminal activity directly. ALPR systems play an increasingly important role in public safety by enhancing productivity, effectiveness, and officer safety. ALPR systems can recognize, read and compare, motor vehicle license plates against various “hot lists” much more efficiently than officers manually scanning and making comparisons while on routine patrol. THE ALPR SYSTEM ALPR systems utilize specialized cameras designed to capture images of license plates, either from static positions or mobile patrol vehicles. Factors which pose difficulty for license plate imaging cameras include the speed of the vehicles being recorded, the distance and angle of the vehicles from the camera, varying ambient lighting conditions, headlight glare, and harsh environmental conditions. In order to address these difficulties, the ALPR system uses infrared cameras operating in addition to visible light cameras. The mobile ALPR systems are equipped with global positioning system (GPS) receivers, allowing the mobile units to record the date, time, and location of the license plate images captured. Data such as date and time stamps and GPS coordinates can be reviewed in relation to investigations leading to critical investigative breaks, such as placing a suspect at a scene, witness identification, pattern recognition, or the tracking of previously identified suspects. Images of vehicles and license plates are the primary form of information collected by the ALPR system. Optical character recognition (OCR) is performed on these images, and the alphanumeric characters on each license plate are rendered into an electronically readable format. The information that is gathered from the ALPR system is not considered personally identifiable information; the system collects only the public display of a license plate which exists in part to assist law enforcement to more readily verify the vehicle complies with the law. Databases may contain plates of stolen vehicles, wanted felony vehicles, vehicles with lost or stolen plates, vehicles wanted for a crime, missing persons, Amber Alerts or any 57 – Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR) 108 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents other lawful reason. Officers are also able to enter wanted plates into the ALPR system manually. The ALPR system may assist in the investigation of any crime with an identified license plate. When the ALPR system scans and a vehicle is a match to a wanted vehicle, the system will alert the officer with both an audible and visual alert. Images of the license plate and vehicle, as well as a brief explanation of what the vehicle is wanted for, will be displayed. This process is entirely automatic and takes less than a second. ALPR ACCURACY Many variables affect OCR accuracy. Poor image resolution, and thus poor character recognition, can be the result of several factors. License plates can be too far away for the capabilities of the ALPR camera to capture, and motion blur can also occur. Poor lighting and low contrast due to overexposure, reflection, adverse weather conditions, or shadows can also result in poor image quality. Occasionally, an object might obscure all or a portion of the license plate and interfere with accurate OCR. Often the object is a tow bar, dirt on the license plate, or a loaded bike rack. Sometimes the letter D is mistaken for a Q or an O. Other times, the characters on the license plate are sometimes cut off from the frame of the image; when this occurs, the OCR software may incorrectly read an E as an F or a Z as a 7. Some colors, especially reddish tones, may be difficult for ALPR system OCR software to read. Learning the type of mistakes ALPR system’s OCR software might make, can help investigators run queries on potentially misread license plate numbers. For these reasons, officers should visually verify that the license plate on the vehicle of interest matches identically with the image captured by the ALPR system, including both the alphanumeric characters of the license plate and the state of issue. CAPABILITIES Officers should note that the ALPR system will not read all license plates. The system only reads plates that it sees, plates must be in the field of view of the camera and the infrared color spectrum. Specifically, to read the plate, it must have reflective characteristics. The ALPR system may not read older blue California plates, extremely dirty, mutilated, or obscured plates. The ALPR system can read out of state and motorcycle, plates, but with reduced accuracy. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Administration Bureau 109 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 58 – Aircraft Accidents REVISED January 2002 AIRCRAFT ACCIDENTS INTRODUCTION As the home of a major municipal airport, the City of Long Beach must be prepared for the possibility of private, commercial, or military aircraft accidents. Police responsibilities at the scene of an aircraft accident include prevention of further fatalities and/or injuries, proper notification of concerned agencies, traffic and crowd control, area security, and incident reporting. Aircraft include fixed wing, helicopters and airships. Forced Landings A forced landing is the landing of an aircraft at a location, other than a designated landing place, which does not result in death, injury or property damage. While a forced landing is not classified as an aircraft accident, it may require police action. Responding officers should initiate traffic and crowd control procedures. When advised of the forced landing of a civilian aircraft in our city, the Watch Commander shall notify the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Duty Officer at (310) 725-3300. The Duty Officer will need the following information: • The location of the landing • The type and serial number of the aircraft • The pilot’s certificate number • The aircraft’s home base of operation They will dispatch an inspector to the scene immediately. Permission must be obtained from the FAA before an aircraft may take off after a forced landing. Officers should remain with the aircraft until the FAA inspector arrives, takes charge, and there is no further need for crowd or traffic control. Aircraft Accident: Operations at Crash Scene As with any disaster scene, the first priority is officer safety and making a determination of the extent of casualties. The first officers arriving at the scene of an aircraft accident should assess the scene, assist survivors and determine the safest approach for assisting emergency personnel. 58 – Aircraft Accidents 110 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents A Command Post should be established and officers should report initial observations, secure the scene and request an air unit for reconnaissance. The Communications Center will need the following information if available: • The type of aircraft down • Size of the impact area • Type of damage present • Number of dead or injured • Presence of fires • Rescue situation • Any other pertinent facts concerning the crash The Watch Commander shall notify the FAA Duty Officer, inform them of the downed aircraft, and request them to notify the National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB). In the case of any fatalities, the Watch Commander will additionally notify the Los Angeles County Coroner’s Office at (323) 343-0711. Site Security Initially, the site must be treated as a crime scene and contained as quickly as possible in order to preserve any possible evidence. Most likely, hundreds of pedestrians and vehicles will converge at the scene. An ingress/egress route to the crash site should be established and controlled to facilitate the movement of emergency vehicles and authorized personnel. All persons requesting access to the containment area shall be directed to the Command Post to obtain authorization. The only exceptions to this are police, fire and medical personnel that are providing emergency services, as well as representatives of the FAA, NTSB, and Coroner’s Office. The wreckage within the containment area should be guarded as evidence. Pieces of the wreckage may be widely scattered and must not be moved without authorization from NTSB personnel. Items such as papers and certificates should be secured and identified as to where they were found. The Coroner has the legal responsibility for directing and coordinating the recovery, collection, identification, and processing of the dead and their personal effects. He also coordinates press releases relative to the identity of the dead. The Incident Commander may consider requesting a temporary flight restriction over the crash scene. This request, made through the FAA Duty Officer, has three primary applications: • To ensure adequate levels of safety to persons and property in the air or on the ground from an existing or potentially hazardous situation when the presence of low-flying aircraft would increase or compound the hazard • To provide a safe environment for the operation of disaster relief aircraft • To prevent unsafe congestion of sightseeing aircraft in the area of an incident or event 58 – Aircraft Accidents 111 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents News Media Aircraft disasters are major media events. California Penal Code §409.5 allows accredited media representatives access to certain areas closed to the public, as long as those areas are not deemed a "crime scene." Federal authority supersedes California law and restricts anyone from entering the crash scene, including the media, without consent of the NTSB investigator in charge [Title 49 US Code §1901: 49 CFR 831.10(a)(b)]. Local law enforcement acts as the investigator's agent and assumes responsibility for restricting access until their arrival. The accident must be considered a crime scene even though the crash may not have been the result of an obvious criminal act. The Police Department must restrict media access to the site pending the arrival of the NTSB investigator. It is, however, the NTSB's policy to accommodate the media. Therefore, it is important that a specific media area be designated as soon as possible, to afford news agencies the best possible view of the site without compromising the scene. Military Aircraft Accidents involving military aircraft are under the jurisdiction of the respective military authorities. Police response is primarily to protect the public and preserve the scene intact until the military investigators arrive and assume control. With the exception of fire and rescue personnel, the scene of a military aircraft accident is strictly off-limits to civilians, including the news media. Requests for information or statements should be referred to the proper military personnel. A crashed military aircraft may present hazards not encountered with civilian aircraft. Such hazards may include ejection seats, bombs, munitions, and jet propellants. Officers should avoid approaching these aircraft head-on, where they may be in the path of exploding cannons or rockets. Reports Primary investigation to determine the cause of an aircraft accident falls under Federal jurisdiction. Our reports are aimed at assisting the Federal agencies in their complicated task. Listed below are the various types of reports that may be filed: • Special Accident (Forced Landing) Filed when any aircraft, civilian or military, makes an emergency landing at a location other than a designated landing place, with no damage to any other property or injuries to anyone. Should include pilot's name, certificate number, passenger names, witness statements, aircraft identification number, and aircraft's home base of operations. • Special Accident (Aircraft) 58 – Aircraft Accidents 112 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Filed when any aircraft, civilian or military, crashes within the city limits. If the crash occurs at the Long Beach Airport, this report will be filed only when Airport personnel call this Department to the scene. The report should be as complete as possible as to the identity of the people involved, property, damage, aircraft identification number, type of aircraft, destination and point of departure, and the name of the aircraft owner. Witnesses are extremely important to the success of aircraft accident investigations. Officers should identify witnesses and record statements as to their location during the crash, aircraft direction in flight, fire or explosion prior to the crash, impact angle, falling items from the aircraft, and removal of any items from the scene. When possible, witnesses should remain until the arrival of FAA or NTSB representatives. If a crash does occur at the airport, airport personnel will escort responding officers to the accident scene. Caution must be exercised as it is likely runways and taxiways will be in use in spite of the aircraft accident. • City Property (Damage) Filed when any city property is damaged as the result of an aircraft crash. • Dead Body Filed when civilian personnel are killed in an aircraft accident, or when military personnel on a civilian aircraft or on the ground are killed. No dead body report will be filed on military personnel aboard a military aircraft. When the pilot or occupants of a civilian aircraft are killed, a single dead body report should be filed, listing the pilot first and all others aboard the aircraft as additional victims. Victims on the ground that die as a result of the crash should be listed on separate, individual reports. Information should be as complete as possible as to identification and locations where the victims were found. CONCLUSION Officers assigned to work at the scene of an aircraft accident must have a clear understanding of their responsibilities. Although a scene of mass destruction and casualties may seem overwhelming initially, having first responders trained in the Incident Command System and employing the system effectively will result in a safe and successful operation. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 113 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 59 – Firearms Evidence REVISED May 2006 FIREARMS EVIDENCE INTRODUCTION Firearms evidence is frequently encountered in homicides, assaults and robberies; but may also be found in any other crimes such as burglary, rape, or narcotics. Examination of firearms evidence includes: • Comparison of bullets and cartridge cases to a specific firearm; • Comparison of a bullet and/or a cartridge case to evidence found at the same or different crime scene; • Firearm function and modification; • List of possible firearms involved in an incident; • Serial number restoration; • Distance determination based on powder residue or shot pattern; • Entry of bullets and casings into a nationwide firearms database for comparison, identification and mapping to other firearms crimes • Sequence of shots fired, crime scene analysis and trajectories. FIREARMS EVIDENCE-HANDLING AND SAFETY When securing or collecting firearm evidence, safety is the first and primary consideration. Firearms are most often found loaded, without a safety on and possibly cocked and ready to fire. Firearms may have a hair trigger, been modified or malfunction. As an example, automatic firearms have been found modified so that a single pull of the trigger will fire all the cartridges in the magazine. These firearms are extremely dangerous and these modifications need to be anticipated. Rifles with a tubular magazine may have a dent in the magazine that will temporarily hold back a live cartridge as the chamber is cleared. The live cartridge can later become dislodged and loaded into the previously cleared chamber. All firearms must be handled as if loaded, ready to fire and possibly modified, damaged and left unsafe. Although physical evidence is important, safety always comes first. The location and condition of firearm evidence at a crime scene should be recorded. In addition to the police report the need for photographs and/or diagrams should be considered. Prior to recovering and securing evidence, firearms must be unloaded, and care taken to preserve the evidence. Evidence includes fingerprints, blood, hair and fibers, revolver cylinder halos, and debris in or on the weapon. The firearm should be handled in areas least likely 59 – Firearms Evidence 114 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents to retain latent fingerprints such as knurled or checkered areas and to preserve trace evidence. Unloading Revolvers Pen or scribe marks need to be placed on the top of the cylinder along each side of the top strap of the frame. The position of each cartridge and cartridge case should be indicated on the property report as diagramed below. Cartridges and cartridge cases removed should be handled carefully to preserve latent fingerprints. Each cartridge and cartridge case should be packaged separately and listed on the property report. Do not mark the actual cartridge or cartridge case. Markings should be placed on the package. Facing Rear of Cylinder Example Notes Chamber Position Condition Cartridge Head stamp 1 Fired U.S.C. Co. 2 Fired REM-UMC 3 Fired WRA 4 Misfired D.C. Co. 5 Loaded WESTERN 6 Loaded PETERS Unloading Single Shot or Auto Loading Firearms Before securing the firearm, record the position and condition you found the safety, hammer, and other control features. With the firearm pointed in a safe direction, remove the magazine. Next clear the chamber by slowly drawing back the slide or bolt to the rear, examine the chamber visually to ensure that no cartridge is in the chamber. If one is found remove it. Separately package the magazine and/or extracted cartridges in envelopes. These envelopes can then be packaged in the box with the firearm. Again, take care to preserve any possible fingerprints and trace evidence. Do not remove the cartridges from the magazine, or mark the cartridges themselves. Indicate in the police report if the magazine was in the firearm, the number of cartridges in the magazine, and whether or not there was a cartridge in the chamber. 59 – Firearms Evidence 115 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents TRACE EVIDENCE AND FINGERPRINTS The Investigating Officer must submit a Long Beach Police Department Crime Laboratory Request for Services PD 3000.002(A) (REV.04/28/99) for any firearm that needs to be processed for trace evidence or latent print evidence. FIREARMS AND CARTRIDGE CASES TO BE ENTERED INTO NIBIN The Long Beach Police Department is a member of the National Integrated Ballistics Information Network (NIBIN). When a firearm is fired, the cartridge case and bullet are left with unique striations and/or tool marks that can be directly linked to a particular firearm. Cartridge case and bullet evidence can be entered into the NIBIN database and linked to other NIBIN cases where the same firearm was used. Crime scene casings and bullets can be linked to the same firearm or a test-fired firearm can be linked to the entered casings and bullets. NIBIN is an excellent investigative tool that assists in solving multiple cases and linking recovered firearms to past crimes. The Investigating Officer must submit a Long Beach Police Department Criminalistics Laboratory Firearms Analysis & NIBIN Entry Request for a firearm, cartridge case or bullet to be entered into NIBIN. Recovered firearms can be requested to be test fired and the test fired casing and/or bullet entered into the NIBIN database. NOTE TAKING AND EVIDENCE MARKING When necessary a crime scene sketch should be prepared. A sketch provides measurements of evidence found to a fixed or reference point. The distance between objects and evidence at a crime scene may provide information that may be of value when reviewing or analyzing a crime scene. Distance between a firearm and other crime scene evidence may be important in cases such as homicides, suicides, cases with multiple shooters, self -defense shootings and others. Photographs supplement the notes and sketch. BULLETS EMBEDDED IN WOOD OR PLASTER Do not dig or pry a bullet out of a wall or other object. This could damage identifying striations on the bullet that can link the bullet to the firearm. Remove the bullet by cutting around the material in which the bullet is embedded, or cut around the adjacent area to loosen the bullet. If necessary, package the piece of material containing the bullet. FIRED CARTRIDGE CASES, WADS, AND PELLETS Cartridge Cases: It may be possible to determine the approximate position of the shooter by the location of ejected cartridge cases. In order to do this a sketch with ACCURATE measurements of the fired cartridge cases must be recorded. Measurements should be made against a common reference or fixed point. Photographs with a scale are also helpful in this type of examination. When collecting cartridge cases package each item separately. 59 – Firearms Evidence 116 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Shot Wads: When a shotgun is fired, the wads travel with the shot charge for a short distance. In cases involving close distances, wadding may be found in either the victim’s clothes or body. Location and distance of the shot wad to a fixed location may help identify the location of the shooter. Shot wads can be used to determine the gauge and identity of the shotgun. Package each item found separately. Shot Pellets: Collect and handle shot pellets in the same manner as bullets. Shot patterns may assist in determining the location and distance of the shooter. Collecting items with the shot pattern and/or measuring the shot pattern distances from each other and taking photographs with a scale will assist in determining the distance of the fired firearm from the target. Loaded Shells or Cartridges: Collect ammunition associated with the case. The ammunition may have markings that indicate an attempt to fire or cycle it in a firearm. Recovered ammunition can be used for test firing and distance determinations. Duplicating ammunition used in the crime may be critical. If the number of cartridges is relatively small, they can be handled in the same manner as bullets and cartridge case evidence and packaged separately. If the quantity is large (boxes of ammunition) then the cartridges may be left in their original container and packaged. GUN SHOT RESIDUE (GSR): When a firearm is fired, gunshot residue gas and solids are discharged. The residue escapes through the cylinder, barrel and other openings in the firearm. Residue can be deposited on clothing, objects in close proximity and the hands of the shooter. The actual amount of residue varies with the weapon, ammunition, and conditions of discharge. The analysis of gunshot residue from the hands of a shooter detects primarily trace amounts of primer residue. Gunshot residue (GSR) deposits on the hands decline over time. In practice, a shooter may not be found to have GSR on his/her person after six hours. However, GSR may last for hours on victims that have died, or on objects near a shooting. Sample collection procedures are critical. GSR Precautions Sampling for GSR should be performed on a live subject as soon as possible. Ideally, samples should be taken immediately after contact with a subject in the field. If the suspect is going to be transported to another location the hands must be bagged to insure there is no cross contamination. One collection kit should be used per suspect. Prior to GSR collection, visually examine the subject's hands and wrists. The subject should not be allowed to wash or rub their hands prior to sampling. Do not let the suspect put their hands in their pockets or touch other objects. GSR samples must be collected prior to fingerprinting the suspect. 59 – Firearms Evidence 117 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents CAUTION! DO NOT TOUCH the hands of the subject in the areas to be sampled for possible gunshot residues. If possible, thoroughly wash your hands and wrists before proceeding to prevent any transfer contamination to the hands of the subject. Put on the disposable plastic gloves provided before handling sampling materials. Clothing and other objects in close proximity to a discharged weapon may have gunshot residue. Depending on the circumstances, these items may need to be collected. The following directions provide a guide for GSR collection. 1. Put on the disposable plastic gloves; 2. Select a sample disc labeled RIGHT HAND. Remove the protective cover. Do not touch the disc to anything but the subject's hands; 3. To collect gunshot residue from a person's hands, the exposed adhesive surface of the disc is pressed firmly against the back right hand in a systematic pattern until the disc loses its stickiness. Do not slide or rotate the disc on the skin. Concentrate on the web area between the junction of the thumb and forefingers and down the forefinger; 4. After the adhesive surface has been used and the hand sampling is complete, reseal the disc in the container provided; 5. Repeat this process with left hand using the disc labeled left hand and reseal the disk in the container provided; 6. Fill out ALL information requested on the GSR kit and ensure that the containers are properly marked. Place the sealed containers in the envelope and seal. Submit the complete kit to the Property Section with a police property report. If the hands were bagged prior to sampling, seal and package each bag and submit them to Property. Any GSR kit that needs to be analyzed must be is sent to the Los Angeles County Sheriffs Crime Laboratory for analysis. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigation Bureau 118 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 62 – Mentally Ill Persons REVISED May 2023 MENTALLY ILL PERSONS INTRODUCTION Police officers often encounter or are called to assess if a person needs to be hospitalized under the criteria of Welfare and Institutions Code (WIC) §5150 (adult) or WIC §5585 (juvenile). To achieve the best possible outcome, officers should use the safest, most effective way to handle a person who is suspected of being mentally ill and still treat them with respect. LEGAL RESPONSIBILITIES Mental illness is not a crime; WIC § 5150 provides that when a person, as a result of mental illness, is a danger to themselves or others, or gravely disabled, they may be held for treatment and evaluation in a County designated facility for up to 72 hours. Gravely disabled is defined as an individual who is unable to provide for basic personal needs such as food, clothing and shelter, due to a mental disorder. In the case of juveniles, gravely disabled is defined as unable to utilize the food, clothing, and shelter provided by others. Dangerous or gravely disabled persons may be detained for evaluation with or without a court order. WIC § 5150.05 - Officers shall “consider available relevant information about the historical course of the person’s mental disorder," when considering probable cause for a 5150 hold. Officers need not personally observe the behavior leading to a determination that a subject meets the criteria for a 5150 hold. Available relevant information can come from the following: • Prior police contacts (e.g., call history or the officer’s own knowledge) • Mental health professionals or treatment providers responsible for the subject’s care • Family and friends Relevant questions to ask include, but are not limited to: • Has the person experienced previous episodes, and what happened? • Did the person become violent? • What happened that compelled the calling party to call the police? MENTAL EVALUATION TEAM (MET) A Mental Evaluation Team (MET) is a unit comprised of a sworn police officer and a licensed clinician that specializes in dealing with the mentally ill. When on duty, MET is available to assist patrol units in the handling of calls involving the mentally ill. However, 62 – Mentally Ill Persons 119 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents MET services are not available at all hours. If a MET unit is not available, patrol units will handle such calls. FIELD RESPONSE The following are steps to be taken when encountering mentally ill subjects in the field: 1) Ensure the scene is safe. If there are articulable facts indicating the subject is dangerous or may be carrying a weapon, conduct a limited search for weapons. Ensure the area is free of weapons and potential weapons the subject may be able to reach. If there is any indication the subject will become violent, handcuff the subject. 2) Request additional units if there are indications the subject may become violent. 3) Request paramedics if the subject needs medical care. 4) Request a MET Unit to respond to the scene if available. a) Provide the MET Unit with a Field Interview card that contains the subject’s social security number, diagnosis, medications, and health insurance information if able. ENCOUNTERS ON PRIVATE PROPERTY When officers receive a call regarding an emotionally ill or mentally disturbed person, they may be invited onto the premises by the property owner, a relative or a friend of the subject. The mere complaint of a neighbor does not give officers authority to enter the subject’s residence. However, if the officer has an objectively reasonable basis to believe that the subject is seriously injured or imminently threatened with such injury, then entry is allowed in order to render emergency assistance. CONDUCTING AN INVESTIGATION When a MET Unit is not available, officers may be called upon to investigate. The investigation should include the following: 1) Contact the calling party to find out the reason they called for assistance. If possible, obtain the following information: a) Description of the subject’s behavior now and in the past b) Psychiatric history including any psychiatric diagnosis c) Medications taken by the subject d) If the subject is treated by a psychiatrist, psychologist, counselor, or other physician e) When the subject was last hospitalized and at what hospital 2) Interview the subject 3) Determine if the person meets the criteria for a 5150 hold Interviewing the subject may be the most important part of your investigation. The subject’s degree of cooperation may be determined by your demeanor and interviewing techniques. Your ability to be calm, confident, and an “emotional buffer” who exudes patience and concern is key. Make sure that you have eye contact. Many schizophrenics hear loud voices in their heads; they need to know which voice is your voice. The “command voice” does not usually work with the mentally ill and may make the subject more paranoid. 62 – Mentally Ill Persons 120 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents When interviewing a mentally ill subject: • Call them by name. • Ask open ended questions like, “what happened?” This allows the subject to express what is going on in their own words. Officers are not expected to diagnose a mental disorder, but rather determine if probable cause exists to believe that the subject is a danger to themselves, a danger to others, or gravely disabled due to a mental illness. Questions should be asked which include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do you know what day it is? (day, month, year) • Do you know what city you are in? • Who is the President? • Do you have a place to live? Where? • Are you able to provide food for yourself? • Do you have medical problems such as diabetes, seizure disorder, or hypertension? What are they? • Are you taking medication? Which ones? • Have you ever seen a psychologist, psychiatrist or counselor? If so, did they give you a diagnosis? If you ask questions too soon regarding the subject’s psychiatric history, it may make them defensive. • If we leave now, where are you going to go and what are you going to do? Even if the person cannot or will not answer your questions, their behavior should be documented in your report as to why the subject needed hospitalization. CRIMINAL ACTS When a mentally disturbed person commits a felony or serious misdemeanor, they should be charged with the appropriate crime. The individual should, if possible, be booked at the station for the relevant crime class. Once booked, the Booking Sergeant and Jail Supervisor will determine whether or not the subject can be housed at LBPD Jail Facility or should be transported to the Los Angeles County Jail. If the criminal charge is minor, the subject may be released not booked on the charges and then transported to the appropriate psychiatric facility for a 72-hour hold. TRANSPORTATION Transportation is necessary either when you determine that a person needs to be put on a 5150 hold, or when you are dealing with a person who does not fit the 5150 criteria but wishes to be hospitalized voluntarily. When a person wants to seek voluntary treatment, they can be transported to a nearby psychiatric facility. When transporting subjects to a psychiatric facility, certain steps should be followed to ensure the safety of both the officer and the subject. • Handcuff, safety belt, and hobble subjects, as necessary. • A non-violent person being hospitalized voluntarily should not be handcuffed but should be thoroughly searched for weapons. 62 – Mentally Ill Persons 121 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • With the exception of MET, who work with DMH Clinicians, all subjects being transported to a psychiatric facility outside of the city for the purpose of a 5150 hold should be transported by a two-officer police unit. • Inform the subject of the detainment advisement as written on the 5150 application form. Transportation by the Long Beach Fire Department For the purpose of a 5150 hold, the Fire Department may be requested to transport persons with a mental illness by ambulance if: • The person is violent and requires restraint to the extent that they must be transported in a recumbent position to prevent injury. • The person is injured or physically ill and needs immediate medical attention. • The person is elderly or a young juvenile, where handcuffs or any physical restraint may injure the patient. • The person is non-ambulatory due to a medical condition. Patrol units should advise dispatch the reason they are requesting an ambulance for the purpose of a 5150 hold. When a person is detained on a 5150 hold and transported by ambulance, at least one officer should ride in the ambulance or follow the ambulance at request of the Fire Department. The officer should remain with the patient until the hospital accepts the hold. If the Fire Department arrives on scene of a mentally ill person and the patient does not need to be transported by ambulance (i.e., medically cleared by Fire), the officer should take over and transport the patient. This includes patients seeking transport for voluntary treatment. IMPORTANT LAWS Health and Safety Code § 1799.11 states that any physician has the authority to detain a person for up to eight hours, for the purpose of getting them a psychiatric evaluation. In other words, there is no need for a police officer to respond to a hospital to write a 5150 application on a person who is a patient in that hospital. The emergency room physician has the authority to detain the patient for evaluation by a psychiatrist at that hospital or evaluated by a Psychiatric Mobile Response Team (PMRT) from another hospital. Welfare and Institutions Codes § 8100 through 8104 gives you the authority to confiscate any firearm or deadly weapon from any person placed on a 5150 hold. Note the reason the weapon has been taken on the property sheet; this is a hold, NOT safekeeping. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Community Services Bureau 122 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 65 – Communications Radio Transmission Procedure REVISED May 2017 COMMUNICATIONS RADIO TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION The Communications Division is a support unit under the Department of Disaster Preparedness and Emergency Communications; and functions to assist officers in the performance of their duty. The Communications Center consistently strives to provide the best possible service and requires the cooperation of all field units. For the most efficient radio transmission, it is necessary for officers using mobile radio equipment to understand certain communications procedures. THE ABCs of RADIO TRANSMISSIONS Officers should adhere to the following principles to ensure the most efficient use of the mobile radio equipment: • Accuracy – A misspelled name may yield a response of “NO WANT” on a wanted person. • Brevity – Airtime is precious, there may be as many as 65 units on the same channel. Plan your transmissions and keep officer safety in mind. Officers are reminded that Manual Section 7.3.2 requires KDT use for routine communication in order to preserve radio air time for emergency use. • Clarity – Speak clearly, using codes and phrases. • Courtesy – Teamwork requires courtesy. Phrases like “Please” and “Thank You” are not necessary, however, officers and dispatchers will be courteous and respectful. GENERAL TRANSMISSION PROCEDURES Prior to transmitting, monitor the channel for a moment to avoid interfering with another unit. Units cannot always hear the transmissions of other units. When using the fixed radio in the vehicle, do not transmit before the red light on the unit illuminates. This will indicate the equipment is operating properly. When using a portable radio, depress the transmit button and wait two seconds before transmitting. When transmitting with either radio, always say “unit” followed by the complete unit designator. This will decrease the incidents of the unit designator being cut off by the identification signal the radio transmits to the Communications Center. When transmitting, the following practices will ensure that radio transmissions are clear, concise and courteous: • Hold the microphone or handheld radio at a 45 angle, approximately 4-6 inches from your mouth; • Speak in a normal tone of voice, yelling causes distortion; 65 – Communications Radio Transmission 123 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Try to keep your voice void of emotion; • Avoid the use of humor or slang; • Never use profanity; • Speak slowly, approximately sixty (60) words per minute; – Officers should remember that dispatchers must type the information broadcast by the field units; – Spell out names that are unusual, have difficult spellings or may be spelled more than one way, i.e. Dixon, Dickson, Dicksen, etc.; – Use the approved phonetic alphabet in this Training Bulletin; • After each transmission, ensure that the transmitter is off; – Check the red light on the control panel and place the microphone back in the metal clip; • Limit each transmission to no more than twenty (20) seconds; – This allows the dispatcher to acknowledge the unit or let them know that part of the transmission was missed; – If necessary, this also allows other units on the frequency to make an emergency broadcast; – If a dispatcher is broadcasting, and a unit has emergency traffic, the officer can initiate the broadcast and the dispatcher will hear them and discontinue broadcasting. REQUEST FOR CLEARANCE When requesting clearance, the officer will broadcast the full unit designator and briefly state the reason, e.g., “Unit 2C10, 10-28/10-29 a plate,” “Unit 3A52, warrant check,” “Unit 4B4, suspect information,” etc. This expedites the work of the dispatcher, who can then bring up the correct format on the CAD screen, thus requiring fewer requests to repeat the information and conserve valuable airtime. BROADCASTING SUSPECT AND WANTED VEHICLE DESCRIPTIONS The original broadcast of suspect and vehicle descriptions is for the purpose of immediate apprehension. Officers broadcasting either suspect or vehicle descriptions from the scene should limit the broadcast information to those facts needed to assist in the immediate apprehension of the suspect or vehicle. Minute details, such as hair style, eye color, type or color of shoes, speech characteristics, exact loss, or complete description of a weapon, may be useful in the final identification or elimination of a suspect, but are time consuming to broadcast during the first transmission. When broadcasting wanted vehicle information provide as much of the following information as is available: • Type of crime the vehicle is wanted for; • Location of theft or crime; • Time of occurrence; • License number; • Year, Make, Model; • Color - top to bottom; • Direction of travel; 65 – Communications Radio Transmission 124 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents WANT AND WARRANT CHECKS When requesting a want or warrant check on an individual, it is important that all of the information is given in the following order: • Driver’s license number (indicate the state if not from California); • Last name, first name, middle initial, suffix; • Sex and race; • Hair and eyes; • Height and weight; • DOB or age. RECORD CHECKS Record checks will not to be done over the air or Mobile Work Station. Officers are to contact the Records Division, after the subject has been transported to the station. If having the subject’s criminal record will have a bearing on whether or not they will be arrested, the officers may contact the Records Division by telephone. Under no circumstance will Communications Personnel broadcast this information over the air or cause it to be transmitted via CAD; to do so is a violation of the Privacy Act. VEHICLE CHECKS Officers requesting a check on a vehicle license or identification number (VIN) will first broadcast their full unit designator and briefly state the request, i.e. 10/28, 10/29, etc. Upon acknowledgement by the dispatcher, the unit will broadcast their location followed by: • Type of plate, i.e. motorcycle, commercial, personalized, etc.; • License number (and state if not from California); • If the license plate is not available, use the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). REQUESTS FOR ASSISTANCE When requesting assistance, provide the dispatcher with specific information as to what type of assistance is needed, i.e., backup (what does the unit have and is backup needed code 3 or regular code), fire, paramedics, tow truck, animal shelter, public service, etc. EMERGENCY AIR BROADCAST During any emergency situation officers should continue talking in a normal tone of voice, remembering general transmission procedures. When in pursuit or traveling Code Three, officers should roll up vehicle windows to help eliminate the background noise such as the siren and wind. In the event a suspect flees at the termination of a pursuit or for any serious crime that has just occurred, utilizing the ABC’s of radio transmissions will help get the proper information out to those who can use it the most, assisting units. The following format for broadcast information is the most efficient: • Type of crime; • Type of premises and location; • Time of occurrence; • Number of suspects and brief description of clothing or outstanding features; • Sex and race of suspect • Direction suspect fled; 65 – Communications Radio Transmission 125 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Type of weapon, if any, was used. INITIATING A CODE RED It is the responsibility of a field unit involved in an incident to make the request for a code red. The Communications Center Supervisor or dispatcher may initiate a Code Red when they believe one might be necessary but was not requested by an officer. Communications dispatchers are not responsible for initiating the Code Red. • Unless a Code Red has been requested, dispatchers do not keep the air clear, instead they continue to dispatch and handle routine radio traffic. – The exception to the above will be upon receiving a transmission from a unit indicating a 997, 998, 999, or Code 1000. Consideration should be given by the dispatcher to halt routine traffic and initiate a Code Red. CANCELING A CODE RED A field unit or field supervisor at the scene is responsible for canceling a Code Red. The cancellation of a Code Red does not mean the incident is Code 4. However, broadcasting a Code 4 or a Code 4A will cancel a Code Red. Code 4 or Code 4A should be provided by a unit that is in the field at the scene of an incident. CHECKING IN- AND OUT-OF-SERVICE At all times, all officers are required to check in-, or out-of-service. In most instances, this can and should be accomplished by using the KDT. However, in instances where officer safety is an issue, airing your location and status is appropriate. NOTIFICATIONS TO AND FROM OTHER JURISDICTIONS When requested, the Communications Center Supervisor, or their designee, shall notify other jurisdictions when a unit may be entering their jurisdiction. • When making the notification request, a field unit should specify if the request is for assistance or notification only. PHONETIC ALPHABET A – Adam H – Henry O – Ocean U - Union B – Boy I – Ida P – Paul V – Victor C – Charles J – John Q – Queen W – William D – David K – King R – Robert X – X-Ray E – Edward L – Lincoln S – Sam Y – Young F – Frank M – Mary T – Tom Z – Zebra G – George N – Nora REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 126 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 67 – Arrest and Control Techniques REVISED January 2017 REVIEWED January 2020 ARREST & CONTROL TECHNIQUES INTRODUCTION In today’s society a tremendous amount of responsibility is placed on police officers and their ability to make decisions. When an officer is confronted with violence, he/she must instantly decide what degree of force to use. Supervisors, lawyers, judges and the public will review the officer’s decision. It is imperative that the decision an officer makes conforms to the law, the standards of the Department and the expectations of the public and profession. California Penal Code §835a states that any peace officer who has reasonable cause to believe that the person to be arrested has committed a public offense may use reasonable force to effect the arrest, to prevent escape or to overcome resistance. As a companion to §835a PC, §834a PC obligates a person who has knowledge, or should have knowledge, that he/she is being arrested by a peace officer to “refrain from using force or any weapon to resist such arrest”. USE OF FORCE PARADIGM Past training utilized a “use of force continuum”, which implies that there is a progressive beginning and end to using force. Realistically, not all situations allow the luxury of beginning at point A and ending at point B. The use of force paradigm allows officers to utilize the degree of force necessary to control the situation. CONTROL Control is that degree of influence an officer must exert over a suspect in order to take him/her safely into custody. TYPES OF CONTROL Officers must strive for control in everything they do. There are two types of control that must be dealt with: General Control is that degree of influence that an officer must exert over a suspect in order to keep the peace and take him/her safely into custody. The key to understanding general control is that the suspect still has the option to either conform to the expected behavior, or resist. With general control, the suspect still has the freedom to move. Physical Control is the application of a specific control hold or technique, which would allow the suspect to move only in the direction and manner the officer chooses. The 67 – Arrest and Control Techniques 127 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents effectiveness of physical control depends greatly on the use of pain compliance and leverage. DEGREES OF CONTROL Presence and Demeanor – Mere presence of a patrol vehicle or the uniform alone is often adequate influence to control suspects. Verbal – In certain situations, the appropriate use of voice commands is all that is necessary to control the situation. An officer’s ability to persuade and communicate in a clear and concise manner will in large part be a determining factor in the officer’s ability to control most situations (for further see Training Bulletin 187 “Tactical Communication”). Controlling force – Controlling force is the minimum amount of force needed to control an individual when voice commands do not exert sufficient control over the situation, or are inappropriate for the situation. Controlling force consists of physical control ranging from exerting a firm grip on an individual to pain compliance control holds to an actual physical hold or lock. Injuring force – Injuring force usually involves the use of a baton or other impact weapon. Injuring force should be used only after lower levels of force have been attempted and failed, or are inappropriate. Deadly force – Long Beach Police Department’s shooting policy, §6.8.5 of the Department Manual, states that firearms shall be regarded as defensive weapons and shall be used by an officer only in the absence of reasonable alternatives and the presence of one or more of the following compelling circumstances: Immediate threat – In self-defense or in defense of another when the officer reasonably believes there is an immediate threat to life or of serious injury. Substantial risk – To effect the arrest or prevent the escape of a felon or suspected felon when the officer has reasonable cause to believe that: – The crime for which the arrest is sought involved the use of or threatened use of deadly force, or the infliction of serious bodily injury; and, – There is substantial risk that the person whose arrest is sought will cause death or serious bodily harm, if apprehension is delayed. Officers who do not have control and/or confidence in their abilities tend to develop one or more or the following compensating behaviors: • Hesitation – Underestimating or belittling the situation and possibly justifying non- involvement or hesitation in getting involved. • Bluffing – Relying on the suspect’s fear of the uniform, badge and gun. Threatening to use a level of force that is not justified by the situation. • Verbal abuse – Insulting or belittling the suspect by using profanity, insults or both. • Excessive force – Over controlling the situation. Losing perspective in the physical arrest situation and overreacting without legal or moral justification. Self-confidence is achieved when officers develop the knowledge, skills and abilities necessary to perform the duties of their profession. Self-confidence eliminates the need for the above mentioned compensating behaviors. 67 – Arrest and Control Techniques 128 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents ESCALATION AND DE-ESCALATION OF FORCE When an officer applies force to a suspect in order to gain compliance, there is always the possibility that the suspect may comply. As long as the suspect is compliant, there is usually no further need for the level of force you have chosen. It is perfectly acceptable, and encouraged, to lessen the amount of force being used when compliance is achieved. Attitude and choice of the proper technique allows officers the flexibility to escalate and de-escalate the amount of force used as the circumstance calls for it. Officers are held responsible in deciding whether to escalate or de-escalate the amount of force needed to arrest a violator. MAKING THE ARREST §836 of the California Penal Code authorizes police officers to arrest people with or without a warrant whenever any of the following circumstances occur: • The officer has probable cause to believe that the person to be arrested has committed a public offense in the officer’s presence • The person arrested has committed a felony, not in the officer’s presence • The officer has probable cause to believe that the person to be arrested has committed a felony, whether or not a felony, in fact, has been committed Officers must remain professional at all times when dealing with the people they come in contact with. People who realize they are going to be arrested react in a variety of behaviors. Some arrestees may become sullen, angry or uncooperative. An arrestee’s attitude toward the officer may change without warning. They may be cooperative one minute and belligerent the next for no apparent reason. They may be sensitive to real or imagined insults where even a casual remark by the officer may offend them. Officers are encouraged to consider the use of tactical communication techniques (TB187) during arrest situations to clarify their actions for arrestees and onlookers. For example, phrases such as "please cooperate" and "please do not resist" can greatly assist in the de-escalation of a potentially volatile situation. Make sure there is no doubt in anyone's mind that you have made every effort to gain voluntary compliance with the law and your requests. An arrestee may try to discredit an officer by accusing him/her of illegal or unethical behavior. It is impossible to prevent arrestees from voicing these unjustified complaints, but officers may minimize the number and effect of such accusations by maintaining a courteous and businesslike attitude in both action and conversation. Officers must refrain from antagonizing the arrestee and avoid a show of emotion. Remember that a cooperative prisoner is easier to arrest and transport than a belligerent one. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 129 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 68 – Prowlers REVISED April 2001 PROWLERS INTRODUCTION Few occurrences frighten the average person like the sudden discovery that someone is prowling at his/her door, yard, or peering in a window. For the responding officer, there is no way of knowing what a prowler’s purpose may be. The suspect might be: • A burglar • A sexual psychopath or a “peeping Tom” • An intoxicated person • Someone seeking a place to sleep • A jealous suitor or an ex-spouse • A person committing malicious mischief or petty thievery • A neighborhood child taking a short cut through the backyard • Someone relieving him/herself RESPONDING TO THE CALL Most prowlers are opportunists and do not plan their actions in advance. They will walk along the street until they notice a residence that suits their purpose. If discovered on the premises, they seldom leave by the same way they entered. Instead, they will go over back fences and through yards until another street is reached; however, many hide in the immediate vicinity. Knowledge of street locations, house numbers, alleys, etc. is essential in planning the approach of the scene and will enable officers to anticipate possible avenues of flight the prowler might take from a given location. Don’t become complacent when responding to a prowler call. For officer safety, you should consider a prowler as a potential burglar. Generally, prowlers are extremely canny and familiar with routine police methods. Techniques the suspect does not expect will work best to outwit him/her. • As soon as you have acknowledged a “921” broadcast, formulate a plan. Treat the call like a burglary in progress − Form a plan − Set a perimeter • Assisting units should consider: − How far away they are from the dispatch address 68 – Prowlers 130 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents − How old the call is, i.e., how long ago the prowler was seen − Possible direction of escape the suspect took • Reduce speed a short distance from the scene and observe persons on the street, being careful not to overshoot the address. Turn corners slowly near the scene to avoid squealing tires and avoid running over manhole covers or street debris • Every person on the street in the vicinity of the call should be closely scrutinized • Persons running or walking rapidly should be stopped and questioned. If stopping someone delays your arrival on scene, notify dispatch immediately • Upon arrival, stop a few doors down from the actual address – Plan your approach, decide ahead of time where you will park – Practice noise control, open and close car doors carefully. Tuck keys and whistle into a pocket to prevent rattling and be aware of radio volume for both hand held and car radio – Listen for dogs barking or any unusual noises, look for any motion light being activated • Avoid searching without first contacting the calling party, if you want to do a cursory search before knocking on the door, have communications advise the calling party • Never search alone • Obtain as complete a description of the suspect as possible and, if known, the route of flight and notify dispatch • Assure the reporting party that the danger has passed, and conduct a more thorough search of the area Searching the Area A prowler may conceal him/herself anywhere; trash cans, sheds, beneath cars, under porches, etc. Clever prowlers conceal themselves in places that are so simple and so obvious that they may be overlooked. Therefore, when investigating a prowler call, after conducting a quick initial search, check the area thoroughly, there is a good possibility the suspect could still be in the general area. Use of a Flashlight • An officer can minimize the possibility of self-silhouetting by holding the flashlight away and slightly in front of the body • Avoid lighted backgrounds and keep low when passing windows so that you are not silhouetted. This is a precaution against being seen by the suspect or shot at by the occupant of the house or a neighbor who may mistake an officer for the prowler • At the rear of the house, “sweep” the yard with a flashlight while listening for any noise which might indicate the suspect’s location or route of flight General Considerations • Examine the lawn for evidence of recent movement. If dew has settled on the grass and a light is shown across it from a low angle, footprints will appear as dark streaks and may indicate the direction taken by the suspect. Damp footprints may also appear on sidewalks or paths 68 – Prowlers 131 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Check fences for damage or debris, a suspect may leave shreds of clothing or smudges. If a suspect leaps from a fence into soft dirt, deep footmarks may show where he landed • Windows and screens should be checked for holes, tool marks, fresh smudges on the sills, or other evidence of an attempted entry • The ground below each window should be carefully examined for footprints. Any marks in the ground or disturbance of spider webs around crawl holes may indicate that the suspect has hidden under the house • Don’t overlook tree branches, shrubbery, and flowerbeds. Thoroughly search heavy vegetation near fences and buildings • Check sheds, garages, arbors, and the roofs of all outbuildings. Many prowlers have been apprehended in garages and beneath workbenches • Use K-9 if appropriate, i.e. a burglary, attempt burglary or some other felony crime has been committed Checking Vehicles • Check vehicles in the area of the call for any occupants • Check underneath parked vehicles, as many suspects hide under parked cars • Investigate any vehicles with warm engines, especially those parked in front of a darkened building. If it is registered to an address away from the neighborhood, consider surveillance • Many so-called “prowlers” are burglary, rape or theft suspects, and many will leave their personal identification, clothing, shoes, and keys in their vehicles before prowling an area. Others have been known to leave the engines of their vehicles running Officer Safety Before you hop over fences, take precautions to avoid hazards. Low branches and clotheslines are not readily visible at night. Be alert for unleashed dogs. Listen for barking dogs, as continuous barking may indicate the route of a fleeing suspect or the hiding place of a suspect. Assuring the Victim • If the suspect is not located, advise the victim that periodic checks will be made on the residence • Advise the victim that if the prowler returns, to immediately notify the police and try not to let the suspect know he has been detected, for example, by turning on lights • Inform officers of the next watch of the circumstances so that they can check the area periodically • Flashlights or spotlights used during these checks will give the complainant a feeling of security and may reveal the prowler’s presence if he returns • If the prowler is not located, a good tactic to employ may be to make a show of leaving the area only to return quietly after a few minutes. Generally about 15-20 minutes is long enough to determine if a prowler is going to pop out of hiding and use the street Suspects 68 – Prowlers 132 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • When a suspect is stopped away from the scene, carefully observe his/her face, hands and clothing. Splinters and scratches might indicate he/she has been climbing fences or going through hedges • Clothing, particularly trouser cuffs and shoes, may have bits of shrubbery, spider webs, or foxtails adhering to them or the shoes may be wet or muddy. These conditions indicate the suspect has probably been going through backyards or vacant lots • Perspiration or heavy breathing might indicate that the suspect has been running Many burglars know that prowling is merely a misdemeanor. If caught, they may admit being on the property unlawfully; they may admit that they were “peeping”, or may claim that they stopped to urinate. These admissions are often made to mislead officers so they will overlook evidence of burglary. Prowler Arrests When a citizen or officer witnesses the prowling, and a suspect is arrested, the offender may be booked for violation of Penal Code §647(h) Disorderly Conduct - Prowling. The following elements must be present. §647(h) PC “Any person who loiters, prowls, or wanders upon the private property of another, at any time, without visible or lawful business with the owner or occupant thereof. As used in this subdivision, “loiter” means to delay or linger without a lawful purpose for being on the property and for the purpose of committing a crime as opportunity may be discovered.” Depending upon circumstances, a suspect may be charged with §647(i) PC Disorderly Conduct - Peeking. To substantiate a charge under this section, the following elements must be present: §647(i) PC “Any person who, while loitering, prowling, or wandering upon the private property of another, at any time, peeks in the door or window of any inhabited building or structure located thereon, without visible or lawful business with the owner or occupant thereof.” Reports When arresting a suspect for §647 (h) PC, it is only necessary to file an arrest report. The following information should be included in this report: • How you came to be on scene, dispatched, on patrol, etc. • Statement that the prowler had been observed on the private property of the occupant (observed by arresting citizen-occupant, or officer) • Statement from the occupant that prowler did not have permission to be on property (a statement from neighbor to this effect is not sufficient) • Statement that occupant (victim) wishes to prosecute • Statements of witnesses, if any 68 – Prowlers 133 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Statement that the suspect had been advised of his/her rights per PD form 1000.008. Suspect’s response to these rights, either a positive or negative waiver • Suspect’s statement; why he was on property, etc. • Officer’s observations (condition of suspect’s clothing, e.g., no shoes, ripped shirt, etc.) • Include whether suspect had been drinking or not. If he appears intoxicated, a Breathalyzer test should be administered Field Interview Cards Field interview cards should be filed whenever officers locate persons in the area of the call, but are unable to connect them with the offense. These cards assist the Detective Division in locating possible suspects for other crimes. Conclusion Because prowler calls are so frequent, officers should be familiar with the recommended prowler call procedure: • Plan approach • Respond quickly, safely • Observe persons in area • Watch side streets • Search the area • Ease complainant’s fear • If arrests are made, report factually; include elements REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 134 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jim McDonnell, Chief of Police 70 – Investigative Follow-up Procedures REVISED January 2011 INVESTIGATIVE FOLLOW-UP PROCEDURES PURPOSE The purpose of this training bulletin is to control, coordinate and document all follow-up work, on any case, which has been assigned to a detective. The assigned detective shall have control over decisions and investigative tactics utilized to bring a specific case to conclusion. This training bulletin is in no way intended to prevent officers from following up on crimes that have just occurred and are fresh. This only applies to crime reports that have already been "assigned" to a detective. PROCEDURE Patrol officers are encouraged to follow-up with as many clues/leads as possible after the occurrence of a crime. Any pertinent information developed shall be documented in their crime report or supplemental report by the end of their work shift. This includes documenting all investigative steps. This also includes documentation of any photos taken at the scene by Patrol or Lab. Once the crime report is filed and routed to a specific detail, the case will be assigned to a specific detective. All follow-up work after this point shall be coordinated through the assigned detective. Examples of follow-up work would include, re-interviewing victims, witnesses, or any possible suspects, conducting surveillances, or showing six-pack photographic line-ups. If information is developed during the course of a work shift, patrol officers should attempt to contact the assigned detective for direction. If unable to contact the assigned detective, the appropriate detail sergeant should be contacted. If circumstances require immediate attention and detectives are unable to be contacted (weekends/nights), notify your field supervisor. All follow-up work that is done shall be documented in a supplemental report prior to the end of the work shift. E-mails shall not be used in lieu of a supplemental report. CONCLUSION 70 – Investigative Follow-up Procedures 135 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents This system is in place to control and coordinate investigations. Adherence to this procedure will assist in our combined efforts to prosecute guilty parties. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigation Bureau 136 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 71 – Community Relations REVISED February 2001 COMMUNITY RELATIONS MISSION STATEMENT The Community Relations Division exists to promote communication, education, and mutual understanding between the Police Department and our community. INTRODUCTION The Community Relations Division is responsible for the coordination and presentation of a wide variety of community programs and services for the Department. The primary areas of responsibility within the Division include: • Crime Prevention • Coordinating Department functions • Community Program requests • Public Information/Press Relations CRIME PREVENTION The Department sponsors four major crime prevention programs: • Neighborhood Watch – Educates citizens to recognize and report suspicious and/or criminal activities. Residents are educated in Home Security, Personal Safety and Emergency Communications and are encouraged to be the “eyes and ears” of the Police Department since officers cannot be everywhere at once • Apartment Watch – Enlists the aid of apartment managers/owners along with their tenants in reducing criminal activity on and around their properties. Apartment buildings are posted with “No Trespassing” signs and the managers/owners agree to be the “victim on file” for any of these crimes • Business Watch – Helps business managers/owners reduce crime on and around their business properties. The organizational structure of this program is similar to that of Apartment Watch • Marina Watch – Provides a partnership between the Police Department, Marine Patrol and boat owners. The Marina Watch is like Neighborhood Watch for people who live on their boats In addition to the above programs, the Community Relations Division also provides handouts, videos, coloring books and stickers and other promotional items on a wide 71 – Community Relations 137 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents variety of crime prevention and safety related topics. Many of these materials are also available in Spanish and Khmer. DEPARTMENT FUNCTIONS AND COMMUNITY LIAISON The Community Relations Division is responsible for coordinating Department functions such as the Annual Awards Luncheon, Retired Officers Bar-B-Que, Police and Fire Christmas Drive, and certain funerals. The Division is also responsible for coordinating community programs such as Safety Fairs, the Chief’s Advisory Groups, Senior Police Partners, Volunteer Program, Summer Youth Employment Training, Internship Program, and Regional Occupational Program. Community Program Requests The Department receives numerous requests from the community for public relations programs. All such requests should be routed through the Community Relations Division where they will be directed to the appropriate Bureau for assignment. Some Program requests include: • Station/Communications Center tours • Herbie the Talking Police Car • Career Day presentations • K-9 displays or demonstrations • Narcotics • McGruff the Crime Dog • Heliport tours • Personal safety presentations • Safety displays • Robbie the Robot • Gangs • Fingerprinting PUBLIC INFORMATION/VIDEO PRODUCTION The Department has established an excellent, positive, working relationship with the news media. Effective communication can create citizen awareness, thus increasing the apprehension of criminal offenders. Press Information Officers make every effort to: • Notify media representatives of investigations that culminate in arrest, and/or recovery of significant amounts of property/drugs • Solicit media assistance in locating missing children, lost adults, and wanted suspects • Solicit media assistance in relating specific criminal activities to the public • Notify the media of major or unusual traffic collisions, hit and runs, etc. • Solicit media assistance for purposes of informing citizens of crime prevention measures • Solicit media coverage of programs involving police sponsorship or participation, e.g., awards for valor, human-interest stories, etc. • Disseminate Information through Channel 64-B 71 – Community Relations 138 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Create and assist in production of educational programs to be aired on the City of Long Beach local cable channel such as “Behind the Badge”, Public Service Announcements, and the Department Highlight Videos CONCLUSION Maintaining a solid, positive relationship with the public and the media is a critical responsibility. The Department that supports the community will in turn receive support from the community. The Community Relations Division is a vital link to the community. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Administration Bureau 139 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 72 – Gangs REVISED February 2022 GANGS INTRODUCTION This Training Bulletin will include gang structure, characteristics, criminal behavior, and identification of gang members. Gangs in the City of Long Beach are primarily organized along ethnic lines and are composed of the following types of gangs: • Hispanic • Asian • Black • Pacific Islander • White COMMON GANG CHARACTERISTICS Gangs in Long Beach are comprised mostly of male members from the same general area, and range in size from about 30 to 200 members. Although the average age is between 14 and 25, they may be found as young as 10 and as old as 40, sometimes older. The older members are known throughout the gangs as “OG’s” (Original Gangster). The OG’s are usually the shot callers or leaders. Although each gang has its own unique characteristics, most gangs are involved in criminal behavior such as drug dealing, committing auto thefts, extortions, firearms violations, burglaries, home invasion robberies, witness intimidation, various degrees of assaults, and murders. They frequently use weapons during the commission of these crimes. Gangs have also become involved in high tech crimes involving identity theft and counterfeiting credit cards and checks. The gangs reap more benefits from these financial crimes without using violence, resulting in lighter jail sentences if caught. Gang members will often admit to gang membership but, may also find it in their own interest to deny membership. Other times, they may only claim to affiliate or “kick it” with a certain gang. In some ways this gives them the benefits of being closely tied to the gang (i.e., girls, parties, protection, excitement), without the risk of being identified as a member by a rival gang or law enforcement. Affiliates should be identified as such by officers in the field and their information forwarded to the Gang Enforcement Section. Gangs may require a new member to be “jumped in”; a process in which the prospective member fights one or more gang members for a specific amount of time. It is also common today for new members to gain membership by committing a criminal act for the gang. These crimes can range from thefts to drive-by shootings and murders. 72 – Gangs 140 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents After this initiation, a gang member is expected to be loyal to his gang, to the death. If he is questioned by a rival gang member or “hit up”, he must never denounce his gang membership. In many cases, generations of membership within a gang have blurred the lines between gang and family to the extent that they are almost synonymous. Female Gang Members – Female gang members practice territorial domination. The female members are usually separate cliques of the larger male gang. There are no known female gangs that are totally separate entities. They get involved in all aspects of gang crime from fistfights to violent felonies, working together with the male members as a team. The females are used in setting up ambushes by luring the rival gang members into their territory. The females will on occasion drive the cars in a driveby shooting while their “home boys” do the actual shooting. Graffiti – Gangs tend to be largely territorial and usually mark their area of influence by using graffiti. Typical gang graffiti will list the gang’s name and list the names of several gang members who were either present or respected within the gang. A crossout is a type of asterisk that covers the rival's graffiti. After a death, it is common to see memorial graffiti listing the fallen member followed by R.I.P. (rest in peace). It proclaims to the world the status of the gang and offers a challenge to rivals. Common gang terms for graffiti are “plaquing”, “tossing”, “throwing up”, "the hood" or “varrio”. Dress – Gang style of dress generally follows the current trends, making it easier to blend in with the general population. They sometimes wear white T-shirts with pressed jeans, and Polo-style shirts. Gang members will often wear certain colors to represent their gang, or wear clothing their gang identifies with, representing professional sports teams. Tattoos – Gang members tattoo their bodies to show their level of commitment to their gang. HISPANIC GANGS OF LONG BEACH Hispanic gangs commonly wear Pendleton’s, clothing that is black and grey, or representing Raiders, Steelers, Pirates, Nationals or Dodgers teams. Hispanic gang members call their graffiti inscriptions "placebos " or "placa," meaning sign or plaque. A cross out of a rival gang’s graffiti is referred to as a "put mark". Many times, the word "puto" (whore) or "rata" (rat) are scribbled next to or close by crossedout graffiti as further disrespect for the rival gang. A common tattoo for Hispanic gang members is three dots on the web of the hand signifying “mi vida loca” (my crazy life). The following Hispanic gangs regard areas of Long Beach as their home turf: • Barrio Pobre (BP) • Barrio Small Town (BST) • East Side Longo (ESL) • East Side Paramount (ESP) • North Side Longo (NSL) • Playa Large (PL) • West Side Longo (WSL) 72 – Gangs 141 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Barrio Pobre • Clothing/Colors: Pittsburgh Pirates, Philadelphia Phillies, Pittsburgh Steelers. • Graffiti/Tattoos: BP, BP16th ST, Pobrero, Poor Town • Area: Long Beach Blvd., Elm Ave., Hill St. to Anaheim St., Drake Park, 14th Street Park, 16th St. & Linden Ave. • Rival Gang(s): 18th Street, ESL, Asian gangs, Black Gangs • Allies: BP Compton and Anaheim • Cliques: 10th St. (Dime Block), 16th St. (Lokos), Mafiosos Chicanos-Compton, Anaheim Barrio Pobre (ABP)-Anaheim OC • Has sets in South Gate, Lynwood, Compton and Anaheim Barrio Small Town • Clothing/Colors: nothing specific • Graffiti/Tattoos: Barrio Small Town 4th Street, BST TWS, (Tiny Winos), BST13 • Area: Broadway to 7th St., Magnolia Ave. to 710 Freeway, 4th St. & Daisy Ave., Chavez Park • Rival Gang(s): ESL/ Playa Larga/ WSL /Black gangs • Allies: None known • Cliques: 4th street, Tiny Winos East Side Longos - The largest and most violent gang in the City of Long Beach. Since 1981, ESL has been responsible for hundreds of gang related shootings. • Clothing/Colors: Las Vegas Raiders, Los Angeles Lakers, Los Angeles Dodgers • Graffiti/Tattoos: ESL, BV, MDS, PWZ, Stoners, LTPBZ • Area: South and West Divisions east of the 710 Freeway Seaside Park, 14th Street Park, Anaheim St./Hoffman Ave. • Rival Gang(s): BST, BP, Asian and Black gangs, 18th St. • Allies: WSL, NSL • Cliques: Barrio Viejo, Malditos, Peewees, Latin Time Playboyz, 8th Street, Dukes, The Stoners, 9th Street Locos, Lonely Boys, Midget Locos, Chico Malo’s, Crazy Latin Boyz, Latin Thugs • Females: Lil Night Owls, Primes, Lokas 14th Street, South Side Youngsters East Side Paramount • Clothing/Colors: Pittsburgh Pirates, Philadelphia Phillies, Pittsburgh Steelers. • Graffiti/Tattoos: ESP, ES Paramount, ESP13, ESPX3, Eastside PRMNT • Area: City of Paramount, North Long Beach, Artesia Blvd. to north city limits, Cherry Ave. to Downey Ave., Indiana Ave./68th Street. • Rival Gang(s): Paramount Dog Patch, Brown Nation • Allies: None known • Cliques: 67th Street, Dukes, Chicos, Tiny Locos, Pee Wees, Playboys, Termites North Side Longos • Clothing/Colors: Las Vegas Raiders • Graffiti/Tattoos: NSL, NS Longo’s 72 – Gangs 142 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Area: Del Amo Blvd. to Harding St., Long Beach Blvd. to Paramount Blvd., Carmelitos Housing Project • Rival Gang(s): Black gangs/ Asian gangs • Allies: ESL, WSL • Cliques: Tiny Locos, Peewees, Cyclones, Youngster, Machos, Baby Gangsters Playa Larga of Long Beach - One of the smallest Long Beach Hispanic gangs • Clothing/Colors – nothing specific • Graffiti/Tattoos: PL, PLR, Playa Larga • Area: Anaheim St. to 7th St., Daisy Ave. to Pacific Ave., Electric Ct. to Anaheim St., Chestnut Ave. to Cedar Ave., Drake Park • Rival Gang(s): BST, ESL, WSL • Allies: 68th Street • Cliques: Diablos (11th St.), Sick Assassins (21st St.), Vipers (VPs) West Side Longos • Clothing/Colors: Washington Nationals, Los Angeles Lakers, Las Vegas Raiders • Graffiti/Tattoos: WSL, WS Longo, Corner Boys, S&C, LCCS, TMTS, 19th Street, WSL13 • Area: PCH to Willow St., 710 Freeway to West city limits, Summit St./Canal Ave. • Rival Gang(s): West Coast Crips, Dominguez 13, Sons of Samoa (SOS), West Coast Islander (WCI) • Allies: ESL, NSL • Cliques: Summit & Canal, Cyclones or Corner Boys, Termites, Tiny Locos, 19th Street, Stoners • Female: Winas, Tiny Locas ASIAN GANGS OF LONG BEACH As the Asian gangs evolved in Long Beach, they began to take on the characteristics of Black “Crip” gangs. They chose Crip colors such as blue or gray and avoided using the color red. They formed a long-lasting truce with all Crip gangs and have rarely had any conflicts with them. The major Asian street gangs currently active in Long Beach are predominantly made up of Cambodian males. Long Beach has one of the largest Cambodian communities in the United States. Most of the members in the five primary Asian gangs of Long Beach listed below are Cambodian, with the balance being Laotian, Thai, or Vietnamese. There may also be a few Black, White, or Hispanic members scattered throughout these gangs. The Cambodian street gangs share several of the qualities found in other Asian gangs such as being very secretive, well organized, and capable of extreme violence. Since the late 1980’s, the East Side Longo’s have waged a conflict with the Cambodian gangs, especially the Asian Boyz and the Tiny Rascal Gang. This conflict has been fueled by the fact that these rivals all share the same general turf and many of them have attended the same schools. Over the years, the Asian/Hispanic gang conflict is responsible for dozens of homicides. 72 – Gangs 143 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Asian gangs are highly mobile criminal enterprises that concentrate their criminal activity primarily against their own community. Asian gangs are nontraditional when compared to street gangs of other ethnic groups; they have national and international ties which makes identification and prosecution more difficult. Tattoos - Asian gang tattoos and burn scars are often an indicator of gang affiliation. These tattoos are usually symbols of power such as dragons, tigers, eagles, sailing ships, etc. Burn scars found on Asian gang members are usually a result of a cigarette burn. These scars are usually found on the hands, wrists, forearms or the lower legs. Long Beach has five primary Asian gangs: • Asian Boys (ABZ) • Crazy Brother Clan (CBC) • Exotic Foreign City Crip (EFCC) • Suicidals (SUIS) • Tiny Rascal Gang (TRG) Asian Boyz (ABZ) - Their gang color is blue, and they claim Crip. This Cambodian gang is also associated with Asian Boyz-Van Nuys. ABZ has established a large presence throughout California, especially Northern California. They also have a large presence in Lowell, Massachusetts; Missouri, North Carolina, Pennsylvania and Utah. • Clothing/Colors: Atlanta Braves, Anaheim Angels, blue handkerchiefs • Graffiti/Tattoos: ABS, AB, ABZ,126 • Area: Anaheim Avenue corridor, 10th and Freeman, 1000 block E. 17th, 2200 block Lewis Avenue • Rival Gang(s): TRG, all Longo gangs • Allies: Member of SEA Pact (S-Suicidals, E-Exotic Foreign City Crip, and A-Asian Boyz) Sons of Samoa (SOS) • Clique: Rose, Bitch Killa, Crime Family Gangster Crip (CFGC) Crazy Brothers Clan (CBC) - This Cambodian gang was transplanted from Modesto, Fresno, Stockton and Sacramento area in the early 1980s. • Clothing/Colors: carries a white rag and wears a white baseball-type cap • Graffiti/Tattoos: CBC, 323 • Area: West Division, parts of East Division and North, Lime Avenue and 20th Street, Orange Avenue and Anaheim Avenue • Rival Gang(s): all Longo gangs , TRG, Asian Boyz, EFCC, Suicidals • Allies: None Exotic Foreign City Crip (EFCC) – These members are primarily Cambodian, Laotian and Thai teens. EFCC was formerly known as Exotic Foreign Creation Coterie, but later adopted the name Exotic Family City Crip gang. The structure is similar to that of Black gangs, and they adopted the Crip name. • Clothing/Colors: blue • Graffiti/Tattoos: EFCC, EFC, dove, heart 72 – Gangs 144 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Area: West Division, part of East Division, 1000 block E. 17th, Cal-Rec Park • Rival Gang(s): all Longo gangs, TRG, CBC • Allies: Member of SEA Pact (S-Suicidals, E-Exotic Foreign City Crip and A-Asian Boyz) Sons of Samoa (SOS) Suicidals (SUIS) – This Cambodian gang consists of multi-race groups. The gang originally took their name from the rock band “Suicidal Tendencies”. Original members were associated with the Sons of Samoa gang. The structure is similar to that of Black gangs, and they have adopted the Crip name. • Clothing/Colors: blue • Graffiti/Tattoos: SUI, SUIS, Suicidal Town, ST • Area: West Division, New York and Atlantic Avenue, streets around Poly High • Rival Gang(s): all Longo gangs, TRG, CBC • Allies: Member of SEA Pact (S-Suicidals, E-Exotic Foreign City Crip and A-Asian Boyz) Sons of Samoa (SOS) Tiny Rascal Gang (TRG) – This multi-ethnic gang formed into a criminal street gang from several other gangs, including the Asian Boyz gang. TRG have established gangs throughout much of California, as well as Lowell, Massachusetts. • Clothing/Colors: traditionally carries a gray rag and sometimes wear red shirts and hats to symbolize that they are not aligned with the other Asian gangs who wear traditional Crip colors such as blue. • Graffiti/Tattoos: TRG, RASCALS, TR, TRASCALG, 7126 • Area: West Division and part of East Division, 2200 block Lewis Avenue, Anaheim Avenue corridor, 1468 Cerritos Avenue • Rival Gang(s): all Longo gangs, Member of SEA Pact (S-Suicidals, E-Exotic Foreign City Crip and A-Asian Boyz), CBC • Allies: Orange County TRGs BLACK GANGS By the early 1980s, the Insane Crip Gang had become the largest Black gang in the city. Because of a fight, a group of Insane Crip members broke off and formed their own gang that became known as the Rollin 20s Crip Gang. Eventually, the Rollin 20s became the second largest Black gang in the city. Over the past twenty years, the Insane Crips and Rollin 20s Crips have become deadly rivals and participated in countless acts of violence against each other. Today, there is less violence between the two gangs and more cooperation, as members from each gang will sometimes collaborate with one another to commit certain crimes such as drug transportation and sales. Currently, there are more than a dozen active Black gangs in Long Beach. In addition, there are also individual members from a variety of Los Angeles and Compton based Black gangs scattered throughout the City at any given time. Black Gang Structure – Black gangs have a rank structure that is more defined toward the top of their leadership. The lower ranked members tend to follow others who have 72 – Gangs 145 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents earned the most status in the gang. Usually this occurs when a gang member shows a willingness to “put in work” and is willing to shoot rival gang members, commit armed robberies, transport and sell drugs, and participate in thefts and burglaries. The more violent the deeds, or the more profitable the activity, the more status the gang member will earn. As he “promotes” up the ladder, does jail or prison time, he may come to control a “crew” of five or six younger members who will “put in work” as ordered. If he continues to gain notoriety, he may become a “shot-caller”, which allows him to direct more than one crew and call meetings to discuss strategy or direction. Black Gang Dress – In the past, Crip gang members commonly identified themselves by wearing blue, while Blood gang members commonly identified themselves by wearing red. Today, colors are not as predictable. There are Crip gang members in Long Beach who wear red. Blood gang members could wear any red collegiate or professional sports team attire and the baseball cap symbolizing the letter “P” for Piru. During the mid-1990s to the present, the traditional patterns previously followed by Black gang members has changed. The clothing has changed from frequently wearing the dominant gang colors to wearing casual clothing. Occasionally you may find a gang member dressing down in their colors. Today’s gang member may not always look like a gang member. Officers may find it necessary to check for possible clues such as the subject’s language, tattoos, graffiti on school materials, belt buckles, etc. Black Gang Terminology – Crip gang members commonly address each other by using the word “cuzz”, while Blood gang members use the term “Blood”. Both gangs will use the term “homeboy” or “homie”. Here are some other current commonly used terms: • strap - gun • strapped - carrying a gun • hit me - call me • donkey - male Hispanic • hood rat - female available for sex • po - police • crab - derogative for Crip • dove - derogative for Rollin 20s gang • slob - derogative for Blood • weak toast - derogative for West Coast Crip gang Black Gang Hand Signs – Members of both Crip and Blood sets display hand signs to identify their set affiliation to other gang members. The flashing of gang hand signs could be used to intimidate or present a face to face challenge to another gang member. This method of communication sometimes leads to confrontation with rivals, which may then escalate into verbal and physical violence. Black Gang Tattoos – Black gang members also use tattoos as another method of communication or identification. Black gang members will tattoo themselves with their street name(s), their set (gang), the names of fellow slain gang members, gang slogans, girlfriends, mothers, and kids. Most Black gang members tattoo their arms, upper backs, and chest areas. 72 – Gangs 146 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Black Gang Graffiti – Black gangs use graffiti to identify their territory and challenge rivals. Graffiti done by Crip gang members will usually be in blue or black with all the letter “Bs” and “Ps” crossed out symbolizing disrespect to Blood gangs. In Crip graffiti, you may find the letters “BK” symbolizing “Blood Killers” and the number 187 indicating death or murder. When one gang puts up graffiti, a rival gang may cross out that graffiti while putting up their own tag. BLACK GANGS OF LONG BEACH Long Beach has eight primarily Black street gangs: • Four Corner Block Crips (4CBC) (4CBC) • Insane Crips (ICG) • Mac Mafia Crips (MM) • Rollin 20 Crips (R20s) • West Coast Crips (WCC) • Bricc Blocc Boys (BBC) • Sex Money Murda (SMM) • Naughty and Nasty Crip (2N) Four Corner Block Crips • Clothing/Colors: Milwaukee Brewers, blue and gold • Graffiti/Tattoos: 4CBC, Four CBC • Area: North Long Beach, West of 710 BTWN Artesia and Victoria St. • Rival Gang(s): all Hispanic gangs, O-Hood, Sex Money Murda • Allies: Blvd Mafia, Mac Mafia Insane Crips • Clothing/Colors: Cleveland Indians, Oakland Raiders, black, gray, red • Graffiti/Tattoos: ICG, ICG 21st Street, YMS, YFC, 21, 19th Street, Babies • Area: 21st Street, MLK Park, 17th and Alamitos Avenue, Burnett Street and Atlantic Avenue • Rival Gangs: all Hispanic gangs, Rollin 20s, Bricc Boys • Allies: all ICG cliques including YMS (Young Murder Squad) and YFC (Young Foundation Crips), 21st St., Baby Insane Gangsters (BIG or Babies), Dawgs, Filthy Youngs (Filthys) Mac Mafia Crips - Mac Mafia fragmented from ICG • Clothing/Colors: University of Michigan, Maybach Logo, blue and gold, • Graffiti/Tattoos: MMC, MAC MAFIA • Area: Andy St./Downey Ave., Artesia Blvd., and Ramona Park • Rival Gang(s): All Hispanic gangs, Naughty & Nasty, Rollin 20s, Sex Money Murda • Allies: (MOBS) Mac Mafia, (O-Hood) Boulevard Mafia, Bricc Boy Crips Rollin 20 Crips - one of the two largest Black gangs in Long Beach • Clothing/Colors: Pittsburgh Steelers, black and gold 72 – Gangs 147 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Graffiti/Tattoos: RTC, R20, $20s • Area: 15th Street and Peterson Ave., 10th Street and Myrtle Ave. 17th Street around Alamitos Ave • Rival Gang(s): all Hispanic gangs, Insane Crip Gang • Allies: none known West Coast Crips • Clothing/Colors: Dallas Cowboys, blue • Graffiti/Tattoos: WCC, West Coast, Rollin 80’s, West Coast 80s • Area: West Division (Beat 1), 3385 Santa Fe Ave. and Springdale Apartments • Rival Gang(s): ICG, WSL (Hispanic gang), Sons of Samoa • Allies: Rollin 20s Bricc Boys Crips (BBC) • Clothing/Colors: Berkeley or UCLA attire, Boston “B”, CC (Chanel logo), Big Black logo (upper case B’s back to back), blue and gold • Graffiti/Tattoos: Bricc Boys, BBC, 52 • Area: North Division (Beats 21 and 24), Carmelitos, 52nd St and Orange Ave., 67th/Indiana • Rival Gangs: all Longo gangs, Naughty & Nasty, Sex Money Murda, ICG • Allies: (MOBS) Mac Mafia, (O-Hood) Boulevard Mafia, Bricc Boy Crips and Rollin 20s Sex Money Murda • Clothing/Colors: Chicago White Sox hat logo, green and white • Graffiti/Tattoos: SMM, $MM, $, Sox • Area: North Division (Beat 24), North Pointe (Parwoods), Langports (Seapoint), Southfield (Ackerfields) Apts. • Rival Gangs: all Longo gangs, Naughty Nasty Crip, Mac Mafia, Bricc Boy Crip • Allies: none known Naughty and Nasty • Clothing/Colors: NY Yankees logo, brown • Graffiti/Tattoos: 2NN, 2Ns, 2NGC, NY Yankees logo • Area: Ramona Park, Artesia Blvd. from Atlantic Ave. to Downey Ave • Rival Gangs: Sex Money Murda, Mac Mafia, Rollin 20s, Bricc Boys Crips • Allies: USO Squad Other than the listed primary Black gangs, there are numerous other Black gangs present in Long Beach, most of which are Los Angeles or Compton based gangs. A few members from each of these gangs may take up residence in Long Beach, but most of them will be scattered throughout north Long Beach, especially in and around the Carmelitos Housing Project. Others may be found in the central area, while a few can be found in East Long Beach along the Anaheim Avenue corridor. PACIFIC ISLANDER GANGS 72 – Gangs 148 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Pacific Islander gangs have been present in Long Beach for over 25 years. Traditionally, they have been concentrated on the West Side of the city, along both sides of the Santa Fe Avenue corridor. Their members include Samoans, Tongans, Fijians, Guamanians, Hawaiians and Filipinos. Due to their skin tone, they sometimes are mistaken for Black or Hispanic. Pacific Islander (PI) gang members have learned to be territorial or “from Long Beach”, versus turf (specific neighborhood) oriented. They deal in stolen cars, guns, and narcotics. Both Long Beach PI gangs have traditionally aligned themselves with “Crip” terminology and attire. Pacific Islanders Gangs of Long Beach • Sons of Samoa (SOS) • West Side Islanders (WSI) • Tongan For Life (TFL) • USO Squad (USO) Sons of Samoa (SOS) – The members are comprised primarily of male and female Samoans, but they also include Black, Asian, and mixed-race members. They have recently established a presence in other parts of California as well as Seattle, Washington, Portland, Oregon and Honolulu, Hawaii. • Clothing/Colors: Seattle Mariners clothing with the “S”, sports jerseys with the Number “32”, blue clothing indicating Crip orientation • Graffiti/Tattoos: SOS, Samoa, Sons of Samoa, Superman logo, Seattle ”S”, SA Gang, Mighty S Gang • Area: West Division (Beats 1 and 2), Silverado Park (32nd St/Santa Fe Ave.) and Admiral Kidd Park • Rival Gangs: West Side Blood Pirus, all Longo gangs, West Coast Crips, Tongan for Life (TFL), Tongan Crip Gang • Allies: Suicidals, Asian Boyz, EFCC, USO Squad (United Samoan Organization), East Coast Crip West Side Islanders (WSI) – This gang is primarily of Guamanian nationality. • Clothing/Colors - blue clothing indicating Crip orientation • Graffiti/Tattoos: WSI, WSI 34th St., WSI Sugar Cove Boys • Area: Santa Fe Avenue corridor between Burnett Avenue and Wardlow Road • Rival Gangs(s): West Side Longo’s, West Coast Crips • Allies: None known Tonga For Life (TFL) – Some claim TFL originated from the Tongan Crip gang out of the Inglewood/Hawthorn area, but TFL claims they are independent and are founded by members of the Eteaki and Hopoi families who moved into the north Long Beach area. • Clothing/Colors: Milwaukee Brewers ball cap (depicting a ball glove with 4 fingers), the Famous Stars and Straps logo “F”, ball caps depicting a “T”, blue colored clothing indicating Crip orientation • Graffiti/Tattoos: Tongan for Life, Foe life, TFL, T4L, NST4LGC, 4L 72 – Gangs 149 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Area: North Division (Beats 22 and 24), Ramona Park, Deforest Park, Houghton Park • Rival Gangs: Sons of Samoa, Fam Bam, Any Blood/Piru gang, Longo gangs (due to complicated family relationships between Samoans and Tongans in Long Beach, not all members are pre-disposed to violence towards members of enemy gangs) • Allies: Tongan Crip Gang WHITE GANGS Generally, White youth express their delinquent behavior in individual acts of crime not within the traditional street gang sense. Those White youth who do join gangs many times join other ethnic gangs such as Hispanic or multi-racial gangs already established in the community. The White race has virtually no exclusive street gang in Long Beach. The only “White exclusive” gangs in Long Beach are the Skinheads and Peckerwood type gangs. Neither of these are traditional street gangs, in that they do not claim certain streets, turf, or territory, nor do they use graffiti or public displays as intimidation tactics against the community or other gangs. Their motivation seems to be White supremacy, fighting, and intoxication through alcohol consumption and narcotics usage and they tend to commit narcotic and property crimes. Skinheads Generally, Skinheads are divided into two categories: racist or non-racist. Both categories of Skinheads, and especially the racist, have been known to be extremely violent. Racist Skinheads are known for their close ties to the White supremacist movement and have been linked to the American Nazi Party, Ku Klux Klan, and other militant racist groups. In Long Beach we have a several dozen Skinhead gang members. Their structure as an organized gang seems to be very loose and mostly involves narcotics use, primarily methamphetamine. Subjects labeling themselves as Skinheads have been contacted in the East and South Divisions. Dress - Traditionally Skinheads wore their hair cropped or shaved. This was partially done so their hair could not be pulled during a fight and they had little or no facial hair. Today it is common to see them wearing long hair, mustaches, and goatees so they will not be so recognizable by the police or their other enemies. Clothing - The traditional clothing for Skinheads has been blue jeans, suspenders (braces), Doc Marten boots, white tank tops or T-shirts, and black or olive-drab flight jackets. The color of the suspenders and shoelaces are messages to other Skinheads identifying the type of Skinhead they are or their beliefs. Traditionally, red means a more militant Neo-Nazi and white means White power or neutrality in the case of non-racist Skinheads. Skinheads may also wear pins, graffiti or other articles on their clothing related to Nazi Germany, White power or White supremacy. 72 – Gangs 150 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Tattoos - Common racist Skinhead tattoos are used for decoration, identification purposes and intimidation. They usually depict racial hatred slogans, references to Skinhead musical groups, Nazi symbols and/or other references to White supremacy. Peckerwoods The term Peckerwood is slang used by some of the White criminal element to describe themselves. Through time, Peckerwood was used by the White prison population to distinguish themselves from other prisoners. Most Peckerwoods have been through the state or county correctional system and emulate prison gangs, primarily the Aryan Brotherhood (AB). Members arrested for narcotic crimes are often overlooked as gang members. They will usually not admit to being a gang member so they will not be identified as such. The Peckerwood ideology is different than other White hate groups, as their objective is monetary gain. Although Peckerwoods profess racist ideas, they are overwhelmingly criminally orientated, not politically oriented. Peckerwoods were primarily formed for self-protection and controlling White criminal activity. In Long Beach there are several dozen Peckerwood-type gang members. They are scattered throughout the city, mostly in east Long Beach, with a few in north Long Beach. Peckerwood gangs include the L.A. Death Squad (LADS), Public Enemy Number I (PENI), and PENI Death Squad (PDS). Dress - Peckerwood dress can be closely associated with the Hispanic street gang style or traditional parolee style. Hairstyles can range from clean-shaven to long and neatly combed back. When in “a full stride” they will wear neatly pressed buttoned up shirts with all of the buttons buttoned up, neatly pressed trousers and work boots or tennis shoes. Tattoos - used for decoration, identification and intimidation. They will usually depict racial hatred slogans, Nazi symbols, references to White pride and White supremacy, Vikings, violence, and reference to the Odin religion. CONCLUSION Illegal gang activity poses a threat to public safety and it is important for officers to accurately identify active gang members. Officers should obtain complete information from suspected gang members encountered in the field. Completed Field Interview Cards turned in to Reporting assist the Gang Enforcement Section in updating their databases. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigation Bureau 151 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 73 – Robbery – Arrival at Scene & Broadcast Procedure REVISED August 2001 ROBBERY - ARRIVAL AT SCENE AND BROADCAST PROCEDURE INTRODUCTION When a "211 now" or "just occurred" is broadcast, generally a large number of units will respond. Multiple units arrive on scene within minutes and the responding units may concentrate too much on the location of occurrence and miss a suspect fleeing the area. Additionally, units piling up at the scene might enhance the suspect's chance of escape. Intelligent deployment of assisting units and immediate broadcast of the suspect's description greatly improves the possibility of apprehension. RESPONSE TO THE CALL - GENERAL When an "all units" 211 is broadcast, response by all available units in the area should be made with as little delay as possible. If the call indicates the suspect is "there now", assisting units should recognize that the search for the suspect begins not at the scene, but in its vicinity. By quickly scanning the streets, sidewalks, doorways and automobiles while the units are responding, the suspect may be located. The handling unit shall respond code-3. A "code-3" response may be cancelled at the discretion of the Watch Commander, field lieutenant or sergeant. Two units at the scene are usually sufficient to handle a "211 just occurred". All additional units should think about containment and concentrate their efforts in searching the area for the suspect. This prevents an unnecessary congregation of units at the scene and aids in the general search for the suspect. However, if the call is "211 now", all units will be directed to proceed to the immediate location until code 4. A "code-4" or "code-4A" should be broadcast once the scene is secure. Units still en route can then slow down and survey the surrounding area. The unit on scene may then be able to give a more complete description of the suspect and set up a perimeter, if needed. RESPONSE TO THE CALL BY ASSIGNED UNIT The first unit to arrive at the scene should conduct a brief interview with victims/witnesses and immediately broadcast a description of the suspect, and advise assisting units what 73 – Robbery 152 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents direction the suspect fled. It is essential that certain information be broadcast without delay so that assisting units may conduct an efficient search for the suspect. Additional time can be saved if the officer will transmit this data to the dispatcher in some form of standardized sequence. By listing this information on a special page of his/her notebook, an officer can readily refer to it when needed. • Vehicle description, note if it was a car, bike or if suspect fled on foot • Suspect description: sex, race, height, weight, clothing • Specific direction of travel • Weapon used • Type of robbery • Location of occurrence • How long ago • Number of suspects SUPPLEMENTAL BROADCAST A robbery suspect's chance of being arrested as he leaves the scene is in direct relation to the completeness, accuracy, and speed of the initial and supplemental broadcast. While non-assigned units are looking for the suspect on the basis of sketchy original information, they may see many possible matches. Once they receive a detailed description of the suspect and suspect vehicle, if any, they can then concentrate their efforts on that information. After the unit has made an initial broadcast containing a brief description of the suspect, additional and more detailed information should follow in the form of a supplemental broadcast as quickly as possible. This supplemental broadcast is to correct any initial errors and to provide units in the area with additional suspect description and vehicle information. DESCRIPTION OF VEHICLE Describe the suspect's vehicle as completely as possible. Include any identifying data such as cracked windows, distinguishing stickers, the presence of a trailer hitch, etc. This information, in addition to the make, color, model, and year of the car, can help to identify the vehicle even without a license plate number. INTERVIEW FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTION Victims, due to their nervousness and excitement, occasionally give erroneous information and descriptions. Officers should attempt to locate any witnesses who were not directly involved and can give more accurate statements. TYPE OF ROBBERY Frequently, a suspect will commit two or more robberies of a similar type in the same immediate area in rapid succession. Therefore, it is essential that the robbery type; i.e., 73 – Robbery 153 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents liquor store, service station, etc. be noted. When looking for suspects, most officers will base their deployment tactics on this information. If the type of robbery is clearly broadcast, valuable time and effort can be saved by effectively deploying officers to proper search areas. CONCLUSION If the officers are alert, formulate a plan while approaching the robbery scene and follow suggested procedures in broadcasting pertinent information, the possibility of apprehending the suspect is enhanced. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 154 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 74 – Robbery – Deployment and Search REVISED August 2001 ROBBERY - DEPLOYMENT AND SEARCH INTRODUCTION When arriving in the area of a robbery just occurred, keep in mind these things about the suspect: • He knows the police are looking for him • He knows he needs to get out of the area quickly • If he is trapped in the area he must hide or be extremely inconspicuous In searching the area, the police officer needs to out-guess the suspect and anticipate his moves in order to apprehend him. DEPLOYMENT FOR SEARCH Deployment of responding units should depend upon the method of escape used by the suspect(s) and the time elapsed since the commission of the crime. Consideration should be given to the distance a suspect in a car or on foot would be able to travel since the crime occurred. This distance will vary depending on the density of pedestrian/ vehicular traffic and weather conditions. These factors should allow the officers to calculate the approximate distance the suspect might have traveled away from the scene. This calculation will enable the officers to search or wait at a location where the suspect might be or pass by. Whenever a suspect is on foot, a perimeter should be quickly established. The perimeter should be large enough to contain the suspect. Police Service Dogs and the helicopter should be utilized whenever appropriate. LOCATIONS OF SEARCH Many criminals will attempt to conceal themselves by mingling with groups of people or will remain in obvious locations hoping to remain unnoticed. Special attention should be given to places where robbery suspects would be inconspicuous. • Some suspects may seek concealment by sitting in lobbies or transportation waiting rooms, mingling with large groups of people. The waiting room of a transportation company is particularly useful in that it gives the suspect access to a means of transportation to another part of the city or to another city 74 – Robbery 155 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Persons standing near bus waiting zones should be scrutinized for a possible resemblance to the wanted suspects. Suspects have been apprehended while standing at a bus-loading zone within a block of the crime scene • Some robbery suspects seek concealment in business establishments and offices near the robbery scene, under the pretense of transacting business. Watch people entering or, if the interior is visible from the street, look at people inside who might fit the descriptions of the suspect • Bars provide good places of concealment because of their dimly lit interiors and groups of people usually present • Occasionally suspects will be found sitting in restaurants, usually in booths or at the counter farthest from the door When a suspect is apprehended while fleeing the area of the crime, the capture is not often the result of chance alone. The officers who make the arrest do so because they are able to anticipate the suspect's actions. They know their beats. They consider the time elapsed and place themselves in positions where they can cover potential routes of escape. When several units do this, the odds in favor of the suspect's escape are significantly reduced. CHECK POINTS Robbery suspects fleeing from one part of the city to another along arterial routes often must pass through intersections where two or more of these arteries meet; for example, Pacific Coast Highway and Atlantic Avenue. A stakeout at such a location would be advisable if the intersection is on the suspect's probable line of flight. The topography of the city along the route of escape will often indicate other places as "naturals" for the purpose of stakeouts. Bridges on heavily traveled streets, streets bordering parks, or approaches to tunnels and freeways are examples. EVASIVE ACTION When searching for suspects in an automobile, officers should pay special attention to any driver who takes any type of evasive action as he nears a police car. Such action might be turning off onto a side street or traveling without lights in an alley at night. These or any other unusual actions warrant an investigation. STOLEN VEHICLES A substantial number of the vehicles used as robbery "get away" cars are stolen. Usually these cars are not reported stolen as they have been stolen just prior to the robbery. The robbery is usually committed before the vehicle theft report is made. Whenever a vehicle that contains possible robbery suspects is stopped, determine the ownership of the vehicle. The robbery of banks, supermarkets and loan company offices often result in the loss of large sums of money. These robberies are usually planned and suspects may use as 74 – Robbery 156 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents many as three or four "get-away" cars. They may leave the scene in one car and change to others at various intervals in an attempt to throw off pursuers. Robbery suspects will sometimes use several different stolen license plates on their "get- away" car. At intervals during their flight from the scene, they will change the plate. Officers should be alert for cars with license plates that are loosely mounted or have two plates on one bracket. It is not uncommon in a planned robbery for suspects to use two vehicles. Suspects in one vehicle will enter and rob the establishment. Immediately after exiting, they will drive around the corner, pass all their outer clothing, the weapons used and proceeds to the occupants driving a second vehicle. Speedy initial radio broadcast, careful deployment, and thorough search patterns immediately following a robbery will greatly increase the field officers chance of apprehending the suspect. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 157 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 75 – Robbery – Corpus Delicti REVISED January 2020 ROBBERY - CORPUS DELICTI ROBBERY DEFINED Every crime consists of a group of elements laid down by a statute of law defining the offense. Every element must exist, or the statute is not violated. This group of essential elements is known as the "corpus delicti" and must be included in the crime report. The corpus delicti for robbery defined consists of: • Taking the personal property of another • From the person or immediate presence • Against his/her will • Intent to permanently deprive • By means of force or fear FORCE OR FEAR Force – Must be more than that which is necessary to merely remove the property. There must be additional force to overcome resistance, no matter how slight. Fear – Must be present at the time the offense occurred and as stated in PC 212, may be either: • The fear of an unlawful injury to the person or property of the person robbed, or any relative of his/her or member of his/her family, or; • The fear of an immediate and unlawful injury to the person or property of any one in the company of the person robbed at the time of the robbery. CLASSIFICATION Robbery reports may be classified as any of the following: PC 212.5 (a) (First Degree Robbery) - Every robbery of any person who is performing his or her duties as an operator of any bus, taxicab, cable car, streetcar, trackless trolley, or other vehicle operated on stationary rails or on a track or rail suspended in the air, and used for the transportation of persons for hire, every robbery of any passenger which is perpetrated in an inhabited dwelling, house, or trailer coach, as defined in the vehicle code, or the inhabited portion of any other building. 158 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents PC 212.5 (b) (First Degree Robbery) - Every robbery of any person while using an automated teller machine or immediately after the person has used an automated teller machine and is near the automated teller machine is robbery of the first degree. PC 212.5 (c) (Second Degree Robbery) - All kinds of robbery other than those listed in subdivisions (a) and (b) are of the second degree. PC 214 (Train Robbery) - Every person who goes upon or boards any railroad train, car or engine, with the intention of robbing any passenger or other person on such train, car or engine, of any personal property thereon in the possession or care or under the control of any such passenger or other person, or who interferes in any manner with any switch, rail, sleeper, viaduct, culvert, embankment, structure or appliance pertaining to or connected with any railroad, or places any dynamite or other explosive substance or material upon or near the track of any railroad bridge or trestle, or who shows, masks, extinguishes or alters any light or other signal, or exhibits or compels any other person to exhibit any false light or signal, or who stops any such train, car or engine, or slackens the speed thereof, or who compels or attempts to compel any person in charge or control thereof to stop any such train, car or engine, or slacken the speed thereof, with the intention of robbing any passenger or other person on such train, car or engine, of any personal property thereon in the possession or charge or under the control of any such passenger or other person, is guilty of a felony. PC 215 (Carjacking) - Carjacking is the felonious taking of a motor vehicle in the possession of another, from his or her person or immediate presence, or from the person or immediate presence of a passenger of the motor vehicle, against his or her will and with the intent to either permanently or temporarily deprive the person in possession of the motor vehicle of his or her possession, accomplished by means of force or fear. PC 487(c) (Grand Theft from Person) - When property is taken from the person of another, and no other force was used other than what was necessary to remove the item from the person (not a robbery). On November 4, 2014, California voters approved Proposition 47. Which in part, redefined numerous theft-related crimes that were previously felonies or “wobblers,” but are now considered misdemeanors. Penal Code Section 490.2 PC has redefined petty theft as any theft where the value of the money, labor, or property taken does not exceed $950, “notwithstanding 487(a) PC or any other provision of law defining grand theft.” • Grand thefts from a person require that the property taken directly from the person. • The value of the item must exceed $950; if the item is valued at $950 or less, the crime is petty theft (484(a) PC). • However, if the suspect has certain felony convictions (sex offenses, murder, conviction with a life sentence or is required to register as a sex offender, etc.), the theft can be filed as a felony. TYPES OF ROBBERY 159 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Armed robbery - a robbery where the suspect uses an instrument which could cause great bodily injury, whether manufactured for that purpose or not; e.g. gun, knife, club, piece of pipe, billy, dirk, etc. Strong arm robbery - a robbery where the suspect uses bodily force and no instrument; fists, feet, holding victim to ground, putting sack overhead, taping feet, hands, etc. Purse snatch - If the victim’s strap broke when the suspect grabbed the purse, it is sufficient force for a robbery. Similarly, if the victim’s purse handle broke when the suspect grabbed the purse it’s also viewed as sufficient force for robbery. Carjacking - a robbery where the suspect commandeers the victim's vehicle. This does not include the hi-jacking or cargo theft of a semi-truck and its contents. Estes Robbery - (People v. Estes 1983) In California, a robbery is not completed at the moment the suspect obtains possession of the stolen property. It must also include the element of asportation (carrying away). Escaping with the loss is considered as important in the commission of the robbery as getting possession of the property. Accordingly, if one has stolen property (such as a till tap or petty theft in a store) and uses force or fear in attempting to remove the property from the owner's immediate presence, the crime of robbery has been committed. If the thief uses physical force or a weapon to make good on his or her escape or to prevent a recovery of the stolen property, after obtaining it, the element of forcible taking is present for a robbery arrest. Robbery Reports Information regarding the correct filing of all robbery reports is addressed in Training Bulletin 117. It entails the filing of a robbery report, proper listing of victims, and essential information needed. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 160 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 76 – Burglary Investigations REVISED November 2000 BURGLARY INVESTIGATIONS INTRODUCTION Burglary is one of the most difficult crimes to solve because the perpetrator is seldom seen. The most important tools used for apprehension and prosecution are the officer's initial investigation and the crime reports filed. The most frequent crime report taken by officers in the field is residential burglary. The method the officer uses to investigate and file the report is extremely important to bring the case to a successful conclusion. BURGLARY DEFINED Every person who enters any house, room, apartment, tenement, shop, warehouse, store, mill, barn, stable, outhouse, or other building; tent, vessel, as defined in §21 of the Harbors and Navigation Code; floating home, as defined in subdivision (d) of §18075.55 of the Health and Safety Code; railroad car, locked or sealed cargo container, whether or not mounted on a vehicle Code; any house car, as defined in §362 of the Vehicle Code; inhabited camper, as defined in §243 of the Vehicle Code, a vehicle as defined by the Vehicle Code, when the doors are locked; an aircraft, as defined by §21012 of the Public Utilities Code; or mine or any underground portion thereof, with intent to commit grand or petty larceny or any felony is guilty of burglary. As used in this chapter, "inhabited" means currently being used for dwelling purposes, whether occupied or not. TYPES OF BURGLARIES: COMMERCIAL • Where entry is made to a business or industrial concern and intent is to commit a theft or felony • Entry into a commercial storage shed/bin business where customers rent the storage sheds/bins on a monthly basis, is a commercial burglary – In these types of crimes, the primary victim (Victim #1) is the customer who rents the shed/bin. The storage business (Victim #2), (example: IN STORAGE OR PUBLIC USAGE), should be listed on the crime report as the additional victim • Entry made to a business or industrial establishment by breaking a window. (Window Smash) Theft usually occurs by a suspect breaking a business display window to a business and taking merchandise on display, such as a television, stereo, clothing, etc. • Hotel or motel-If the object of attack was primarily the property of the hotel or motel, e.g. the office, storerooms or guest rooms whether rented or not, it is a commercial burglary. If the primary object of attack appears to be the property of the renter of the room, it is a residential burglary 76 – Burglary 161 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • A telephone booth has three walls, a roof, and a door. The theft or attempted theft from such a booth would be commercial burglary. Such an act committed against a pedestal-mounted pay telephone would either be theft or attempted theft • Shoplifting is a commercial burglary when an establishment is open for business and the suspect enters with the intent to commit a theft. Important elements to help prove intent include: – Presence of a booster device (large empty bags or purses) and/or baggy, loose clothing that would help facilitate the shoplifting – More than one entry into the establishment – Statement or admissions by suspect under Miranda can be used to show intent – Note where the suspect was stopped in relation to the cash registers – If the suspect bought any items at all, book the receipt for those items – Note if the suspect has other receipts on his/her person; an emerging scam is for suspects to find receipts in the garbage and attempt to “return” merchandise never purchased All other thefts from open businesses are grand theft or petty theft shoplifts. (If a shoplifter fights with the shopkeepers or security guards in attempting to escape with the goods, this is considered a use of force and makes the crime a robbery) RESIDENTIAL BURGLARY • Entry has been made to a residence, apartment, hotel, motel or inhabited vessel with the intent to commit a theft or felony • Whether garage doors are open or closed, if entry is made with intent to commit a theft or felony it is a burglary. If the garage is attached to the residence it should be classified as a residential burglary. If unattached, garage burglary • A storage shed (four walls and roof) on the property of a residence, whether directly connected to a residence or not, is entered with the intent to commit a theft or felony, it is a burglary – A lean-to with an open front or wire for a roof would not be classified as burglary, a theft report would be taken • If there is FORCED ENTRY to a laundry room which is part of, or attached to, an apartment house, it’s a residential burglary • If there is no forced entry to the laundry room, this is still a burglary, unless detached; then it is petty or grand theft laundry room THE REPORT • Describe the structure carefully; a single-family residence, an apartment unit, a tool shed, a tent someone was living in, etc. • Note any damage showing forced entry • Note any signs of theft of items within, including ransacking • Even if the suspect never fully entered the structure, if any part of him or any tool used by him “broke the plane” of the structure, the burglary is complete • Even insertion of an ATM card into an Automated Teller Machine built into a bank’s wall is a completed burglary MULTIPLE VICTIMS 76 – Burglary 162 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents If several different units in an apartment building, hotel or motel are burglarized at the approximate same time, a separate crime report is required for each victim. In a situation where several businesses are burglarized and are all contained within one building, i.e., professional building with numerous medical offices, a crime report will be filed for each separate office. One crime report listing one victim and numerous additional victims is incorrect. ABSENTEE REPORTS Many burglaries are discovered and reported by friends, neighbors or employees while the victim or owner is away. In cases where the loss cannot be determined, the responding officers will file a burglary report listing the reporting party and as much information as possible, including the date the victim or owner is due to return. If warranted, officers will file PD Form 400.010 - Request for Lab Technician, provided someone will be available to allow the Lab Technician into the residence or business. The report receipt may be given to the reporting party or left in plain sight at the crime scene. Officers should also make arrangements for the building to be secured prior to leaving the crime scene. MISCELLANEOUS CRIMES MALICIOUS MISCHIEF The suspect enters a structure and commits malicious mischief without committing an act of theft or a felony, a malicious mischief report will be taken, not a burglary report. TRESPASSING In the event of a forced entry with no evidence of intent to commit a crime or felony, should be considered a trespassing, not a burglary. FENCED AREAS When a theft has occurred in a fenced off area, such as a junkyard, garden shop, etc., an entry has not actually been made to a building, it is not burglary. Classify the crime as a grand theft or petty theft, depending on the amount of loss. CRIME LAB REQUESTS A latent print technician should be requested whenever there is a window entry, a suspect in custody, extensive ransacking, or a substantial loss involving identifiable property. CONCLUSION The proper filing of a burglary crime report requires that all elements of a burglary are present and officers obtain the correct information. Crime scene integrity and a request for the lab to obtain latent prints are essential for a successful prosecution. One should draw upon common sense to request the lab, because physical evidence is most often undetected by the naked eye. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 163 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 78 – Sex Crimes – Indecent Exposure REVISED September 2022 SEX CRIME REPORTS PART I - INDECENT EXPOSURE DEFINITIONS Indecent Exposure – A person who willfully and lewdly exposed their private or intimate parts in a public place, or in the presence of others to be offended or annoyed by the action, is guilty of a misdemeanor in violation of Penal Code §314.1. Mere exposure of a private part is not enough to constitute indecent exposure. The exposure must be “willful” and “lewd,” which can mean exposure for sexual gratification. Willfully - An act was done intentionally, knowingly, purposely, and without justifiable excuse. Lewdly - Specific intent to direct public attention to one’s genitals. Private parts (intimate parts) - Sexual organ, anus, groin, or buttocks of any person and the breast of a female. INVESTIGATIVE PROCEDURES An officer should make an arrest if the elements of the crime are present, the suspect is detained, positively identified, and the victim is willing to sign a private person’s arrest form. If an officer observed the act but no victim comes forward, the officer can make the arrest, and the officer should list themselves as the victim of the crime. If a suspect is detained shortly after the commission of the crime, an officer should conduct a field show-up using the following procedures: • Complete the Field Show-Up Admonition Form and have the victim sign it. • Transport the victim to the suspect for a field show-up and position the victim in a way that allows them anonymity and to feel secure. Officers should not take the suspect to the victim's location for identification. • Record the victim’s statement of identification on the Field Show-up Admonition form, and arrest the suspect. NOTE: Misdemeanor citations will not be issued for sex crimes-related offenses, for further, refer to Training Bulletin 123. 78 – Sex Crimes 164 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents If the suspect is outstanding, obtain a complete physical description, including the hairstyle, hat, glasses, facial hair, tattoos, scars, nationality, complexion, and detailed clothing description. If a vehicle is involved, include the year, make, model, color, license plate number, and any additional features, such as accessories, significant dents, and scratches. Additionally, note the interior of the vehicle, color of seats or covers, color of the dash, or any other unusual items observed. Officers should collect any photos or videos the victim or surveillance cameras captured of the incident, upload it to Evidence.com, and document findings in their incident report. DOCUMENTATION Officers should document in an electronic incident report if the victim saw the suspect’s private parts, any statement(s), comment(s), or gestures made by the suspect, related to the incident (E.g., hand motions, pelvic movements, facial expressions). Ask the victim if the suspect’s penis was erect or if there were other indications the suspect was sexually aroused, as this will assist the court in determining if the act was lewd or lascivious. RELATED CRIMES Disorderly Conduct - §647(a) PC If a suspect is engaged in lewd behavior by appearing to masturbate in public, but his penis is not exposed, officers should file a disorderly conduct report. §647(a) PC states, “Every person…who solicits anyone to engage in or who engages in lewd or dissolute conduct in any public place or any place open to the public or exposed to public view” is guilty of a misdemeanor. Annoying or Molesting Children, §647.6 PC When taking an indecent exposure report and the victim is a juvenile (under 18 years), the crime could be classified as CPC § 647.6, Annoying or Molesting Children, which states, "Every person who annoys or molests any child under the age of 18 years of age,” is guilty of a misdemeanor. If the suspect merely exposes himself where a child is present and leaves the scene, an indecent exposure report would be the appropriate offense. If the suspect made it clear a child was the intended victim via lewd remarks, continued exposure, following a child victim, or other aggravating factors, an annoying or molesting a child report would be more appropriate. Urinating in Public - 9.25.010 LBMC If a suspect is urinating in public, and the victim(s) does not provide statements indicating they believe the act was willful and lewd, officers should file a urinating in public report. This sections states, “No person shall urinate or defecate in or at any public place, except at regularly provided toilet facilities.” 78 – Sex Crimes 165 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Nudity – 16.16.050 LBMC If a suspect’s private parts are exposed and the victim(s) does not provide statements indicating they believe the act was willful and lewd in nature, officers should file a public nudity report. It is a violation of the Long Beach Municipal Code for a person to be in any public park, playground, beach, or the adjacent waters in such a manner that their private or intimate parts are exposed to public view. This Section shall not apply to children under the age of ten (10) years. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 166 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 79 – Sex Crimes – Forcible Rape REVISED September 2022 SEX CRIME REPORTS PART II - FORCIBLE RAPE INTRODUCTION Oftentimes, victims of rape do not have a visible injury, making rape cases particularly challenging to investigate. This means the investigation must focus on proving the sexual act was committed without consent. Officers should not prejudge the victim based on their statements or the conditions under which the rape occurred. ELEMENTS OF FORCIBLE RAPE §261(a)(2) PC - Forcible rape is an act of sexual intercourse accomplished with a person who is not the spouse of the perpetrator, where it is against the person’s will by means of force, violence, duress, menace, or fear of immediate and unlawful bodily injury on the person or another. VICTIM INTERVIEW The only way to determine if the elements of the crime exist is to interview the victim carefully. The officer must establish a rapport with the victim through a professional and empathetic approach. Taking the time to use this approach can help the victim overcome feelings of fear, anger, and guilt. The purpose of the initial interview is to establish the elements of the crime, identify potential suspect(s), as well as identify and collect physical evidence. If the incident involves a Sexual Assault Response Team (SART) response, the detective will conduct a follow-up interview. FORENSIC EXAMINATION When investigating a recent incident involving rape, a Forensic Nurse Specialist must conduct a timely forensic examination of the victim. If the incident occurred within 24 hours, officers should contact a Field Supervisor and request that SART be activated. The victim should be transported to the SART location for the examination. Note: The Communications Center will have the current City contracted hospital on file. For further, refer to Manual § 8.7.6 SART. When a suspect is arrested within 24 hours of the assault, they should be transported to the SART location for a forensic examination. Officers should ensure the victim does not encounter the suspect while at the SART location. Officers should coordinate with the Forensic Nurse Specialist as to when and where the suspect’s forensic examination will be conducted. 79 – Sex Crimes 167 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents While it does not meet the SART call-out criteria, if an incident occurred between 24 and 120 hours (5 days), officers may contact the Forensic Nurse Specialist if the victim requests a forensic examination. The Forensic Nurse Specialist’s examination may include the collection of the victims and/or suspect’s clothing, urine, blood, and the sexual assault evidence kit samples. The nurse will collect, seal, and initial each piece of evidence in accordance with evidence collection procedures. Because of this, it is not necessary to repackage the evidence. The officer should collect, document, and place the evidence in the appropriate evidence refrigerator or freezer. 264.2(b)(1) PC requires a law enforcement agency to notify the local rape victim counseling center whenever a victim of an alleged violation of sections 261, 261.5, 286, 287, or 289 is transported to a hospital for any medical evidentiary or physical exam. The Field Supervisor is responsible for ensuring the counseling center is notified. CRIME SCENE EVIDENCE If the location of the crime is known, the area around the crime scene and escape routes should be thoroughly searched for evidence. Suspects often leave valuable evidence behind at the scene and/or when fleeing, including condoms (and wrappers), cigarettes, matchbooks, wallets, fingerprints, etc. Officers should also look for DNA evidence on bed sheets, blankets, clothing, and/or other paraphernalia (foreign objects used to commit the assault). If items collected potentially contain blood, semen, or body fluids, officers should photograph, collect, package (in paper packaging), document, and place in the evidence freezer as soon as possible. Based on the circumstances, a priority lab may be requested per Manual § 8.3.7.1. VIOLENCE AGAINST WOMEN ACT (VAWA) VAWA is the Violence Against Women Act of 1994. It allows victims, regardless of gender, the right to a sexual assault examination at no expense and without having to cooperate with law enforcement (SB-534 2011-2012). If the victim chooses not to cooperate with the officer and/or answer any questions regarding the assault, officers should follow the protocol for a VAWA Sexual Assault Exam (see Manual § 8.7.8 and 8.7.8.1). PUBLIC RECORD NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENT Under Section 6254(f)(2)A) of the Government Code and Section 293 of the Penal Code, officers must inform the victim their name will become a matter of public record unless they request it not be disclosed. The notification and the victim’s response should be documented in the electronic incident report. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 168 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 81 – Beach Operation - SUV/Quad/ATV REVISED January 2007 BEACH OPERATION OF SUV/QUAD ATV VEHICLES INTRODUCTION With the growing number of citizens utilizing city beach areas, SUV’s (sport utility vehicles) and Quad ATV’s (all-terrain vehicles) have become necessary tools for effective policing. The use of such vehicles on the beach allows officers the ability to drive in areas where conventional police vehicles are not practical. Although SUV’s and Quad ATV’s can traverse sand, water and other hazardous terrain, great care and consideration must be given due to ever changing conditions. Officers must understand that although DIV. 3 CVC, Rules Of The Road sections do not apply when operating these vehicles, Div. 16.5 CVC, Off Highway Vehicles provides specific guidelines for the operation of these vehicles off highway. Beach areas present the SUV/Quad ATV operator with hazards not commonly encountered during normal street driving. Therefore, defensive driving techniques and awareness must be implemented in order to avoid collisions under both emergency and routine beach driving conditions. SUV/QUAD ATV VEHICLES DEFINED SUV’s are generally described as two or four-wheel-drive trucks or automobiles with a higher center of gravity, often utilized for carrying passengers and/or cargo and moderate towing. SUV’s are outfitted with large wheels and tires, heavy-duty suspension, and considerable vertical ground clearance. SUV’s may be used on or off road. QUAD/ATV’s are generally described as two or four-wheel-drive single rider vehicles with handlebar steering, throttle, and brake controls. Quad/ATV’s are authorized for off road use only. Quad/ATV’s are vehicles fifty inches or less in width, suspended on three or more low-pressure tires. Quad/ATV’s may be utilized for towing small trailers or carrying limited cargo, but should not be utilized for carrying passengers. (Section 111 CVC) TRAINING FOR QUAD/ATV OPERATORS A qualified instructor working from a lesson plan approved by the AID-Fleet Safety Unit shall provide training for officers assigned to ride Quad/ATV’s on beaches, parks, or special events. DOT/SNELL rated helmets shall be worn during all aspects of training. Training will consist of, but not limited to, practical application exercises in the following: • Quad/ATV nomenclature • Vehicle dynamics 81 – Beach Operations 169 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Operating and control procedures • Rider safety and responsibility • Proper speed and hazardous conditions recognition • Balance and counter balance • Emergency response tactics BEACH AREA HAZARDS Patrolling beach areas in SUV’s or Quad/ATV’s presents unique hazards for the operator. Officers must use sound judgment in evaluating and adjusting for potentially hazardous conditions. A beach hazard is defined as anything either natural or man- made that has the potential to cause damage to property or injury to persons. Natural Beach Hazards Sand Berms- can obstruct a driver’s view when ascending or descending a berm. If it is necessary to drive over a berm, give an audible signal (voice, horn, siren, PA system) to alert anyone who may not be aware of an approaching vehicle. Attempt to drive at angles, which will maximize the driver’s view. The edge of sand berms or gullies may give way suddenly from the weight of a vehicle causing sudden weight transfer, thus causing a vehicle to roll or become unstable. NEVER drive over an area that you can’t see, get out and walk it first. Gullies- or storm drain trenches cut paths through the beach and should be avoided. The sides of the gullies can be steep and may cause a vehicle to become grounded when attempting to cross. These can appear and disappear daily due to rain and water runoff or routine beach maintenance. Quicksand- can be exposed at low tide and may cause a vehicle to sink to the frame. The east beach (peninsula area) in the area of 60th Place to 68th Place is most hazardous due to the beach sand replenishment program. Storm Debris- should be avoided as they can be kicked up under the vehicle and can cause damage to a vehicle’s body and undercarriage. Holes and Dips- in the sand can cause damage to a vehicle, especially at higher speeds. Sand Storms- and fog can reduce visibility, speeds should be reduced and vehicle running lights turned on. Small gullies can easily be concealed by sand storms. Water- Avoid driving in the water if possible. Salt water can affect braking and, if not washed from the vehicle, becomes corrosive over time. Man Made Beach Hazards Wind Blocks- A wind block can be anything used to block the wind for a beach patron. Trashcans, storm debris piles, canopies and sand berms may obstruct a driver’s view 81 – Beach Operations 170 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents of anyone who may be on the other side a wind block. Use great care while driving near wind blocks or any uneven surface. Holes- Children will often dig deep holes in the sand in an attempt to conceal themselves. Be cautious when driving near these holes, as children may be startled by the vehicle and run from the hole into the path of the vehicle. A vehicle entering a hole may become disabled or damaged. LBMC 16.08.440 Digging holes on beaches. - No person shall dig or cause to be dug, holes exceeding a depth of two feet (2') in or along the beaches of the marinas. Any person who digs or causes to be dug any hole in or along the beaches shall fill the hole before leaving the beach area. (Ord. C-5625 § 4 (part), 1980: prior code § 7222.9). Pier- When attempting to drive a vehicle under the pier, ensure that the path is clear of beach patrons and that there will be enough vertical clearance. During high tide, conditions may be such that it is unsafe to drive under the pier. Consider using the bike path or surface streets. Bike Path- Pedestrians, skaters and bicyclists frequent the bike path, which may become congested during peak hours. Use caution when crossing the bike path near parking lot areas, as bicyclists and skaters often fail to stop for cross traffic. Avoid driving or parking vehicles on the bike path if possible, this will ensure a safe flow of traffic. If driving on the bike path is necessary, drive on the downwind side to reduce the amount of sand blown onto the bike path. Volleyball Poles & Netting- can blend with the beach background. Kite Surfers- Kite surfers can be blown across the beach by strong gusts of wind. When this occurs, they have little control and can be blown into the path of vehicles. Kite lines are often stretched across the sand, and may not be visible to the vehicle operator. (Officer Safety Note! Kite control lines are made of Kevlar. This could cause serious injury or even death if the line were to pass across or through the body.) LBMC 16.16.010 Prohibited acts. • (L). Leave any kite board control line laying on the beach when the parasail kite is not in use. Control lines should be secured in such a manner so as not to create an obstruction for any city equipment or vehicles, or for patrons of the beach. • (M). Flying a kite within one hundred feet (100') of the bike path. • (N). Allowing kite control lines to cross the bike path while flying a kite. ROUTINE DRIVING CONSIDERATIONS Speeds on or near beach areas must be adjusted for conditions. Attempt to keep speeds below 15 MPH when within 50’ of beach patrons in accordance with section 38310 CVC, Prima Facie Speed Limit as it applies to off highway vehicles. DON’T assume that beach patrons will hear or see a vehicle. DO assume that children will run in front of a vehicle. Children often times don’t look, or may appear to make eye contact, 81 – Beach Operations 171 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents but run in front of the vehicle anyway. SUV’s should be driven on the sand in four-wheel- drive if so equipped. • When patrolling the beach, drive slowly. After stopping, always check under and around the vehicle before moving • Avoid driving through crowds or crowded areas whenever possible • Always activate the vehicle headlights when driving on the beach • Be alert and watch for hazards • Use a course that will keep the vehicle furthest from beach patrons • When making turns, make left turns whenever possible. This will increase visibility for the operator • Avoid backing the vehicle if possible • Be aware of children and dogs, they may run in front of vehicles • Watch for adults and children who bury themselves in the sand • Be aware of dust from the vehicle and be courteous to all beach patrons; the slower you drive, the less dust EMERGENCY DRIVING CONSIDERATIONS Beach operation of a SUV/Quad ATV (if properly equipped) during a Code-3 response poses additional risks not typical to Code-3 street driving. Although beach patrons should yield the right of way to a vehicle operating with red lights and siren, the operator should recognize the need for greater care and patience when doing so. Vehicle operators driving Code-3 on the beach must adhere to the Long Beach Police Departments Code-3 policy, and must exercise due regard when responding Code-3 in an emergency. Section 38305 CVC- Off Highway Vehicles Basic Speed Law states: No person shall drive an off-highway motor vehicle at a speed greater than is reasonable or prudent and in no event at a speed which endangers the safety of other persons or property. Remember: • An emergency must exist (perceived, or actual) • Use the lights and siren to give adequate warning • Speeds during Code 3 operation must be appropriate for conditions • Children may panic and bolt towards parents upon hearing the siren • Some may disregard a Code 3 response and demand right of way • Braking distance on sand will be increased as speeds increase • Maneuverability on sand is severely compromised REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 172 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 82 – Operation of Emergency Vehicles REVISED August 2000 OPERATION OF EMERGENCY VEHICLES INTRODUCTION Today in law enforcement, traffic collisions claim nearly as many police officers’ lives as do felonious assaults. Many officers believe that when they turn on the red lights and siren they are exempt from harm and that every other driver within miles will automatically stop and give them the right of way. While there are legal provisions to protect the officer, they must learn to use caution and be prepared for sudden and unexpected encounters with other vehicles. In addition, they must know the limitations of the vehicle and what it can do under emergency situations. All officers must be well acquainted with defensive driving techniques in order to avoid collisions under both emergency and routine driving conditions. AUTHORIZED EMERGENCY VEHICLE DEFINED Vehicle Code §165 defines an authorized emergency vehicle as a vehicle furnished by the City for the use of police officers in the performance of their duties. When an authorized emergency vehicle is sounding a siren, and has at least one lighted red lamp visible from the front of the vehicle, Vehicle Code §21806 requires that surrounding traffic yield the right of way. But nothing in the Vehicle Code relieves the driver of the emergency vehicle from driving with due regard for the safety of all persons using the highway. LEGAL PROVISIONS FOR OPERATING EMERGENCY VEHICLES CODE THREE Emergency Conditions Vehicle Code §21055 provides that the driver of an authorized emergency vehicle shall be exempt from the provisions of the Vehicle Code commonly referred to as the “rules of the road”. However, the exemptions apply only when the vehicle is being operated under one or more of the following circumstances: • In response to an emergency call • In the immediate pursuit of an actual violator of the law • In the immediate pursuit of a suspected violator of the law AND all of the following conditions exist: • The vehicle driven is an authorized emergency vehicle 82 –Operation of Emergency Vehicles 173 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • A siren is being sounded in a manner that gives reasonable warning of the approach of the vehicle • One lighted red lamp, visible in normal atmospheric conditions for a distance of 1000 feet, is displayed to the front of the vehicle No privilege to operate a vehicle in disregard of the “rules of the road” can be established unless these conditions exist. Even after all these conditions have been met, the privilege is denied if the driver of the emergency vehicle fails to show due regard for the safety of all persons using the highway or arbitrarily exercises their privilege. Emergency Response Experience has shown that the use of the siren and red light does not always assure an officer of immediate right of way. The human element is always present and under emergency conditions, various motorists and pedestrians will react differently. An officer is seldom, if ever, justified in traveling at a speed greater than the designated speed. A phrase often heard is “code two” response, which is defined as “urgent-no red lights or sirens”, and implies something less than code three but more than normal driving. However, there is no excuse for violating any rules of the road when you are not traveling code three. Certain circumstances might justify higher speeds while traveling code three; but those circumstances must outweigh the additional hazards that accompany higher speeds. • Goal: arrive as quickly and safely as possible • Keep the vehicle under control at all times • Drive at a speed that will allow reaction to hazards • Properly use the siren and red lights so that other motorists and pedestrians will be given adequate warning • Remember, a collision en route to the scene merely creates another police problem and delays handling of the initial problem • Obey the rules of the road if not exempted by a code three response THE SIREN Tests show that siren sound waves have a greater intensity ahead of as opposed to the sides or behind a police unit. Sound waves measured at 45 degrees to the left rear of the emergency vehicle were only one-third as effective as those measured directly in front. Results indicate that motorists at right angles to an emergency vehicle with activated lights and sirens will not normally hear the siren at the same distance as a vehicle directly in front of the emergency vehicle. An officer must anticipate that a motorist approaching an intersection from a side street may not stop as soon as distant motorists directly ahead. Buildings can also deflect sound waves put out by a siren, which would create a problem when a motorist is around a corner and at right angles to an emergency vehicle. Motorists who have their car windows rolled up, or a radio, heater or air conditioner on, will have difficulty hearing the siren. An officer needs to take into account many variables when driving code three. The following are prudent assumptions to make: 82 –Operation of Emergency Vehicles 174 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • All other motorists are deaf. The DMV does issue driver’s licenses to deaf persons • Other motorists are inattentive to their driving and to other traffic • The windows of other cars are rolled up and effective at blocking out sound • Car radios are playing and/or conversation is taking place in other cars • Other motorists will become confused and anything is possible when they hear the siren Passing and Following Other Vehicles A police unit using a siren must pass traffic on the left, even if it may be necessary to drive across the centerline of the roadway. The vehicle code directs other motorists to pull to the right upon hearing an approaching siren and often motorists will swerve abruptly to the right. Passing on the right cautiously is only an option if there is absolutely no other course open. A police unit should not closely follow another emergency vehicle that is traveling code three in the event that a motorist, who has yielded to the siren by pulling to the right, swerves back into traffic abruptly after the code three vehicle passes. In conclusion: • The use of a red light and siren does not guarantee all motorists will yield • People react differently when they hear a siren and anything is possible • Excessive speed is seldom justified and is a very dangerous practice • In every situation, officer and citizen safety is the main factor to consider CIVIL LIABILITY Vehicle Code §17004 relieves a police officer from civil liability for personal injury to, or death of any person, or damage to property resulting from the operation of an authorized emergency vehicle in the line of duty. This exemption is provided if the vehicle is responding to an emergency call or in the immediate pursuit of an actual or suspected violator of the law. The section does not relieve an officer from possible criminal liability such as manslaughter, nor does it relieve the City from civil liability. The City is only protected when the siren is sounded and the red light displayed and the vehicle is responding to an emergency call or in pursuit of an actual or suspected violator of the law. It is the duty of the driver of an authorized emergency vehicle to exercise that amount of care that, under all the circumstances, would not impose upon others an unreasonable risk of harm. Always ask the question, “What would a reasonable and prudent driver do under all circumstances, including an emergency?” REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 175 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 84 – Defensive Driving Techniques REVISED August 2000 DEFENSIVE DRIVING TECHNIQUES INTRODUCTION Once learned and applied, the following techniques of defensive driving will help prevent collisions, no matter whether you are engaged in an emergency response, routine patrol or chauffeuring the family. The purpose of this training bulletin is to outline five simple rules pertaining to defensive driving. GENERAL The Smith System of driving was developed by Harold Smith, a veteran driving instructor formerly with Ford Motor Company. The System is described as the “ultimate” in defensive driving and it is a positive approach to protecting yourself from the irregular and inconsistent actions of other motorists. Rather than relying on an indefinite series of reactions to unanticipated movements of others, the Smith System provides you with a positive plan for your own driving pattern. Traffic can be described as a collection of individual drivers manipulating their cars, trucks and buses in the confines of the roadway. The manner in which you handle your car, your spacing and speed, directly affects the reactions and safety of everyone else in the immediate area. The Smith System is based on space and visibility. The more space and visibility you have, the smoother and safer your driving will be. When you don’t provide proper spacing between your car and the car in front of you, you lose the ability to see all that is up ahead. And up ahead is where you are going. Space and visibility are not a system of car control but rather a guide to techniques in driving which provide the closest thing to an accident free driving guarantee that you will ever find. RULE #1- AIM HIGH IN STEERING Smith: “Your first consideration in Space Cushion driving is to find a safe initial path for your vehicle, a place to put your vehicle and keep it moving in a safe steering path.” For illustration purposes, compare driving with walking. When walking, rather then watching your feet, you usually look about 25 feet ahead of your path. Walking speed is generally only about 3 to 4 miles per hour. When driving a vehicle at 25 to 30 miles per hour, you must have a steering path picked out several hundred feet ahead. When walking through a doorway, you usually look beyond the doorway, not at either side of the door jam, and 84 – Defensive Driving 176 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents follow through with your walk. You can’t throw a ball at a target or ride a bicycle and keep your balance unless you are looking at the place where you want the bicycle or ball to go. That’s how it is with steering a vehicle. Give a frequent, quick glance well ahead of the center of your driving path. Your car will travel on center in your lane. Aiming high in steering is a comfortable and effective technique to find a safe driving path. RULE #2-GET THE BIG PICTURE The big picture is sidewalk to sidewalk wide and extends from your front bumper to a full city block ahead on the street at city driving speed. The big picture contains your total field of vision, which includes objects and ground. Ground is background and refers to pavement, curbs, parking meters, poles, and unoccupied, parked vehicles; things that won’t move. Most of the objects are likely to be people, people walking, riding bikes, driving cars in all directions or sitting in cars parked at the curb. Other objects also include traffic control devices. In viewing the big picture, take note of objects up to one block ahead that will affect you or be affected by you as you move down the roadway. Your eyes and mind must consistently select those objects that will be affected by your vehicle’s movements. • Eliminate physical barriers that would prevent you from seeing a full block ahead; trucks, buses or any large vehicle blocking your field of vision • Establish a minimum of six car lengths following distance in front of you: – Allows you to comfortably ignore the vehicle ahead of you – Allows you to scan a full city block, maintaining an eye lead time of 8-12 seconds • The car or cars ahead of you should be viewed only as a small part of the big roadway scene RULE #3- KEEP YOUR EYES MOVING A common excuse at accident scenes is “I just didn’t see him”. Their cell phone, other vehicle occupants, eating, other traffic and tuning the radio can distract drivers. To avoid a preventable collision, keep your eyes on the road, and keep them moving. When your eyes stop moving and taking in what’s happening on the road, while your vehicle is still moving, the chances of something or someone crossing your path unexpectedly increase exponentially. RULE #4- LEAVE YOURSELF AN OUT Your vehicle should never travel ahead of your eyes. If you let your vehicle arrive somewhere before you have checked out every conceivable avenue of surprise, you will be surprised. An accident is almost always an unexpected event. “Space Cushion Driving” is all about leaving yourself an out. You have a built in “out” that travels with you wherever you go. RULE #5- MAKE SURE THEY SEE YOU Communication is important. To prevent other people, be they pedestrians, bicyclists or motorists, from setting up a conflict with you, you must make sure they see you. 84 – Defensive Driving 177 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Communicate your intentions by the use of the horn, headlights, turn signals, hand signals and eye contact. Employ these tools positively in a controlled approach so there is no mistaking your intentions. The proper, friendly use of the horn in advance of a situation will lend itself well with eye to eye contact. Another useful communication measure includes soft brake taps to warn of slowing traffic ahead. CONCLUSION The Smith Driving System is useful only if you apply and practice the rules outlined. The objective is to improve your driving awareness and your driving skill. The result will be a higher degree of safety on the road for you and the public. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 178 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 85 – CNS Depressants REVISED July 2000 CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM DEPRESSANTS INTRODUCTION Central nervous system (CNS) depressants, which include alcohol, are the most widely abused drugs. This category includes barbiturates, non-barbiturates, anti-anxiety tranquilizers, anti-psychotic tranquilizers, certain anti-depressants and certain pharmaceutical combinations that contain more than one type of CNS depressant. Included in this category are benzodiazepines, chloral hydrate, methaqualone, lithium and phenobarbital, to name a few. These drugs, commonly called “downers”, mirror the effects of alcohol, but without the alcoholic odor. EFFECTS Central nervous system depressants produce relaxation, drowsiness, impaired balance and coordination, slurred speech, a lowering of inhibition and an increase in risk-taking behavior. They typically depress the vital signs such as pulse and blood pressure. They generally produce nystagmus but do not affect pupil size. These drugs are very dangerous when taken with alcohol. When prescribed by a doctor, they usually contain a warning advising the user to refrain from driving, operating machinery and using alcohol when taking the medication. Central nervous system depressants slow down the operation of the brain. They first affect those areas of the brain that control a person’s conscious or voluntary actions. As dosages increase, depressants begin to affect the parts of the brain that control the body’s automatic or unconscious processes such as heart rate and respiration. An overdose can produce death. COMMON DEPRESSANTS Alcohol is the model for the CNS depressant category of drug. Alcohol is the most familiar and most widely abused depressant. With some exceptions, all depressants affect people in much the same way. Some major sub-categories of central nervous system depressants other than alcohol include: • Barbiturates (a derivative of barbiturate acid) e.g., Secobarbital, trade name Seconal; Phenobarbital, trade name Nembutal • Non-barbiturates (synthetic compounds with a variety of chemical structures) e.g., Chloral Hydrate, trade name Noctec; Methaqualone, trade name Quaalude 85 – CNS Depressants 179 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Anti-anxiety tranquilizers e.g., Diazepam, trade name Valium; Alprazolam, trade name Xanax • Anti-depressants (prescribed to combat psychological depression, known as mood elevators) e.g., Iscarboxazid, trade name Marplan; Amitriptyline Hydrochloride, trade name Elavil • Anti-psychotic tranquilizers e.g., Haloperidol, trade name Haldol; Chlorpromazine, trade name Thorazine • Combinations, e.g., Chlordiazepoxide and Amitriptyline, trade name Limitrol; Perphenazine and Amitriptyline Hydrochloride, trade name Travil METHODS OF INGESTION Most users of this type of drug ingest their drugs orally. Although not a common practice, some barbiturate abusers do inject their drugs intravenously. The injection paraphernalia used by barbiturate abusers is similar to that used by heroin users, however a wider gauge needle is used because the barbiturate solution is thicker than the heroin solution. The injection sites will show large swelling and may develop ulceration resembling cigarette burns. UNDER THE INFLUENCE As the name implies, central nervous system depressants tend to depress the nervous system. For the most part, this will cause the pulse and the blood pressure to be lower than normal. A person under the influence of depressants will appear “drunk” or extremely drowsy. Signs and symptoms of central nervous system depressant abuse EYES • Horizontal gaze nystagmus (this condition was once referred to as the “barb bounce”) • Vertical nystagmus at high doses • Non-convergence (can’t cross their eyes) • Near normal pupil size • Slow pupillary reaction to varying degrees of light • Impaired smooth pursuit, (the eyeballs do not track objects smoothly from side to side) • Droopy eyelids (appears as though the subject is falling asleep) VITAL SIGNS • Lowered blood pressure • Lowered pulse • Near normal temperature OBSERVABLE PHYSICAL SIGNS 85 – CNS Depressants 180 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Drunken behavior • Thick, slurred speech • Gait ataxia; (inability of the person to walk a straight line) • Impaired coordination • Impaired balance • Knee tremors • Impaired divided attention (subject cannot do two things at once) SYMPTOMS • Disorientation • Drowsiness Methaqualone and alcohol will produce effects somewhat different than what you may expect from other depressant type drugs. With methaqualone use, the pupils will be dilated and the pulse elevated. With alcohol intoxication, the blood pressure and pulse may be elevated. It is believed this occurs because the alcohol in the blood displaces the oxygen, forcing the heart to pump faster and harder to keep what little oxygen is left in the blood flowing to the brain. CONCLUSION Depressant type drugs effect people much the same way as alcohol. Overdose may cause coma and then death. Be aware that many people abuse their prescription drugs and may be under the influence when involved in activity such as traffic collisions, and disputes. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 181 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 86 – CNS Stimulants REVISED September 2019 REVIEWED September 2019 CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM STIMULANTS INTRODUCTION Central nervous system (CNS) stimulant drugs speed up the operation of the brain and the spinal cord. They do not improve the operation of the brain but make the brain work harder, which often leads to the person making more mistakes. After using a stimulant, the user will experience an increase in heart rate, respiration and blood pressure. An abuser will experience nervousness, irritability and an inability to concentrate or think clearly. Continued use can lead to physical harm and death. The following are the three major subcategories of central nervous stimulant drugs: • Cocaine - rock, crack • Amphetamines - methamphetamine, amphetamine sulfate, biphetamine, Desoxyn • Others - Ritalin, Cylert The two major types of stimulants abused in America are cocaine and the various amphetamine compounds. COCAINE Cocaine is derived from the leaves of the coca plant, an evergreen bush that is native to South America. AMPHETAMINES Amphetamines are synthetic drugs with a high potential for abuse. They were first produced near the end of the 19th century for a number of legitimate uses that include the control of narcolepsy, the control of hyperactive disorders in children, the treatment of mild depression, appetite suppression and the treatment of Parkinson's disease. The following are examples of pharmaceutical amphetamines and their associated street names: • Dexedrine - dexies or hearts; • Benzedrine - bennies or whites; • Biphetamine - black beauties. Amphetamines are also manufactured illegally in clandestine laboratories. They are known as methamphetamine and amphetamine sulfate. Some of the street names for 86 – CNS Stimulants 182 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents methamphetamine are; speed, crystal, meth, and crank. Methamphetamine is sometimes known as methadrine. There are several ways in which CNS stimulants are ingested. Cocaine can be snorted, smoked, injected, and taken orally. Pharmaceutical amphetamines are produced in the form of tablets, capsules, and elixirs, which are all taken orally. Illicitly manufactured amphetamine sulfate usually is produced in tablet form, called mini bennies, and ingested orally. Methamphetamine can be injected, snorted, ingested orally or smoked. SIGNS OF ABUSE Eyes Subjects who are under the influence of CNS stimulants will have pupils dilated above 6.5 mm in normal lighting conditions. It is not uncommon to see the subject’s pupils dilated to above 8.0 mm in darkness. The pupils will also be slow to react in varying light conditions. Vital Signs The subject’s pulse and blood pressure will be elevated. Typically, the pulse will be above 100 beats per minute (BPM), with an increase in blood pressure. The body temperature will also tend to rise. Other Signs The following are possible additional signs and symptoms of CNS stimulant use: • Body tremors • Restlessness • Talkative, rapid, rambling speech • Bruxism (grinding of teeth) • Dry mouth • Impaired balance and coordination • Red and irritated nasal area • Impaired divided attention • Risk taking due to over confidence • Agitation • Increased alertness • Anxiety • Euphoria • Insomnia • Loss of appetite • Paranoia • Hallucinations REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 183 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 87 – Marijuana REVISED September 2019 MARIJUANA INTRODUCTION Marijuana is the most commonly used drug in the United States. It is a dry shredded green/brown mix of flowers, stems, seed, and leaves of the hemp plant cannabis sativa. It is usually smoked as a cigarette (joint, nail), or in a pipe (bong) but is also smoked in blunts, which are cigars that have been emptied of tobacco and refilled with marijuana, often in combination with another drug. Marijuana can also be mixed into food or brewed as tea. A more concentrated, resinous form is called hashish; as a sticky black liquid, it is called hash oil. Marijuana smoke has a pungent and distinctive, usually sweet and sour odor. There are countless street terms for marijuana including pot, herb, weed, grass, widow, ganja, and hash, as well as terms derived from trademarked varieties of cannabis, such as Bubble Gum, Northern Lights, Juicy Fruit, Afghani#1, and numerous Skunk varieties. RECREATIONAL MARIJUANA In November 2016, the majority of California voters passed Proposition 64 – The Control, Regulate and Tax Adult Use of Marijuana Act. California now joins several states including Washington, Oregon, and Colorado where the personal possession and use of marijuana is decriminalized. The State of California now permits adults 21 years of age and over to possess up to one ounce (28.5 grams) and grow up to six marijuana plants, at any one time, for recreational use. Proposition 64 does not alter the Compassionate Use Act (Prop 215) or the Medical Marijuana Regulation and Safety Act (MMRSA). Possession of recreational marijuana will still be a crime if in violation of one of the newly added Health and Safety Code Sections, which regulate the amounts individuals may possess, where cannabis may be used, and the penalties for illegal use or possession. Marijuana remains a schedule one illegal drug under Federal law. Any suspected violations of illegal cultivation or sales of marijuana, however, should be referred to the Office of Cannabis Oversight (OCO), in the Office of the City Manager, which regulates the cannabis industry in Long Beach. The OCO’s role is to coordinate the implementation of the City’s cannabis laws and regulations. SYNTHETIC MARIJUANA 87 – Narcotics 184 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Synthetic marijuana is made of dried herbs and plants that are sprayed with lab-created chemicals that attempt to mimic the effects of marijuana. Synthetic marijuana goes by the name of K2, Spice, Fake Weed, Blaze, Bombay, Blue, Skunk or Dank and is normally sold in foil type packets labeled as “incense” and “not for human consumption.” Because synthetic marijuana is so new, nobody knows much about the long-term damage that it can do to the brain and body. Some of the short-term effects that can appear immediately after consumption are: • Insomnia • Hallucinations and delusions • Paranoia • Convulsions • Suicidal thoughts • Seizures • Severe anxiety • Increased heart rate • Loss of consciousness • Vomiting • Lowered blood pressure and body temperature Both sales, 11357.5(a) H&S, and possession, 11357.5(b) H&S, of synthetic marijuana are considered violations of the law punishable as an infraction or a misdemeanor. CONCLUSION Since marijuana is the most commonly used drug in the United States, contact with those under the influence or in possession of marijuana is not uncommon. As with any investigation, document your observations and actions clearly and completely whenever you make an arrest for under the influence of marijuana or any of other listed Health and Safety Code violations. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 185 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 88 – Narcotic Analgesics REVISED January 30, 2020 NARCOTIC ANALGESICS (OPIATES) DEFINITIONS Narcotic - a drug derived from a species of flowering plant known as the opium poppy or Papaver somniferum, Latin for "the poppy that brings sleep." Opiates relieve pain, induce euphoria, alter mood, and produce sedation. Opiates can also be produced synthetically without using the opium poppy. Analgesic - a drug that relieves pain. It differs from an anesthetic, in that it lowers one's perception of pain, rather than stopping nerve transmission. Non-Narcotic Analgesics – medications such as aspirin, Tylenol (acetaminophen), and Motrin (ibuprofen) relieve pain but do not produce sedation or alter mood. CHARACTERISTICS OF NARCOTIC ANALGESICS All narcotic analgesics share three distinguishing characteristics: • Pain relief (analgesic). • They produce withdrawal signs and symptoms when the drug is withdrawn after chronic use. • Their continued use will suppress the withdrawal signs and symptoms in the chronic user. Any one of the narcotic analgesics can be substituted for each other to relieve withdrawal symptoms. CATEGORIES OF NARCOTIC ANALGESICS ALKALOID - a substance that is found within another substance and can be isolated from it. Common natural alkaloids of opium include: • Morphine is the principal natural alkaloid of opium. It is used to treat severe pain and is very addictive. • Codeine is used to treat coughing and minor pain but can be almost as addictive as morphine. • Dilaudid is used to treat moderate to severe pain and persistent coughs and just as addictive as morphine and heroin. Because it is commercially available, Dilaudid is sometimes called "drug store heroin.” OPIUM DERIVATIVES are unlike natural alkaloids in that they are not naturally occurring; they are produced by chemically treating the natural alkaloid. 88 – Narcotics 186 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Heroin is probably the most well-known of all the derivatives made from chemically treating morphine. It is the most commonly abused of all narcotic analgesics. • Hycodan is made from the natural alkaloid codeine and used to treat coughs. Sometimes hycodan is abused by addicts who are unable to get heroin or morphine. • Percodan is made by chemically treating codeine. Percodan is one of the most commonly prescribed narcotic analgesics. It is less addictive than morphine, but more addictive than codeine. SYNTHETIC OPIUM is artificially produced in a laboratory from non-opiate substances. • Methadone is used in the treatment of heroin addicts because the withdrawal from methadone is slower and milder than with heroin. It is also used to treat severe pain and persistent cough. Methadone's effects are similar to morphine's except that they develop more slowly and last a little longer. • Demerol is used for sedation and treatment of pain. It is probably most widely abused within the medical profession. It is said by some that when using demerol the person's pupils will not constrict. There is no medical evidence to support this claim • Darvon is commonly prescribed because of its low addiction rate. It has a low analgesic potency and is generally prescribed for moderate pain. • Fentanyl include several hundred designer synthetic drug analogs. The most abused of the fentanyls is "three-methyl-fentanyl". It looks just like white heroin but is 50-100 times more potent. • MPPP is illegally manufactured from Demerol and is very addictive. The production of MPPP by "home chemists" often mistakenly produce MPTP; a chemical that produces a paralysis similar to that of Parkinson's disease. Powdered Opium, also known as "smoking opium", is not a derivative but is refined raw opium. This drug is a favorite among the Asian communities and when smoked, is called "chasing the dragon". When used medically, such as for treating diarrhea, it is taken orally. EFFECTS OF NARCOTIC ANALGESIC USE Signs of Drug Use An easy sign a person is a new or non-tolerant narcotic user is a condition known as nodding off. While "on the nod,” the user is in a semi-conscious, sleep-like state that is brought on by the sedative effect of the drug. While on the nod the user's eyelids become droopy and their head will fall forward until it rests on his or her chest. Even though the user appears to be asleep, the user can hear what is being said and will respond when aroused. The user may nod off in mid-sentence and seem to be asleep for several seconds, but once aroused the user may continue the sentence exactly where they left off. Narcotic users will experience certain physical effects immediately after using the drug. These effects include the feeling of euphoria (a feeling of well-being), the relief from withdrawal symptoms, and the relief of pain. Other physical effects will be evident after five to 30 minutes. These effects may not be evident if the user is tolerant and has had only their normal dose. 88 – Narcotics 187 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Tolerance Tolerance plays a large part in what effects the narcotic user will experience and exhibit. As the user develops tolerance, he or she will experience diminishing effects. Tolerance develops very rapidly causing the user to feel very little or no effect from the drug after taking their normal dose. If the user wants to continue to experience the same amount of euphoria, the user will have to take larger and larger doses of the drug to get the same effect. Users commonly become addicted to these types of drugs. When a user takes their tolerant dose, the user may be able to drive a car properly and perform very well on field sobriety tests. Physical Effects The below-listed physical effects may be easy to see and recognize with new or non- tolerant users or the tolerant user who has exceeded their normal dose: Sedation Constricted pupils Being "on the nod" Cold, clammy skin Poor coordination Low, raspy voice Depressed reflexes Impaired divided attention Slow and shallow breathing Gait ataxia Dry mouth Facial itching Flaccid muscle tone Track marks Droopy eyelids Fresh puncture wound For someone who is addicted to a narcotic analgesic, withdrawal signs and symptoms will be evident as the physical effects begin to wear off, usually within 8-12 hours. Withdrawal symptoms can become severe and will not be relieved until the user receives another dose of the drug. At this point the user may appear as if they have a bad cold or the flu. After 14-24 hours the user may develop tremors and dilated pupils. Approximately 24-36 hours after the last "fix," the user will likely experience insomnia, vomiting, diarrhea, weakness, depression and hot and cold flashes. The symptoms will reach their peak after 2-3 days. At this point the user usually experiences muscular and abdominal cramps, elevated temperature, and severe tremors and twitching. This twitching known as a sign of "kicking the habit" is especially noticeable in the legs. The user will be very nauseated and may gag and vomit repeatedly. The user may lose as much as 10-15 pounds in 24 hours. Typical withdrawal signs can include the following: Sweating Goose flesh Hyperactive reflexes Yawning Runny nose Watery eyes Overdose One of the narcotic analgesic user’s biggest problems is the danger of overdose. The danger comes from the user being unaware of the strength of the drug ingested. If the user ingests more than what the user is used to or tolerant of, overdose can result. When a user begins to overdose, his or her breathing slows and becomes shallow. Death is usually the result of severe respiration depression, when the user is unable to breath. 88 – Narcotics 188 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The user's skin may become clammy and the user may experience convulsions before slipping into a coma. Signs and Symptoms of Use A person who is under the influence of a narcotic analgesic will have constricted pupils smaller than 3.0 mm. There will be little or no noticeable reaction to light and the eyelids may appear droopy. The pulse rate will be slow and the blood pressure and temperature lower than normal. The user will appear sedated and may "nod off' in the middle of your interview. The user will have poor motor skills with gait ataxia and depressed reflexes. You may see the user scratch their face. This is due to the release of histamine, which causes the capillaries to dilate and the face to itch. The user may have a dry mouth and clammy skin. A user may request a drink of water and may lick their lips frequently. Their voice may be low and raspy due to the relaxation of the vocal cords. One evident sign someone is using drugs is a fresh puncture wound made by the needle that is used to inject the drug into the body. A fresh puncture wound may appear to be a small red dot and ooze a clear fluid. The puncture wound will heal after about 14 days, but a user will try to inject in the same site as many times as possible to hide the evidence of drug use. When the puncture wound heals it will develop scar tissue. After approximately 100 injections the user will develop approximately one inch of scar tissue along the length of the vein. Most users generally prefer to inject the narcotic intravenously which will cause “track marks” to develop. The examination of these track marks may reveal clues about the user's drug habits. The user can inject the drug anywhere on the body where they can locate a vein. Although the arms and wrists are the most common injection sites, users may use the neck, feet, or ankles. With the proliferation of AIDS, many new narcotic analgesic users prefer to smoke, ingest orally, or inhale their drug. Many Mexican Nationals who use Heroin do not like needles and prefer to inhale the drug by diluting the dose with water, then spraying the dose into their nasal cavity like one would do with nose spray. This minimizes signs such as injection sites and infections that often appear with injecting. Conclusion An addict will have to ingest the drug every 4-6 hours or start to feel the effects of withdrawal. Drug habits are expensive to support on a daily basis, and most of this money is commonly raised through other forms of profitable criminal activity. Officers are reminded to use extreme caution when handling any unknown substance. Improper handling can result in absorption through the skin or accidental inhalation of airborne powder. Onset of adverse health effects, such as disorientation, coughing, respiratory distress, or cardiac arrest is rapid and profound. AUDIT RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 189 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 89 – Hallucinogens REVISED November 2019 HALLUCINOGENS INTRODUCTION Hallucinogens, or psychedelics, are drugs that affect a person's perceptions, sensations, thinking, self-awareness, and emotions. Hallucinogens include such drugs as LSD, ecstasy, mescaline, psilocybin, and DMT. Some hallucinogens come from natural sources, such as mescaline from the peyote cactus. Others, such as LSD or ecstasy (MDMA), are synthetic. PCP and ketamine hydrochloride (Special K) can be considered hallucinogens because they have some of the same effects. However, they do not fit easily into any one drug category because they can also relieve pain or act as stimulants. Hallucinogens are relatively inexpensive, domestically produced, and not part of a network of distributors battling over markets or territory. The popularity of hallucinogens coincides with the growth of underground dance parties, or raves that cater to those under 21. Hallucinogens are often referred to as club drugs. MOST COMMON DRUGS LSD (lysergic acid diethylamide) – Manufactured from lysergic acid, which is found in ergot, a fungus that grows on rye and some other grains. LSD was discovered in 1938 and is one of the most potent mood-changing chemicals. It is odorless, colorless, and tasteless. LSD is sold on the street in tablets, capsules, or liquid form. It is usually taken by mouth but can be injected. It can be added to absorbent paper, such as blotter paper, and divided into small decorated squares, with each square representing one dose. Ecstasy (Methylene dioxymethamphetamine or MDMA) – A synthetic methamphetamine compound that produces both psychedelic and stimulant effects. MDMA was used clinically until 1988 when the Food and Drug Administration reclassified it as a Schedule I controlled substance (i.e., one with no approved use) because of its abuse potential. MDMA is most often found in the form of tablets that sell for $5 to $10 per tablet. Mescaline – Derived from the peyote cactus and although it is not as strong as LSD, its effects are similar. Mescaline is usually smoked or swallowed in the form of capsules or tablets. Molly – Another name given to MDMA and marketed as a purer mixture than ecstasy. Psilocybin – Derived from certain mushrooms. It is sold in tablet or capsule form so people can swallow it. The mushrooms themselves, fresh or dried, may be eaten. The effects are similar to LSD. 190 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents DMT (Dimethyltryptamine) – A psychedelic drug that acts like LSD though its effects are said to be more powerful. It can be injected, smoked or sniffed and the effects begin almost immediately and last for 30-60 minutes. PCP (Phencyclidine) – In its pure form, PCP is a white crystalline powder that readily dissolves in water or alcohol and has a distinctive bitter chemical taste. It contains contaminants that cause the color to range from light to dark brown and has a powdery to gummy consistency. It is available in the form of tablets, capsules, and colored powders, which are taken orally or by insufflation (blowing into a body cavity). The liquid form of PCP is dissolved most often in ether, a highly flammable solvent. For smoking, PCP is typically sprayed onto a leafy material such as mint, parsley, oregano, or marijuana. PCP may also be injected. Officers should use extreme caution while handling this substance as PCP can be absorbed through the skin. Ketamine (Ketamine hydrochloride, Special K) – A non-barbiturate, rapid acting dissociative anesthetic used on both animals and humans. It is being abused by an increasing number of young people as a club drug, and is often distributed at raves and parties. OBJECTIVE SYMPTOMS OF HALLUCINOGEN USE The effects of psychedelics are unpredictable. It depends on the amount taken, the user's personality, mood and expectations, and the surroundings in which the drug is used. Usually, the user feels the first effects of the drug 30-90 minutes after taking it. The following are possible symptoms of someone under the influence of a hallucinogen: Perspiring Warm to the touch Blank stare Difficulty speaking Repetitive speech Hallucinations Violent Dilated pupils Dazed appearance Uncoordinated Nausea Disoriented Memory loss Flashbacks Appetite loss Tremors Sensations and feelings change too. The user may feel several different emotions at once or swing rapidly from one emotion to another. The person's sense of self and time change. Sensations may seem to cross over, giving the user the feeling of "hearing" colors and "seeing" sounds. All these changes can be frightening and cause panic. BAD TRIPS Having a bad psychological reaction to LSD and similar drugs is common. The scary sensations may last a few minutes or several hours and be mildly frightening or terrifying. Sometimes taking a hallucinogen such as LSD can unmask mental or emotional problems that were previously unknown to the user. PCP can produce violent or bizarre behavior in people who are not normally that way. Behavior stemming from a bad trip can lead to 191 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents violent confrontations with police, death from drowning, burns, falls and automobile accidents. ARRESTS BASED ON OBJECTIVE SYMPTOMS State in your report what you saw that led you to believe that the person was under the influence. Include any detail that would be pertinent to the arrest (e.g. subject could not walk a straight line, or subject claimed he could fly). Obtain a breath test to rule out the presence of alcohol. Obtain a voluntary blood sample. For further, refer to Training Bulletin 90 Under the Influence Investigations and Arrests. LEGISLATIVE SUPPORT 11377 H&S – Unauthorized possession (Misdemeanor) 11378 H&S – Possession for sale (Felony) 11378.5 H&S – Possession for sale of designated substances including phencyclidine (Felony) 11379 H&S – Transportation for sale (Felony) 11379.2 H&S – Possession for sale or sale of ketamine (Misdemeanor) 11379.5 H&S – Transportation, sale, furnishing, etc. of designated substances including phencyclidine (Felony) 11379.6 H&S – Manufacturing, compounding, converting, producing, etc. (Felony) 11379.9 H&S – Death or great bodily injury of another person; use of methamphetamine or phencyclidine (Felony) 11380 H&S – Adult using minor as agent; inducing minor to violate provisions; furnishing to minor (Felony) 11382 H&S – Sale or furnishing substances falsely represented to be a controlled substance (Wobbler) CONCLUSION The most common danger to law enforcement when confronted with persons under the influence of hallucinogens is the unpredictability of the situation. Since the drugs affect users differently, an officer is likely to observe a myriad of behaviors. Additionally, the auditory and visual distortion resulting from hallucinogen ingestion can last for 10 to 12 hours. This can endanger the user who drives, their passengers, pedestrians and other cars. The best defense is to be familiar with signs a hallucinogen user is likely to display and treat the situation carefully with full regard for officer safety. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 192 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony W. Batts, Chief of Police 90 – Under the Influence Investigations and Arrests REVISED September 2003 UNDER THE INFLUENCE INVESTIGATIONS AND ARRESTS The impact of drug users/abusers upon society, both economically and criminally, is apparent to the law enforcement community. Drug abusers often resort to crime sprees to support their habits and officers see the impact in more calls for service, higher crime statistics and greater victimization of innocent citizens. The incidence of motor vehicle accidents involving impaired drivers often accounts for more injuries and more property damage than incidents involving drivers not impaired. All of this points to the fact that when officers arrest individuals they believe to be under the influence of an illegal substance, it is imperative they include in the report all of the elements necessary for successful prosecution. The City Prosecutor will evaluate the totality of the circumstances surrounding an arrest for "under the influence" when determining whether or not to file charges. To that end, following are important elements that must be included in your report to enhance any effort to prosecute offenders. Legal Justification for Initial Contact It is essential that arrest reports include the legal justification for your contact with the arrestee (consensual contact, reasonable suspicion for detention or probable cause arrest). • Was it a traffic stop? • Was it a response to a dispatch? • Were you investigating something? • Was it a consensual encounter? (If consensual encounter, state what happened to turn it to a detention. For example: “While talking to the subject, I noticed he had to hold onto a fence rail to balance himself and his pupils appeared to be pinpointed. He was exhibiting signs of narcotic influence”) Arrest Based on Objective Symptoms State in your report what you saw that led you to believe that the person was under the influence. Include any detail that would be pertinent to the arrest (e.g. subject could not walk a straight line, or subject yawned several times, etc.) There are seven main categories of drugs. Each category will exhibit distinct and sometimes crossover observable physical signs. The categories and some signs are: Central Nervous System Depressants 90 – Under the Influence Arrests 193 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Drunken behavior Thick, slurred speech Impaired coordination Impaired balance Impaired divided attention Disorientation Drowsiness Central Nervous System Stimulants Dry mouth Impaired balance and coordination Red and irritated nasal area Impaired divided attention Body tremors Restlessness Talkative, rapid, rambling speech Bruxism (grinding of teeth) Insomnia Hallucinations Agitation Increased alertness Anxiety Euphoria Dilated pupils Narcotic Analgesics (opiates) Sedation Being "on the nod" Poor coordination Slow and shallow breathing Dry mouth Flaccid muscle tone Droopy eyelids Constricted pupils Cold, clammy skin Impaired divided attention Facial itching Track marks Fresh puncture wound Inhalants Residue around nose and mouth Slurred speech Disorientation Lack of muscle control Flushed face Non-communicative 90 – Under the Influence Arrests 194 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Intense Headaches PCP Horizontal/vertical nystagmus Perspiring Warm to the touch Blank stare Difficulty in speech Repetitive speech Hallucinations Possibly violent Cannabis Dilated pupils Odor of marijuana Marijuana debris in mouth Body tremors Eyelid tremors Relaxed inhibitions Hallucinogens Dilated pupils Dazed appearance Hallucinations Uncoordinated Nausea Disoriented Difficulty in speech Perspiring Memory loss Flashbacks Statements Statements made by the subject are important to your investigation. Officers often develop a rapport with the subject and are able to obtain admissions on the type, quantity and frequency of drug use. Many subjects state that they are taking prescribed controlled substances. This would be an affirmative defense, but it falls on the defense to prove it. Admissions, if obtained properly, are used to support your conclusions. Training and Experience List in the report your formal training and experience. For some officers this might be academy training and time in the field. Combine this information with the number of people you have seen, investigated and arrested who have been under the influence. Some officers will have extensive training (DRE). Every investigation and arrest adds to the depth of your knowledge and experience. Chemical Evidence 90 – Under the Influence Arrests 195 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents If you believe the subject is under the influence, obtain a breath test to either include or exclude the presence of alcohol. Most officers who work these investigations on a regular basis build a relationship with the subject, which makes it easier to obtain voluntary blood or urine samples. To successfully prosecute these cases, the City Prosecutor is heavily reliant upon the analysis of chemical samples. A urine sample is preferred, but it does present a greater biohazard risk to the officer. If there is a jail nurse on duty, the blood sample can be drawn at the station. If the person is a driver and you suspect drug use. Implied consent law requires the driver to submit to a breath test and, either a blood or urine test. Be sure to complete the DMV Officer’s Statement form DS367 (located in booking) and read the subject the drug admonition located on the back of the first page. Conclusion By adhering to these recommendations, we significantly increase the chances of successfully prosecuting “Under the Influence” arrests. The City Prosecutor’s office aggressively prosecutes 11550 H/S cases. While Proposition 36 provides for “drug diversion” in lieu of prosecution in “Under the Influence” cases, the majority of cases are still being prosecuted locally. Often times, arrestees are opting for prosecution with short jail sentences, over lengthy diversion programs. By continuing to aggressively arrest individuals for “Under the Influence” we can potentially significantly impact crime within our community. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 196 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 91 – Citizen’s Arrest REVISED May 2003 PRIVATE PERSON'S (CITIZEN'S) ARREST INTRODUCTION Under California law, private persons, whether citizens or not, have the right to effect a "private person's arrest" under specific circumstances. It is an officer's responsibility to be aware of these rights and to inform the complainant of the laws of arrest and post- arrest procedures. §837 PC - PRIVATE PERSON'S AUTHORITY TO ARREST A private person may arrest another: 1- For a public offense committed or attempted in his/her presence 2- When the person arrested has committed a felony, although not in his/her presence 3- When a felony has in fact been committed and he/she has reasonable cause for believing the person arrested to have committed it §847 PC - A private person who has arrested another for the commission of a public offense must, without unnecessary delay, take the arrested person before a magistrate, or deliver him/her to a peace officer. There shall be no civil liability on the part of, and no cause of action shall arise against, any peace officer acting within the scope of his/her authority for false arrest and/or false imprisonment arising out of any arrest when: • The arrest was lawful or when the peace officer, at the time of the arrest, had reasonable cause to believe the arrest was lawful; or • The arrest was made pursuant to a charge made, upon reasonable cause, of the commission of a felony by the person to be arrested; or • The arrest was made pursuant to the requirements of Penal Code §142, §838 or §839 §142 PC - (a) Any peace officer who has the authority to receive or arrest a person charged with a criminal offense and willfully refuses to receive or arrest such person is guilty of a felony/misdemeanor (wobbler). (c) This section shall not apply to arrests made pursuant to §837 PC. (Amended Jan 1, 2003) §838 PC - A magistrate may orally order a peace officer or private person to arrest anyone committing or attempting to commit a public offense in the presence of such magistrate. §839 PC - Any person making an arrest may orally summon as many persons as he deems necessary to aid him therein. 91 – Citizen’s Arrest 197 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents MISDEMEANOR OFFENSES Officers who are dispatched regarding a private person's arrest must keep in mind that generally they do not have the authority to make an arrest without a warrant for a misdemeanor not committed in their presence. • Officers must confirm the arresting citizen actually witnessed the offense and detained the suspect(s) at the time of the offense • The arrest must be made contemporaneous to the commission of the offense and not several days later • Officers must also investigate and determine if the act(s) committed by the arrested person constitutes a crime Additionally, in virtually all situations involving a private arrest, the officer's duty is simply to "receive" the arrestee and remove him or her from the scene. Once the arrest is "received" there is always the option of a §849(b)PC release, even immediately right at the scene, if appropriate. §849(b) PC states an officer may release any person arrested without a warrant whenever: • There are insufficient grounds for filing a criminal complaint • The person was arrested for intoxication only, and no further proceedings are desirable • The person was arrested only for being under the influence of a controlled substance or drug, and such person is delivered to a facility or hospital for treatment and no further proceedings are desirable OFFICER'S RESPONSIBILITY Must an officer "accept" a person who has been placed under citizen's arrest for a crime where probable cause does not appear to be present? No, officers may exercise their judgment as to acceptance of questionable citizen's arrests, in order to reduce the risk of federal liability, where probable cause does not appear to be present. If you do "receive" the arrestee or otherwise take custody of him, you have three options: • Book the suspect into jail (this is the typical disposition for a felony) • Cite and release the suspect per Department guidelines • Simply release (RNB) the suspect without issuing a notice to appear (This option is the way to go when you believe there are "insufficient grounds for making a criminal complaint") Adhere to released not booked (RNB) policy (Manual §7.1.22). If an officer accepts the arrested person, he/she must make it clear to all parties that he/she is merely the transporting officer and the private person is the arresting party. In the officer's presence, the arresting party should verbally advise the prisoner that he/she is under arrest and identify the crime with which he/she is being charged. 91 – Citizen’s Arrest 198 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents In all citizen arrest cases involving the physical arrest or issuance of a misdemeanor citation to an offender, officers must complete the Private Person's Arrest Report, PD Form 4100.021. A copy of this report should be provided to the arresting citizen. FELONY CRIMES If, after an investigation, the officer has reasonable cause to believe a felony has been committed, the officer can arrest the person under the authority of §836 PC, which allows a peace officer to make an arrest for a felony although it was not committed in his/her presence. A private person also has broader powers of arrest on felony cases and, if the citizen legally arrests the suspect, the officer has the duty to receive the prisoner. COMPETENCY OF PERSONS TO MAKE ARRESTS It is important for the officer who receives the request to accept an arrested person to consider the competency of the private person to qualify as a witness. If the case depends on the testimony of a complainant who would not be a competent witness, no arrest should be made. Intoxicated or Mentally Ill Persons An officer should "receive" but not book an arrestee from a person who, at the time the act was allegedly observed, was mentally ill or intoxicated to the extent that he/she would not be a competent witness. If a person in this category who wishes to make an arrest confronts an officer and there appears to be some basis for an arrest, a memorandum to the Deputy Chief of the Detective Bureau shall be filed. This memorandum should include all pertinent information regarding the complainant and arrestee, a description of the circumstances, and a statement explaining why the arrestee was not booked. This information should remain on file in the responsible investigative Detail for one year in the event the complainant contacts the Department at a later date. Juvenile Age, alone, is not necessarily a factor that would bar a person from making an arrest. Successful prosecutions have been made when the arresting person was as young as 12 years of age. If the officer concludes that the victim would be a qualified witness and the arrest is legal, it is his/her duty to accept the subject. If, however, the officer feels the victim would not be a qualified witness or that the arrest is not legal, he/she should "receive" the arrested person and then RNB them in the field. When there is any doubt in the officer's mind as to effecting a citizen's arrest, an alternative is to file a complete Incident Report. COMPLAINT V. ARREST PROCEDURE 91 – Citizen’s Arrest 199 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Misdemeanor cases can often be resolved without the physical arrest of the offender. The officer should inform the complainant that the matter can be presented to the City Prosecutor's Office by making an arrest, issuing a misdemeanor citation, or filing an Incident Report. When the misdemeanor is of a minor nature, the private person can file an Incident Report with the investigating officer instead of making a physical arrest. The report will be examined by the City Prosecutor's Office and, if justified, a complaint will be filed and a warrant issued. This procedure may be followed when: • The offender has a permanent address • Public peace will not be further disturbed • No further police investigation is necessary • Cases of petty theft or drinking in public when the officer may release an offender with a misdemeanor citation after he/she has been placed under a citizen's arrest Refer to Training Bulletin 123 "Misdemeanor Citations" for those violations for which a person will not be cited. CONCLUSION While every private person may have the right to effect a citizen's arrest, not every private person knows and understands the laws of arrest. For this reason, when you, as a police officer, are asked to receive such an arrest, you need to clearly understand your responsibilities in the situation. It is important you know what to do with the arrest, and what to explain to the arresting person. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 200 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 94 – DUI REVISED December 2000 DRIVING UNDER THE INFLUENCE INTRODUCTION Driving under the influence (DUI) is a very real problem for law enforcement and the public, claiming on average nearly 30,000 lives each year throughout the U.S. and causing nearly 31,000 injuries in California alone. It is sad but important to note, nearly every officer reading this bulletin has either had a family member injured or killed by a DUI driver, or personally knows of someone else’s family that has suffered because of a DUI driver. The term DUI has replaced “drunk driving” due to many social reviews. It is inaccurate to believe a person must be “drunk” to be arrested for DUI, as drunk usually implies a person who has difficulty with many motor functions and is visibly impaired. Anyone can walk into a bar and after a few moments spot a drunk because they stand out so well. Impaired is defined as someone who, because of their level of intoxication by alcohol or drugs, cannot operate a motor vehicle safely. As a trained police officer, you are expected to apprehend the impaired driver as well as the drunk driver. Current State law states that it is illegal to operate a motor vehicle with a blood alcohol content (BAC) of 0.08% or higher, regardless of impairment. PURPOSE Because of the widespread problem of people driving under the influence, making a traffic stop and DUI arrest is a common occurrence for a patrol officer. Filing a DUI arrest report has been perceived as very complex, both because of the different vehicle codes involved and the number of report forms required. This training bulletin is designed to answer most of the questions an officer might have about filing a DUI report and it includes a flow chart of the paperwork required. VEHICLE CODE SECTIONS AND PERCENT BLOOD ALCOHOL LEVELS • §23152(a) CVC - Under the influence of alcohol, drugs or combination, when the BAC is unknown (i.e. blood test) or not greater than 0.08%, but the level of impairment is great enough to warrant the arrest (misdemeanor) • §23152(b) CVC - The BAC is known at the time of the arrest and it is 0.08% or higher (misdemeanor) • §23152 (d) CVC – Commercial operator, while operating a commercial vehicle, with a BAC of 0.04% or greater (misdemeanor) 94 – DUI 201 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • §23153 (a) CVC – Under the influence of alcohol, drugs or combination, when the BAC is unknown (i.e. blood test) or not greater than 0.08%, but the level of impairment is great enough to warrant the arrest, and the driver caused injury to anyone other than themselves (felony) • §23153(b) CVC – The BAC is known at the time of the arrest and is 0.08% or higher and the driver caused injury to anyone other than themselves (felony) • §23153 (d) CVC – Commercial operator, while operating a commercial vehicle, with a BAC of 0.04% or greater and the driver caused injury to anyone other than themselves (felony) • §23550 CVC – Any violator who has 3 prior arrests for DUI (including charges reduced to reckless driving) within seven years of the current arrest is able to have their charge enhanced to a felony • §23140 (a) CVC - Juvenile DUI (Under 21), BAC 0.05% or greater • §23136 CVC - Enabling section allowing officers to confiscate the CDL of a juvenile driver whose BAC is 0.01% or greater • §40300.5 CVC - allows you to make an arrest for DUI following a traffic accident even if you did not see the person drive. The specifics to this section indicate a suspected driver must be in or about a vehicle blocking a roadway, or involved in a collision Please note, §23152 (d) and 23153 (d) CVC refers to commercial drivers. Their BAC limit is 0.04%. This level actually came from an American Medical Association (AMA) study. The dangers of driving a large commercial vehicle are apparent and the Federal Government chose to limit the BAC level of those operators. Our current BAC level in California is 0.08% for the regular motoring public. There are two types of felony DUI arrests. The first is when the DUI driver is involved in a collision and causes injury to anyone else other than themselves. There are no criteria for the level of the injury to effect the arrest. The second type of felony arrest for DUI is similar to the three strikes law. Whenever a subject is arrested for DUI, a check of their driver’s history will indicate if they have any prior arrests for DUI. If the subject has three prior convictions for §23103 CVC, §23103.5 CVC §23152 CVC or §23153 CVC, within seven years of the latest offense for DUI, they are eligible for the additional enhancement of §23550 CVC. This enhancement section makes the fourth arrest a felony, and allows a forced blood draw when necessary. If at all possible, have the booking Sergeant provide you with a copy of the DUI driver’s record and include it with your report. PROCEDURE The complexity of a DUI arrest actually comes from the required use of several different report forms. In reality, these are simple fill in the blank forms that only require repetition of information. This repetition is necessary because the DMV process is civil in nature and the actual reports we file are not usually available to the DMV hearing officers. The initial contact of a DUI driver may be either accidental or deliberate on the part of the field officer. A very intoxicated driver might be contacted because their level of impairment is obvious, such as driving all over the road and committing several infractions, or you may contact an intoxicated operator as a result of a single traffic violation. Every driver is potentially DUI, and it is up to the officer to see the signs and 94 – DUI 202 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents symptoms consistent with the intoxicated driver. These signs and symptoms include, but are not limited to: • Odor of an alcoholic beverage on breath and/or person • Open container of alcohol in the vehicle • Bloodshot and/or watery eyes • Slurred speech • Difficulty with routine tasks such as removing a CDL from a wallet or papers from a glove box All of these, and more, are important pieces of your probable cause to arrest and should be included in your arrest report along with your original reason for the traffic stop. Like every other arrest, you must have probable cause, and since DUI is a traffic violation, all other traffic violations are sufficient probable cause to begin your case. Once you have determined a person is possibly impaired, you must get them out of the vehicle to complete your field investigation. Case law has resulted in several benefits to DUI investigation, one of which is the ability to ask questions of the driver without advising him/her of their Miranda rights since your questions are investigative in nature. The City Prosecutor’s office has worked with the Police Department to develop the questions needed for prosecution and those questions are listed on the front of the DUI arrest form under the heading of “Preliminary Interview”. Again, these questions need to be asked at the onset of the investigation. If you wait until after the arrest, or the subject is already in custody, then Miranda will be required before continuing. Standard Field Sobriety Test After conducting the preliminary interview, ask the driver to submit to the Standard Field Sobriety Test (SFST). The tests to be given, in the order to be given and the physical signs to look for during each test, are as follows: • Horizontal Gaze Nystagmus (HGN) • Rhomberg − Unable to stand still or steadily with the feet together − Body tremors − Eyelid tremors − Sway (estimate the number of inches that the suspect sways, front to back and side to side − Muscle tension (either more rigid than normal or more flaccid) − Statements or sounds made by the suspect while performing the test − Record the actual number of seconds that the suspect stands with the head tilted back and the eyes closed • Walk and Turn (eight validated clues of impairment for Walk and Turn) − Can’t keep balance during instructions − Starts walking too soon − Steps off the line while walking − Raises arms while walking 94 – DUI 203 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents − Misses heel to toe − Stops walking − Takes the wrong number of steps − Turns improperly • The One Leg Stand (four validated clues of impairment) − Raising the arms − Swaying − Hopping − Putting the foot down • The Finger to Nose − Diagram exactly where each fingertip touched the suspect’s face − Indicate on the diagram which finger was actually used by the suspect each time − Body sway − Eyelid tremors − Muscle tension − Statements and sounds made by the suspect while performing the test The instructions for the field sobriety test are included at the end of this bulletin. On the second page of the DUI arrest report is a pictograph, which is designed to allow you to write down the results and your observations of the SFST. Once the notes are made in the pictograph, you will not be required to re-write them in the narrative of your arrest report. Once the SFST is completed, you must come to a conclusion as to the sobriety of the driver. If you believe them to be impaired, make the arrest and advise the driver of their chemical test obligations pursuant to §23175 CVC. Implied Consent Every person who has a driver’s license in California must provide either a blood or breath sample when asked to do so by a police officer. This is called implied consent and the basis whereby the DMV can suspend or revoke a driver’s license for a DUI violation, independent of any action taken by the courts. Many other states have the same or similar laws, so the rule of thumb is to treat the out of state driver as you would if they were from California. The test choices changed in 1999, and you are only required to offer the breath or blood test. It is important to note the urine test is appropriate under certain circumstances. If the subject, due to medical conditions, is not capable of completing the breath or blood tests, a urine test must then be offered. An example of when the urine test would be offered would be to a person who has asthma and is a hemophiliac. A person who has this medical condition would take a urine test. A urine test would also be offered if you suspect the driver is under the influence of drugs, or a Drug Recognition Expert (DRE) requests you obtain the sample as part of their investigation. To ensure a complete investigation, whenever you suspect a person is under the influence of alcohol and drugs, or just drugs, the driver should be evaluated by a DRE. 94 – DUI 204 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The Blood Test When a person chooses to take a blood test, transport the person to the current contract hospital and have the Licensed Medical Technician withdraw a blood according to established practices. Pursuant to LBPD procedures, all blood samples for BAC measurements must be placed into LBPD provided blood vials and then stored in the evidence refrigerator located in the booking tunnel. Since a blood test is not time sensitive, a sample can be obtained immediately upon arrival at the hospital, or up to, but not exceeding, 3 hours after the arrest. If the incident involves a felony arrest for DUI, then blood may be forcibly drawn from a subject. This is a reportable use of force, and a supervisor must be notified. The rule of law on a forcible blood draw is the procedure must “not shock the conscious” of the average person. An example of an acceptable blood draw by force is at the hospital, placing the subject in four-point leather restraints on a gurney and then using several officers to physically hold the subject in place while a technician withdraws the sample. Forcible blood draws are rare, but do require officers use common sense. The Breath Test When a subject chooses to complete a breath test, you must transport the person to a facility where a Department breath test machine is available. The key to a useful breath sample is 20 minutes of uninterrupted observation time before administering the test. The observation time is meant to insure the driver does not drink, smoke or regurgitate prior to completing the breath test. The driver must be observed by the testing officer for the entire observation time and cannot be transferred between other officers. Driving time cannot be included for a one- officer unit because the officer should be focused on driving, not observing the suspect. Once you have completed your observation time, administer the breath test pursuant to established procedures and record your results. At the completion of the breath test, you must advise the subject of §23157.5 CVC (Trombetta), which allows for an additional test. The subject is not required to submit to an additional test, but has the option of doing so. Make sure they know that the additional test will be used against them in court. If the subject chooses to take a blood test, then he/she must go to the contract hospital and a sample must be obtained as previously described. REFUSALS If a subject refuses to complete any tests then you must remind the subject of their obligation to do so. If he/she continues to refuse to take a test, you must advise him/her verbatim from the backside of the current DMV Officer’s Statement form. This form seems to change often, so look at the bottom left corner to verify the revision date is the most current form. There are two separate refusal admonishments on this form. The top section relates to alcohol influence only, while the bottom section is only to be used when you believe a subject is under the influence of drugs and he/she has completed a breath 94 – DUI 205 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents test but is refusing any further tests. There are several check boxes. Make sure you select the correct boxes that correlate with your arrest. BOOKING Once the chemical test is completed, it’s time to begin the normal booking process and move into the DUI report forms. If your subject took a blood or urine test, you will need to fill out DMV form, “Supplement to Officer’s Statement”. This is a very short form and must be included with the sample in the refrigerator (filling out the top half of the form is all that is required). You MUST confiscate the subject’s driver’s license and attach it to your paper work once your subject has either: • Completed a BAC test with a result of 0.08% or greater, • Completed a blood or urine test where you believe the BAC result will be 0.08% or greater • Refused to take a test, either initially or after the drug admonishment. Accident Investigation Detail will forward the license to the DMV for processing. (Out of state driver’s licenses are not to be confiscated). The driver should be instructed their driver’s license has been suspended effective 30 days from the date of arrest. Their temporary driver’s license is their booking sheet and the pink copy of the Officer’s Statement form. The pink copy of the Officer’s Statement form should be placed into prisoner property. The last form to complete is the “Driving Under the Influence Arrest Report”. This form has been designed to include all the information that might be needed in court. The form can help you immensely in your preparation for court, if you have completely filled it out. The next step is your narrative, which should include the following information: • Probable cause to make the stop (This is usually a traffic stop or collision) • Probable cause to have the driver exit their car (What did you see, smell, and hear?) • Probable cause to detain and arrest, following the SFST (Did you come to a conclusion as to the sobriety of the driver? Do not restate the SFST exam, just your conclusion. You already drew a picture) • The results of any chemical tests administered (Which test did they take?, what did you do with it, and what were the results, if you know?) • What you did with their car? (Did you tow it or park and lock it?) • Any additional information you believe would help with the case JUVENILES Juvenile offenders have virtually the same paperwork as adults, with one addition. Besides the juvenile booking sheet, officers must substitute the “Under age 21 Officer’s Statement” DMV form for the adult “Officer’s Statement” form. Any person under 21 who has any measurable amount of alcohol in their system, 0.01% or greater, is in violation of §23136 CVC. This is not a citation or arrest offense, but instead is handled directly by the DMV. The penalty is a one-year suspension of the offender’s driver’s license. This 94 – DUI 206 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents BAC reading can be obtained through a Portable Alcohol Sensor (PAS) device, or if one is not available, by transporting the juvenile to a facility where a breath test is available. All of the observation times must be followed. Forward these documents to the Accident Investigation Detail. If the juvenile has a BAC of 0.05% or greater, then they are in violation of §23140 CVC. This is an arrest offense and the violator should be charged. If the juvenile has a BAC of over 0.08%, or you believe them to be under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs, and their BAC is over 0.05%, you may arrest them for §23152 (a) or (b) CVC. Remember, the significance of 23152(a) is that the person is under the influence to the extent that they cannot safely drive (under 0.08% and/or drug) or the BAC is unknown at the time of booking (i.e. blood test). The 23152(b) section simply states that the subjects BAC is known to be 0.08% or greater, regardless of impairment. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 207 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 95 – Tow Truck Requests REVISED September 2000 TOW TRUCK REQUESTS INTRODUCTION Officers store and impound many vehicles during their shift and, after some time, it becomes a routine procedure. This training bulletin will address the City’s Police Tow Service, what their responsibilities are, and how officers can make requests for tow services properly for the best service. GENERAL INFORMATION The City of Long Beach owns and operates Police Tow, located at 3111 East Willow Street, for the purpose of taking care of the Department’s towing needs. All requests for tow service will be made to Police Tow. (Exceptions as noted below) If Police Tow cannot respond, they maintain contracts with other tow companies and will notify them if the need arises. Police Tow has the following responsibilities and duties: • Removal of wrecked, impounded and recovered vehicles • Cleaning debris from the scene of accidents • Availability on a twenty-four hour basis • Maintenance of a storage area for all stored and impounded vehicles • Security for all personal property found in or on the vehicles • Provision for the release of vehicles between 8AM and midnight daily (and emergency release if needed during off hours) FEES The owner of the vehicle towed or stored is responsible for all fees charged in connection with services furnished. In addition to basic towing fees, other charges can accrue, such as: • Righting an overturned vehicle • Disconnecting a drive shaft • Removing a vehicle from a ditch or fence • Anything that can be classified as a difficult removal • Storage fees The officer requesting tow service should apprise the dispatcher of the condition of the car relative to towing. For example, all four tires are flat, or two vehicles are hooked 95 – Tow Truck Requests 208 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents together and need to be separated, etc. This will ensure that tow arrives with the proper equipment. REQUEST FOR TOW SERVICE All requests for tow service will be made through a dispatcher who will notify Police Tow. The exceptions to this are as follows: • If the vehicle owner is an Automobile Club of Southern California member, or other similar club member, the officer will contact a dispatcher who will contact the Auto Club towing service • If the vehicle owner or operator indicates they have a specific towing service request, the officer will notify a dispatcher who will contact the tow service requested. However, in such instances, the officer on scene shall take into consideration the length of time involved in obtaining the requested towing service, as well as any hazards presented by the situation at the scene, before granting the request. The dispatcher should obtain an ETA from the tow service and relay that information to the officer on scene. If the requested tow service is unavailable and the vehicle is a hazard, it will be removed by Police Tow Heavy Duty Requests When heavy towing equipment is needed, (e.g., a big rig is involved in an accident), the officer on scene will make that information known to the dispatcher who will notify Police Tow. The tow yard has a contract with another tow service for heavy equipment and they need to be advised of the situation as soon as possible so they can make the necessary requests. REPORTS The investigating officer at the scene shall file the appropriate reports concerning the removal of the vehicle and shall indicate whether the vehicle is “stored” or “impounded”. All reports require DR#’s but most vehicle reports will use the same DR# as the main incident with only a supplement required. For example, a vehicle towed from a traffic accident will receive a supplement to the accident DR#. Likewise, a recovered Long Beach stolen vehicle will receive a supplement to the original stolen vehicle DR#. If, at the scene of an accident, a citizen makes the request for tow service from Police Tow, a vehicle report form is not required. If the officer must order a tow because the driver is incapacitated or otherwise unable to decide how best to remove the vehicle, a Vehicle Report Form and DR# is required. CONCLUSION When dispatched to an accident scene, officers must give first consideration to caring for injured persons, summoning paramedics or apprehending violators at the scene. Their second concern should be arranging for the immediate removal of any vehicle causing traffic congestion or creating a hazard. Knowing the procedures involved in summoning 95 – Tow Truck Requests 209 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents tow trucks will save valuable air time and enable officers to respond with intelligent answers for citizens who have questions regarding such service. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 210 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 98 – Implied Consent Law REVISED May 2003 IMPLIED CONSENT LAW INTRODUCTION Operating a motor vehicle in the State of California is a privilege, not a right. When a peace officer legally detains a driver whom they have reasonable cause to believe is impaired, the driver must submit to the request to a take a chemical test or face suspension or revocation of their driving privilege. Pertinent Vehicle Code Sections §23612(a)(1)(A) CVC – “Any person who drives a motor vehicle is deemed to have given his/her consent to chemical testing of his/her blood or breath for the purpose of determining the alcoholic content of his/her blood, if lawfully arrested for any offense allegedly committed in violation of §23140, 23152, or 23153.” §13353(a) CVC – “If any person refuses the officer’s request to submit to, or fails to complete, a chemical test or tests pursuant to §23612, upon receipt of the officer’s sworn statement that the officer had reasonable cause to believe the person had been driving a motor vehicle in violation of §23140, 23152, or 23153, the department shall do one of the following:” • Suspend the person’s privilege to operate a motor vehicle for a period of one year • Revoke the person’s privilege to operate a motor vehicle for a period of two or more years if the refusal occurred within seven years of separate violations of §23103.5, 23140, 23152, or 23153 Refusal of Chemical Test: The Violator’s Rights When a person is arrested for drunk driving and refuses to take any tests to determine the alcoholic content of his/her blood, it is the arresting officer’s responsibility to complete the following: • DMV Form DS 367/DS 367M (Rev 10/2002) Officers Statement; and, • PD Form 4300.003 (Rev 02/2001) LBPD Driving Under the Influence Arrest Report The officer will retain the driver's license to be submitted with DMV Form DS 367 and shall issue the "pink" temporary driver's license to the violator. The license is to be processed for return to the Department of Motor Vehicles. The Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) in Sacramento will send an “Order of Suspension” to the individual advising them that their driving privilege has been 98 – Implied Consent 211 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents suspended for one year. They have the right to request a hearing for the purpose of submitting evidence and show cause why their driving privilege should not be revoked. In order to exercise this right, the person must submit a letter to DMV Sacramento, requesting such a hearing. The DMV will set a date for the hearing at a local DMV office. Officers are subpoenaed to attend hearings in person or telephonically and their testimony can be the determining factor in upholding the suspension of the individual’s driving privilege. PROCEDURES The officer must be certain to clearly explain that the right to counsel and the right to remain silent do not apply to the driver’s duty to submit to a chemical test to determine the alcoholic content of his/her blood. Problems in Advisement Officers will not ad lib the Implied Consent advisement. Changing “will result in the suspension of…” to “may result in the suspension of…” will create a loophole for the defendant during the hearing. The DMV stresses that the officer needs to advise the suspect verbatim that their refusal to take a test “will” result in a suspension of their driver’s license. Read the implied consent admonition verbatim from DMV form DS 367 or DS 367M as appropriate. Failure to Complete a Test If the arrested person consents to a chemical test but fails to complete the test, claiming he/she is physically unable and also refuses to submit to a second test, the officer must present evidence of the lack of a good faith effort by the violator. The officer should be able to indicate the condition of the violator at the time of the test to repudiate his/her claim of physical inability. Also, stress the fact that the driver was offered a second test and refused that one altogether. Consent When Intoxicated People who have refused a chemical test often raise the defense at a hearing that they were too intoxicated to understand the officer’s advisement when requested to consent to a test. Officers should be prepared to give factual evidence that would support a conclusion that the arrested person understood the officer’s advisals when requested to consent to a test. Include the responses of the suspect to questions, requests and actions to the officer prior to the implied consent issue; e.g., response to sirens, red lights, request for CDL and field sobriety test. Proper Advisement of Tests The officer should not request that the suspect submit to one test and only offer the other test when the offered test is refused. In all cases the officer should advise the defendant that he/she has a choice of two chemical tests, as provided by statute. If necessary, the officer should explain how each test would be physically accomplished, i.e., going to the 98 – Implied Consent 212 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents hospital for a blood test or taking the breath test at the station. The defendant does not have the right to have his/her own doctor administer the initial test. However, the defendant can have his/her own doctor administer additional tests at his/her own expense. CONCLUSION Just as it is a motorist’s responsibility to consent to a chemical test when stopped for suspicion of DUI, it is the officer’s responsibility to make the Implied Consent advisement clearly and correctly. The officer must document any refusal and the circumstances surrounding the refusal. After following proper procedures and preparing clear notes, the officer will be prepared for both a DMV administrative hearing and a criminal trial, if required. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 213 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 99 – Traffic – Following too closely REVISED May 2001 TRAFFIC: FOLLOWING TOO CLOSELY (§21703 CVC) INTRODUCTION Following too closely is one of the leading causes of traffic collisions. The Vehicle Code §21703 CVC reads: “The driver of a motor vehicle shall not follow another vehicle more closely than is reasonable and prudent, having due regard for the speed of such vehicle and the traffic upon and the condition of, the roadway.” ELEMENTS OF §21703 • Driving of a motor vehicle • Following another vehicle (on a highway) • More closely than is reasonable and prudent considering the: – Speed of concerned vehicles – Traffic on the roadway – Conditions present (rain, fog, etc.) on the roadway What does “reasonable and prudent” mean? How does this relate to the speed? What must the traffic conditions be? To what extent must we allow for the condition of the roadway? These questions are all important; however, the core of the problem is the proven and tested physics of reaction time and stopping distance. STOPPING DISTANCES Stopping distance is predicated on unalterable natural laws affecting vehicles in motion. • A vehicle moving at a particular speed is traveling a known exact number of feet per second (1.467 ft./sec) • A passenger vehicle traveling on a known type of surface at a known number of feet per second and obtaining its maximum braking efficiency will always require a certain minimum number of feet to stop (under ideal conditions) The two elements of stopping distance are reaction time and braking distance. We cannot question what constitutes braking distance because of the natural law involved. It is also difficult to question reaction time because of the many controlled tests by recognized experts who agree, with minor variations, that the average time a normal, healthy, alert individual will require to lock his wheels is ¾ of one second. When we convert these elements to figures, total stopping distance can be computed. 99 – Traffic – Following Too Closely 214 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents CONVERSION TABLE REACTION *STOPPING DISTANCE Miles per hour Feet per second Time in seconds Distance traveled in feet After brakes applied Total: (including reaction distance) 5 7.3 .75 5.5 1.2 6.7 10 14.6 .75 11.0 5.0 16.0 20 29.3 .75 22.0 20.0 42.0 30 44.0 .75 33.0 45.0 78.0 40 58.6 .75 44.0 80.0 124.0 50 73.3 .75 55.0 125.0 180.0 60 88.0 .75 66.0 180.0 246.0 70 102.6 .75 77.0 245.0 322.0 *Dry level concrete or asphaltic-concrete Observe on the chart when miles per hour are doubled, feet per second and reaction distance are also doubled but stopping distance after brakes are applied is increased by the square. Few drivers recognize that when we double our speed, we need four times as much stopping distance. Failure to realize this traps drivers into the belief that following at two car lengths at 40 mph is as safe as it was at 20 mph. Using the chart, when a driver traveling at a speed of 50 mph observes a vehicle stopped 160 feet ahead of him (8 to 9 car lengths) and there is no place to turn, he has no alternative but to drive 20 feet into the stopped vehicle (180 ft. – 160 ft. = 20 feet). ENFORCEMENT The conversion table indicates that a vehicle traveling at 50 mph has to have 55 feet for reaction distance. If it were following at a distance of less than 55 feet, it would be certain, even if all other conditions were ideal, to collide with the lead vehicle in the event it stopped suddenly. The driver who follows at an interval less than his reaction distance is in what we will call the “disaster zone”. Put in another way, a vehicle following at the equivalent of one foot per mile per hour will always be in this “disaster zone. • Guideline #1 - A driver shall be stopped and should be cited when following at a distance that is less than one foot per mile per hour of speed Miles per hour Feet Car lengths 20 20 1 30 30 1 ½ 40 40 2 99 – Traffic – Following Too Closely 215 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 50 50 2 ½ 60 60 3 70 70 3 ½ • The safe following distance advocated by the Nation Safety Council and most authorities on safe driving is one car length for each 10 miles of speed. A car length is approximated as being 20 feet. For example: A car following at 50 mph should be at least 100 feet behind. This 45 foot difference (over 2 car lengths) between the 50 mph disaster zone (approximately 2 ½ car lengths) and the acceptable safe following distance (approximately 5 car lengths) is called the “danger zone”. Any vehicle following within this “danger zone” may be following too closely. • Guideline #2 - A violator should be stopped and may be cited when his/her vehicle is following at a distance greater than indicated in guideline #1 if the prevailing circumstances make the distance between the two vehicles unsafe and he/she has the opportunity to adjust his following distance – “Prevailing circumstances” may include rain, fog, wet and slippery streets, inattentive driver, heavy loads, vehicles in a caravan, etc. – The decision will be made by the officer in each situation in relation to the circumstances surrounding the driver’s depth into the danger zone. CONCLUSION The rear end collision occurs far too frequently. Enforcement of §21703 will reduce injury and property damage. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 216 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 100 – Financial Responsibility Laws REVISED June 2001 FINANCIAL RESPONSIBILITY LAWS INTRODUCTION The purpose of the Financial Responsibility Law is to ensure that drivers and owners of vehicles using the streets and highways shall be financially responsible for damage or injuries caused by an automobile collision, regardless of blame, and to remove financially irresponsible drivers from the highway. Every driver or owner must meet the same provisions of the law. If anyone suffers injuries or property damage, all drivers or owners must satisfy the financial responsibility provisions of the law. Legal Support §16000 CVC – provides that the driver of every motor vehicle, who is involved in an accident on the highway resulting in property damage in excess of $500, or in bodily injury or death of any person shall, within 10 days, report the accident to the Department of Motor Vehicles. The report will be made on DMV Form SR-1. The forms are available directly from the DMV or from any police department sub-station. §16004 CVC – provides for the suspension of driving privilege for the person who fails, refuses or neglects to make a report of an accident of the type described above. §16020(a) CVC – provides that every driver and every owner of a motor vehicle shall at all times be able to establish financial responsibility and shall at all times carry in the vehicle evidence of financial responsibility. §16025(a) CVC – every driver involved in a traffic accident shall exchange name, driver’s license number, current residence address, vehicle identification number, address of registered owner, and insurance company to include policy number. 16028(a) CVC - upon demand of a peace officer every person who drives a motor vehicle upon a highway shall provide evidence of financial responsibility for the vehicle that is in effect at the time the demand is made. However, a peace officer shall not stop a vehicle for the sole purpose of determining weather the vehicle is being driven in violation of this subdivision. §16070 CVC – whenever a driver is involved in an accident and fails to provide evidence of financial responsibility as required in §16020 at the time of the accident, the DMV shall suspend the privilege of the driver or owner to drive a motor vehicle, including the driving privilege of a nonresident driver in this state. 100 – Financial Responsibility Laws 217 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Evidence of Financial Responsibility means any of the following: • A form issued by an insurance company • A certificate of self-insurance (§16052 CVC) • An insurance policy or bond, which involves depositing a certain amount of cash with the Department of Motor Vehicles (§16056 CVC) FOREIGN VEHICLE REGISTRATION Evidence of financial responsibility can be obtained during violator/officer contact when requesting driver’s license, registration, or other means of identification. The requirement may be satisfied by either oral or written proof if it is to the officer’s satisfaction. PROCEDURE FOR RECORDING INSURANCE INFORMATION • Write the insurance company name by policy number. Example: Nationwide/72pe 123456 • California Certificate of Deposit issued to self-insured companies or individuals by the DMV. Example: DMV S/I 66 • Public Utilities Commission identifying symbol issued to a highway carrier. Example: PUC ID TCP 1123456 • Name of the government entity which owns/operates the vehicle. Government entities are considered self-insured. Example: LA City, Orange County, State of California • Rental Vehicles – All major vehicle rental companies in California are covered by their own fleet policy, example: Avis. Note: This procedure does not apply to leased vehicles where the leaseholder may be financially responsible. It is recommended that officers note on stats copy of citation how the violator advised the officer as to written or oral confirmation of insurance as it will assist the officer later, in court EMPLOYERS VEHICLE Whenever a cited driver is operating a vehicle owned or leased by his/her employer, and the vehicle is operated with the employer’s permission and the driver cannot provide evidence of the employer’s financial responsibility, two citations shall be issued. One citation will go to the driver for the original violation and one to the employer for no evidence of financial responsibility. If all violations are owner’s responsibility, only one citation shall be issued. §16028(e) VC permits a driver to sign the Notice to Appear on behalf of the employer when the violation charge is failure to provide evidence of financial responsibility. Officers should allow the driver to sign the citation if he/she so requests; however, officers should not solicit the signature. When issuing two citations, one to the vehicle owner, one to the driver, the citations should be cross-referenced to each other by number in the narrative portion of the citation. Drivers who sign owner responsibility citations DO NOT receive a copy of the citation. All copies of the citation shall be submitted to the Field Support Division for processing through the City Prosecutor’s office. Whenever a cited driver is operating a vehicle owned or leased by another person who is not their employer but with that person’s permission, and the driver cannot provide evidence of either his, her or the owner/lessee’s financial 100 – Financial Responsibility Laws 218 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents responsibility, only the driver shall be cited. Whenever the Department of Motor Vehicles has determined that the motorist provided incorrect or false information, DMV will notify the appropriate prosecuting authority. REVIEW Responsibility Patrol Bureau 219 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 101 – Traffic Hand Signals REVISED September 2002 TRAFFIC HAND SIGNALS INTRODUCTION When directing traffic, it is the officer’s job to tell people how, when, and where they may move, either in their vehicles or on foot. Officers must therefore pay attention to both cars and pedestrians and insure they are all given a chance to move. If officers are not on hand to make decisions and direct movements when hazardous traffic situations occur, traffic jams would result and motorists and/or pedestrians could be injured. It is not possible for officers to direct each driver and/or pedestrian verbally. They have to use a type of sign language that is clearly understood by everyone. There may be several different ways to motion drivers to stop, start or turn. If several officers directing traffic all used their own signals, entirely different from one another, the result would be complete chaos and not the orderly dispersal of traffic generally desired. Therefore, it is important in directing traffic for all officers to do it the same way. Equally important, the gestures should be made where the driver can see them from a distance. An officer’s most important task while directing traffic is to direct drivers and pedestrians with clear, discernable commands. If the officer’s directions are misunderstood, more problems may develop. Officers should consider the following instructions as guidelines to help make their direction clear to motorists. DIRECTING TRAFFIC BY HAND • Let people know that you are in charge by standing where they cannot fail to see you. This is usually right in the center of the crossing • Use command presence. Motorists are responding to and complying with your authority • Stand straight with weight the same on each foot • When not signaling with them, let your hands hang easily at your side • Do not face vehicles authorized by you to move. Stand with your side toward them To stop traffic, two motions are used: 101 – Traffic Hand Signals 220 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • First, point with your arm and finger and look straight at the driver you want to stop. • Watch them and hold this point until they see you, or at least until they have plenty of time to do so • Raise your pointing hand (but not your whole arm) so that the palm is toward the driver. Hold this until he/she stops • Traffic must be stopped in both directions to give cross traffic a chance to move. Because you cannot look both ways at once, stop the traffic coming from one side first, then from the other side • After you have halted traffic with one hand, hold that hand in the stop position and turn to the other side and repeat the process • Don’t lower either arm until cars coming from both ways are halted To start traffic • Place yourself so that your side is towards traffic to be started 101 – Traffic Hand Signals 221 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Point with your arm and finger toward the car you want to start. Hold it until you get the attention of the driver • And then, with your palm up, swing your hand up and over to your chin. Bend your arm only at the elbow • If you get the attention of the driver first by pointing you won’t have to make the signal a second time • After traffic has been started from one side, drop that arm and start traffic from the other side in the same way • Use the same signals to give the go-ahead to slow and timid drivers Right turn Signals for a right turn movement are not usually required at an intersection. When it is necessary, the arm you signal with will be determined by the car’s direction. If it approaches from the right, point toward the driver with your right arm. Give the driver time to see your gesture and then swing your arm to point in the direction he/she is going. Keep pointing in that direction until he/she begins to turn. If the car approaches you from the left, point with your left arm. When the driver sees you point, swing your arm in the direction he/she is to go. Because of your position you will not be able to make a complete swing with your arm. If you prefer and find it more comfortable, bend your left arm at the elbow and with your thumb and forearm indicate the direction the driver is to take. Left turn • In helping a driver make a left turn you may first have to halt traffic in the lane or lanes through which the turning car must cross • If the car is approaching from your left, give the stop signal with your right arm to stop traffic in the lane through which the turning driver is to pass • Hold the stop signal with your right arm and then give the turning gesture with your left arm 101 – Traffic Hand Signals 222 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • If the car approaches from your right, turn around so that you face toward the direction the car making the turn is to go • On a street with only one available lane in each direction, one driver wishing to make a left turn can delay many cars behind him unless you handle his movement properly • If traffic is approaching the left turn vehicle from the opposite direction, he/she cannot make a turn until there is a gap in it. While he/she is waiting, give a signal to move into the intersection close to you so that the cars behind can continue straight through or make right turns. Point your finger and motion him/her forward and then point to the place on the pavement where you wish them to stop. As soon as he/she begins to move, signal cars behind to move straight through or turn right • Permit the left turn when there is a natural break in the opposing traffic or stop the opposing traffic and signal for the left turn Two Officer Signaling Sometimes there is a need for more than one officer at a busy intersection or control point. One of the two officers must originate all signals and gestures. In other words, one officer is leader and makes all decisions as to changes in traffic flow. His/her partner assists by helping to make those decisions known. 101 – Traffic Hand Signals 223 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Signaling Aids The whistle is used to get the attention of drivers and pedestrians. It is used as follows: • One long blast with a STOP signal • Two short blasts with the GO signal • Several short blasts to get the attention of a driver or pedestrian who does not respond to a given signal Be judicious in the use of your whistle at all times. Whistle blasts directed to pedestrians don’t need to be as shrill as those to command the attention of motorists. The voice is seldom used in directing traffic. Arm gestures and the whistle are usually sufficient. There are numerous reasons why verbal commands are not used. Verbal orders are not easy to give or understand and often lead to misinterpretations that are dangerous. An order that is shouted can antagonize the motorist. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 224 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 102 – Collisions – Metro A-Line Revised March 2021 COLLISIONS INVOLVING THE LIGHT RAIL VEHICLE METRO A-LINE INTRODUCTION Since July 2017, the Long Beach Police Department (LBPD) has been contracted by the Los Angeles County Metropolitan Transportation Authority (METRO) to conduct law enforcement services involving the Metro A-Line. Metro Transportation Detail officers are responsible for taking all reports regarding criminal incidents and collisions involving the Metro A-Line and the Light Rail Vehicles (LRV). AREA OF RESPONSIBILITY The LBPD area of responsibility spans south from the dividing line at Dominguez Street east of Santa Fe Avenue, which is the North Division border with Rancho Dominguez. The Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department (LASD) is responsible for all A-Line activity north of this line at Dominguez Street. The LBPD area of responsibility includes the following Metro A-Line stations and other Metro properties: STATION ADDRESS Wardlow 3420 Pacific Place Willow Street 2750 West American Avenue Pacific Coast Highway 1798 Long Beach Boulevard Anaheim Street Station 1290 Long Beach Boulevard 5th Street Station 598 Long Beach Boulevard 1st Street Station 108 Long Beach Boulevard Downtown Station 128 W. 1st Street Pacific Avenue Station 498 Pacific Avenue A-Line Maintenance Yard (Division 11) 4350 E. 208th Street Inactive Bus Operating Division (Division 12) 970 Chester Place METRO CONTACT NUMBERS Metro Transportation Detail Lieutenant 562-570-5746 Metro Transportation Detail Sergeant 562-570-5167 Metro Transportation Detail Office 562-570-5166 Metro Rail Operations Control (ROC) Floor Manager 323-563-5022 102 – Collisions Metro A Line 225 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Division 11 – A-Line Maintenance Dispatch 310-816-5538 Division 11 – A-Line Maintenance Gate Guard 310-816-5554 LASD Bureau Communications Coordinator 213-928-8204 LAPD Transportation Services Division Watch Commander 213-922-1410 *IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTE* An LRV is powered by a strong electrical current through a pantograph, which is an apparatus mounted on the roof of an electric train to collect power through contact with an electrically charged overhead wire. Ensure the following is done PRIOR to any rescue attempt: • The operator has lowered the pantograph • The ROC has de-energized the overhead electrical lines • All officers can make this request by conferring with the LRV operator or by requesting dispatch to call the ROC and make the request The Long Beach Fire Department is also trained to ensure the electrical lines have been de-energized and the pantograph has been lowered from the overhead electrical wire. INCIDENTS AND COLLISIONS INVOLVING THE LRV All criminal incidents and traffic collisions involving the A-Line occurring within the City of Long Beach area of responsibility will be handled by LBPD officers in the Metro Transportation Detail and will be dispatched as the primary unit to handle reporting. Patrol units may be dispatched if a Metro Transportation Detail officer is not available. The following are commonly dispatched incidents: • LRV collisions anywhere along the Long Beach A-Line right-of-way • LRV versus pedestrian collisions occurring anywhere along the Long Beach A-Line right-of-way • Crimes occurring on LRVs, platforms and right-of-way within the Long Beach A-Line area of responsibility • Contact a victim of a crime which occurred within the Long Beach A-Line area of responsibility, even if the victim is in another jurisdiction • Similar to other courtesy reports, the Patrol Watch Commander has the discretion to approve or deny a request from either LAPD or LASD to take a courtesy report. TYPES OF COLLISIONS INVOLVING THE LRV In-Transport Vehicle – An in-transport vehicle is defined as a vehicle moving people or goods. An LRV is not a motor vehicle for the purposes of collision reporting. An LRV versus vehicle collision is only reported if the collision involves a motor vehicle in-transport and will be filed on an LBPD Collision Report – PD Form 4210.001. Not In-Transport Vehicle – If an LRV strikes a vehicle not in-transport (parked), the incident should be reported as a special accident. 102 – Collisions Metro A Line 226 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Pedestrian – When an LRV strikes a pedestrian anywhere along the A-Line right-of-way the incident is reported on an LBPD Collision Report – PD Form 4210.001. Pedestrian Suicide – When an incident is determined to be a pedestrian suicide, with the pedestrian purposely walking into the path of an LRV, the incident is filed as a suicide. The LBPD Homicide Detail may be contacted, however they are not required to respond to a suicide incident. For further information regarding fatality collision reporting refer to LBPD Manual § 7.4.1.2. INVESTIGATING COLLISIONS INVOLVING THE LRV The LRV operator is exempt from most provisions of the California Vehicle Code and is NOT required to show a valid driver’s license, registration, or insurance documents. An LRV operator is not a “Driver,” and should not be listed as a driver on page one of the collision reporting form. Include an LRV operator’s information either on page three as a witness or list his/her information in the narrative. An LRV operator may make a written statement after a collision. Passengers, for the most part, are able to view what occurs on the sides of the LRV and are less likely to see what happens at the front or rear of the LRV. A Metro Rail Transit Operations Supervisor (RTOS) will respond to all incidents. The RTOS should be consulted during the investigation. Additionally, the RTOS is responsible for LRV movement and release. Should the RTOS release the LRV prior to law enforcement response, the RTOS will be responsible for providing information for the report. It is the responding officer’s responsibility to release the LRV to the RTOS as soon as possible. The officer should consider allowing the RTOS to have the LRV driven to the A-Line Maintenance Yard, where the investigation can continue without further impeding the A-Line system. A Metro collision expert may be sent to the scene to conduct an independent investigation. Metro Transportation Detail supervisors and/or patrol supervisors should make every effort to allow the expert to conduct their investigation. However, the independent investigation shall not interfere with the police department investigation. In the event of a fatal incident, request that the Metro collision expert withhold his or her investigation until the arrival of LBPD Detectives. The handling detectives determine when it is appropriate for the Metro collision expert to begin their investigation. The ROC may request a “Bus Bridge” be enacted to transfer passengers from the affected LRV to another LRV or platform. A Metro bus will be called to assist. It is the Metro Transportation Detail Officers’ responsibility to assist with this “Bus Bridge.” Metro Transportation Detail Officers have portable ladders within their vehicles to assist with 102 – Collisions Metro A Line 227 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents this task. If a Metro Transportation Detail Officer is not available, patrol resources will assist with the “Bus Bridge.” LRV COLLISION REPORTING Collision reports will be handled expeditiously so that Metro operations may be resumed for the benefit of the riding public. Officers should consider marking the position of the vehicles and then having the vehicles towed, stored, or moved off the tracks to allow additional LRVs to proceed while further investigation is conducted. Officers should consider requesting tow trucks as soon as possible after arrival at the incident location. CVC § 22656 provides the authority to remove a vehicle which is upon or within 7 ½ feet of the nearest rail. VIOLATIONS APPLICABLE TO THE LRV OPERATOR The following codes taken from the California Vehicle Code (CVC), Health and Safety (H&S), Public Utilities Code (PUC), and the Penal Code (PC) are potential violations applicable to the LRV operator: 21462 CVC – Must obey any official traffic signal applicable (I) 21806(b) CVC – Must yield to emergency vehicles (I) 2800(a) CVC – Must obey the lawful order or direction of a peace officer (M) 11550(a) H&S – Under the influence of a controlled substance (M) 7818 PUC – Intoxicated while operating an LRV (M); follow DUI arrest procedures and use the appropriate DUI forms 7679 PUC – Intoxication while on duty causes injury or death (F) 7680 PUC – Causes a collision resulting in death on a street railroad (F) 192(b) PC – Involuntary Manslaughter (F) LRV AND PLATFORM VIDEOS A-Line Station platforms have at least two cameras with 24-hour video monitoring. LRVs have cameras in the operator’s cab that monitor the operator side and forward views outside of the cab. LRVs also have cameras covering the passenger compartments within each LRV. LRV and platform videos may be obtained for evidentiary purposes, but must be requested utilizing the official Metro Application for Release of Video Footage form available on Laserfiche in the Metro folder. The following information must be completed for Metro to provide video footage: • Fill out the form, ensuring that you list the LRV number and/or platform station name. • E-mail the request form to the current Metro Detail Clerk Typist AND the current Metro Detail Detective. . • Metro Transportation Detail staff will process the request. Only Metro Transportation Detail personnel can submit video requests to Metro. • Submit a separate request for LRV video if you are requesting both LRV and platform video. 102 – Collisions Metro A Line 228 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Metro provides video in thirty-minute increments; provide the proper thirty-minute time frame. If an additional thirty-minute increment is required, complete a second request form. Officers should not contact the ROC or A-Line Controllers directly for video footage or status updates; this is coordinated by the Metro Transportation Detail staff. This protocol ensures chain of custody and prevents video footage from being improperly released to the public. An officer filing a DR or sergeants completing administrative investigations should make the video request immediately as this data is time sensitive. LRV video is only available for approximately three days and platform video for approximately two weeks. WATCH LOG ENTRIES – A-LINE INCIDENTS Metro Transportation and Patrol Sergeants should enter a Watch Log entry for all violent crime, use of force incidents, LRV collisions, any incident that delays an LRV for an extended length of time, or any other significant incident that occurs along the A-Line. Utilize the title, A-Line Incidents, under the Event Type drop down bar. A use of force incident should have a Watch Log entry in both Use of Force and A-Line Incidents separately. WARDLOW STATION SWEEPS LRV operators are required to conduct a sweep of all LRV cars prior to retiring the LRV to Division 11. The LRV conductor is required to exit the LRV at the Wardlow Station and ensure each LRV car is void of passengers. If a passenger is on board and refuses to exit, the operator is required to ask for assistance from Metro Security Officers or law enforcement. The ROC will call LBPD Dispatch for assistance and Long Beach Police response will be as follows: • 0600 to 0130 hours – Metro Transportation Detail officers shall be dispatched to assist the LRV operator. If a Metro Transportation Detail officer is not available, a patrol officer can be dispatched to assist. • After 0130 hours and up to 0600 hours – Metro Transit Security Officers should already be on scene to assist the operators with their sweeps. Should the passenger refuse to exit the LRV for the Metro Transit Security Officers, the ROC will call Long Beach Police Dispatch for assistance. A patrol officer will be dispatched to assist the LRV operator as a Priority 2 call for service. The call should be handled like any other business requesting law enforcement assistance. • Sweep Staging – A request from the ROC to pre-stage a unit for a sweep should not be honored after 0130 hours. METRO BUS LINES TRAVELING THROUGH THE CITY OF LONG BEACH The LASD Transit Services Bureau has maintained responsibility for incidents, but not Metro bus collisions within the City of Long Beach. An LBPD patrol officer should be dispatched as the primary unit to handle any Metro bus collision within the City of Long Beach. 102 – Collisions Metro A Line 229 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Currently, Metro has two bus lines that operate through the City of Long Beach. They stop at the Transit Gallery on 1st Street between Long Beach Boulevard and Pine Avenue, and on 7th Street across from the Long Beach Veterans Administration Medical Center (5901 E. 7th Street). Metro will contact LASD for incidents involving these bus lines. If LASD has a lengthy response, LBPD patrol officers may be called to assist or handle the incident. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 103 Public Transportation Safety Revised March 2021 PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION SAFETY Law Enforcement Officers must be aware of the dangers they may encounter while conducting law enforcement duties involving the Metro A-Line and Long Beach Transit. To keep themselves and the public safe, it is critical for officers to stay alert and follow safety precautions specific to the Metro A-Line trains and platforms and Long Beach Transit buses. Metro A-Line The following guidelines will help to ensure the safety of officers and persons on the Metro platform or Metro Light Rail Vehicle (LRV) during law enforcement action: • Exercise extreme caution when taking law enforcement action on a Metro platform and on-board of a moving LRV. • Always be alert and aware of your surroundings, footing, and the ingress/egress of passengers on the platform. • When an LRV is approaching the platform, always stand behind the yellow line, and if possible, in the middle of the platform. DO NOT walk over the yellow line or approach the LRV until it has come to a complete stop and the doors open. • The safest location to contact a suspect or person to be detained is in the middle of the station platform. • When contacting or detaining a subject(s), officers should guide them away from the LRV before beginning an investigation or dialogue and have them sit down on a bench in the center of the station platform. • A push, slip or fall onto the tracks could result in contact with the electrified contact rail, or the possibility of being struck by an oncoming train. In emergency situations officers may request to call the Metro Rail Operations Control (ROC). This allows the ROC to advise incoming train operators to either hold outside the platform or to enter slowly, keeping the train doors closed upon arrival at the platform. Long Beach Transit When contacting subject(s) on a bus: • Be aware of tripping hazards, obstacles, and passing traffic. • Before contacting subject(s) on a bus, ask the driver to do the following: − Open all bus doors − Lower the bus if appropriate − Turn on the inside bus lights if it is dark 103 Public Transportation Safety 231 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents − Turn off the bus power if the subject(s) in question are displaying violent tendencies or appear agitated • Direct the subject(s) to step off the bus and guide the subject(s) to a safe area away from traffic and other customers. • Consider asking the subject(s) to sit at the bus bench if appropriate. • Consider asking the driver to close the bus doors and leave the area if appropriate. If the subject(s) refuses to exit the bus and is agitated or violent: • Direct other passengers to exit the bus if possible. • If needed, request the driver to lower the bus, open the doors, turn on the lights, turn off the bus power, and exit the bus. There is a potential for danger with every contact in a public transportation environment. The actions and positions taken by an officer will vary according to the type of situation. Knowledge of the Metro A-line and Long Beach Transit operations can assist the officer in pre-planning their approach with subjects in these unique environments. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 103 Public Transportation Safety 232 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 104 – Crimes in International Waters REVISED January 2004 CRIMES IN INTERNATIONAL WATERS INTRODUCTION In the spring of 2003, Carnival Cruise Lines began berthing its ships in the City of Long Beach at a new terminal facility next to the Queen Mary. Since these ships travel to and return from ports outside the United States, we will be faced with law enforcement issues we have not had to deal with in the past. This department will receive an increasing number of calls for service to respond to the cruise ship terminal to investigate assaults, domestic violence, sex crimes, thefts, drug offenses and other violations. In dealing with crimes at sea, location of the ship at the time the offense occurred is of critical importance. It must be determined if the ship was in international waters or within the jurisdiction of the City of Long Beach. JURISDICTION The jurisdiction of the City of Long Beach extends to the breakwater. The jurisdiction of the State of California extends to three-mile belts seaward from the mainland and around the perimeter of each of the islands. If a crime begins within the three-mile limit, this department has full jurisdiction to investigate and make arrests. If the crime occurs outside that three-mile limit, the jurisdiction falls to the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI). For example, if a crime occurs mid-way between Long Beach and Catalina, the FBI has jurisdiction. If the crime occurs within three miles of Catalina, the Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department has jurisdiction. While the ships are in international waters or the territorial waters of another country (in this case Mexico), the United States may exercise extraterritorial jurisdiction if certain criteria is met. International law recognizes five theories of jurisdiction under which a country is permitted to exercise extraterritorial criminal jurisdiction. • Territorial jurisdiction, both subject and objective, based on the location where the offense is committed or the effects of the act • Nationality jurisdiction, based on the nationality of the offender • Protective jurisdiction, based on the protection of the nation's interest, security, and integrity • Universal jurisdiction, which amounts to physical custody of the offender • Passive personality jurisdiction, based on the nationality of the victim 103 – Crimes in International Waters 233 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Most of Carnival Cruise Lines ships travel south to Mexican ports. While cruising in either direction, the ships are usually about thirty (30) miles off shore. It is imperative for officers responding to a call for service to ascertain the time of the crime’s occurrence as close as possible so that the ships position can be fixed by longitude and latitude coordinates. The ship logs its coordinates and speed at regular intervals to assist in determining the ships location at a given time. Carnival Cruise Lines will contact the FBI directly if they believe the crime occurred in international waters. The FBI may decline to respond due to the minor nature of the crime. If FBI declines, our department may be called to conduct an investigation. INVESTIGATION, REPORTING & INCARCERATION If called, and it is determined that the crime was in-fact committed in international waters, investigate the seriousness of the crime as to loss, violence, injuries, political ramifications, etc. If warranted, take a courtesy report to be forwarded to the FBI for consideration of presentation to the U.S. Attorney. Interview and interrogate all victims, witnesses and suspects as thoroughly as possible, as they will be from all over the country and difficult to interview at a later time. Do not make an arrest, except as a last resort, and then only as a detainee for the FBI. Keep in mind that the federal judicial system is not equipped to handle or house juvenile suspects. We may be asked to assist in detaining a juvenile suspect even on cases being handled by the FBI. LBPD can only detain minors for a maximum of six hours. The FBI will have to make arrangements with Los Padrinos to detain a minor for a longer period of time. RESOURCES • Carnival Cruise Lines Security is located in Miami, Florida, and can be contacted at (305) 406-5011 • Agent Deirdre Emmes, FBI – Long Beach Office, is the specialist in “crimes at sea” and can be reached at (562) 590-6657. The 24-hour FBI Duty Agent can be reached at (310) 477-6565 • The U.S. Coast Guard Search And Rescue (SAR) Center can be reached at (310) 732-2046, to provide a ship’s location offshore, if given the coordinates CONCLUSION Officers should be very careful in making arrests for crimes occurring in international waters and should do so only as a last resort with intention of transferring custody to the FBI for federal prosecution. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigation Bureau 234 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 106 – Disturbing the Peace REVISED March 2004 DISTURBING THE PEACE – PC 415 THE LAW §415 PC – “Any of the following persons shall be punished by imprisonment in the county jail for a period of not more than 90 days, a fine of not more than $400, or both such imprisonment and fine.” • Any person who unlawfully fights in a public place or challenges another person in a public place to fight • Any person who maliciously and willfully disturbs another person by loud and unreasonable noise • Any person who uses offensive words in a public place which are inherently likely to produce an immediate violent reaction “…Loud and Unreasonable Noise” In determining what constitutes a "loud and unreasonable noise," the first step is to decide if it is a "communication." "Communications" are words, shouting, or cheering that are intended to convey ideas, and they are generally protected by the First Amendment (freedom of speech). On the other hand, a loud noise such as a motorcycle revving at 3 a.m. is not communication. Neither is shouting which is done for the purpose of disruption. A loud family fight during the night would also fit in this category. Although it technically involves communication, it is not the type protected by the First Amendment. “…Inherently Likely to Provoke an Immediate Violent Reaction” Concerning what words are "inherently likely to provoke an immediate violent reaction" under section 415 (3), courts held that profanity screamed by the defendant at his neighbor as she drove by, was enough to constitute a violation. Additionally, racial slurs would also likely suffice for prosecution under this section. The arrest report for an arrest for offensive words needs to include the name of the offended party, the offensive words communicated, the manner in which they were communicated, the reaction of the offended party and any other acts that show the crime was malicious in nature. Challenging an Officer to Fight and Offensive Words Directed at an Officer On the other hand, if the "fighting words" are directed at a police officer, courts will recognize that the officer is "required to exercise a higher degree of restraint than the average citizen in reacting to verbal abuse." Obviously, if the officer is not in fact offended 106 – Disturbing the Peace 235 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents or provoked, there will be no violation. For example, at the scene of an accident a hostile motorist calls an officer a "fucking asshole," and the officer is annoyed but does not feel threatened or provoked in any way. However, a violation does occur if the officer feels personally threatened such as when a non-arrested defendant expressly challenged the officer to fight, and officer "felt it could turn into physical assault." Disturbance of Peace with Unwilling Complaining Party A police officer’s peace may be disturbed at a loud party if the officer can testify that the noise was too loud as corroborated by evidence. The officer may make an arrest even if the complaining party refuses to be a victim, however, the officer must then be prepared to be a witness with corroborating evidence. For example: • At 0100 hours the noise was well above normal conversation levels and could easily be heard 100’ away from the party location; or • Neighbors were gathering outside at 0100 hours, looking at the party; or • At 0100 hours there was bumper to bumper traffic because of party goers looking for places to park This does not mean that an arrest is called for in every situation. Officers are expected to use good judgment and evaluate each situation on the basis of observable facts Disturbance of Peace with Willing Complaining Party Remember that a case is always stronger when a complaining party (CP) is willing to be a victim. When dispatched to speak to a CP regarding a disturbance, always obtain their name, address and full statement. Advise the CP that if the party cannot be quieted with a warning that an arrest or citation will occur and the CP may be required to testify in court. The Report When disturbance circumstances results in an arrest, the arrest report should indicate any other conditions that affirm that the peace and quiet of the neighborhood has been disturbed. Facts, which should appear in the report, include: • Number and frequency of calls to the area • Prior warnings, names of persons warned and names of officers giving prior warnings • Homes in the vicinity have lights on at unusual hours as evidence of annoyance to people who might normally be asleep • Any pertinent statements from CPs • Number of units required to handle the situation Since malice is one of the elements of “disturbing the peace,” indication that the offence was a continuing one would tend to establish the element. Officers should be alert for any statement or other evidence that would tend to prove malice and incorporate this information in the report. 106 – Disturbing the Peace 236 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents CONCLUSION • Know the law • Establish the elements of the offense • Obtain names, addresses of victims and witnesses • File a complete, concise report and include all information • Don’t rely on your memory for later testimony REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 237 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 107 – Intoxilyzer 5000 REVISED February 2003 INTOXILYZER 5000 – BREATH INSTRUMENT INTRODUCTION The Intoxilyzer 5000 is designed to measure the percent of alcohol in blood through the analysis of a person’s breath. It is widely accepted by the judicial system as a means of documenting and determining the degree of alcohol intoxication. OPERATING PRINCIPLE Intoxilyzers operate on the principle of infrared energy (light) absorption, based on the fact that alcohol absorbs infrared energy at a specific wavelength. It measures the degree to which alcohol absorbs infrared energy; the more alcohol present, the greater the absorption of infrared energy. A quartz lamp generates infrared energy that travels through a single sample chamber containing the subject’s breath. Upon leaving the sample chamber, a lens focuses the energy onto the chopper modulator containing three optical filters that allow only specific infrared energy wavelengths to pass through. The three wavelengths – one for alcohol, one for acetone and one for reference – are focused into a infrared energy detector which converts the light into electrical impulses. An electronic processor interprets the impulses and the percent of blood alcohol concentration is displayed. OPERATION The intoxilyzer is fully automatic. By pushing a single button and inserting a card, the intoxilyzer becomes operational. After the subject has blown into a clean mouthpiece attached to the sample tube, test results, including date, time and instrument serial # are printed on a three part evidence card. A complete test includes two subject tests that are within 0.02% and three test blanks of 0.00%. If the test results are not within 0.02%, then an additional card must be run. The procedure for operation is attached. Officers must have two samples within 0.02% even if they are on separate cards. The Intoxilyzer Precautionary Checklist must be completed for each subject tested. The test card is stapled to the checklist and the test information must be placed into the user log. The user log should be kept in the immediate vicinity of the intoxilyzer. All operators must be trained and certified in its use by a licensed criminalist from the Crime Lab. Deficient Sample When the card reads “deficient sample,” this is not a sample and the test must be run again. The machine will not differentiate between a deficient sample and regular test. 107 – Intoxilyzer 238 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Therefore it is up to the operator to make the distinction. Deficient sample cards must be retained and included with the report. If two valid subject tests cannot be obtained, either due to “deficient sample” or inability of the subject taking the test, it will be considered a refusal unless the subject completes another test, blood or urine. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY investigations Bureau 107 – Intoxilyzer 239 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents INTOXILYZER PRECAUTIONARY CHECKLIST LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SUBJECT LAST NAME FIRST INITIAL VIOLATION BOOKING NO. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PREPARING FOR TEST 1. ( ) Continuously observe the subject for twenty minutes prior to the test; during this time the subject must not ingest alcoholic beverages or other fluids, regurgitate, vomit, eat or smoke, 2. ( ) Display is lit – instrument is to be left on at all times 3. ( ) Affix a new, clean mouthpiece to the breath tubing. Sanitary practices require a clean mouthpiece for each subject tested. Prompt should read, “READY TO START.” 4. ( ) Momentarily depress the start button. 5. ( ) Insert card print side up attached edge in. Prompt should read, “INSERT CARD.” 6. ( ) Driving related offense require that the subject submit at least two breath samples that agree within 0.020% BA (blood alcohol) TEST PROCEDURE: FOLLOW DIRECTIONS ON THE DIGITAL DISPLAY 7. ( ) Allow the air blank to be completed, the prompt should read “AIR BLANK ####” 8. ( ) Advise the subject to take a breath and blow into the mouthpiece until the tone stops. The prompt should read “PLEASE BLOW INTO THE MOUTHPIECE UNTIL THE TONE STOPS. PLEASE BLOW.” 9. ( ) If the sample is accepted the BA level will appear on the display. If not, follow the prompt, “PLEASE BLOW” (Flashing “PLEASE BLOW” indicates an inadequate sample was delivered. Have the subject blow again.” 10. ( ) Allow the air blank to be completed. The prompt should read “AIR BLANK” ###” 11. ( ) Advise the subject to take a breath and blow into the mouthpiece until the tone stops. Prompt should read, “PLEASE BLOW INTO THE MOUTHPIECE UNTIL THE TONE STOPS. PLEASE BLOW.” 12. ( ) If the sample is accepted, the BA level will appear on the display. If not, follow the prompt “PLEASE BLOW” (Flashing “PLEASE BLOW” indicates an inadequate sample was delivered. Have the subject blow again.) 13. ( ) Allow the air blank to be completed. The prompt should read “AIR BLANK ###” 14. ( ) IF the results of the two breath samples vary by more than .02%, repeat steps 11 ( ), 107 – Intoxilyzer 240 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 12 ( ), and 13 ( ). 15. ( ) Complete the card with; the subject’s name, Intoxilyzer unit number letter, time first observed, operator’s name, location of instrument, attach the card to the precautionary checklist. 16. ( ) Enter the following information in the appropriate Intoxilyzer log book with; the subject’s name, instrument unit letter, date, time, operator’s name, and results. Complete the precautionary checklist with; the operator’s name, photo #, date and unit letter. 17. ( ) Following proper sanitary practices, remove and discard the mouthpiece. The instrument is to be left on. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > < >STAPLE STAPLE < > < > < > < > < > < > < > < > ATTACH CARD < > < > < > < > < > < > < > < >STAPLE STAPLE < > < --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OPERATOR OFFICER’S DID# DATE UNIT LETTER 241 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome E. Lance, Chief of Police 108 – Special Incidents REVISED October 2001 SPECIAL INCIDENTS People are frequently injured accidentally, and while often there is no police related issue, the police are called because of injury and/or property damage. A complete "Special Incident" report shall be filed when certain incidents occur on City property, whether or not an injury is sustained. These reports assist the City Attorney's Office in the case of civil actions and also alert the City Department responsible for reporting or correcting the property involved. A copy of this report is forwarded to the City Attorney's office. An officer shall file a complete incident report entitled "Special Incident", whenever dispatched to one of the following: WHEN TO FILE A SPECIAL INCIDENT REPORT • Any injury or non-injury accident, other than motor vehicle, which occurred on or in any way involves City property; e.g., on streets, in parks, sidewalks, beaches, public buildings, public trees, etc. • Any injury or non-injury accident, other than motor vehicle, which occurred in the harbor or marina area, such as boating accidents, injuries on piers, beaches, public buildings, etc. • Any injury or non-injury airplane accident or incident (see Training Bulletin 58 Aircraft Accidents) • Any injury where there is a possibility that such an injury was the result of criminal means and a incident report was not filed Note: Do not file a Special Incident Report on a motor vehicle accident. Any time vehicles are in transit and an accident occurs, file a regular accident report. Content of the Report • The report should be composed on Long Beach Police Incident Report PD Form 2310.00(A). Use Crime Class Code "SPECACC", which is for Special Accident/Incidents • The information side of the form will include all data in the manner as a regular crime report with the exception of the solvability factors and the MO portion. These boxes will be left blank • The narrative (body) portion of the report form will include all investigation conducted by the officers: "How accident occurred, statements of witnesses, victims, etc." It should include the responding paramedic unit or ambulance number, name of the hospital and doctor, injuries sustained by the victim and treatment administered. The 108 – Special Incidents 242 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents doctor's observation should be included, if readily available. Officers should include a statement from the victim regarding the incident and note whether the victim had been drinking or not. Private Property A "Special Incident" report is not usually required if a person is injured on private property such as in a residence, in a parochial school, schoolyard or private industrial property (factory). However, if the officer feels there is a likelihood the City may become involved civilly, a complete report entitled "Special Incident, Private Property", etc., should be taken. Discretion Officers should use discretion. For example, a unit responds to a "man down" call and finds an individual lying on the sidewalk. It appears that the man suffered a heart attack. If officers feel that the subject sustained an injury from the fall, a "Special Incident" report is in order. This will be of value to the City Attorney in case future civil action is filed. The issue may be raised that the individual tripped on the sidewalk, injuring himself, causing the attack. It is not uncommon to have a "Special Incident" filed under the above circumstance and the person is later discovered to be victim of a strong-arm robbery. Conclusion • Know when a "Special Incident" Report is required • File a complete report. List all the facts and conduct a complete investigation. (It is difficult to go back six months later and obtain the facts) Try to locate witnesses and include their statements • Consult your sergeant when in doubt REVIEW Responsibility Patrol Bureau 243 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 111 – Juvenile Booking Procedures REVISED September 2000 JUVENILE BOOKING PROCEDURES INTRODUCTION The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to inform officers about the proper way to process detained/arrested juveniles. Booking Juveniles All in custody juveniles, with the exception of some dependent and found children who are described in Section 300 and 601 of the Welfare and Institution Code (WIC), shall be taken to Youth Services Division at 1957 Pacific Avenue for processing. Dependent Children (300 WIC) & Wards of the Court (601) WIC Dependent and found children will NOT be temporarily housed in the Public Safety Building or any other police facility, while awaiting final disposition by a County of Los Angeles Department of Children and Family Services (DCFS) employee. All dependent children as described in Section 300 WIC and taken into temporary custody under authority of Section 305 WIC shall be delivered directly to DCFS in the manner prescribed below. • All found children who are in custody of the police may be released to their parent(s) or legal guardian. If a parent or legal guardian cannot be found, the child shall be released to DCFS. NOTE: Officers shall NOT allow a citizen who has found a child to return the child to the parents. A police unit shall take charge of the child Police officers who take dependent children into custody must: • Notify the Child Abuse Detail, Monday-Friday between 0700 – 1800 hours at 570- 7321. In the case of severe physical or sexual abuse, a Child Abuse Detective may respond • Notify Los Angeles County Child Abuse Hotline, 24-hour telephone number (800) 540- 4000, dial 9 (police only). Note the social worker’s name and the case reference number and include in the narrative portion of the incident report • Complete a Dependent Booking form and Arrest Report. All police reports should be filed no later than end of watch and taken to 400 West Broadway as soon as possible • Weekdays/Business hours 0900 – 1530: Dependent children shall be taken to DCFS, 4060 Watson Plaza Drive, Lakewood (562) 497-3500 or (562) 497-3776 111 – Juvenile Booking 244 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Give the DCFS Supervisor on duty the case reference number provided by the hotline • If the officer is unable to obtain the case reference number while in the field, he/she may transport the dependent to the facility and use their telephone to get the case reference number Non-business hours, holidays, weekends • At this time there is no location in Long Beach to take dependent children after weekday/business hours. After the officer calls the Child Abuse Hotline 800 number, he/she shall call the on-duty hotline command post supervisor − Sunday through Wednesday, contact the supervisor at (213) 639-4494 − Thursday through Saturday, the on-duty supervisor can be reached at (213) 639- 4492. Explain the abuse to the supervisor and he/she will make every attempt to shorten the arrival time of a hotline caseworker • If the officer can reach a relative of the dependent children who is willing to take temporary custody, the on-duty supervisor has the authority to telephonically place the dependent children. This is done by conducting a short background investigation on the relative prior to giving permission for placement (this still requires a 300 WIC booking) 300 WIC children who are taken by the Department of Children and Family Services (DCFS), and not brought to 1957 Pacific, must still be processed through the booking computer. These bookings may be accomplished in the booking facilities located at any sub-station, the downtown Public Safety Building, or 1957 Pacific. Booking officers will accept these bookings at 1957 Pacific and not refer officers to another facility for booking. Wherever the booking is accomplished, arresting officers will be required to turn the paperwork in at 400 West Broadway, as the Child Abuse unit will handle the processing. 300 WIC children who have warrants are to be brought through the front door of 1957 Pacific. Officers will contact the Youth Services officer at the front desk for further direction. 300 WIC children shall not be detained with juveniles described as 601 WIC violators, (incorrigibles, truants, runaways and juvenile loiterers) or 602 WIC violators (violators of criminal laws). The arresting officers will keep 300 WIC children in constant visual and auditory contact. Officers will follow the procedures noted in Manual Section 7.1.25 (Protective Custody of Dependents) for all 300 WIC children who do not have a warrant. On rare occasions children under three years of age may have warrants. These children should not be brought to 1957 Pacific. Officers will follow the procedures noted in Manual Section 7.1.25 when dealing with 300 WIC children under three years of age. JUVENILE PRISONERS WHO CANNOT BE DETAINED AT 1957 PACIFIC Juvenile prisoners cannot be booked at 1957 Pacific if the juvenile is: • Intoxicated to such an extent that he/she poses an immediate threat to him/herself or others (A juvenile who has been drinking but is cleared for booking by a doctor is the exception) 111 – Juvenile Booking 245 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Psychotic, i.e. within the scope of 5150 of the WIC. • Under the influence of PCP • In need of immediate medical care at a hospital emergency room • In need of continuing medical care or treatment • Suicidal • One who presents a physical control problem • One who requires special handling, which may exceed the abilities of detention personnel, i.e. a juvenile with serious medical or mental problems that significantly increase department liability. If in doubt, call the Youth Services Division at 570-1425 If officers detain any of the above mentioned juveniles, they are to be transported to a hospital or county facility according to Manual Section 6.5.5.2 (Arrestees - Emergency or Injured) or Training Bulletin 62. Arresting or transporting officers are responsible for searching their prisoners. All arrested subjects shall be handcuffed while being transported to Youth Services Division and during the booking process or until they are placed in a holding room. Note: The only reason to un-cuff a juvenile outside of the holding room will be to fingerprint or release the juvenile to a parent or legal guardian, or to facilitate the juvenile in signing a citation or completing a writing sample. • All officers who enter the booking area at the Youth Services Building are required to secure their weapons in one of the gun lockers provided • Officers will then enter the detention area. They will first pass through the 601 WIC detention enroute to booking. Officers will ensure that 601 WIC violators do not have direct contact with 602 WIC juveniles (contact being defined as communication either verbal or by hand signals) • Officers will contact a juvenile detective as soon as possible. The on duty Youth Services Sergeant (or a YSD detective if no sergeant is on duty) will evaluate the arrest and approve the booking • If the booking is approved, officers will fill out a county booking form, a juvenile booking form, and inventory the juvenile’s property. • Detectives will again search the juvenile prior to placing him/her in a holding room. All officers will follow the searching procedures noted in Manual Section 6.5.3 (Responsibility for Searching Prisoners) and 6.5.4 (Searching of Arrestees) Intoxicated Juveniles (Alcohol and/or Drugs) • Juveniles who are intoxicated from alcohol and/or drugs will be taken to the City’s contract hospital for medical clearance before booking and before being released to their parents or guardians, or to Juvenile Hall • Juveniles who have possibly ingested dangerous quantities of a legal or any quantity of an illegal substance will also be taken to the City’s contract hospital for evaluation • Officers are reminded that some drugs that are taken may not take effect right away. All juveniles who are arrested for intoxication must be constantly monitored for possible life-threatening changes 111 – Juvenile Booking 246 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • If there is any doubt as to whether a juvenile’s level of intoxication is a danger or not, the juvenile will be transported immediately to the City’s contract hospital. The above guidelines are mandatory per Section 1431, Title 15, California Code of Regulations Medical Care of Juveniles • Arresting officers are responsible for the proper medical care of the juveniles they detain. Juveniles who are bleeding, have open wounds, are complaining of pain, or who are showing signs of medical distress must immediately be taken to the city contract hospital (prior to booking) • Juveniles who have any communicable diseases should be cited out whenever possible. Officers will notify their immediate supervisor of the exposure and file appropriate paperwork, if necessary • Occasionally, a juvenile may need to be admitted to a hospital or there is a need for continuous medical treatment of some type. If the juvenile being detained has committed a murder or serious felony, he/she will need to be booked at USC Medical Center. Juveniles who have committed minor offenses will be released, not booked. Call Youth Services Division for guidance as soon as possible when these situations occur • The juvenile supplemental booking form contains a box regarding the juvenile’s medical condition and the juvenile’s drug and/or alcohol consumption. These boxes must be filled out prior to booking. Officers will notify the booking personnel of the minor’s medical condition prior to booking • Booking personnel are responsible for determining if the juvenile’s medical condition is considered unacceptable for booking. It is the arresting officer’s responsibility to ensure care and, if necessary, transportation of the juvenile REVIEW Responsibility The Investigations Bureau will monitor compliance with this Training Bulletin. Jerome E. Lance Chief of Police Effective Date—September 27, 2000 247 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 112 – Juvenile Procedures Truancy REVISED April 2000 JUVENILE PROCEDURES: TRUANCY INTRODUCTION: A particular aspect in dealing with youthful offenders is that they are capable of committing "status offenses", which are acts or behaviors that are usually legal if committed by an adult. Truancy, or an unauthorized absence from school, is an example of a status offense. Truancy Defined: California Education Code §48260 Any pupil subject to compulsory full-time education or to compulsory continuation education who is absent from school without valid excuse three full days in one school year or tardy or absent for more than any 30-minute period during the school day without a valid excuse on three occasions in one school year, or any combination thereof, is a truant and shall be reported to the attendance supervisor or to the superintendent of the school district. Enforcement of Truancy Laws: California Education Code §48261 Any pupil who has once been reported as a truant and who is again absent from school without a valid excuse for one or more days, or tardy on one or more days, shall again be reported as a truant to the attendance supervisor or the superintendent of the district. Habitual Truant: California Education Code §48262 Any pupil is deemed a habitual truant who has been reported as a truant three or more times per school year. The appropriate district officer or employee must make a conscientious effort to hold at least one conference with a parent or guardian of the pupil and the pupil himself, after the filing of either of the reports required by Section 48260 or Section 48261. OFFICERS RESPONSIBILITY California Education Code §48264 The attendance supervisor or his or her designee, a peace officer, a school administrator or his or her designee, or a probation officer may arrest or assume temporary custody, during school hours, of any minor subject to compulsory full-time education or to compulsory continuation education found away from his or her home and who is absent from school without valid excuse within the county, city, or city and county, or school district. There are specific penalties outlined in § 48264.5, including mandatory truancy prevention counseling, community service, suspension of driving privilege and fines. 112 – Truancy 248 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • An officer may transport the minor to the school in which he/she is enrolled during the current school year, during school hours, while school is in session. • Or, the minor may be transported to the truancy abatement center operated by the school district. This option is best used when the student is truant from a district outside of Long Beach. (Communications will have the current location of a truancy abatement center on file) • The officer will complete a report noting where the minor was observed, (truancy does not have to occur in a public place) and submit the report to the attendance supervisor • In the case of a habitual truant, the officer will follow the same procedure and add the notation that the pupil should be referred to the School Attendance Review Board at the individual school, or run by the school district. Long Beach Municipal Code §9.58.020 (Truancy or daytime curfew) Another tool Officers have to address the problem of truancy is Long Beach Municipal Code Section 9.58.020. “It is unlawful for any minor under the age of eighteen years, who is subject to compulsory education or to compulsory continuation education, alone or in concert with others, to loiter, idle, wander, stroll or play in or upon the public streets, highways, roads, alleys, parks, playgrounds, and other public grounds, public places, public buildings, places of amusement and eating places, vacant lots or any place open to the public during the hours of eight-thirty a.m. to one- thirty p.m. on days when said minor’s school is in session.” Youths violating this may be detained and cited. Officers must ensure the youth is not away from school for one of the seven exceptions listed in the Section. Careful application of the Section will help prevent the courts from eliminating this useful tool. Seven Exceptions • His/her parent, guardian, or other adult person having the care and custody of the minor accompanies the minor • The minor is on an emergency errand directed by his/her parent or guardian or other adult person having the care and custody of the minor • The minor is going to or coming from their place of gainful employment or in a public place incidental to their place of employment • The minor is going or coming to or from a medical appointment • The minor has permission to leave campus for lunch or other school-related activity and has in his/her possession a valid, school-issued, off campus permit • The minor is in a place connected or required with respect to a business, trade, profession or occupation in which the minor is lawfully engaged • The minor is not required by his or her school vacation, track or curriculum schedule to be in school Whether the minor is cited, transported home or transported back to school, he/she shall be released to a responsible adult. REVIEW Responsibility 112 – Truancy 249 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Investigations Bureau 250 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 113 – Fraudulent Document Report REVISED April 2001 FRAUDULENT DOCUMENT REPORT The Fraudulent Document Report, PD form 3132.002(D), revised 10/31/97, will be the original report filed in our Records Division and presented to the District Attorney for criminal filings. The Fraudulent Document Report will be used to report all check violations (non-sufficient funds and account-closed checks and forgeries). However, there will be other forgeries and fraudulent documents that will be filed on a regular Police Department Incident Report; e.g., forgery of narcotics prescriptions, forgery of driver’s licenses, pink slips, etc. Most business people file their check cases directly with the Forgery/Fraud Detail, however, on occasion, patrol officers will be dispatched to assist the recipient of a dishonored check. FORGERY - ELEMENTS • Every person who, with the intent to defraud, signs the name of another or of a fictitious person knowing he/she has no authority to do so, or who • Alters or counterfeits any documents which can be negotiated for profit, or who • Utters or passes as true and genuine any forged, altered or counterfeit document, is guilty of a felony Laws of Arrest Forgery is always a felony and an arrest can be made on probable cause. Means of Accomplishing Forgery • Signing the true name of another person, or • Signing a fictitious name as endorser, maker or payee • Passing a forged check, knowing it to be altered, forged, counterfeit or of a fictitious making in the suspect’s own name as maker or endorser Alters by: • Raising the amount by erasure, eradication, or addition • Changing the name of payee or maker • Okayer’s name or initials changed or added • Changing of date 113 – Fraudulent Document Report 251 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Utters or passes: • Presents known forged item to be cashed to obtain money, merchandise or services • No writing on the forged documents by suspect is necessary • Knowledge of forgery can be deducted by circumstances supporting probable cause PASSING OR POSSESSION OF UNFINISHED CHECKS, MONEY ORDERS OR TRAVELERS CHECKS §475(a) PC – Every person who possesses or receives, with the intent to pass or facilitate the passage or utterance of any forged, altered or counterfeit items, or completed items contained in subdivision (d) of §470 with intent to defraud, knowing the same to be forged, altered or counterfeit is guilty of forgery. §475(b) PC – Every person who possesses any blank or unfinished check, note bank bill, money order, or traveler’s check, whether real or fictitious, with the intention of completing the same or the intention of facilitating the completion of the same, in order to defraud any person, is guilty of forgery. §475(c) PC – Every person who possesses any completed check, money order, traveler’s check, warrant or county order, whether real or fictitious, with the intent to utter or pass or facilitate the utterance or passage of the same, in order to defraud any person is guilty of forgery. EVIDENCE Primary items of evidence in any check case are: • Check • Invoice • Forged document Secondary items of evidence • Driver’s license that includes signature and photo • Other items of identification in suspect’s possession • Description and license number of suspect’s vehicle which may lead to identification or location of the suspect Other items of evidence • The vehicle used may be impounded at the discretion of the officer if the suspect is arrested for a felony • Handwriting Exemplars – When an arrest is made for forgery, the Jail Division will request a handwriting exemplar card (PD form 3134.001) be completed and turned over to the Forgery/Fraud Detail 113 – Fraudulent Document Report 252 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents – If the suspect(s) refuses the exemplar, the investigator assigned can then request a judge to order the suspect to fill out the exemplar NON-SUFFICIENT FUND CHECKS (NSF CHECKS) Fraudulent checks of this type are commonplace and are reported to the Police Department in large numbers. Not all “NSF” checks are criminal offenses, and victims do not consider them to be crimes in the same manner they regard theft or bunco/fraud. §476 (a) Felony and (b) Misdemeanor PC – Elements of NSF Any person who willfully and with the intent to defraud, makes or passes any check, knowing at the time that there are insufficient funds in the account or knowing the account to be closed, is guilty of a felony if the value exceeds $200.00. • The arrest of a suspect for investigation of felony NSF checks can be made where there is probable cause to believe that the suspect has any number of checks out- standing which would together exceed a total of $200 − The probable cause exists when checks are from the same suspect to the same victim (For example, a $100.00 NSF check written to Vons and a $100.00 NSF check to Ralph’s would constitute two misdemeanors. In order constitute a felony, the loss to either Vons or Ralph’s would have to be in excess of $200.00) − The officer receives information from the Forgery/Fraud Detail or Records Division regarding other checks written by the suspect and reported to the Police Department • A rule of thumb for criminal NSF check cases is the fact that something of value should change hands at the time the check is accepted by the victim (cash, goods, or services) • The act of making and/or presenting a check or checks must be done in the presence of the arresting citizen if the value is $200.00 or less as with any misdemeanor arrest • Automobile dealers who complain of a purchase of a vehicle with a NSF check shall be referred to the Forgery/Fraud Detail CHECKS NOT HANDLED BY THE POLICE DEPARTMENT (CIVIL OR OTHER AGENCIES) • Rent Checks – A NSF check received by the landlord will be handled civilly, as if the tenant had never paid his rent for that period (Unless the check is for the 1st month’s rent, in this case file a fraudulent document report and refer to forgery fraud) • Two-Party Checks – Issued by one party to another who in turn cashes with a third party, forgeries included • Payroll or Any Check Issued for Wages – Is by law the jurisdiction of the California Labor Commission and must be reported to that agency. However, forgeries of such checks are still handled by this Department • Post Dated Checks – The suspect has, in effect, told the victim that there are insufficient funds in the account at the time the check is presented • Checks Issued to Make Payment of an Existing Debt – These are in the same category as the rent checks. Such checks represent non-payment and are civil 113 – Fraudulent Document Report 253 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • NSF Checks 90 Days Old From the Date of Issue – This policy is based on the premise that 90 days is sufficient time for a victim who is primarily interested in prosecution to make a report • Checks Accepted in Payment of an Illegal Activity – These include gambling obligations and other such debts • Checks on Out of State Banks – These can be prosecuted by using a legal form known as a Protest Form (§476 (c) PC) however, this process is complicated and time consuming and is only used in cases involving insistent victims or for serious felony cases involving large losses • United States Treasury Checks – These are investigated exclusively by the US Secret Service • Jurisdiction – Checks accepted outside Long Beach must be reported to the appropriate jurisdiction • United States Postal Money Orders – These should be reported to the Postal Inspector • Stop Payment Checks – Considered to be civil, unless intent to defraud can be shown • Checks Accepted in Bars (Forgeries Excluded) REPORTING PROCEDURES • Suspect not in custody – Most NSF checks are reported by the victims directly to the Forgery Detail either by mail or by personally bringing them to the Detail. If an officer is dispatched to assist a citizen who has received a dishonored check, and it is of an infrequent occasion, the officer should assist the individual in filling out the Fraudulent Document form, PD form 3132.002 (D), and attach the dishonored check to the form. The form should then be forwarded to the Forgery/Fraud Detail where it will be examined by detectives, assigned a number, and processed • Suspect in Custody – There will be times when the officer is dispatched to a bank or store where a suspect has been detained for attempting to pass a stolen and forged check. At this time, the officer should complete PD form 2132.002 (D) and process it like any other incident report. If the crime occurs while the Forgery/Fraud Detail is working, the officer can call with questions INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING FRAUDULENT DOCUMENT REPORT The report form has numbered spaces corresponding with the below numbered instructions. When filling out the Fraudulent Document Report, please print or type the required information in BLACK INK. NOTE: Completed Fraudulent Document reports to be sent to the Long Beach Police Department MUST be on the PINK form designated as the original report copy. SECTION 1: INCIDENT INFORMATION 1) DR: Leave this space blank. A DR number will be added to the report by LBPD. 113 – Fraudulent Document Report 254 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 2) SUPP: Leave this space blank. 3) DATE RPTD: The time report is mailed or hand delivered to LBPD. 4) TIME RPTD: The time report is mailed or hand delivered to LBPD. 5) CRIME CLASS: Leave this space blank. The specific crime title will be added to the report by LBPD. 6) LOCATION OF OCCURRENCE: Street address where the check was accepted. 7) CITY: City where the check was accepted. 8) THROUGH 11: Leave these spaces blank. 12) OCCURRED ON DATE: Specific time that the check was accepted. 13) TIME: Specific time that the check was accepted. 14) THROUGH 17: Leave these spaces blank. SECTION 2: PERSON/BUSINESS 18) INVOLVEMENT: “V” – victim business. 19) INVOLVEMENT DATE: The date the business accepted the check. 20) NAME: Business name. 21) THROUGH 31: Leave these spaces blank. 32) THROUGH 36: Victim address, city, state, zip, phone number, if the victim is a firm or business, list the address of the firm or business. 37) BUSINESS NAME: Leave Blank 38) TYPE OF BUSINESS: Type of business when victim is a firm or business. (Example, record store, pizza parlor, department store, food take-out, etc.). If victim is an individual, list occupation such as doctor, plumber, laborer, lawyer, etc., do not list self-employed. 39) THROUGH 42: Leave blank. 43) BUSINESS PHONE: The phone number of the business where the check 113 – Fraudulent Document Report 255 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents was accepted. 44) SUSPECT: Leave blank. 45) SUSPECT OBSERVABLE: Leave blank. 46) REMARKS: The days and hours that the business is opened and closed. SECTION 3: PERSON/BUSINESS 47) INVOLVEMENT: R/P = Reporting person who is filling out this form 48) INVOLVEMENT DATE: The date that the R/P is filling out this form. 49) THROUGH 65: The full name of R/P, giving last name first and all other identifying information must be complete. 66) BUSINESS NAME: The name of the business that the R/P works for. 67) TYPE OF BUSINESS: Type of business if victim is a firm or business. (Example, record store, pizza parlor, department store, food take-out, etc.). If victim is an individual, list occupation such as doctor, plumber, laborer, lawyer, etc., do not list self-employed. 68) THROUGH 72: The business address where the R/P works, city, state, zip code, and phone number. 73) SUSPECT INFO: Leave blank. 74) SUSPECT OBSERVABLE: Leave blank. 75) REMARKS: The days and hours that the R/P works and can be reached for further investigation. SECTION 4: PERSON/BUSINESS 76) INVOLVEMENT: “S” = for suspect that passed the bad check. 77) INVOLVEMENT DATE: The date that the suspect passed the bad check. 78) THROUGH 94: The name and address used by the suspect while trying to pass the bad check. List physical description of the person who cashed or presented this check. Driver’s license number or California identification card used by the suspect. List social security number, credit card numbers, employer identification, etc. 95) THROUGH 101: Leave blank. 113 – Fraudulent Document Report 256 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 102) SUSPECT INFO: List age of suspect and clothing worn by the suspect. 103) SUSPECT OBSERVABLE: List any physical oddities/ characteristics of the suspect. 104) REMARKS: List other information pertinent to this check or the suspect. Indicate if contact has been made with suspect and the results. SECTION 5: FRAUDULENT DOCUMENT REPORT This section requires the acceptor’s name, the person who accepted the check, address, and phone number, working hours, business address, sex, race and date of birth. This must be completed. The check information must be completed. Leave Package # blank. Any identification used by suspect and vehicle used must be completed. Any additional information concerning the passing of the check or of the suspect. SECTION 6: VEHICLE SECTION Generally, the same information as contained above in section 5. COPIES OF THE PINK FRAUDULENT DOCUMENT REPORT FORMS CAN BE OBTAINED BY SENDING A SELF-ADDRESSED STAMPED ENVELOPE TO: LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT FORGERY DETAIL 400 WEST BROADWAY, Rm. 342 LONG BEACH, CA 90802 ANY QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE COMPLETION OF THIS FORM PLEASE CONTACT THE FORGERY DETAIL AT (562) 570-7330. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 257 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon REVISED November 2022 CONDUCTED ELECTRICAL WEAPON (CEW) INTRODUCTION The Conducted Electrical Weapon (CEW) is a handheld, battery-powered device. It is designed to override the sensory and motor nervous functions of the central nervous system, and temporarily incapacitate potentially violent subjects by creating uncontrollable muscular contractions. The CEW is a force option and is governed by the Use of Force policy outlined in the Long Beach Police Department Policy Manual. While other manufacturers of CEWs exist, the TASER CEW (AXON Enterprise, Inc.) is the only device approved for deployment by the Long Beach Police Department. NEURO-MUSCULAR INCAPACITATION (NMI) TASER CEW technology is effective because it creates neuro-muscular incapacitation. Unlike traditional impact weapons that focus mainly on pain compliance by overloading a subject’s sensory nerves, the CEW affects the sensory and motor functions of the nervous system. When the CEW is deployed, the subject experiences pain (through the sensory nerves) while the subject’s muscles involuntarily contract due to the electrical pulse, thus overloading the motor nerve functions. This incapacitating effect is ONLY present while the CEW is being deployed and cycling. It is for this reason that while a violent subject is incapacitated by the effects of the CEW, and if it is reasonably safe to do so, the cover officer(s) should attempt to handcuff the subject. Doing so may reduce the need for additional cycles, reduce the likelihood the subject will roll during the cycle, and reduce the potential of injury to the officers because the subject is incapacitated ONLY during the cycle. ELECTRICAL OUTPUT OF THE TASER CEW Neuro-muscular incapacitation (NMI) is achieved by the electrical output delivered from the CEW. The CEW operates at a high peak voltage of 50,000 volts. This high voltage operation only occurs when the electrical arc is required to jump a gap such as between the electrodes on the end of the CEW, or when a probe lodges in loose clothing and must jump the gap into the body. When traveling across the human body, the peak voltage drops to approximately 1,200 volts. When considering the effects of electricity on the human body, it is critical to understand that amperage is dangerous and not voltage. Low voltage can be lethal if the amperage 115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon 258 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents is high enough. However, high voltage will not injure a person if the amperage is low. The CEW operates at an average current of 0.0021 amps. The CEW can only be effective if both probes attach to the subject (skin or clothing). The electricity must be able to flow between the probes to deliver an electrical charge and will generally follow the path of least resistance. Generally, the greater the spread between the probes on the target, the greater the effectiveness the CEW will have. Exposure to water will not cause electrocution or increase the pulse generated by the device. The electrical charge is fixed inside the CEW and will not significantly change with varying environmental conditions. The electrical charge of the CEW can arc through most clothing or other loose material, including some bullet resistant vests. The electrical charge from the CEW will generally not pass to others in contact with the subject unless contact is made directly between or on the probes, or the wires are touched. CARTRIDGE DEPLOYMENT VS. DRIVE-STUN The CEW is capable of being deployed by either firing the probes from a distance or delivering a “drive-stun,” with the cartridge removed, by pressing the end of the CEW into contact with the subject’s body. The cartridges manufactured by AXON are color coded to signify the type and distance of probe deployment available. COLOR DISTANCE PROBE TYPE WHO SHOULD DEPLOY Solid Blue 21 Feet Training Training Use Only - No Deployment Solid Yellow 15 Feet Standard Civilian Use Only – No Deployment Solid Green 25 Feet Extended/Heavier Any CEW Trained Officer Solid Orange 35 Feet Extended/Heavier SWAT Officer Cartridge Deployment Firing the probes into the body of a subject is usually the preferred option for various reasons. Even a close or point-blank range firing of the cartridge at the subject allows the officer to disengage while still delivering the effects of the CEW for the full five seconds. It also allows the officer the option of delivering a drive-stun away from the probes with the cartridge still attached to create NMI. When firing a cartridge at a subject, it is critical to remember that the 15, 21, and 25-foot cartridges propel the bottom probe at an 8-degree downward angle. This downward angle 115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon 259 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents contributes to approximately a 12-inch probe spread for each 7 feet of standoff distance. A 12-inch distance between probes (“probe spread”) is optimal to reliably create NMI. A probe spread under 12 inches may not create NMI, and probe spreads 4 inches or less typically create pain effect only. Drive-Stun If a cartridge is not attached to the CEW, a drive-stun may be delivered to the subject. However, the drive-stun feature will not create NMI. If used in this mode, the CEW should be considered a pain compliance weapon only. Additionally, the drive-stun option is not as effective because it is sometimes difficult to maintain contact with a combative subject. Often, numerous drive-stuns must be delivered before a subject’s resistance can be overcome, and a drive-stun deployment will usually result in more significant “signature” marks on a subject’s body. TARGET AREAS Officers should avoid intentionally targeting sensitive areas of the body such as the head, neck, upper torso/chest area, groin, or known pre-existing injury areas without legal justification. Experts have identified the dart-to-heart distance as being the key determining factor in whether the CEW can affect the heart. The further the CEW dart is away from the heart, the lower the risk of affecting the heart. When facing a subject, it is recommended that an officer deploy the CEW at the upper abdominal area or below. By lowering the point of aim to the lower torso on the front of the body by about four inches, the potential for NMI of the core muscles is often increased by splitting the beltline of the body and targeting larger muscle groups. Aiming for the lower torso reduces the risk of hitting some sensitive body areas and increases the dart- to-heart safety margin distance. A subject’s back is the most preferred target area when reasonably practicable because it contains larger muscle groups and reduces the risk of hitting sensitive body areas. The preferred target zone on the back begins just below the neck and extends all the way down the legs. Additionally, bulky and loose-fitting clothing can create too large of a gap for the electricity to jump, causing the CEW to be ineffective. Generally, the back is an area where the clothing fits closer to the body and will minimize the potential for clothing disconnect. The following image illustrates the preferred target areas. The shaded areas are preferred, while the lightly colored areas should be avoided. 115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon 260 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents MULTIPLE APPLICATIONS OF THE CEW Although low, cardiac risk to a subject from a CEW exposure is possible. Officers should avoid repeated or continuous exposures unless justified. Multiple applications or continuous cycling of the CEW resulting in an exposure longer than 15 seconds (whether continuous or cumulative) may increase the risk of serious injury or death and should be avoided. Officers should apply the CEW for only one standard cycle and then evaluate the situation before applying any subsequent cycles. If the first application of the CEW appears to be ineffective in gaining control of an individual, the officer should consider certain factors before additional applications of the CEW, including: • Whether the probes are making proper contact. • Whether the individual has the ability and has been given a reasonable opportunity to comply. • Whether verbal commands, other force options or tactics may be more effective. The use of multiple CEWs against a single subject should be avoided unless there is a reasonable belief that the need to control the individual outweighs the potential increased risk posed by multiple applications. BATTERY LIFE/OPERATION The TASER CEW operates on a Performance Power Magazine (PPM) manufactured by AXON. This PPM contains three 3-volt lithium energy cells. The PPM has a 10-year shelf 115 – Conducted Electrical Weapon 261 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents life and will provide approximately 500 full 5-second cycles in normal environmental conditions. Upon turning the CEW to the “on” position, the remaining percentage of battery life will display on the monitor under the rear fixed sights. A functioning battery should be considered safe for duty use when the remaining battery life displays between 99% to 20%. When the battery life drops below 20%, an officer should bring the CEW to the Advanced Officer Training Cadre to receive a replacement PPM. Batteries with a life rating of 19% to 01% percent will be used for training. It is essential that the CEW be stored with the PPM inserted at all times. Failure to do so may result in software corruption and/or failure. A spark test should be conducted once every 24 hours or prior to the start of an officer’s shift. One brief spark is adequate. As long as the officer sees a visible spark between the electrodes, there is no need to extend the duration. A spark test is required to verify the CEW is working, to verify the PPM is performing and is adequately charged, and because there are components in the high voltage section of the CEW that are more reliable when energized on a regular basis. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 262 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 116 – Terrorism – Homicide Bombers REVISED February 2005 TERRORISM: HOMICIDE BOMBERS September 11, 2001 illustrated to the world that terrorists would go to any lengths, including suicide to commit mass murder. Several terrorist groups, including al-Qaeda have targeted the United States due to our international foreign policy. Al-Qaeda sees the West, and the United States in particular, as the enemy of Islam. This makes the United States and Israel prime targets for a terrorist attack. Recently, the use of homicide (suicide) bombers has significantly increased in the Middle East, especially Israel. The term homicide bomber has come to replace what had been called a suicide bomber, since the bomber’s intent is to commit homicide, not suicide. At this time there has not been a successful homicide bombing (human body bomb) conducted within the United States. However, in the interest of public safety and current international trends, it is prudent to study these incidents and develop effective law enforcement counter-measures. Terrorist attacks take many forms, including bombs in cars, trucks, airplanes, boats, motorcycles, or carried by humans as well as drive-by shootings and active shooters. This Training Bulletin will narrow the focus to homicide bombers. The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to assist officers in identifying a homicide bomber; provide tactical considerations when attempting to interdict a homicide bomber, and appropriate response to a detonated homicide bomb. On New Year’s Eve 1999, an al-Qaeda trained terrorist planned to carry out an attack at the Los Angeles International Airport by placing a large suitcase bomb at the Tom Bradley International Terminal. The suspect was arrested prior to carrying out the bombing. However, the threat still remains because al-Qaeda trained terrorists are mission oriented and will continue to attack the same target until they are successful as they did with attacks on the World Trade Center in 1993 and 2001. Homicide bombers generally target areas of dense population or specific high profile events. In Long Beach, this would include the downtown and harbor areas, and high profile entertainment events that attract large assemblages of people as well as live media coverage. THE HOMICIDE BOMBER – BACKGROUND Like the individuals involved in the September 11, 2001 attack, homicide bombers are well trained to carry out their mission. Terrorist groups like Hamas and Hezballah have been using homicide bombers for years against the civilian population in Israel. These 116 – Homicide Bombers 263 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents groups provide the best model of how homicide bombers are used against a civilian population. School age children are indoctrinated to idolize those who martyr themselves as homicide bombers. Training camps located throughout the world teach terrorist tactics and mentally prepare the bombers for martyrdom. Some terrorist organizations train personnel for months in order to prepare for a single attack. The rewards for martyrdom may include both religious and financial promises. The resulting hero status and financial rewards supply a never-ending stream of recruits who are willing to become homicide bombers. TERRORIST TACTICS An attack by a homicide bomber is well organized, and involves up to four distinct groups to carry out the functions necessary for a successful attack. The first group recruits and trains potential homicide bombers. This group conducts interviews to determine the motivation of the martyr recruit and ensure that they have the mental stability to complete the mission. The second group determines the target and type of explosive device necessary. This group accomplishes planning, surveillance, and reconnaissance of the target. Officers should immediately contact the Office of Counter Terrorism if they encounter any person they believe is engaged in this type of activity. The third group assembles the bomb. The bomb is usually worn on the body in a belt or vest, or carried in a bag or backpack. In most cases, additional fragmentation is added to increase the lethality of the bomb. The fourth group delivers the bomb to the homicide bomber. This group will then act as a support team, escorting the bomber to the target. The support team will provide security to the bomber, much like a “layoff man” at a robbery. The bomber does not normally become aware of the target until the last possible moment. In order to maintain motivation, only at the last minute is the bomber instructed on how to activate the bomb. Officers need to be acutely aware of the presence of the support team if they encounter a suspected bomber. The body bomb is commonly worn on the upper torso in the form of a belt or vest. Activating a toggle or rocker-type switch, which is either attached to the mid-section of the vest or carried in the hand, easily detonates these devices. There may be a secondary detonation system present to allow detonation of the device even if law enforcement personnel interdict the bomber. Secondary timing devices may include a timing system or a fuse that is lit when the bomber arrives within close proximity to the target. Officers need to be aware that a bomb can be placed in a backpack, briefcase, suitcase, or any other large item that could conceal the explosives. Common items used in the past to disguise bombs include guitars, computers, and even a watermelon. The majority 116 – Homicide Bombers 264 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents of these bombs are activated by the simple means of pushing a button or flipping a switch. In some incidents, cell phones have been used to activate the device. Once the bomber arrives at the target location, the bomber will attempt to move to the center of the crowd to maximize the casualties. If confronted, the bomber will usually detonate the bomb, rather than be taken into custody. Just before activation of the bomb, the bomber will often raise both arms in the air to prevent any mitigation of the fragmentation and shrapnel caused by the presence of the bomber’s own body parts. CHARACTERISTICS OF A HOMICIDE BOMBER The following list of distinguishing characteristics was compiled by analyzing recent homicide bombing attacks in the Middle East. These characteristics are not all- inclusive, but may be utilized to establish reasonable suspicion to identify and detain potential homicide bombers. Because patrol officers are highly visible, they need to be familiar with these characteristics due to the potential for a chance encounter with a terrorist member. Officers may receive a radio call of suspicious activity from a variety of sources. Terrorists may be surveilling a target, renting a truck, or buying bomb-making components, which may raise the suspicion of the public. Additionally, officers may observe a traffic violation and during the encounter see photos, diagrams, or bomb components. The knowledge and initial observations of the officer are critical to establish reasonable suspicion to detain and probable cause to further investigate the activity. Officers should look for more than one characteristic when making their initial observations before drawing conclusions of reasonable suspicion of a homicide bomber. Characteristics include: Biographical Data • Mostly unmarried males, although recently some females • Males between 16-40 years old • Females between 16-25 years old • Ethnicity may vary Clothing Description • The manner of dress is chosen to conceal a bomb • Occasionally dressed as woman (pregnant) • Inappropriate for warmer temperatures • Will be baggy, ill fitting, unusually long or heavy • Overly elegant • Disguised to blend into community surroundings • Stolen uniforms Physical Description • Blank stare, wide-eyed, unresponsive, perspiring or preoccupied • Gaunt appearance (may look ill) 116 – Homicide Bombers 265 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Smiling or grinning (possibly due to thinking about the rewards in the afterlife) • Muttering or talking to self (saying a prayer) • Any other stress-related symptom associated with imminent death The following peculiar characteristics may be present because of the concealed bomb: • Torso appears unusually bulky or inflated • Unusual or suspicious bulges • Torso appears stiff, or lacks flexibility • Uneven gait, difficulty walking • Visible explosive-laden belts, protruding from under clothing • Carrying a heavy or unbalanced backpack, suitcase, box or knapsack • Switch wire hanging from the sleeve The following are less common, but also may be present: • Possibly clean or freshly shaven – face and body, closely cropped hair. This is a ceremonial religious act that has become less common since it makes homicide bombers easy to identify • Herbal or chemical smell emitting from the person due to the presence of poison(s) added to the device LEGAL REVIEW It is important for responding officers to understand the legal and policy requirements for reasonable suspicion, probable cause and the use of lethal force when attempting to investigate a potential homicide bomber. Reasonable Suspicion • Unusual activity has occurred, is occurring or is about to occur • Unusual activity is related to a crime • The person detained is connected with the unusual activity When developing reasonable suspicion, officers should consider the following factors: the location, the manner of dress, the weather, the suspect’s overall appearance and actions. For example, if the suspect looks inflated, is wearing a heavy trench coat in hot weather, and walking towards a large crowded location, the officers may attempt a detention. Probable Cause • The state of facts that would cause a reasonable and trained officer (or person of similar training and experience) to form an honest and strong suspicion that the person to be arrested has committed a crime Lethal Force (Manual Section 6.8.5) 116 – Homicide Bombers 266 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Firearms shall be regarded as defensive weapons and shall be used when the officer in the absence of reasonable alternatives and the presence of one or more of the following compelling circumstances: • Immediate threat – In self-defense or in defense of another when the officer reasonably believes there is an immediate threat to life or of serious injury • Substantial risk – To effect the arrest or prevent the escape of a felon or suspected felon when the officer has reasonable cause to believe that: – The crime for which the arrest is sought involved the use of or threatened use of deadly force, or the infliction of serious bodily injury; and, – There is substantial risk that the person whose arrest is sought will cause death or serious bodily harm, if apprehension is delayed There is no exception to the law or use of lethal force policy when encountering a suspected or confirmed homicide bomber. An Officer may not use lethal force to stop someone who is “merely” suspected of being a homicide bomber. The officer must have probable cause to believe the suspect is presenting an immediate threat to life before lethal force can be utilized. If an officer observes an explosive device attached to the suspect, and believes the suspect presents an immediate threat of death or serious bodily injury to the officer or others, then lethal force is reasonable, since the officer is trying to “prevent a crime where the suspect’s actions place persons in jeopardy of death or serious bodily injury.” TACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS There is no precise formula for interdicting a homicide bomber. However, in all situations, officer and public safety must remain paramount. When confronted by a possible homicide bomber and in light of the totality of the circumstances, the following tactics should be considered. If the suspect is AWARE of the police officer(s) presence: • Assume cover and maintain a tactical advantage • Do not approach, if possible • Maintain a reasonable (safe) standoff distance • Request assistance; deploy responding officers to covered positions • Order the suspect to stop all movement • Warn bystanders in the area to leave immediately If the suspect complies with the contact officer’s direction to stop: • Have the suspect open the palms of both hands and demonstrate that nothing is contained within them • Have the suspect turn around and raise the outer garment to neck level • Once the suspect’s hands and waist area are visible and nothing of a suspicious nature is observed, the contact officer may order the suspect into a high risk kneeling or high risk standing position until arrival of the Bomb Squad. Avoid the High Risk 116 – Homicide Bombers 267 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Prone Position, since bomb switches may be located on the chest or waistband area of the suspect • Officers should remain in a position of cover and evacuate any bystanders • Request the Bomb Squad If the suspect does not comply with the contact officer’s direction to stop: • Continue to warn bystanders to leave the area • Maintain a position of cover and monitor the actions of the suspect • Based on the actions of the suspect, (i.e. the officers have established probable cause to believe the suspect is in possession of an explosive device, Penal Code Section 12303) AND they believe the suspect represents an immediate threat of death or serious bodily injury to themselves or others, officers may utilize lethal force to stop the suspect • If the suspect is believed to no longer present a threat, officers should stop and detain the suspect and conduct an investigation Historically, when confronted by law enforcement, bombing suspects will often detonate the bomb, rather than be taken into custody. If officers inadvertently find themselves in close proximity to the suspect, they may choose not to order the suspect to stop, and instead they may grab the suspect’s arms to keep them away from the torso and determine if there is a bomb. However, officers must be mindful of the Department’s Use of Force Policy at all times. If the suspect is NOT AWARE of the police officer(s) presence: • Utilizing the element of surprise, officers may choose to surreptitiously approach the suspect and grab both arms, keeping them away from the torso. The object is to prevent the suspect from activating the bomb • Once the suspect’s arms are secured, officers should verbalize with the suspect, explain their actions and attempt to gain voluntary compliance. Officers should avoid taking the suspect to the ground to avoid accidental detonation • Unlike other high-risk situations, in this situation close proximity to the suspect may be desirable to ensure quick contact and control Using Lethal Force Where lethal force is warranted and the suspect is believed to be wearing body armor, a headshot may be necessary to stop the suspect; likewise, in a lethal force situation with a homicide bomber, officers may be forced to attempt a headshot to prevent detonation of the device by the suspect. Since homicide bombers may wear the bomb on the upper torso in the form of a belt or vest, a shot to this area could trigger a detonation; therefore, a headshot may be necessary under these circumstances. When a suspect has been neutralized • Do not approach the suspect • Do not allow others to approach the suspect 116 – Homicide Bombers 268 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Immediately evacuate the area (the explosive device may still be detonated by other means) • Officers should maintain a minimum of 300 feet on all sides of the bomber • Seek and maintain cover • Await the arrival of the Bomb Squad In the interest of public safety, it is imperative that law enforcement assumes a proactive role in countering homicide bombers. Officers can help prevent attacks by remaining vigilant to signs of terrorism, reporting suspicious activity, understanding trends and being tactically prepared. As stated previously, there is no precise formula to be applied to a homicide bomber incident. Police officer and public safety will always remain our highest priorities. POST HOMICIDE BOMBING INCIDENT When a homicide bombing occurs, the post blast crime scene will be bloody and chaotic, requiring officers to be emotionally and mentally prepared to take control of the incident. Officers must remain focused because there may be a significant threat to rescue personnel in the form of secondary devices, blood-borne pathogens, hazardous chemicals, and the potential for structural collapse. RESPONSE TO AN EXPLODED DEVICE As with any bombing incident, officers must look for the presence of secondary devices placed to kill rescue personnel. The initial bomb may have been detonated to draw rescue personnel to the location where a second bomb has been planted. The explosive device may be in the form of a car bomb or concealed in a trashcan or other item large enough to hide explosives. Terrorists have used common items such as thermos bottles, backpacks, and flashlights to disguise their bombs. The devices may be command detonated by remote means such as the use of a cellular telephone wired into the firing mechanism of the bomb, or by means of a timer. Terrorists may place secondary devices at main points of ingress and egress, as well as possible Command Post (CP) locations, to maximize the potential for injury and death to rescue personnel. If a possible secondary device is located, the area around the device should be immediately evacuated a minimum of 300 feet in all directions and then handled as any other suspected explosive device. Another hazard to rescue workers at the scene of a homicide bombing involves blood- borne pathogens. Due to massive trauma caused by the explosion, there will be a tremendous amount of bodily fluids and tissue present. These fluids and tissue can contain human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), hepatitis, or other blood-borne pathogens. In recent attacks in the Middle East, homicide bombers have been found to be infected with HIV and hepatitis, which can contaminate both bombing victims and rescue workers. Anyone who might encounter body fluids or tissue should wear personal protective equipment (PPE), including a mask, gloves, jumpsuit, apron and boot covers. A PPE kit should be carried by every police officer on patrol. 116 – Homicide Bombers 269 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Do not approach the suspect or the suspect’s remains. In addition to the threat of secondary devices, there may be un-detonated or partially detonated explosives present on or near the suspect. Evacuate the area a minimum of 300 feet from the location of the bombing. Body bombs can cause severe structural damage including downed electrical lines and ruptured gas and water pipes. To ensure the safety of the public and rescue personnel, officers should immediately establish a large crime scene perimeter. A general rule for a post blast crime scene perimeter is to look for the furthest blast debris/damage from the center of the explosion and then double that distance. Before decreasing the size of the perimeter, the Incident Commander should contact the Bomb Squad for advice. It is the responsibility of officers on the perimeter to limit access in and out of the blast area/crime scene. This will reduce crime scene contamination, and further injury caused by a secondary device. Once the Fire Department has completed the rescue mission, no one should be allowed to enter the post blast crime scene until the Bomb Squad has cleared the area. Blast debris should not be moved or examined by anyone except Bomb Squad personnel. The location of the debris can give clues as to the type of device used. Because blast debris can spread in wide areas, vehicle tires and shoes can pick up key blast evidence, so if possible they should be checked before leaving the perimeter. The Incident Commander should assign an officer to record the hospitals where the victims are transported. This can be coordinated through the Fire Department. Officers should then be assigned to each hospital to gather victim information, record any statements and preserve evidence pending the arrival of detectives assigned to investigate the bombing. Remember that one of the injured may have been a participant in the bombing. The Incident Commander should also assign someone to locate any security cameras that may have captured the incident on tape. Security tapes should be recovered as soon as possible to avoid any critical images being lost. All tapes of the affected area that are available, regardless of the date recorded, should be recovered, since they may show terrorists scouting the location weeks or even months prior to the incident. CONCLUSION Officers must be mentally prepared to contend with the chaos and carnage caused by a homicide bombing incident. Officers need to look for possible secondary devices and wear appropriate Personal Protective Equipment to reduce the risk to themselves or others. By being prepared, the first officers on scene of a bombing incident will have the knowledge to prevent further casualties, preserve crucial evidence, and assist in the apprehension of additional suspects. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 270 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 117 – Robbery – The Report REVISED August 2019 ROBBERY - THE REPORT Although robbery is a crime against the person, we differentiate between robberies of businesses and persons. Whenever a crime is perpetrated against a business, and the property obtained belongs to the business, the primary victim would be that business. The actual person who is robbed will be listed as an additional victim. Long Beach Police Department files three types of robbery reports: 1. Robbery of a business – 212.5(c) PC 2. Robbery of a person – 212.5(c) PC 3. Robbery of a vehicle – 215 PC (car-jacking) BUSINESS ROBBERY The different types of business robberies include banks, markets, liquor stores, gas stations, restaurants, bars, and all other miscellaneous businesses. When the victim is a business, file the report as follows: • List the name of the business as the primary victim and list the business address and phone number. • List the person against whom the act was committed as an additional victim (victim #2). • List the age, race, sex, home address, alternate addresses, e-mails, social media accounts and additional phone numbers of additional victims. • When more than one person is a victim, list them as additional victims. • List the owner as an additional victim and note that he/she is the owner by placing the word "owner" by his/her name. Examples • When a robbery is committed against the manager or employee of a Standard Oil Company service station, in which company money was taken, the primary victim is the Standard Oil Company. The additional victim is the manager or employee against whom the robbery was committed. • When a robbery is committed against a driver of the Yellow Cab Company, the additional victim would be the taxi driver and the primary victim would be the Yellow Cab Company. If the property obtained from the taxi driver belonged solely to the taxi driver, the primary victim would be the taxi driver and not the Yellow Cab Company. • A robbery occurs in a bar where there are several persons present. The suspects hold up the bartender and the patrons. The suspects obtain the bar's money and the 117 – Robbery Reports 271 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents patron’s money. The primary victim would be the name of the bar and the additional victims would be the bartender and the patrons. ROBBERY AGAINST PERSONS When a person is the victim of a street robbery, residential robbery, or carjacking of a personal vehicle, file a report listing that person as the victim. ROBBERY OF A VEHICLE (CARJACKING/TRUCK HI-JACK) When a person is a victim of a car-jack or truck hi-jack and there is a company vehicle involved, the business shall be the primary victim with the person robbed listed as an additional victim. Whenever a person is a victim of a carjack and his own vehicle or an acquaintance's vehicle is taken, that person against whom the act was committed is listed as the primary victim. Examples • When a truck driver is driving a semi-trailer rig and the truck is hi-jacked, the truck company should be listed as the primary victim. The driver and the cargo owner are the additional victims. • When a Postal Carrier is driving a US Post Office vehicle and it is taken in a carjacking, the US Postal Service should be listed as a primary victim and the driver as an additional victim. • When a Postal Carrier is driving his own vehicle carrying US mail and that vehicle is hi-jacked for the mail, again the US Postal Service is the primary victim and the postal carrier is the additional victim. MULTIPLE VICTIMS Where there is one act of robbery with multiple victims, only one crime report should be filed listing the primary victim at the top of the report and all other victims as additional victims. COMPOSING THE REPORT Most robbery reports are taken at a time when the victim is in an excited or nervous state. Often, they will be unable to give an accurate description of the suspect and may not initially relay correct information. Officers should confirm the information they have received from the victim is correct. When a complete, concise and accurate report is filed, the possibility of apprehending and successfully prosecuting the suspect will be greatly enhanced. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 272 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 118 – Solicitors REVISED February 2002 SOLICITORS INTRODUCTION The patrol officer is often faced with citizen complaints regarding door-to-door sales. These situations are invariably immediate in nature and do not lend themselves to the referral action of investigators. This Training Bulletin will assist the patrol officer in taking appropriate action. DEFINITIONS Door-to-door salesmen fall into two specific categories, listed and defined below: • “Peddler” – any person going from place to place selling and making immediate delivery of anything of value in the possession of the peddler • “Solicitor” – any person going from place to place selling or taking orders for anything of value for future delivery or for services to be performed in the future GUIDES FOR LICENSE OR PERMITS REQUIRED: • Peddlers/Solicitors using "charity" pitch (e.g., boys clubs, college funds, etc.): Any Charitable Solicitation (CS) must have a CS permit: cite for violation of §5.28.050 LBMC • Peddlers/Solicitors not using charity pitch: Business license required (must specify "Peddler"). Cite for violation of §3.80.210 LBMC • Religious Solicitations: No license or permit required • Magazine Solicitation: Due to interstate commerce regulations, no license is needed • Charitable Solicitors (any fundraiser): Any Charitable Solicitation (CS) must have a CS permit: cite for a violation of §5.28.050 LBMC. Charitable organizations must also register with the State of California Attorney General's Registry of Charitable Trusts. Information can be verified by calling 800-952-5225, or you can go to their web site at www.caag.state.ca.us • Newspaper Peddlers or Solicitors: If the peddler/solicitor is an employee with the newspaper/magazine company the employee does not need a permit. However, if the peddler/solicitor is self-employed, the individual needs a business license: cite for violation of §3.80.210 LBMC • Photography Solicitors: Whether there is a fixed place of business or the individual is a "free-lance" photographer with no fixed place of business, they must have a business license: cite for violation of Section 3.80.210 LBMC 118 – Solicitors 273 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Service or Repair Solicitors: The business must be at a fixed location. The only exception is that repair or service from a vehicle is limited to freeway service only. In both cases, a business license is required. Cite for violation of Section 3.80.210 LBMC General Information: • Hours of Solicitation: Door-to-door peddling/soliciting is prohibited in residential areas between the hours of 8:00 p.m. through 9:00 a.m. of the following day. Cite for violation of Section 5.66.040(A) LBMC. Peddling goods within one block of a school facility between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, is also prohibited. Cite for Section 5.66.030 LBMC • Peddling in areas such as tidelands, Queen's Way area and the Downtown area is allowed only with a permit issued by the City Manager or his/her designee. For a description of these areas, see Sections 5.66.050, 566.060 and 5.66.070 LBMC. Cite for the preceding Sections depending on the exact area of the violation • If you have questions, call the City of Long Beach Business Licensing at 8-6211 or Vice/Permits at 8-7219 CONCLUSION Although misdemeanor citations are generally preferable in the handling of violators in most of the aforementioned situations, the decision as to whether a verbal advisement, misdemeanor citation or physical booking will be effected, remains at the discretion of the field officer. When a booking is made, the items being sold by the suspect, and any money derived from sales, must be placed in evidence. Remember that all business endeavors within the City require a license or permit issued by the City of Long Beach. The only exceptions are persons engaged in interstate commerce, First Amendment rights (i.e. newspapers) and religious solicitations. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 274 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 119 – Bunco Related Crimes REVISED March 2001 BUNCO RELATED CRIMES INTRODUCTION This Training Bulletin will clarify the elements of bunco related crimes and show their correct classification for the Incident Report. The proper classification of bunco related crimes will insure the correct routing of the Incident Report. DEFINITIONS “Bunco” refers to a type of theft wherein the victim willingly gives up the loss, usually due to false statements or sleight of hand tricks on the part of the suspect. It is not a crime classification and the term should never be used in an Incident Report. “Fraud” is a legal term generally used when referring to some form of deception. It is not a special crime classification and should never be used alone on the crime classification line. It may be used in the M.O. box. TYPES OF INVESTIGATION BY THE FORGERY/FRAUD DETAIL EMBEZZLEMENT This type of theft is the taking or wrongful use of property entrusted to a servant, agent, trustee or public servant. If the loss is over $400 dollars it is a felony; otherwise it is a misdemeanor. The only exception is when the loss is public funds and then it is always a felony. When a patrol officer takes a report, the proper crime classification is either: • 508 PC F (EMBEZZLEMENT) • 508 PC M PETTY THEFT (EMBEZZLEMENT) Patrol officers shall take reports of embezzlement in the same manner as any other theft report, on a regular Incident Report. THEFT BY FALSE PRETENSES Theft by false pretenses is obtaining property from a victim who gives it willfully, due to reliance on false representations made by the suspect. The victim must also intend for the suspect to have permanent title to the loss. 119 – Bunco 275 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The sale of non-existent real estate, stocks, etc., are thefts by false pretenses. It is a felony if over $400.00, otherwise it is a misdemeanor. • 487.1 PC (F) Grand Theft Property, or • 484/488 PC (M) Theft Personal Property THEFT BY TRICK OR DEVICE Theft by trick or device is the permanent retention of property, willfully but only temporarily supplied by the victim by use of trick or device. Pigeon drops, Jamaican switches, and the bank examiner cons are police slang terms describing different thefts by trick or device. These terms should never be used on the crime classification line, but may be used in the MO box. PETTY THEFT DRIVE-OUTS Drive-outs are thefts wherein the suspect obtains property such as gasoline for his car and drives away without paying. They are almost always misdemeanors; however, if the loss exceeds $400.00 it would be a felony. Although the correct crime classification would be simply “484(A) PC Petty Theft”, the addition of the descriptive term of “drive-out” facilitates the proper routing of the Incident Report and is important due to the great volume of theft reports. DEFRAUDING AN INNKEEPER This refers to the failure to pay for food or lodging. This is not considered a theft, but rather a separate and distinct violation. The offense is a misdemeanor if the amount of money involved in the transaction is $400.00 or less and a wobbler if the amount is over $400.00. The correct classification for these crimes is: 537(A)(1) PC – Defrauding an Innkeeper, under $400.00 537(A)(2) PC – Defrauding an Innkeeper, over $400.00 TAKING VEHICLE WITHOUT PAYING FOR SERVICE The taking of a vehicle from a repair garage, gas station, etc., without paying for labor and/or parts, is not a theft. This offense is covered by Section 3075 Civil Code and is a misdemeanor regardless of the amount of loss. Further, the vehicle must have been removed without the repairman’s consent and without any arrangement for credit. The charge would be 3075 Civil Code, Surreptitious Removal of Vehicle from Lien Holder. CONCLUSION The above mentioned crimes are crimes against property. If a business is involved the business should be listed as the victim. The victim would not be listed as the owner of 119 – Bunco 276 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents the business. These reports are filed exactly like commercial burglary and business robberies. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 277 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 120 – Bomb Scene Investigations REVISED September 2005 Bomb Scene Investigations INTRODUCTION This Bulletin will establish clear lines of responsibility for either exploded or unexploded devices and will determine investigative responsibility, both on-scene and follow-up. BOMB THREATS A victim, who receives a bomb threat either by telephone or mail, usually reports the threat to the Communications Center. The Communications Center will then dispatch a field supervisor and patrol unit. Field Supervisor Responsibilities • Assume overall command of the bomb threat scene • Arrange for crowd control if needed • Ensure all necessary reports are filed Patrol Unit Responsibilities • Contact the reporting party or person in charge of the premises • Interview the reporting party or person in charge and attempt to identify the caller or establish the legitimacy of the call • Advise the person in charge of the premises that they must make the decision to evacuate. At this point, it is not a police decision If a decision to evacuate is made: • Notify the field supervisor of the decision • Assist in the orderly evacuation of the premises • Identify key personnel to remain and assist officers in conducting a search of the premises; the search should begin in areas open to the public • File all necessary reports ACTUAL OR SUSPECTED BOMB IS LOCATED Field Sergeant Responsibilities Advise the Watch Commander that a potential bomb has been found. Watch Commander Responsibilities • Establish a field command post to coordinate information and to establish liaison with Sheriff’s Bomb Squad when they arrive 120 – Bomb Scene Investigations 278 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Establish a safety perimeter at least 500' from bomb location • Maintain radio silence except for emergencies • Notify Los Angeles Sheriff’s Department Arson/Explosives Detail Between 0800 and 1700 (562) 946-7222 Other hours (323) 526-5541 Sheriffs H.Q. Bureau • Notify Violent Crimes Detail supervisor • Notify Office of Counter Terrorism • Notify Fire Department and request they respond and stand by once Bomb Squad is on scene • Notify Public Service. Advise of potential need for barricades and related equipment Patrol Unit Responsibilities • Under no circumstances touch the suspect package • Protect the area in which the suspect package is found • Evacuate the occupants to a point of safety, at least 500' from the premises • Assist Bomb Squad personnel • File all necessary reports Violent Crimes Detail Responsibilities The Violent Crimes Detail will be notified of all cases where an actual or suspected bomb is found. The Violent Crimes supervisor or his/her designee will determine if detective response to the scene is necessary. • If necessary, the Violent Crimes investigator will report to the command post for briefing and will assist the officer-in-charge as requested. The investigator will assist the Bomb Squad personnel as required • The Violent Crimes investigator will be responsible for all follow-up investigation and case filing Sheriff’s Arson/Explosives Detail Responsibilities • Los Angeles Sheriff’s Department will usually dispatch two investigators to the scene • The Sheriff’s investigators will report to the command post for briefing and will determine if additional deputies or equipment are needed • Sheriff’s investigators will control the immediate area of the suspected explosive device with assistance from LBPD • Sheriff’s investigators will control all evidence found at the scene and their lab will analyze evidence as needed • Should the device be non-explosive, it will be turned over to Long Beach personnel and placed into evidence • Sheriff Department personnel will provide expert testimony if needed Officer of Counter Terrorism Responsibilities • Will be notified by the Watch Commander in all cases when an actual or suspected bomb is found • Will gather intelligence and provide expert assistance to the Violent Crimes Detail • Will receive copies of all reports filed 120 – Bomb Scene Investigations 279 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Fire Department • Will be notified by the Watch Commander when an actual or suspected bomb is found • Will make a determination to respond with equipment and/or send a representative to the command post • Will institute their operational plan for suspected bomb findings • Will send an Arson Investigator to assist the police DETONATED DEVICE Field Sergeant Responsibilities Proceed to the scene for initial evaluation and assume responsibility for the following: • Notifying the Fire Department of the tactical situation • Establishing a command post and calling for required assistance • Establishing an outer safety perimeter • Re-routing traffic as required • Informing the Watch Commander of the circumstances at scene and requesting that the Watch Commander make necessary notifications Watch Commander Notification Responsibilities • Notify the Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Arson/Explosives Detail • Notify Violent Crimes supervisor • Notify Office of Counter Terrorism • Notify on-call Homicide investigator if the blast resulted in a death or probable death • Notify Public Service. Advise of potential need for barricades and related equipment Homicide Detail Responsibilities • Will be the primary investigative unit in bomb explosions resulting in a death or probable death • Will be responsible for the activities previously listed for the Violent Crimes Detail Sheriff’s Arson/Explosives Detail Responsibilities • The Sheriff will usually send three or more investigators to a post-blast scene • Sheriff’s investigators will report to the command post for briefing • As soon as practical, the Sheriffs will enter the bomb scene and assume control Fire Department Responsibilities • Will coordinate with the police command post BOMB THREATS ABOARD AIRCRAFT Any time the Department receives a threat of a bomb reported to be aboard an aircraft at the Long Beach Municipal Airport, the response to that threat will be coordinated with Airport Security. Airport Security will coordinate with the affected airline. The affected airline will determine how viable the threat is. If the threat is viable: • The FBI will be notified by the on-duty Police Department Watch Commander 120 – Bomb Scene Investigations 280 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • If the plane is on the ground the watch commander will also notify the Los Angeles Police Department Bomb Squad. A plane suspected of containing a bomb can only be searched by FAA-certified dogs, and LAPD is the closest agency with them • If the plane is on the ground and occupied, Airport Security will coordinate with police personnel to determine how best to evacuate passengers • An aircraft suspected of containing a bomb will be moved (if possible) to a remote portion of the airport, a location predetermined by Airport Security • If a device is located on a plane and/or detonated, the investigation is the jurisdiction of the FAA and the FBI Patrol Officer Responsibilities • Assist Airport Security • File necessary reports; if a threat is made but no device is found, a report will be filed Field Supervisor Responsibilities • Notify Watch Commander • Maintain liaison with Airport Security • File an unusual occurrence report when: - A plane is searched and nothing is found - A device is found - A device is detonated Watch Commander Responsibilities • Supervise the police response • Make appropriate notifications, i.e. FBI, LAPD • Notify the Violent Crimes Detail supervisor who will determine the need to respond to the scene Ultimately, the role of the Police Department during a bomb threat on an aircraft will be to contain the scene, protect the public and assist the Bomb Squad handling the threat. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 281 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 121 – Explosives REVISED January 2000 EXPLOSIVES Purpose The purpose of this training bulletin is to provide officers with a basic explanation of the theory, classifications and effects of explosive materials. Background The use of explosives in criminal bombings has increased dramatically over the past (15) years. The Federal Bureau of Investigations Bomb Data Center reports that bombings and attempted bombings increased from 803 incidents in 1984 to 3,163 incidents during 1994. Bombing incidents decreased slightly in the three subsequent years for which statistics are available, however, bombings still remain substantially above 2,000 incidents each year. The Long Beach Police Department responds to an average of 100 bomb threats per year and 12 actual explosive device incidents per year. The likelihood, therefore, of officers encountering explosive devices while on the job is very high. Explosive Theory An explosive is any material that, when ignited by heat, shock or chemical reaction, undergoes rapid decomposition or oxidation. The oxidation process releases energy that is stored in the material in the form of heat and light, or by breaking down into gaseous compounds that occupy a much larger volume than the original explosive material. The expanding gases displace large volumes of air, often at speeds greater than the speed of sound, thus creating a shock wave similar to a sonic boom. The generation and violent escape of gases are the primary criteria of an explosion and are present in each of the three basic types of explosions: mechanical, chemical and nuclear. Classifications of Explosives Explosives are grouped into the following general classifications based upon the velocity of combustion that occurs in the material: Low explosives (deflagrating explosives) burn at a rate that is less than sonic velocity. When initiated, the fuel and the oxidizer in a low explosive combine to produce heat, light and gaseous products. Common examples of low explosives are black powder, smokeless powder (nitrocellulose) and flash powder. Black powder is particularly dangerous to handle due to its sensitivity to heat, shock, friction and static electricity. Black powder is frequently used as the 121 – Explosives 282 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents explosive filler in improvised explosive devices, such as pipe bombs, due to its availability and ease of ignition. Smokeless powder (nitrocellulose) is another common ingredient used in the construction of pipe bombs and is both more stable and more powerful than black powder. Smokeless powder may be ignited in improvised explosive devices with an electrically heated bridge wire or a burning fuse. Although less powerful than high explosives, low explosive devices are generally more dangerous to handle due to their sensitivity to a variety of ignition sources. Primary explosives (initiating explosives) are the most dangerous explosive compounds in common use. Some primary explosives such as mercury fulminate will function as either a low explosive or a high explosive. When functioning as a low explosive, the primer merely burns. When functioning as a high explosive, a shock wave travels through the primer material that is capable of initiating a quantity of relatively insensitive high explosives. Common examples of primary explosives are mercury fulminate, lead azide, lead styphnate and tetracene. High explosives are those materials that detonate at velocities between 3,300 and 30,000 feet per second. A detonation is caused by a shock wave that propagates through a block of the high explosive material. The shock wave breaks apart the molecular bonds between the atoms of the material, at a rate approximately equal to the speed of sound traveling through that substance. Because high explosives are generally solids or liquids, this speed can be much greater than the speed of sound traveling through air. Unlike low explosives, the fuel and the oxidizer in a high explosive are chemically bonded. A primer made from a sensitive high explosive is normally used to initiate the detonation of a high explosive. When the primer detonates, it sends a shock wave through the high explosive. This shock wave breaks apart the chemical bonds, and the chemicals released re-combine to produce large volumes of hot gases. The sudden and rapid escape of these gases from a confined space, accompanied by high temperatures, violent shock and loud noise, are the primary effects of an explosion. Some common examples of high explosives are dynamite, TNT, ammonium nitrate, and RDX (the primary ingredient in C-4). Effects of an Explosion When an explosive material detonates, the typical block or stick of chemical explosive material is instantaneously converted from a solid into a rapidly expanding mass of gases. The detonation of the explosive will produce three primary effects and several secondary effects that can create great damage in the area surrounding the explosion. The three primary effects produced are incendiary/thermal, blast pressure and fragmentation. 1. The incendiary/thermal effect (fireball) produced by the detonation of a low or high explosive varies greatly from one explosive to another. In general, a low explosive will produce a longer incendiary/thermal effect than will a high explosive. A high explosive will, however, produce much higher temperatures. The thermal effect may range from 2,000 to 4,000 degrees centigrade (approximately 3,630 to 121 – Explosives 283 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 7,200 degrees Fahrenheit). Although the thermal effect of an explosion is measured in fractions of a second, secondary fires frequently occur. 2. The blast pressure effect is comprised of a positive pressure phase and a negative pressure phase. When an explosive charge is detonated, volumes of hot, expanding gases are formed in a period of approximately 1/10,000 of a second. These gases exert pressures of approximately 700 tons per square inch on the atmosphere surrounding the point of detonation and rush outward from the point of detonation at velocities of up to 13,000 miles per hour. This mass of expanding gas, which rolls outward in a spherical pattern from the point of detonation, is the positive pressure phase. As the positive pressure phase wave compresses and pushes the surrounding air away from the point of detonation, a partial vacuum exists in the area surrounding the point of detonation. When the positive pressure phase wave dissipates entirely, the compressed and displaced atmosphere reverses its movement and collapses inward to fill the void in the partial vacuum. The reaction of the partial vacuum and the reverse movement of the air is known as the negative pressure phase. The negative phase is less powerful, but lasts three times as long as the positive phase. The entire blast pressure wave, because of its two distinct phases, actually delivers a one-two punch to any object in its path. The blast pressure effect is the most powerful and destructive of the explosive effects produced by the detonation of high explosives. 3. The third primary effect of the detonation of an explosive is the fragmentation effect. Primary fragmentation consists of pieces of the bomb itself, which are transmitted by the blast wave. Secondary fragmentation consists of items near the bomb that are picked up and transmitted by the same blast wave. Different types of devices have different fragmentation potentials. A pipe bomb containing either a high or low explosive will produce a quantity of fragmented material (many small fragments with a high explosive and fewer, but larger fragments with a low explosive). A bomb, which consists of dynamite, fuse and detonator would have virtually no primary fragmentation, but by virtue of its explosive power, may produce significant secondary fragmentation. It is important to recognize that anyone or any combination of the primary effects of the detonations of an explosive are capable of killing or seriously maiming anyone exposed to those effects. Improvised Explosive Devices Pipe Bombs • Are the most commonly encountered improvised explosive devices by public safety agencies • Are made from a variety of readily available materials and configured in one of several different fusing systems • The most common configuration is a burning fuse ignition (hobby or safety fuse) entering into a galvanized metal pipe section, enclosed with end caps, and filled with a low explosive powder filler. Hobby fuse and commercial safety fuse burn at a uniform rate (30-45 seconds per foot), thereby providing a time delay based upon the length of the attached fuse. The advent of plastic pipe has provided bomb makers 121 – Explosives 284 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents with a safer and cheaper container for explosive fillers, especially when working with sensitive black powder • Additional shrapnel is frequently added to both metal and plastic pipe bombs in the form of nails, bolts, screws, BB’s or buckshot in the pipe’s interior, or links of chain wrapped around the exterior of the pipe • Are also easily rigged with remote activation or motion activation (booby trap) systems using pressure release or mercury switches, batteries, and electrically heated bridge wires to initiate low explosive fillers • Are considered to be particularly hazardous by bomb technicians due to their configuration possibilities and the sensitivity of low explosive fillers to a variety of ignition sources Dry Ice Bombs The device is constructed by placing a small quantity of dry ice in a sealable glass or plastic bottle, and adding water. A process called sublimation occurs wherein the dry ice (compressed and solidified carbon dioxide - CO2) vaporizes, producing a quantity of carbon dioxide gas which ultimately exceeds the structural or tensile strength of the container. At this point an explosion occurs which sends the glass or plastic, and any surrounding shrapnel, out in a spherical pattern from the point of detonation. The quantity of dry ice used and the thickness and tensile strength of the container will determine the explosive strength of the device. The reaction time usually varies from 20 to 45 minutes depending upon the above factors and the temperature of the water added to the dry ice. Warm water accelerates the sublimation process thereby decreasing the delay time between the activation and the explosion of the device. Dry ice vaporizes at -78.5 degrees centigrade. • Have gained in popularity in recent years, particularly with juveniles engaged in vandalism and revenge activities • Are one of the simplest made devices under the general classification of chemically reactive destructive devices • Although thought of largely as prank devices, dry ice bombs have killed or injured both intended targets and innocent bystanders in recent years, and are classified as destructive devices under California Penal Code §12301 Hypergolic Devices Hypergolic devices are chemical devices that spontaneously ignite when a chemical reagent is mixed with a fuel and oxidizer. A common example is a glass bottle containing a mix of gasoline and sulfuric acid. Attached to the bottom of the bottle is a section of cotton gauze that is permeated with potassium permanganate. When the bottle breaks open, the sulfuric acid in the mixture reacts with the potassium permanganate generating extremely high temperatures which, in turn, ignites the gasoline. In the above example, the sulfuric acid acts as the oxidizer, the gasoline is the fuel, and the potassium permanganate is the chemical reagent creating the hypergolic effect. Many other similar recipes exist in chemical applications. 121 – Explosives 285 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Hypergolic and other chemical reaction devices are also gaining in popularity due to the proliferation of explosive recipes over Internet resources. Modified Military Ordnance Responding to calls involving military ordnance presents the problem of distinguishing between harmless, inert ordnance, which is lawfully possessed for souvenir purposes, and actual or modified ordnance, which presents a significant danger to law enforcement and the community. Due to the possibility of modification, it is imperative that all military ordnance be treated as potentially dangerous until qualified bomb technicians or military explosive ordnance disposal technicians determine it to be otherwise. • Military hand grenade practice casings are the easiest devices to obtain and convert into dangerous anti-personnel explosive devices • The practice casings need only to have the vent hole plugged in the bottom of the grenade, a low or high explosive filler inserted into the grenade body, and an actual or improvised fuse placed into the fuse well • Black powder filler and short lengths of hobby fuse are frequently used to modify grenades for criminal purposes High Explosive Devices Although high explosive devices are infrequently encountered, they have been employed in criminal bombings in Long Beach in past years. Unlike low explosives, high explosives do not have to be confined in a container in order to detonate. With a proper fusing system, high explosives will detonate unconfined and produce significantly more damage, pound for pound, than will low explosives. • Are much less sensitive to ignition than low explosives and generally require a blasting cap or detonator to shock the main charge into detonation • Cannot be initiated with hobby fuse or electrically heated bridge wires which are effective initiators for low explosives • Are widely used commercially in construction, demolition, mining, agriculture, and oil and gas exploration projects. Over six (6) billion pounds of explosives are used in the commercial explosives industry each year which affords many opportunities for theft, embezzlement, misappropriation and criminal applications. • Commercial and military high explosives are manufactured in a wide array of forms including: detonation cord, sheet explosives, sticks, cartridges, tubes, blocks, canisters, slurries, prills (ANFO) and binary mixes Letter and Parcel Bombs Letter bombs and parcel bombs have become increasingly common since the first wave of Palestinian Liberation Organization letter bombs were mailed to Israeli Diplomatic Missions throughout the world in the early 1970's. Technological advances in miniaturized electrical, mechanical and electronic components, coupled with the use of powerful plastic explosives, have provided terrorists and common criminals the means with which to construct effective letter and parcel bombs. 121 – Explosives 286 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The early letter bombs contained spring-loaded mechanical initiating devices employing a coil spring, firing pin, a pressure lever, small arms ammunition primer, and non-electric detonator surrounded in flattened plastic explosive. All of these components were mounted within a strip of cardboard folded in half. The folded cardboard was then inserted into an envelope addressed to the intended target. The bomb functioned when the folded cardboard sprung open as it was removed from the envelope. Later devices employed Polaroid Camera flat pack batteries wired to an electric detonator that was initiated by the closure of an improvised loop-switch. Parcel bombs afford the opportunity to use either high or low explosives since container size is not a limiting factor. Two of our most recent serial bombers, Theodore Kaczynski and Walter Moody, both used motion activated, electrically initiated low explosive powders in pipe bombs concealed in mail parcels, book bombs or disguised road hazards. Walter Moody’s mail bombs killed a Federal Appeals Court Judge in Alabama and a civil rights attorney in Georgia. Theodore Kaczynski killed three people and injured twenty- nine during his reign of terror between 1978 and 1996. Based upon data derived from numerous mail bomb investigations, the Postal Inspection Service has compiled the following warning list of letter and parcel bomb indicators: • Excessive postage • No return address • Visual distractions • Incorrect titles • Rigid envelope • Excessive weight • Oily stains or discoloration • Misspellings of common words • Titles but no names • Lopsided or uneven envelope • Protruding wires or tinfoil • Foreign mail and special delivery • Restrictive markings: personal, confidential, etc. • Excessive securing material: masking tape, strapping tape, string, etc. Relevant California Statutes §12301 PC-Defines Destructive Device. §12303 PC-Possession of any Destructive Device. (F/M) §12303.1 PC-Carry or Place Destructive Device onto Common Carrier. (F) §12303.2 PC-Possession of Destructive Device in Public Place. (F) §12303.3 PC-Possess, Explode or Ignite Destructive Device to Injure, Intimidate or Terrorize. (F) §12303.6 PC-Trafficking in Destructive Devices. (F) §12312 PC-Possess Materials with Intent to Make Destructive Device. (F) §12000 H&S-Explosives Defined. §12305 H&S-Illegal Possession of Explosives. (F) §12671 H&S-Possession of Illegal Fireworks. (M) 121 – Explosives 287 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents §12702 H&S-Possession of Illegal Fireworks, >7500 Grains. (F/M) For questions or additional information, contact the Administrative Security Section, telephone 570-7422. References: • FBI Bomb Data Center • The Blasters’ Handbook • The Anarchist’s Cookbook • The Terrorist’s Handbook • Army Field Manual FM23-30 • California Penal Code REVIEW Responsibility Investigations Bureau 288 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 122 – Traffic Collision Reporting REVISED February 2002 TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORTING POLICY INTRODUCTION The California Vehicle Code sets forth reporting requirements for traffic collisions. These include all fatal injury collisions (reference 20008 CVC). The reporting of non-injury collisions serves several purposes. These reports are used by prosecuting agencies, courts, the Department of Motor Vehicles and other State agencies, insurance companies, the City Traffic Engineer, and the Long Beach Police Traffic Section for selective enforcement. The City of Long Beach participates in the Statewide Integrated Traffic Records System (SWITRS) and sends all traffic collision reports to the State for entry into this system. A Traffic Collision Report shall be taken as follows: (on highway or private property) • Fatality collision • Injury collision • Collisions involving pedestrians • Collisions involving bicyclists • Felony Hit and Run (20001CVC) • Misdemeanor Hit and Run (20002CVC) • Collisions where evidence tends to indicate potential liability by any public agency • Collisions where at least one vehicle must be towed from the scene • Collisions involving drunk drivers • Collision where one driver requests that a report be taken • Collision reports shall be taken, even if no report is desired, when any driver does not have a valid driver's license or proof of insurance The California Highway Patrol will take school bus collisions, as follows: • When a bus is transporting at least one pupil on public or private property • Vehicle vs. pupil who has just exited a school bus • Vehicle vs. school bus driver escorting pupils across the street All other school bus collisions will be reported as an injury collision or non-injury collision by the Long Beach Police Department. 122 – Traffic Collision Reporting 289 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents NOTE: If a unit is dispatched to a collision, a report will be taken unless no report is desired. If no report is desired, officers will assist in the exchange of information between the involved parties, including verification and/or status of drivers' license and insurance. Officers will ensure that all parties understand no report is being taken. TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORT FORMS All collision reports must be taken on PD form 4210.001 (12/01), "Investigation/Injury Collision" (long form), with these exceptions: The CHP 555-03 Form (short form), "Traffic Collision Report - Property Damage Only," can only be used by officers when a traffic collision involves one or two vehicles. This report form may be used on collisions with injuries when the subject is not transported directly to a medical facility by paramedics or a private vehicle. NOTE: This form shall not be used for City Property Damage, vehicle vs. bicyclist, or vehicle vs. pedestrian collision. Instructions for completing PD Form 4210.001 and CHP 555-03 Form may be found in the “LBPD Field Reference Manual," Sections 9.24 through 9.24.5, and in the Collision Investigation Manual (Highway Patrol Manual 110.5). LATE REPORTED COLLISIONS Section 20008 CVC requires that drivers involved in injury collisions file a report with police within 24 hours. Late reported injury traffic collisions will be taken as follows: • If this is the first contact with police, a report will be filed • If a prior contact with police was made, either through Communications or by an officer at the scene - and no report was taken and an exchange of information was made or advised to be made, then no report will be made at a later time • If a non-injury report has already been filed, no late reported injuries will be added to the original report • Non-injury collision: No report will be taken unless the collision is a Hit and Run ISSUING CITATIONS AT SCENE When a vehicle belonging to a public agency, being driven by an employee of that agency, is involved in the collision, no citation (for a moving violation) will be issued to any of the parties in the collision. However, citations may be issued for other than the primary collision factor, such as 12500(a), 14601 CVC or any equipment violations. Other than above, a citation shall be issued at the scene of every collision, whether injury or non-injury, if the statements of independent witnesses and/or the facts warrant it. If a violator is taken to a hospital and is unable to sign the citation, attach the unsigned citation to the Collision Report and the Accident Investigation Detail (AID) may obtain a complaint through the City Prosecutor's office. 122 – Traffic Collision Reporting 290 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Traffic citations should not be written when the violator is booked. Traffic violations will be included in the booking charges. Exception: A citation will be issued to a juvenile booked for a traffic offense. Under no circumstances will a physical arrest be made of a driver who refuses to sign a citation based solely upon evidence found at the scene and not actually witnessed by the officers. In such cases, attach the unsigned citation to the report when filed, and AID may obtain a complaint through the City Prosecutor's Office. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 291 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 123 – Misdemeanor Citations REVISED March 2001 MISDEMEANOR CITATIONS This TB is currently being revised. Please see Watch Report issued 11/6/19 Non-Release Misdemeanor Arrest Form INTRODUCTION In recent years, our misdemeanor and moving violation citation books have evolved from two separate books into one citation book. The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to explain the proper use and issuance of misdemeanor citations. ISSUING MISDEMEANOR CITATIONS §853.6(h) PC authorizes a peace officer to issue a citation for any misdemeanor offense where an officer has arrested a person pursuant to §836 PC, or where the officer has taken custody of a person pursuant to §847 PC (private person arrest). Officers are urged to issue misdemeanor citations in lieu of arrest whenever possible. A misdemeanor citation should not be issued if the person being arrested has any outstanding warrants, a prior record of non-appearance, has been issued a bench warrant, or is unwilling to sign the citation. Misdemeanor citations will not be issued if the misdemeanor case involves: • Sex crimes • Domestic Violence • Petty theft with a prior offense (second offense or more) • Narcotic and drug violations (except 11357B H&S marijuana less than one ounce, 4140 B&P possession of a hypodermic syringe, 11364 H&S possession of drug paraphernalia and 9.36. 010 LBMC loitering for drug activity) • 647f PC arrests • Resisting arrest • Firearm violations Other reasons a misdemeanor citation will not be issued: • The officer has reason to believe there is a likelihood the suspect will not appear in court • The arrested person does not have proper identification (i.e. current California Driver’s License) • If exceptional circumstances are indicated, the suspect should appear before a judge FILING A MISDEMEANOR CITATION 123 – Misdemeanor Citations 292 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents If the officer feels the suspect should be fingerprinted and photographed, the officer must fill out the “Booking Required” box. When the suspect appears in court, the judge will order the suspect to go to the police station for booking before pronouncing sentence (in accordance with 853.6(g) PC). This procedure provides our Records Section and the Criminal Information Index (CII) with records of those who continually receive citations. After issuing a misdemeanor citation, a Follow-up report must be filed. The Follow-up report will include: • The elements of the crime • Suspect statements • Witness statements • Other facts pertaining to the offense • If evidence is seized during the arrest, the “Evidence Seized” box will be marked Follow-up reports and Evidence reports must be attached to the misdemeanor citation when the citation is turned in to Reporting. The citation number will be included on all reports filed with the misdemeanor arrest. A Department Record (DR) number will be obtained and written in the “DR#” box on the citation. Most misdemeanor citation arrests will be filed on a pink Misdemeanor Follow- up form. However, if the crime would normally require an incident report, a yellow Incident Report must still be filed. Although the suspect’s name and physical description is on the citation, it must also be placed in the suspect block of the Incident Report. All misdemeanor citation arrests not committed in the officer’s presence require a Private Person’s Arrest (PPA) form. The PPA form is filed along with the misdemeanor citation and the Follow-up or Incident Report. Each numbered citation must be accounted for. After issuing a misdemeanor citation, if the officer decides to book rather than write a citation, the officer must void the citation by filing a memorandum to the officer’s Division Commander, explaining why the citation was voided. The misdemeanor citation and all connecting reports must be time stamped and placed in the report review box located at each division. CONCLUSION Misdemeanor citations allow officers to take necessary enforcement action and return to duty more quickly. Officers should use their discretion and issue misdemeanor citations in the field whenever possible. Prior to issuing a citation, a records check should be run on the suspect for outstanding warrants or prior convictions. Take all precautions to ensure suspects cited in the field will appear in court, avoiding the issuance of a bench warrant. REVIEW Responsibility Patrol Bureau 293 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 124 – Credit Card Investigation REVISED March 2001 CREDIT CARD INVESTIGATION INTRODUCTION The fraudulent use of credit cards has become a major problem for law enforcement. There are over two billion credit cards in use in the United States. A portion of these credit cards fall into the hands of criminals in a variety of ways; robberies, burglaries, theft and lost cards. To some criminals the credit card is as valuable as cash. In the past, credit card companies have handled most of the investigations regarding fraudulent use of their lost or stolen cards. The current increase in credit card fraud, and the corresponding crimes that result from the original loss of the cards, has caused police agencies to become more involved in this type of field investigation. Officers should, therefore, become familiar with the different crimes involving the use of credit cards. TYPES OF CREDIT CARD CRIMES The credit card sections are 484(d) through (I) of the Penal Code. Those sections that always require an incident report are as follows: • §484e PC - Unauthorized access cards or related information • §484e(a) PC - Every person who, with the intent to defraud, sells, transfers, or conveys an access card, without the cardholder’s or issuer’s consent, is guilty of grand theft • §484f PC - Fraudulent use of access card • §484f(a) PC - Every person who, with the intent to defraud, designs, makes, alters, or embosses a counterfeit access card or utters or otherwise attempts to use a counterfeit access card is guilty of forgery • §484g(a) PC - Every person who, with the intent to defraud, (a) uses, for the purpose of obtaining money, goods, services, or anything else of value, an access card or access card account information that has been altered, obtained, or retained in violation of Section 484e or 484f, or an access card which he or she knows is forged, expired, or revoked • §484g(b) PC - Obtains money, goods, services, or anything else of value by representing without the consent of the cardholder that he or she is the holder of any access card and the card has not in fact been issued, is guilty of theft. If the things of value obtained in violation of this section exceeds four hundred dollars ($400) in any consecutive six month period, then the same shall constitute grand theft • §484i PC - Every person who possesses an incomplete access card, with intent to complete it without the consent of the issuer, is guilty of a misdemeanor. INVESTIGATION 124 – Credit Card Investigations 294 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The Forgery Detail handles all credit card cases. When a field officer is dispatched to investigate any of the above crimes, he/she shall take a crime report if a sales receipt is available to be placed in evidence. If the person in possession of the receipt refuses to relinquish the document to the officers, that person should be advised to contact the Forgery Detail. If a suspect is found to be in possession of a credit card determined to be lost or stolen, and the officer has reasonable cause to believe that the suspect has used the credit card and has signed the cardholder’s name, the suspect should be booked for Investigation of Forgery. If a suspect is found to be in unauthorized possession of a credit card and after an effort is made to ascertain if the card is lost or stolen, the suspect should be booked for Appropriation of Lost Property, a misdemeanor – §485 PC. A report should be made in all cases. The main victim on a crime report is the credit card Company – Bank of America Visa Card, Texaco, JC PENNY, etc. The additional victims are the cardholders and the store where the card was used. Officers should remember that the credit card is not the property of the cardholder, but is the property of the credit card Company and can be picked up when an officer feels there is probable cause. If this is done and no arrest is made, the card, along with an information and found property report, shall be filed to the Forgery Detail. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 295 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 128 – Homicide Investigations REVISED March 2020 HOMICIDE INVESTIGATION INTRODUCTION The preliminary investigation at the crime scene is the most important and possibly the most sensitive aspect of the investigation. The primary responsibility of a patrol officer at a homicide scene is to protect and preserve the crime scene. The actions of the first officer(s) on the scene can directly influence the outcome of the investigation. A small detail could later prove to be a significant issue. The emphasis of any investigation is the successful arrest and prosecution of those responsible. THE CRIME SCENE The first officer on scene assumes initial command and is responsible for the crime scene, pending the arrival of a supervisor and detectives from the Homicide Detail. Other than immediate safety concerns, an officer's first duty is to render aid to the victim(s) and request paramedics. If the victim is deceased, paramedics make that determination; however, note the name of the paramedic and the time determined. Upon determining the victim is deceased, and after exiting the crime scene, officers should consider where to place personnel to control access to the crime scene. Officers should note any changes made at the scene; e.g., lights, switches, doors, windows, gates, etc. If paramedics responded, record how they changed the crime scene; e.g., did they reposition or remove clothing from the body, etc. If the victim or suspect is transported to the hospital, one officer should be assigned to go with them. If medical professionals remove the victim's clothing, the clothing should be left undisturbed until collected by the Forensic Specialist; it is possible for bullets and bullet fragments to get caught in clothing. Preserve any evidence the suspect or victim may have left on their person. Officers should immediately attempt to obtain information regarding the suspect, or arrest suspects still at the scene. If the suspect is gone, obtain as much information as possible and relay it to the Communications Center for a crime broadcast. While at the crime scene, officers should remember the following: • Exercise extreme care to preserve the scene; • Be careful when walking in the crime scene to prevent accidental damage to the scene; • Coordinate a large perimeter; • Request enough units to secure the crime scene; 128 – Homicide Investigations 296 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Notify a field supervisor, request Homicide and a Forensic Specialist; • Cordon off the crime scene and exclude all non-essential persons from entering, this includes supervisors, command staff, fellow officers, relatives, neighbors, friends, landlords, etc.; • Any unauthorized individuals who try to force their way into a crime scene are subject to arrest under PC 148(a)(1); • In the event of extreme circumstances such as high winds, heavy rain, fire, etc., officers may need to photograph and collect evidence prior to the arrival of crime scene technicians to avoid loss; – This should occur only if necessary, to preserve the evidence, and should be documented in a police report; • Remain alert – It is not unusual for a suspect or the suspect’s associates to return to the crime scene and monitor the investigation. SECONDARY CRIME SCENE A secondary crime scene may be located nearby and should be protected and handled in the same manner as a primary scene. If a suspect vehicle is located, wait for Homicide detectives to provide direction prior to handling or searching unless the vehicle needs to be cleared of suspects for officer safety. WEAPONS If a crime scene is secure, do not handle weapons unless directed by a Homicide detective; this eliminates contamination and helps preserve evidence. If a crime scene is unsecured, remember officer safety is the priority. If a weapon must be collected prior to the arrival of Homicide detectives, officers should mark the location where the weapon was initially discovered, this allows investigators to reconstruct the crime scene. If the weapon is a firearm, mark the direction of the barrel prior to collecting it. Carefully pick up the firearm by the grips while wearing gloves and place it in a secure location. WITNESSES Once the crime scene is secure and notification has been made to a supervisor, officers should locate witnesses. This should include a door-to-door search (knock-and-talks) in the immediate vicinity of the crime; list the addresses contacted and indicate if anyone was home. When witnesses are located, officers should ask for a driver's license or other picture identification. Witnesses should be separated and directed outside the crime scene where an officer will stay with them. Officers may be instructed to transport witnesses to the downtown station to be interviewed by investigators. When considering the transport of witnesses to other locations, please keep in mind the following: 128 – Homicide Investigations 297 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Seek consent to take the person to the station; – Involuntary transportation of a person for any investigative purpose is a de facto arrest requiring probable cause or a warrant; • Run a warrant check to see if the person is subject to arrest; • If a witness does not agree to go to the station or be interviewed, officers should document the encounter and any identifying information obtained. SUSPECT ARRESTED If an officer arrests the suspect, the suspect should be removed from the scene as soon as possible. If the suspect makes statements or confesses to the crime, also known as spontaneous statements, allow the suspect to speak freely and document the spontaneous statements. There is no need to interrupt a suspect making spontaneous statements to advise them of the Miranda Warning. However, if you begin questioning a suspect in custody, then advisal of the Miranda Warning is required. Ideally, do not question or advise a homicide suspect of their rights, allow Homicide detectives to interview the suspect. If a suspect makes spontaneous statements, ensure the statements are included in your report. When a firearm is suspected as the weapon, the suspect's hands should be placed in paper bags as soon as possible to preserve evidence for a gunshot residue test (GSR). Under the direction of the Homicide Detectives, officers will collect any physical evidence; e.g., clothing and personal property. THE HOMICIDE TEAM Homicide Detail detectives will respond to the crime scene and assume control of the investigation. Upon arrival they should be briefed by the Incident Commander and the officer assigned to file the main report. The briefing should include the following: • What officers observed when they first arrived on scene; • How many involved parties (victim, witness, suspect) are on scene and where they are located; • Locations where knock-and-talks have been conducted; • What areas have been searched for surveillance cameras; • The location of the crime scene; and • What evidence has been identified, and the estimated time of arrival for the Forensic Specialists. – Homicide investigators will direct the Forensic Specialists to take photographs, examine, and collect evidence. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 298 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 129 – Stolen Aircraft REVISED November 2003 IDENTIFICATION OF STOLEN AIRCRAFT Because theft of an aircraft is unfamiliar to most officers, the proper identification numbers and other information may be omitted from reports. When reporting an aircraft theft, use the Incident Report Worksheet (PD Form 100000.00). This training bulletin lists the information needed to place the stolen aircraft on the DOJ and NCIC Computers. Omitted information will delay the entry of information into the computer and thus delay the reporting of the theft, a critical mistake during these times of terrorist activities. Officers filing a stolen aircraft report need to make two notifications: • Auto stats must be notified and given the identifying aircraft information needed for the intake form. If the information is unavailable to the officer while he is conducting the investigation he should advise the victim to contact the Auto Status Desk (ext 7475), as soon as possible to report the identification numbers. Most of the information can be obtained from the aircraft registration documents, which are generally in possession of the operator of the aircraft storage area or the victim of the theft • The Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) must also be notified when an aircraft theft occurs The following Information should be contained in the narrative of the Incident Report: Aircraft Registration Number Civil Aircraft Record the aircraft’s registration number. This number usually appears on each side of the rear section of the fuselage or vertical fin (vertical part of tail assembly) of civil aircraft. The registration number of aircraft registered in the United States is commonly referred to as an “N” number, since “N” is the first character of the number and indicates the aircraft is of United States registry. Registration numbers of foreign civil aircraft may consist of all letters. For example: N9101D N505PF N799K CF-TVU (Denotes civil aircraft of Canadian registry) Military Aircraft 129 – Stolen Aircraft 299 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents US Military aircraft registration numbers usually appear on the vertical fin of the tail assembly. Verify with the military representative reporting the theft the correct number to be used. For example: 39766 2776 Military aircraft will also have a squadron number (VF-142-F111A). This should be listed separately. State License Plate - Indicate the designation “US” for all United States aircraft. License Plate Year - List the highest year in which the aircraft’s registration certificate is valid for those registration certificates requiring annual or periodic renewal. Indicate that a registration certificate is valid for an indefinite period by entering two zeros (00). For example: License plate year: 2000 2003 00: indefinite This information is found on a sticker with the current year punched out (similar to a boat registration sticker) or in an entry in the aircraft logbook. License Plate Type - List the description associated with the best fitting definition of the aircraft. For example: License Plate Type • Civil, passenger: includes all civil aircraft designed and/or utilized primarily for transporting passengers, whether commercially or privately operated. • Civil, non-passenger: includes all civil aircraft designed and/or utilized for purposes other than transporting passengers • Military: any type of military aircraft, regardless of design or primary use Aircraft Vehicle Identification Number - Indicates the complete serial number of the aircraft. Includes any letter that is part of the serial number. This number is usually found on a metal plate in the cockpit. Vehicle Year - The exact or a close approximation of the year in which the aircraft was constructed. This is shown on the “Airworthiness Certificate” which is issued at the time of manufacture. For example: 2001 Aircraft Make - The complete identity of the aircraft make (including manufacturer’s model number and name, when available). For example: Beechcraft 35c Bonanza Piper PA 24 Apache Cessna 172 Skyhawk 129 – Stolen Aircraft 300 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Type of Aircraft - The appropriate description of the aircraft in one of the following classifications. Also list the number of engines. For example: Blimp Sailplane (glider) Propeller Driven: propeller driven aircraft are externally identifiable by propeller being visible. Where jet engines and propellers are visible, consider the aircraft to a be propeller driven and code “PRO.” E.g. turboprop Jet propelled: Jet propelled aircraft are externally identifiable by jet engines being visible, but no propellers being visible. Helicopters and other Rotor-wing (or rotary blade) driven aircraft - Consider an AUTOGIRO (AUTOGYRO) to be a helicopter Aircraft Color – Use the same designations used for motor vehicles CONCLUSION As with any report an officer files, the information on a stolen aircraft report needs to be recorded clearly and completely. The sooner the correct information is entered into the system the sooner recovery becomes possible. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigation Bureau 301 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 131 – Counterfeit Currency REVISED March 2001 THE DETECTION OF COUNTERFEIT CURRENCY INTRODUCTION Each year criminals who make or pass counterfeit currency, coins or other government obligations victimize thousands of citizens. The problem of controlling this illegal activity is aggravated by technological advances in printing, computers, and by copying machines that enable persons with little or no skill to engage in counterfeiting. As a result, this crime may be uncovered in the most improbable places. For example, counterfeit operations have been found in the print shop of a state penitentiary, in residential areas and in legitimate printing firms. The mobility of the modern criminal permits him to pass the counterfeit currency hundreds of miles from its source. TYPES OF U.S. CURRENCY Since 1879, United States currency has been printed on a special quality paper. The paper is manufactured by a process utilizing cotton and linen. The red and blue fibers interwoven within the paper are characteristic of this process. The mixture of the paper and fiber is one of the deterrents to counterfeiting, since counterfeiters have been unable to duplicate either material. Consequently, the bogus moneymakers have either ignored these fibers or attempted to simulate them by printing red and blue lines on the paper. These latter marks can be removed merely by scratching or erasing the surface. The United States uses the same paper in the manufacture of all its currency. These notes are of three general types: • Federal Reserve Notes bear green serial numbers and Treasury seal • United States Notes bear red serial numbers and Treasury seal • Silver Certificates which bear blue serial numbers and Treasury seal are no longer printed, but may be found in circulation RECOGNIZING THE COUNTERFEIT BILL One of the surest methods of recognizing a counterfeit note is to compare it with a genuine bill of the same denomination and series. Good currency is made to exact standards by a high quality printing process. Rubbing a bill will not prove whether it is genuine or counterfeit, ink will rub off either type note. 131 – Counterfeit Currency 302 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The counterfeiter usually makes his/her product by copying a genuine bill through a photo mechanical process. The finished product is the difference between genuine art work and a copy. This comparison can further be extended to the texture of the paper and the ink coloring. The counterfeit portrait is “lifeless”. Shading such as in the head and hair, and the cross rules lines behind the portrait, lack sharpness and are often broken or missing. When two bills are compared, look for the following differences or variations. Genuine • Portrait - Off center portrait with sharp, regularity of line, eyes are clear and distinct, pronounced contrast and shading • The Treasury seal – The saw-tooth points around the rim are identical and sharp • Serial numbers – Distinctive style, firmly and evenly printed, the same color as the Treasury seal • Back of note – Distinct and sharp details, the shading lines easily noticed • Watermark – Identical to the portrait, is visible from both sides when held up to the light (not present on older money) • Color shifting ink – The number in the lower right corner on the front of the note looks green when viewed straight on, but appears black when viewed at an angle • Security thread – A polymer thread embedded vertically on the note displaying USA and the denomination Counterfeit • Portrait – Flat, dull, smudgy, background often merges into portrait, the lines are irregular and broken • Treasury seal – The saw-tooth points may be uneven and broken • Serial numbers – May be a different printing style and poorly reproduced, badly spaced or unevenly aligned • Back of note – Numerous green details and shading lines missing or merged into the solid green area • Watermark – No visible watermark • Color shifting ink – Green foil used for overlay does not change color COUNTERFEIT COINS AND SLUGS The counterfeiting of coins still continues on a limited basis. Usually a counterfeit coin is a poor reproduction of the genuine and can be identified by observation. Comparing the reeding (the corrugated outer edge) of a questionable coin with a known genuine coin of the same denomination will establish the identity of the suspect coin. Far more difficult to detect are those counterfeit coins or altered genuine coins made to be sold to collectors for amounts much greater than their face value. A laboratory analysis is often necessary to determine their true value. PROCEDURE FOR REPORTING COUNTERFEIT CURRENCY 131 – Counterfeit Currency 303 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Officers receiving suspicious bills in the field shall file a Found Property Report with all the necessary information pertaining to the incident. The following information should be placed on the Property/Evidence Report when identifying currency. − Example: Federal Reserve Note, twenty ($20.00), L12, 173, “name of issuing bank” (name of bank not printed on new bills), series 1996, serial #AL95369975G. • Type of note – located on the front of the bill above the portrait • Denomination of bill ($20) • (L12) is not explained and not required for identification • Name of issuing bank – located in the Federal Reserve Seal on the front of the bill (not printed on new bills) • Series (1996) – located at the bottom of either side of the portrait • Serial # (AL95369975G) – located on the front of the bill on both sides of the portrait • Back plate number (173) – located on the backside of the bill in the lower right corner STATUTES Title 18 US Code • §331 – Mutilation, falsification, possession, uttering, etc., of US coins (felony) DENOMINATION SERIAL # TYPE OF NOTE Issuing Bank (not printed on new bills) SERIES Back Plate # NO EXPLANATION FOR THIS ITEM OF IDENTIFICATION (L12) 131 – Counterfeit Currency 304 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • §333 – Mutilation of National Bank obligations (misdemeanor) • §472 – Uttering counterfeit obligations or securities (felony) REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 132 – Community Service Assistants Incidents Involving Self-Defense 305 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 132 – Community Services Assistant Incidents Involving Self-Defense REVISED September 2023 COMMUNITY SERVICES ASSISTANT INCIDENTS INVOLVING SELF-DEFENSE INTRODUCTION A Community Services Assistant’s (CSA) role in the Department is to respond to non- emergency calls for service and conduct investigations not requiring the expertise of sworn personnel. CSAs do not have the authority to arrest or use force against a person. CSAs have been trained not to use force and to remove themselves from any situation that appears to be escalating into a physical altercation. For further refer to Special Order 2023-7 Community Services Assistant. The CSA’s limited authority, duties, and training should prevent the CSA from becoming involved in a physical assault incident. However, if an incident occurs, the investigation should be conducted in the same manner as any citizen physical assault complaint. The purpose of this training bulletin is to provide guidance to CSAs, Patrol Officers, and Supervisors when investigating incidents when a physical assault incident occurs, and a CSA is an involved party. INVESTIGATION A CSA should not use force as part of their duty assignment, but they do have the same rights as any citizen to defend themselves, including the use of a chemical agent (22810 PC). A CSA should only use force to defend themselves as described in CALCRIM 3470, which states a person can only use force against another person in lawful defense of themselves or another if: 1. The person reasonably believes that they [or] someone else was in imminent danger of suffering bodily injury [or was in imminent danger of being touched unlawfully]; 2. The person reasonably believes that the immediate use of force was necessary to defend against that danger; and 3. The person only uses the force reasonably necessary to defend against that danger. All investigations of physical assault that involve a CSA should be conducted in a fair, unbiased, and thorough manner. CSA Responsibilities If a CSA is involved in a physical altercation, they should: • Request a Police Officer to assist via radio. • Request a Patrol Supervisor and CSA Supervisor to respond. 132 – Community Service Assistants Incidents Involving Self-Defense 306 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Cooperate with the investigation, as necessary. • Provide reasonable and appropriate medical aid to any involved persons. Patrol Officer Responsibilities The Patrol Officer should: • Respond to the location, provide assistance as necessary, and render the scene safe. • Provide reasonable and appropriate medical aid to the CSA and any other involved persons. • Ensure a Field Supervisor has been notified. • Investigate the incident, including victim/suspect/witness statements, collection of evidence, and obtaining available digital evidence (i.e., photos/videos). • File relevant electronic incident reports. Patrol Supervisor Responsibilities The Patrol Supervisor should: 1) Respond to the scene and ensure a detailed investigation is conducted surrounding the incident. 2) Ensure photographs are taken of all injuries or lack of injuries to the CSA and any other involved persons. 3) Notify the Watch Commander of the incident as soon as possible and no later than the conclusion of the incident investigation. 4) Respond to the medical facility if the subject is transported. 5) Review the incident, arrest/supplemental reports related to the incident, and any digital evidence (i.e., photos/video) available at the time. CSA Supervisor Responsibilities The CSA Supervisor should: 1) Respond to the scene and ensure a Patrol Supervisor has been requested. 2) Respond to the medical facility if the CSA is transported. 3) Complete required HR paperwork, such as the DWC-1. 4) Notify the involved employee’s Lieutenant. Watch Commander Responsibilities The Watch Commander should ensure the involved employee’s Lieutenant was notified of the incident and ensure the incident is entered in the Watch Commander’s Log. Involved Employee’s Lieutenant Responsibilities The involved employee’s Lieutenant should: 1) Review the incident reports as well as any digital evidence (i.e., photos/video). 2) Notify the involved employee’s Commander. 3) Take corrective action if necessary. 4) Evaluate the incident to determine the need for future training. Involved Employee’s Division Commander Responsibilities The involved employee’s Division Commander should: 1) Review the incident reports as well as any digital evidence (i.e., photos/video). 2) Take corrective action if necessary. 132 – Community Service Assistants Incidents Involving Self-Defense 307 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 3) Evaluate the incident to determine the need for future training. REVIEW Responsibility Community Services Bureau 133 – Security Guards & Private Patrol Operators 308 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 133 – Security Guards & Private Patrol Operators REVISED February 2003 SECURITY GUARDS AND PRIVATE PATROL OPERATORS INTRODUCTION The Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of Security and Investigative Services (BSIS) under the California Business and Professions Code regulate security guards and Private Patrol Operators (PPOs), more commonly referred to as security guard companies. Although local regulation is largely pre-empted by State law, local officers may conduct inspection and enforcement. Field officers will frequently encounter security guards and should be familiar with the regulations governing these individuals, who often are uniformed, wear badges, and carry weapons. GUARD CARDS A security guard is a uniformed or non-uniformed person employed to protect people and property or to prevent the theft of property. This includes security guards, bodyguards, patrolmen, and watchmen. A security guard who provides security for one employer, is listed on the payroll of that employer, has wages paid directly by that employer, and only provides security for that employer, is known as an “in-house” security guard. Included in this category are bodyguards, bouncers, and doormen. In-house security guards do not need a State permit (guard card) unless they carry any deadly weapons in the course of their duties, in which case they must be registered with the BSIS and must obtain the appropriate weapons permits. Any security guard employed by a Private Patrol Operator is required to be registered with the BSIS and must obtain a guard card and have it in possession while on duty. Conversely, a security guard with a valid guard card may only work as an employee of a licensed Private Patrol Operator. A security guard who contracts out his/her services on an individual or freelance basis shall be treated as an unlicensed Private Patrol Operator. Effective January 1, 2003, temporary security guard cards are no longer issued. A security guard must possess a valid security guard registration or a screen printout of the Bureau's approval from the Bureau website at www.dca.ca.gov/bcis, along with valid photo identification. Temporary guard cards issued prior to January 1, 2003, are valid until the expiration of the temporary. 133 – Security Guards and Private Patrol 309 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Officers should be aware that counterfeit guard cards (as well as firearm and baton cards) are not uncommon. Officers are encouraged to note and verify guard cards through the BSIS, either by telephone during business hours, or via the website listed below. LICENSING Security guards need no permits from the City of Long Beach. In regard to PPOs, under the California Business and Professions Code (B&P) cities may collect a business tax and a fee to cover the cost of regulation. However, regulation is effectively limited to enforcement of State statutes relating to private patrol activity and reporting violations to the State for administrative action against the licensee. A person cannot obtain a Business License to operate as a PPO in the City of Long Beach until they are properly licensed by the State of California. If a Private Patrol Operator is observed doing business without a Business License to operate in the City of Long Beach, they are in violation of 3.80.210 LBMC (business license required). Any advertisement, whether by sign or circulation, will suffice as evidence of doing business (3.80.425.1 LBMC). Other Sections: §7582 B&P - Unlicensed security guard §7583.3(a) B&P - Guard card not in possession (of licensed security guard) §7582.3(a) B&P - Unlicensed Private Patrol Operator §7582.3(b) B&P - Client (ex: apartment complex, nightclub owner) knowingly hire an unlicensed operator §7582.3(d) B&P - (False representations may be made by way of badge, ID Card, business card, letterhead or any advertisement.) Person who falsely represents license by the State or employment by a licensee FIREARMS Any security guard in possession of a firearm must also possess a valid Firearms Qualification Card in addition to his guard card. A receipt for application for a Firearms Qualification Card is not sufficient. A Firearms Qualification Card is not a permit to carry a concealed weapon upon the person (as defined in section 12050 PC). Private security guards who carry firearms without a valid firearms card may be arrested for carrying a loaded firearm in the City 12031(a)(1) PC. Private security guards may not carry replica firearms. Sections: §7583.3(b) B&P - Security guard in possession of a firearm must possess Firearms Qualification Card §7583.37(a) B&P - Security guard carrying replica firearm BATON AND MACE Private security guards may legally carry a baton and/or mace in the performance of their duties if they are in possession of BSIS permits in addition to a guard card. Appropriate Penal Code sections may be enforced whether or not the guard is registered with the State or employed by a licensed PPO. 133 – Security Guards and Private Patrol 310 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Sections: §7583.37(c) B&P and 12020(a)(1) PC - Security guard in possession of a baton without the required permit card §7583.37(d) B&P and 12420 PC - Carrying mace without a permit UNIFORMS Security guards must be in a distinctive uniform when carrying either a baton or an exposed firearm. The uniform must have clearly visible patches on each arm that read "private security" and include the company name, and a badge or cloth patch on the upper left breast of the uniform. Badges or cap devices must bear the company name and an employee identification number. Per the City Attorney and the City Prosecutor, patrol officers should not enforce §9.08.010 LBMC, which prohibits private security guards from wearing uniforms that are not clearly distinguishable from those of the Long Beach Police Department. However, patrol officers may still enforce the following Business and Professions Code provisions: §7582.27 B&P - Security guard uniform must have clearly visible patches on each arm that read "private security" and include the company name §7582.28 B&P - Badges or cap devices require company name and employee identification number §7582.27 B&P - Carry baton or exposed firearm when not in uniform or without required patches §7582.26(f) B&P - Security guard may not wear or use any badge, except while engaged in guard work and wearing a distinctive uniform with required patches ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION AGAINST PPOs AND SECURITY GUARDS In addition to criminal prosecution, the Department of Consumer Affairs will take administrative action against its licensed Private Patrol Operators and registered Security Guards. Some offenses invoke disciplinary action such as suspension or revocation. Other offenses invoke heavy fines. The Special Permits Detail is the liaison between the Police Department and the State. They will maintain and track all information received from patrol and coordinate with State and local agencies to obtain compliance or begin administrative action against the subject license. Detailed documentation of violations involving PPOs or their employees is as essential to an administrative action as to a criminal prosecution. Field officers should forward a copy of any citation, crime or arrest report, and any follow-up reports, to Vice Special Permits. However, if no citation was issued and no report was taken, a memorandum may be filed that explains, in detail, any questionable activity. For further information, you may contact the Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of Collections and Investigations at (916) 255-4277. Additional information and a license verification is also available at the Bureau of Security and Investigative Services website: http://www.dca.ca.gov/bsis/index.html REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 311 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 134 – Firearms Qualification REVISED September 2022 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION Course of Fire for 50 Round Qualification Course: 25 - yard line: 5 rounds – draw from holster, 2-hand hold, 21 second time limit 15 - yard line: 5 rounds- draw from holster, 2-hand hold, speed reload, 5 rounds, 2- hand hold, 23 second time limit, 5 rounds – draw from holster, strong hand only, 17 second time limit 10 - yard line: 3 rounds – low ready position, 3 second time limit (4 times) 7 - yard line 6 rounds – draw from holster, 8 second time limit 3 rounds – low ready position, 2 second time limit (2 times) 7 - yard line 2 rounds center mass, 1 round head – draw from holster, 4 second time limit, 1 round head – draw from holster, 3.5 second time limit, (3 times) Pistol/Combat Qualification Course: The course of fire varies each qualification period based on the tactical scenario used. QUALIFICATION The minimum score for qualification will be 80%. Officers will be required to qualify with the weapon that they carry while on duty. COURSE OF FIRE FOR RETIRED OFFICERS AND BACK UP WEAPONS The standardized course consists of: Rounds – 25 Minimum score to pass – 80% 15 - yard line: 5 rounds two-handed hold 7 - yard line: 10 rounds two-handed hold 3 - yard line: 5 rounds left hand only 5 rounds right hand only 134 – Firearms Qualifications 312 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents DISQUALIFICATION The Range Officer will have complete charge of the course of fire. He shall have the option to disqualify any officer who: • Fires more than the prescribed load from any point within a course of fire • Fires the weapon after the command to cease-fire • Fails to fire in the proper sequence • Deviates from the prescribed course of fire REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 313 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 136 – Shoplifting Theft REVISED September 2002 SHOPLIFTING THEFTS INTRODUCTION Shoplifting is the act of committing a theft from an open-for-business establishment, taking merchandise of value, and leaving or attempting to leave without making an effort to pay for the item. Officers must be able to prove asportation and that the suspect intended to deprive the owner of the merchandise. TYPE OF SHOPLIFTING THEFTS There are four types of shoplifting thefts. Officers sh use the following classifications when filing shoplifting reports to ensure proper distribution and assignment of reports. • 484(a) PC PETTY THEFT SHOPLIFT – Occurs when the value of merchandise taken is $400.00 or less • 487(a) PC GRAND THEFT SHOPLIFT - Occurs when the value of merchandise taken exceeds $400.00. When determining the value of merchandise, officers should not include the tax as part of the loss. Tax cannot be stolen • 459 PC COMMERCIAL BURGLARY SHOPLIFT – Occurs when there is reasonable cause to believe that the suspect(s) entered an open-for-business establishment with the specific intent of committing a theft. Statements, physical evidence, lack of money or other means for paying for the merchandise, or other stolen merchandise in possession of suspect(s) at the time of arrest can be used to establish intent: NOTE: it is requested that officers no longer book shoplifting suspects for Commercial Burglary. If you feel that you have an exception to the rule, please consult with the Booking Sergeant. Continue to file detailed reports with all the elements of commercial burglary, if applicable. The detective assigned to the case will present the case to the District Attorney's Office or City Prosecutor's Office with any additional appropriate charges • 666 PC (FELONY) PETTY THEFT WITH A PRIOR PETTY THEFT CONVICTION Prior to booking a suspect for 666 PC related charges, officers will check the suspect’s CII record for theft related convictions. The suspect must have served at least one day in jail after conviction in order for the section to apply: – Priors should not exceed an eight to ten year time frame, as court dockets are destroyed after that time The Booking Sergeant shall monitor for compliance when approving theft related charges. The Booking Sergeant shall confirm the CII record for the 666 PC booking. GENERAL PROCEDURES 136 – Shoplifting Thefts 314 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Evidence Nearly all-shoplifting arrests will involve some type of evidence. It is accepted procedure to have the victim establishment retain the evidence. The arresting citizen should be advised to place the evidence in a safe secure area. If for any reason the victim cannot maintain the evidence, it should be photographed showing the incident report number and/or the suspect(s) name and date of arrest. Arresting citizens should be advised to put an identifying mark (such as initials or name and date) on the evidence, as they may have to bring the evidence to court and testify about it at a later date. When evidence is perishable, the victim(s) should be advised to remove the tags, or labels and retain them for evidence. Officers shall take into evidence any large empty purse, booster bag, etc., which was brought by the shoplifter to the store for the purpose of shoplifting. Officers often receive arrests from store security/loss prevention officers. In this case, the police officer should be sure to record the personal information of the security officer, e.g., a CDL#, DOB, home address and phone number in their report. Detectives have difficulty locating security officers, therefore the security officer information is required. Security officers do not have the “non-disclosure” of personal information that police officers have. All arrests involving a retail store where an “In house” arrest report is filed by a security/loss prevention officer shall be placed into evidence. A copy of the report will do if the original is not available. Advisement of Rights The arresting/transporting officer should advise the suspect of their Miranda Rights and attempt to obtain a statement or confession. Suspects Financial Situation Officer's report should document the means the suspect(s) had, if any, to pay for the merchandise taken. If the suspect had no money or other means for paying for the merchandise taken, statements regarding this can be used during the prosecution. Suspect Vehicle It is extremely important for officers to make every effort to obtain a description of a suspect vehicle. Many times, a suspect has shoplifted in other stores and the stolen merchandise can be recovered if the suspect vehicle is located. The suspect should be questioned as to how he arrived at the store. If the suspect vehicle is located, it should be thoroughly investigated to determine if the vehicle is involved in the crime. Any search of the vehicle should be consistent with current search and seizure laws. 136 – Shoplifting Thefts 315 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents MISDEMEANOR CITATIONS Misdemeanor citations should be issued with discretion. If a citation is issued, the issuing officer should check off the “Booking Required” box. This will allow the court to order the suspect to report to the Police Department for booking, fingerprinting and a photograph. The suspect will then be released. If the “Booking Required” box is not checked, then: • The suspect will not have a local record of this citation for future reference • The suspect will not be photographed or fingerprinted in connection with this citation A Petty Theft Shoplift 484(a) PC incident report must be filed in addition to any citation issued. The crime report shall include all details of the crime, including any statements made by the suspect. It shall also include the date the suspect is to appear in court. In any event, DO NOT issue a misdemeanor citation if the suspect has no identification. 490.1 PC CITATION §490.1 PC is Petty Theft where value taken is under $50.00. Juveniles may be cited for minor offenses such as petty theft shoplift using this section. This is an excellent tool to minimize the time spent dealing with minor offenses committed by juveniles. A narrative must be filed and attached to the citation. Also, a “Glady’s R” form is required on all juveniles age 13 and under. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 316 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 140 – Bar Inspections REVISED April 2004 BAR INSPECTIONS AND ABC LAW COMPLIANCE INTRODUCTION Enforcement of ABC laws is often necessary for the preservation of peace, the reduction of drunk driving, and to maintain the quality of life in neighborhoods with ABC-licensed establishments. INSPECTION AUTHORITY Long Beach Municipal Code §5.08.020 specifies that all Police Officers and certain civilian employees are appointed inspectors of business licenses. Additionally, §25619 of the California Business and Professions Code specifically requires every peace officer to enforce the provisions of the Alcohol Beverage control act. Accordingly, all patrol officers are directed to make compliance inspections of ABC-licensed premises and to file timely field inspection reports describing conspicuous and/or suspected vice violations. ENFORCEMENT Patrol officers must check out “Code 6” on the radio or MDC when making an inspection of any licensed premises and must check “10-8” immediately after leaving the premises. The name and the address of the premises must also be given to Dispatch when checking “Code 6.” This procedure will establish an official record for the officer’s and the Department’s protection. ABC inspections, when practical, should be directed toward voluntary compliance on the part of the licensee. Officers shall report problems that cannot be resolved through voluntary compliance, describing the conditions observed, citizen complaints received, and enforcement action taken. File reports to the Deputy Chief, Investigations Bureau, for transmittal to the Detective Division, Vice Investigations. Inspection forms may be picked up from Vice, or a memorandum will suffice. The Alcoholic Beverage Control Board will act on information filed through the Detective Division. Establishments that are habitual violators will be investigated by the Vice Investigations Section or by ABC investigators, acting on field intelligence reports filed by patrol officers and detectives. Field inspection reports, along with citizens’ complaints, contribute to the basis for additional personnel deployment by both the area Commander and the Commander of the Detective Division. 140 – Bar Inspections 317 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents A “compliance inspection” (by patrol officers) is an entry and walk-through of licensed premises. Officers should refer to the attached violation guidelines and become familiar with possible violations that might be encountered. Each officer should keep a log or notes on inspections made, containing all observations and the names and addresses of persons contacted about violations or compliance. Any logs or notes will include dates, times, and names of witnessing officers. Performance of these duties does not require a citation or arrest for every violation observed. Officers should use good judgment and discretion to bring about the preferred method of enforcement, voluntary compliance. GENERAL INVESTIGATIVE TECHNIQUES, suggested by ABC: • Retain alcoholic beverage for evidence • Mark bottles or containers of seized beverages for identification • Immediately remove ice from mixed drinks and seal liquid in an evidence bottle • Give a receipt for unopened containers that are seized • Obtain complete identifying information of licensee or employees on premises • Establish employee's shift schedules, length of association with the premises, and length of experience in the liquor business • Observe and record licensee’s/employee’s physical condition as to vision, hearing, sobriety, etc., and a description of their clothing • Examine all identification documents carefully. Seize any false identification as evidence • Present apprehended minors to alleged sellers as soon as possible, on a face-to-face basis, for positive identification. Note results of the presentation and any conversation/statements between them • Note and include in your report the condition of the premises (lighting, size of crowds, number of employees present, etc.) and list any witnesses present • Be accurate about time if an after-hours case. Note the time on any clock on premises and on employee’s watch; verify time with dispatcher • Note method of identifying alcoholic beverages: smell and appearance, container labels or beer tap spigot markers, statements overheard (what did patron order?), admissions of licensee or employees A thorough and detailed follow-up report to all arrests or citations will greatly enhance not only the criminal prosecution, but also any administrative action undertaken by ABC against the licensee. Please contact Vice Investigations with any questions regarding violations or non- compliance situations, or for assistance with an inspection. Officers are also encouraged to go to the Vice office to file information with the Vice officers. Attached are guidelines to violations designed to assist the field officer in making compliance inspections of bars and ABC-licensed businesses. Many of the ordinances are ABC related, but sections pertaining to security guards and municipal entertainment ordinances may also be useful at ABC establishments. 140 – Bar Inspections 318 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 140 – Bar Inspections 319 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents VIOLATION GUIDELINES RELATING TO BAR INSPECTIONS AND ABC LAW COMPLIANCE Business & Professions Code Sections 23300 Alcohol sales without a license. • Includes admittance tickets entitling purchaser to a drink 24046 License must be posted. • no citation - memo to Vice only 25602(a) Sale to obviously intoxicated person. • server must have opportunity to observe that person is obviously intoxicated • Arrest intoxicated person as well as citing server 5607(a) Unlawful possession on licensed premises (i.e., distilled spirits) on beer & wine premises. • Cite bar • Cite patron if in possession • Seize all non-permitted alcohol 25631 Sales/furnishing during restricted hours (0200-0600 hours). • Service must be observed • Server and patron are citable 25632 Consumption during restricted hours (check license for conditions) • Actual consumption must be observed • Mere presence of drinks is insufficient 25658(a) Sales, serving or furnishing to a minor • Cite server 25658(b) Purchase/consumption by a minor • Cite minor. See 25662 for mere possession 25658.5 Minor attempting to purchase alcoholic beverage (an infraction) 25660.5 Furnishing false identification to minor. 25661 Use/possession of false identification by minor. • Regardless of whether on ABC premises, or in connection with attempted purchase of alcohol 25662 Possession of alcohol by a minor • On any street, public place, or place open to public • Exception for making delivery at direction of parent, etc., or in pursuance of employment 25663 Employment of minor in on-sale premises. • Minors may not work in areas primarily designated for alcohol consumption • There are some exceptions. Consult with Vice Investigations 25665 Minor on public premises (nobody under 21 years of age permitted) • Cite licensee, if present, and minor 7582 Unlicensed security guard 7583.3 (a) Security guard without valid guard card 7583.3 (b) Guard carrying firearm without permit 7583.37 (c) Guard carrying baton without baton permit 140 – Bar Inspections 320 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 7583.37 (d) Guard carrying tear gas without permit 7583.37 (a) Guard carrying replica firearm Penal Code Sections 647 (f) Drunk in public • Includes inside a bar 347(b) Putrid/contaminated bottles ("Buggy Bottles") - • Mandatory citation if there are 5 or more bottles • Seal and place the bottles into evidence 308 Sale of cigarettes to minor 308.2 Sale of single cigarettes ENTERTAINMENT AND OTHER ISSUES Long Beach Municipal Code Sections 3.80.210 Business license required 5.72.110A Entertainment permit required • Not applicable at private residence • Dancing by performers or patrons • Live music by more than two people • Amplified music, including DJs and karaoke 5.69.050A Pool hall permit required • 3 or more pool tables 5.72.110B Entertainment for monetary gain at private residence prohibited • Charging admission for party 9.20.010 Exposure of genitals, pubic hair, buttocks, etc., by waiter or waitress prohibited 9.20.020 Exposure of female breasts by waitress or entertainer in food/beverage establishment prohibited 9.20.030 Permit/procuring for public exposure • owner/manager allowing nudity 9.20.050A Public nudity prohibited • except in First-amendment protected expression 9.22.010 Transport/drink/consume alcoholic beverage in public 9.24.010 Gambling prohibited 9.24.060 Use of false ID to be admitted to place of entertainment 9.25.010 Urinating/defecating in public 9.30.025 Misdemeanor to enter public restroom designated for use by the opposite sex Labor Code 6404.5(b) Smoking prohibited in an establishment 140 – Bar Inspections 321 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents If the ABC license is a type 41 or 47 (bonafide eating place), they are required to serve food, other than appetizers, during normal meal hours. If you observe such a violation, please notify Vice Investigations. 322 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 141 – Security of Information REVISED August 2001 SECURITY OF INFORMATION The California Law Enforcement Telecommunications System (CLETS) is the most widely used message switching system within the criminal justice system. Records obtained through CLETS are a primary source of information vital to decision making and the exercising of discretion concerning the processing of criminal suspects. The Department of Justice continues to receive information relating to alleged unauthorized access and misuse of information obtained through CLETS, primarily, Criminal Offender Record Information (arrests and rap sheets) and Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) records. The importance of complying with the privacy and security provisions of State law and DOJ regulations cannot be overemphasized. Sworn and civilian employees who access and misuse CLETS obtained information risk their careers, criminal prosecution and civil liability. Unlawful inquiries to any criminal justice databases, such as a criminal justice employee who accesses a criminal record for unauthorized agencies or citizens, is in violation of PC §502. This section contains subsections defining computer-related crimes as either a misdemeanor or felony. Unauthorized receivers of information include, but are not limited to the following: • Private investigators • Collection agencies • Auto Dealers • Friends and relatives • Private business persons or corporations • Sworn officers and civilian employees when they seek information for personal and/or private use Citizens may obtain vehicle registration information and driver’s license information through the Department of Motor Vehicles. CLETS provides all law enforcement user agencies with the capability of obtaining information directly from Federal, State and local computerized information files. • Any information transmitted or received via CLETS is confidential and for official use only by authorized law enforcement or criminal justice personnel. Access to confidential information is based on: − A right to know − A need to know 141 – Security of Information 323 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Police officers have a need and a right to access information. However, the information must be accessed correctly and with the “need to know” reason being law enforcement related. • Accessing and/or releasing criminal justice information for non-law enforcement purposes is prohibited and is subject to administrative action and/or criminal prosecution • CLETS terminals and information must remain secure from unauthorized access • Information received from a CLETS terminal must be maintained separately from non- law enforcement information • A unique password must be assigned to each CLETS user Examples of unacceptable messages for transmission over CLETS include: • Personal notices, e.g.; social functions, pistol meets, funeral notices, retirement announcements and holiday cheer messages • Profane or obscene language for any purpose including that contained within the description of a crime • Excessive listing or detailed description of stolen property except that identifiable by serial numbers or unique markings Criminal History Inquiry Police officers often “need to know” an individual's criminal history. Providing such information is a function of CLETS. Law enforcement inquiries into Criminal Offender Record Information (CORI) are audited by the Department of Justice. CORI inquiries are not to be done on the mobile work station. They are generally completed in Records or at a terminal inside the station. When inquiry screens ask for a “requesting officer” or contain an “attention” field they must be filled in with the correct information. The proper use of these fields will result in an audit trail to provide DOJ with the official law enforcement reason to obtain information. The “attention” or “requester” field must be completed for all inquiries. This field contains up to 23 characters and must indicate the following: • The name, initials or DID # of the requester • The operator’s name, initials or DID # (if different from the requester) • The specific reason for the request • The requester’s unit information is optional • The “reason” information is the tracking data, e.g., arrest #, booking #, case # or name, citation #, incident #, warrant #, Department of Corrections (CDC) inmate #, etc. • Generic terms such as “Investigation”, “Inquiry”, are unacceptable for use as an inquiry reason • The data must provide DOJ with sufficient information to justify the “need to know” Proper usage of these fields ensures compliance with State and Federal law. The Police Department will also conduct internal audits on the use of CLETS and the proper entry of requester information. 141 – Security of Information 324 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The user restrictions for the National Crime Information Center (NCIC) and the Criminal Information Index (CII), are generally the same as for CLETS. Authorized recipients of information derived from these systems are: • Peace officers • District attorneys • Probation officers • Courts of the State • U.S. officers • Officers of other states, territories or U.S. possessions • Peace officers of other countries authorized by the Attorney General • Any public defender or attorney, who is representing a person in proceeding for a certificate of rehabilitation and pardon Persons other than those listed above are not authorized to receive information through those systems. Should NCIC be able to verify improper use of the system by a requesting officer or agency, they will take immediate action to discontinue service to the agency until the agency can prove the situation has been corrected. COUNTY WARRANT SYSTEM (CWS) Sworn officers and civilian employees are bound to the same regulations and restrictions that apply to information derived from CLETS or NCIC. RELEASE OF LAW ENFORCEMENT INFORMATION §6254(f) of the California Government Code requires that certain information be made public: • Crime Reports. Certain information will be made available to: − The victim of the incident − An authorized representative of the victim (attorney of victim’s designee) − An insurance carrier against which a claim has been or might be made − Any person suffering bodily injury or property damage as a result of the incident Categories of crime reports subject to release under this section are: • Arson • Burglary • Explosion • Fire • Larceny • Robbery • Carjacking • Vandalism • Vehicle theft 141 – Security of Information 325 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Violent crimes Information is not released if the disclosure would endanger the safety of a witness or other person involved in the investigation or would endanger the successful completion of the investigation or a related investigation. In some cases certain information is not released such as informant information and conclusions of the investigating officer. The following information pertaining to an incident shall be released to the public: • Time, substance and location of all complaints or requests for assistance • Time and nature of response to the extent that such information is recorded: − Time, date and location of occurrence − Time and date of the report − Name, age and current address of victim − The factual circumstances surrounding the entire incident or crime • General description of: − Any injuries involved − Weapons involved − Property involved The name of a victim of any crime defined by §220, 261, 261.5, 262, 264, 264.1, 273a, 273d, 273.5, 286, 288, 288a, 289, 422.6, 422.7, 422.75, or 646.9 of the Penal Code may be withheld at the victim’s request or at the request of the victim’s parent or guardian if the victim is a minor. When a person is a victim of more than one crime, information disclosing that the person is a victim of a crime defined by any of the above-mentioned Penal Code sections may be deleted at the request of the victim, (or the victim's parent or guardian if the victim is a minor), when the report of the crime, or of any incident accompanying the crime, is made available to the public in compliance with the requirements of this paragraph. The current address of every individual arrested by the agency and the current address of the victim of a crime will be released, where the requester declares under penalty of perjury that the request is made for: • Scholarly, • Journalistic, • Political or governmental purposes, or, • Investigation purposes by a licensed private investigator The address of the victim of any crime defined by any of the aforementioned Penal Code sections shall remain confidential. §841.5 PC - No law enforcement officer or employee of a law enforcement agency shall disclose to any arrested person, or to any person who may be a defendant in a criminal action, the address or telephone number of any person who is a victim or witness in the alleged offense. ARREST REPORTS 141 – Security of Information 326 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The following information will be made public: • The full name, current address, and occupation of every person arrested by the agency (except juvenile offenders) • Arrestee’s physical description including: − Date of birth and sex − Eye and hair color − Height and weight • Date and time of arrest • Date and time of booking • Location of arrest • Amount of bail set • Factual circumstances surrounding arrest • Time and manner of release or location where the arrestee is being held • All charges subject is being held on including outstanding warrants and probation/parole holds Any of the aforementioned information shall be released to the public, except to the extent that disclosure of a particular item of information would endanger the safety of a person involved in an investigation or would endanger the successful completion of the investigation or related investigation. Nothing in §6254 (f) requires the release of information by which a juvenile offender’s identity may be disclosed. Juvenile information can only be obtained through the Superior Court juvenile system. REVIEW Responsibility Investigations Bureau 327 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 144 – Clandestine Laboratories & LAIMPACT Clandestine Lab Team REVISED September 2019 CLANDESTINE LABORATORIES & LAIMPACT CLANDESTINE LAB TEAM INTRODUCTION Clandestine drug laboratories are found throughout Southern California and range from small processing operations, to large-scale operations that produce hundreds of pounds of illicit drugs, such as Methamphetamine, PCP and Butane Honey Oil. Makeshift pill mills, pill presses, and capsulation processes are also found in laboratory environments producing narcotic analgesics, opioids, and Fentanyl. All clandestine laboratories pose a danger to the law enforcement officers who discover them. Clandestine laboratories are often found by patrol officers or by narcotics detectives during unrelated investigations. Indicators of drug laboratories may include an explosion, fire, chemicals, odor, glassware, containers with liquids or powders, injured persons, or statements by witnesses or suspects. Labs, chemicals & equipment may be found in vehicles, motel rooms, mobile homes, sheds, yards, garages, houses, apartments or businesses. When a clandestine lab is discovered or suspected, specific dangers must be kept in mind. The chemicals used in a lab can cause fires, explosions, toxic exposures, and the release of poisonous gases. Clandestine lab operators are known to dump dangerous chemicals in surrounding areas and extreme caution must be exercised. Lab operators are often heavily armed and at times have elaborate security systems. These systems include video cameras and alarm systems, which may be operated by trip wires or other detection devices and can include various types of booby traps. Another concern for officers is encountering suspects who may throw chemicals on them. Additional problems occur if the suspects have visible contamination on their clothing, or if an officer becomes contaminated. Except in emergency situations, individuals who may have been exposed to chemicals or other contaminants should follow approved decontamination procedures prior to leaving the area of exposure, or contact with other people, objects, or food. Whenever practical, all contaminated persons should be isolated at the scene for decontamination procedures. PROCEDURES 144 – Clandestine Labs 328 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents When a lab is suspected, or found, a Field Supervisor and the Fire Department should be notified as early as possible. Patrol officers have the primary responsibility of containing and controlling the lab scene pending the arrival of the Fire Department and Drug Investigations Section (DIS). Officers should have as little contact as possible with the actual laboratory and, when necessary, evacuate the lab location, neighboring buildings and area. Do not allow entry of any persons into the secured area unless the individual is authorized, properly trained, or must perform an emergency function. DIS should be notified, if not already on scene. A DIS detective will be assigned as case agent and may prepare a search warrant, if necessary. Lawful entry may be gained due to the exigency and a hazardous materials cleanup could lawfully be done. However, to ensure a successful prosecution, a search warrant is the preferred approach. DIS detectives should conduct suspect interviews, follow-up investigations, and filing the case with the District Attorney. When a public health hazard or chemical waste disposal is suspected, the Fire Department will assess the need for response by the City Department of Health and Human Services Hazardous Materials Specialists and are responsible for making the notification. Patrol officers may transport and book any suspects, except under circumstances such as contaminated or injured prisoners. Contaminated suspects will be decontaminated at the scene and their clothing will be retained as evidence or disposed of appropriately. The suspects will be provided with disposable clothing to wear to the booking area. Arresting officers should notify Jail personnel that the suspects were arrested inside a clandestine laboratory and have been through a decontamination process. The dispatched officers may need to prepare an Arrest Report including probable cause and exigent circumstances, if any, which led to the arrest and lab seizure. A Property Report should be filed listing all items of uncontaminated evidence retained by LBPD. LAIMPACT RESPONSIBILITIES The Los Angeles Interagency Metropolitan Police Apprehension Crime Task Force (LAIMPACT) is composed of County and local law enforcement officers. The mission of the LAIMPACT Lab Team is to investigate, seize and dismantle clandestine drug laboratory operations, and target illicit drug distributors who acquire their source drugs from clandestine laboratory operators in Los Angeles County. The goals of LAIMPACT are as follows: • Provide investigative and technical expertise to Los Angeles County law enforcement agencies by responding to and targeting clandestine laboratories and operators; • Initiate and investigate clandestine laboratories, specifically targeting respective clandestine laboratory operators; • Identify, target and investigate illicit drug distributors who acquire the source drug from clandestine laboratories; 144 – Clandestine Labs 329 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Provide clandestine laboratory enforcement and safety training to law enforcement agencies and the citizens of Los Angeles County. Notifications to LAIMPACT can be made directly to the Los Angeles Clearing House (LACLEAR) by the Field Supervisor or case agent, or through the Communications Center. LAIMPACT can be contacted through LACLEAR 24 hours a day at (800) LA- CLEAR ((800) 522-5327). Upon arrival, LAIMPACT will take over any site safety issues and conduct a thorough search of the crime scene. Evidence will be inventoried, photographed, sampled, and fingerprinted where appropriate. Contaminated suspects will be decontaminated by LAIMPACT and provided with disposable clothing, when necessary. LAIMPACT will notify the California Department of Toxic Substances Control (DTSC) who will issue an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) number for this event and arrange for a hazardous materials disposal company to complete the cleanup. LAIMPACT will notify a criminalist from LASD who will respond to assist with the collection of chemical evidence. LAIMPACT will prepare the appropriate DOJ reports, property inventory, and State reports. SUMMARY Clandestine laboratory investigations are unique among crime scenes. Most of the evidence at these scenes is too hazardous to retain and must be destroyed. Therefore, the actions of those present at the crime scene must be proper to ensure safety and a successful prosecution of clandestine laboratory operators. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 330 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 145 – Vehicle Stops REVISED March 2005 VEHICLE STOPS INTRODUCTION Vehicle stops are a potentially dangerous undertaking. Because of the routine nature of vehicle stops, officers must avoid becoming complacent. This training bulletin is a guideline, emphasizing that common sense, flexibility, and safety are needed to effectively conduct a vehicle stop. TYPES OF VEHICLE STOPS • Enforcement/Traffic violation • Investigative stop, based on legal cause • High risk stop, refer to Training Bulletin 146 PRE-STOP CONSIDERATIONS • Identify the type of stop and your reason for the stop (i.e. specific violation, legal justification) • Advantageous location for the stop, considerations – Traffic flow – Hostile locations – Lighting – Escape routes • Broadcast information: – Reason for the stop – Location of the stop – Vehicle license number – Basic vehicle description – Number of occupants – Needed backup • Ensure your handheld radio is on and tuned to the proper frequency • Roll down the front windows and unlock the vehicle doors for easy access in an emergency • Be prepared to respond if the suspect stops abruptly at a location advantageous to them • Be ready to exit your unit before you stop • Maintain constant visual contact with the suspect(s) and vehicle • Maintain the proper distance with the suspect vehicle 145 – Vehicle Stops 331 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents INITIATING THE VEHICLE STOP • Activate the overhead emergency lighting equipment and use the siren, horn, and public address system as necessary • Use lighting equipment to your advantage. Focus high-beams, takedown light, and spotlights onto the suspect(s) vehicle to illuminate the interior at nighttime • Position your vehicle at least 1 1/2 to 2 car lengths behind the suspect vehicle, offset to one side, creating an approach corridor to the suspect vehicle. With motor homes, semi-trucks, or larger vehicles, you may not be able to safely offset your vehicle • Turn your wheels to the left • Exit your vehicle prior to the suspect exiting his/her vehicle, taking and maintaining a position of advantage. Be aware of passing traffic • Maintain visual contact of the driver, occupants, vehicle, and surrounding area. Don’t get tunnel vision METHODS OF APPROACH • Driver’s side approach • Passenger side approach • Non-approach, calling the driver back to you Approach Considerations • Perceived officer safety risks • Location of the stop • Driver/occupant actions • Escape route • Location of cover • Attention to passing traffic • Keeping your gun hand free GUIDELINES FOR APPROACH • Prior to making the approach, consider instructing the driver to turn off the motor if they have not done so already. • Know how you will escape and where cover is in the event that the driver or occupants of the vehicle engage you. • If a cover officer is present, consider his/her function and abilities. The cover officer’s purpose is to protect the primary officer from any outside interference, to “cover”, and support the primary officer. Always maintain the advantage. Consider a simultaneous approach, a staggered approach, or a single officer approach using the cover officer as a distraction. • The approach is the most dangerous portion of any car stop. Be prepared to respond to any threat or attack • Have something in your weak hand, a ticket book during the day or a flashlight at night, to toss at the suspect as a distraction if engaged at the window 145 – Vehicle Stops 332 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents CONSIDERATIONS WHEN CONTACTING THE DRIVER • Standing behind the driver offers you: – A position of advantage – Vision into both compartments of the vehicle – Protection from being struck by the door if it’s suddenly opened – Allows you to maintain your balance – Allows for an easy escape, if needed – Forces the driver to turn in his/her seat to observe or attack you • Don’t bend or crouch down to the driver/passenger window: – This places the driver at an advantage, and you at a disadvantage – You are within easy reach of the suspect – You will need to regain your balance prior to movement or effective defense • Instruct the driver to turn the motor off • Obtain the driver's license, registration and insurance information • Confirm the driver's address and compare the picture to the driver WRITING THE CITATION • Write the citation at a location where you can observe the driver and/or vehicle while staying aware of positions of cover if the need should arise • Constantly be aware of traffic conditions and your surroundings • Utilize a cover officer, if necessary VEHICLE SEARCHES • Do not search a vehicle that is still occupied • Utilize a cover officer to watch the vehicle occupants outside of the vehicle while you conduct the vehicle search RE-APPROACHING THE DRIVER/VEHICLE • Do not drop your guard but maintain the same safety procedures as with the initial approach • After the driver signs the citation, return the driver’s license and registration TERMINATION OF THE VEHICLE STOP • Keep the driver and vehicle in view until the vehicle stop is completed • If necessary, assist the vehicle back into traffic NON-CONVENTIONAL VEHICLE STOP 145 – Vehicle Stops 333 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Motorcycles: • Consider their increased acceleration and maneuverability capabilities • Consider the driver’s access to weapons • Consider the helmet being used as a weapon against you Consider calling the drivers of motor homes, campers, vans, semi-trucks and buses back to you due to: • The potential for a larger number of passengers • Reflectorized windows and the inability to view the interior of the vehicle • High-profile vehicles giving the occupants an advantage over an officer on foot • Increased ability to conceal weapons and other people/suspects • Increased ability to maintain cover/concealment CONCLUSION Patrol officers will stop numerous vehicles during their tour of duty. However, due to its repetitive nature, vehicle stops carry the inherent danger of becoming routine. Officers must adhere to basic training principles, eliminate shortcuts, and apply sound tactics while remaining professional and flexible. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 334 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 146 – High-Risk Vehicle Stops REVISED October 2004 HIGH-RISK VEHICLE STOPS INTRODUCTION The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to describe the method and tactics that should be utilized by officers when conducting high-risk vehicle stops. High-risk vehicle stops are made when officers believe that any occupants of a vehicle are a serious threat, armed, or have committed a felony. This is intended as a guideline. Officers should be flexible and adapt their tactics for the specific operational objective. PRE-STOP CONSIDERATIONS Radio Transmission: • Direction of travel/location • Nature of the stop • Suspect vehicle license plate and description • The intended stop location and direction of travel, safe routes to approach • Number of occupants and descriptions, if possible • Knowledge of suspect weapons • Officer's intentions or special instructions to assisting units; i.e., block side traffic, etc. • Requests: Sergeant, K-9, Fox, Code Red, etc. Suspect Actions: • Abrupt stops • Attempts to flee • Stopping at locations of tactical advantage • Ambush Tactical Advantage: • Additional units (increased firepower) • Containment • Tactical resources (i.e. less-lethal, K-9, AR-15, Ballistic Blanket, Helicopter) Stop Location: • Possible escape routes • Cover 146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops 335 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Hostile locations • Citizens • Shooting background (i.e. industrial area vs. residential) • Traffic conditions VEHICLE STOP Unit Readiness: • Unlock doors and lower windows to: − Improve communication − Assisting officer access to vehicle • Unlock shotgun • Position spotlights Unit Positioning (Diagram 1): • Primary unit − Two and one-half car lengths or approximately 45 feet, directly behind the suspect vehicle − Allow enough distance for adequate reaction time and communication • Secondary unit (Arrest Vehicle) − Directly left of the primary unit and slightly angled away from the suspect vehicle − Leave enough room between both units to open the doors • Third unit − Directly right of the primary unit, pointed at the suspect vehicle (SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK) 146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops 336 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents (Diagram -1) Approximately 45 feet Additional unit positioning (Diagram 2): • To the rear of the vehicle stop to: − Allow officers to move up and support the vehicle stop − Block traffic • On parallel streets in case the suspect(s) runs (Diagram – 2) (Perimeter Unit) (High-Risk Stop) (Perimeter Unit) 2 3 1 146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops 337 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Lighting: • Officers should utilize lighting to maximize their tactical advantage, while being cautious of the following: − Back-lighting − Blinding assisting units with the overhead strobe lights − Masking suspect movements with strobe lights OFFICER DEPLOYMENT Incident Command: • The primary unit is in charge of the stop • The primary unit should ensure the following: − Adequate back-up has arrived on scene − Back-up officers are properly deployed before exit commands are given − Minimum arrest team of two officers has been deployed − Necessary resources are deployed (i.e. AR-15, shotgun, less-lethal, K-9, ballistic blanket, helicopter) Officer Positions (Diagram – 3): • Officers should maintain cover positions behind the doors of their vehicles • If the passenger side of units 1 and/or 3 are vacant, assisting officers should fill these positions and cover the suspect vehicle • Arrest team should deploy to the driver’s side of the arrest vehicle (vehicle 2) Diagram - 3 Arrest Team 2 3 1 146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops 338 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Arrest Team Responsibilities: • The arrest team should consist of a minimum of two to three officers • One officer will cover the suspect(s) during the arrest procedure • One officer will handcuff the suspect(s) • A third officer will cover the suspect vehicle during arrest procedures • Additional officers will form at the rear of the arrest vehicle and consider the following: − Be available to take control of individual suspect(s) after being handcuffed − Perform thorough searches of suspect(s) after being handcuffed − Securing suspect(s) in supporting units behind the stop − Be available with EAT resources such as ballistic blanket, less lethal, K-9, etc. Additional Officer Responsibilities: • Once the positions depicted in Diagram 3 are filled, additional assisting officers should consider the following: − Supporting the primary unit with necessary resources − Perimeter − Blocking traffic − Crowd control SUSPECT COMMANDS/CONTROL General Communication Considerations: • Language barriers • Public Address (P.A.) system versus un-amplified voice commands • Closed or open windows on suspect vehicle • Background noise (i.e. traffic, weather conditions, helicopter, etc.) • Microphone feedback Suspect Command Considerations: • Primary officer should give all commands until arrest team takes control of suspect(s) • Give clear and simple commands • Specifically address individual suspects by position in vehicle and/or clothing • Give specific action commands such as: − Suspect(s) place your hands on your head − Driver turn off the vehicle − Driver place the keys on the roof of the vehicle Suspect Removal Considerations: 146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops 339 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Determine which side of vehicle suspect(s) will exit • Order suspect(s) to exit from same side of the vehicle • Order suspect(s) to exit one at a time • Secure each suspect(s) in a police vehicle(s) before giving the next suspect exit commands Suspect Arrest Considerations (Diagram 4): • After exiting, order the suspect to face you and raise his/her hands in the air • Direct the suspect to walk toward the arrest vehicle (Vehicle 2) • Once in front of the arrest vehicle, the arrest team should: − Assume verbal commands − Order the suspect onto their hands and knees − Crawl the suspect(s) to the driver’s side of the arrest vehicle − Order them to a prone position, behind the engine block, well short of the driver’s side door − Handcuff and conduct a cursory search for weapons Securing the Suspect(s): • Once handcuffed: − Walk suspect(s) to rear of arrest vehicle − Ensure a thorough search of the suspect(s) is conducted − Secure suspect(s) into the rear of assisting units (Diagram – 4) 2 3 1 146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops 340 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents SUSPECT VEHICLE CLEARANCE Tactical Considerations (Diagram 5): • Interview in-custody suspect(s) regarding suspect(s) still hiding in suspect vehicle • Consider a “bluff” call out of any additional suspect(s) • Consider the following: − Forming a clearing team − Using the police vehicle and ballistic blanket as cover for the clearing team − Ballistic blanket − K-9 to clear suspect vehicle before clearing team moves up − Pie the suspect vehicle from behind cover (i.e. police vehicle, ballistic blanket) • Once vehicle is cleared, clear the trunk utilizing cover (Diagram – 5) Finding Additional Suspect(s) Considerations: • If the searching team finds an additional suspect(s) they should consider the following: − If possible return to their original stop positions 2 3 1 Ballistic Blanket 146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops 341 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents − Consider the outstanding suspect(s) as barricaded − Utilize K-9, negotiations, SWAT HIGH RISK VAN STOPS Tactical Considerations: • The solid doors may offer better cover to the suspects • The solid doors may deny officers a view of the interior • A van may also contain more suspects than a normal vehicle Unit Positioning for Van Stops: • Basic vehicle deployment should still be used Distance Considerations: • A slightly greater distance between the suspect van and police units (approximately three car lengths), allowing for greater reaction time if the back doors of a panel van are quickly opened in an ambush-type attack SUSPECT COMMANDS/CONTROL FOR VAN STOPS Direct the driver to: • Exit the van with the keys in his/her possession • Direct the driver to keep his/her hands visible and walk to the rear of the van and open the back doors exposing the interior to officers After the rear door are open: • Direct driver as previously described • Direct any additional passengers out of the van in the normal manner HIGH-RISK VEHICLE STOP CONTINGENCY CONSIDERATIONS Officers should constantly evaluate circumstances and be ready to adapt their tactics to respond to: • Officer-involved shooting, suspect(s) down • Reassure the remaining suspects that if they follow your instructions, they will not be harmed • Continue the stop, adapting your tactics to cover the downed suspect(s) and consider using a secondary operational area for any other suspects • Space limitations, such as in a small alley • Leave enough room for the clearing officers to approach and return from the suspect vehicle 146 – High Risk Vehicle Stops 342 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Extreme heat, asphalt too hot to reasonably expect suspects to lie down upon, or flooded due to rain • Direct suspects to kneel facing away from you for handcuffing as opposed to prone • Children/Elderly in the vehicle who can walk and appear not to be a threat • Direct them to an officer on the outer edge of the stop, keeping them out of the field of fire • A center console or other objects that a subject cannot climb over • Have the subject exit from the right side FIELD SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES • Respond to the high-risk vehicle stop location, supervise the stop and take command, if needed • Supervisors should not assume assisting officer responsibilities • Communicate with the primary officer. Assist in coordinating movements and assigning responsibilities. Anticipate the needs of the primary officer and other officers directly involved • If the affected area is a crime scene, secure as needed and maintain integrity • Beware of public perceptions and misperceptions regarding your actions. Use the incident as a positive public relations tool by explaining what occurred to witnesses and onlookers • DEBRIEF, prepare for the next similar incident. Objectively review the incident with participants and offer constructive criticism in an attempt to improve performance, teamwork, and officer safety CONCLUSION High-risk vehicle stops require coordination, cooperation, flexibility, and practice. Field officers and supervisors should review these techniques and regularly practice them together. This will allow maximum effectiveness and minimize risks in actual high-risk stops in the future. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 343 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 147 – One Officer Patrol Unit REVISED January 2003 ONE OFFICER PATROL UNIT INTRODUCTION Working a one-officer unit requires that an officer learn to exercise a large degree of self- reliance, to be aware of personal limitations and to pay greater attention to detail. Immediate help is not sitting next to you in the form of a partner. Casual factors that have resulted in injury or death to police officers working alone, include, but are not limited to: • Failure to request back-up when required • Failure to safeguard officer's own weapon • One officer foot pursuit, particularly into dark, secluded or hostile areas, crowds • Underestimating the suspect • Overestimating yourself PREPARATION TECHNIQUES Mental Preparation - Law enforcement requires planning and preparation. Mental preparation is important for all officers, particularly those working marked one-officer units. Prior to logging on, inspect your equipment: • Your weapon; is it loaded and operational? • Your back-up weapon • Handcuffs • Keys • Vest and leather Planning - An important part of mental preparation is planning. During the Academy, training officers detailed the significance of planning in relation to officer safety. When working with a partner scenarios and options can be discussed and plans verbalized. Now that you are working a one-officer unit, do you still prepare mental plans? Many officers in the field rely on experience, which works in most daily scenarios, but consider the "non-routine" problems. Whatever the situation, plan ahead for an alternative course of action. Ex-convicts and criminals plan every day. They are counting on predictability. Plan what you will do regardless of the scenario. When the pressure is on, people subconsciously resort to training and prior mental preparation. 147 – One Officer Patrol 344 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Technique - Knowledge of technique is useless without proper execution. Be familiar with the techniques that you rely on and continually use: • Drawing your weapon while standing, sitting, walking, running, lying down etc. • Returning your weapon to the holster without looking • Loading the shotgun without looking • Drawing your baton, your strikes • Drawing your back-up weapon • Searching and handcuffing Vehicle Preparation - is as important as mental and physical preparation. The following are suggestions for preparing the vehicle and personal equipment: • Lock three doors - This will keep unwanted individuals from getting in your vehicle and obtaining your equipment • Passenger window - Roll it down four or five inches to allow you access to unlock your passenger door for protection during traffic stops • Spotlights - Adjust the passenger side spotlight so all that is necessary is to simply turn it on • Kits - Place your kit or briefcase on the passenger floorboard. This will allow you access to ticket books, spare rounds, miscellaneous equipment and paperwork. If your equipment is readily accessible, you will not have to remove your eyes from a suspect to go to the vehicle trunk • Seats - When you check your passenger seat, pre-set the seat belts. Make sure that buckles are easily accessible. It is helpful to extend the strap completely and truck the buckle above the seat. While the majority of prisoners will be seated and belted in the back of a caged vehicle, this step will assist you if for some reason a prisoner must be seated and secured in the passenger seat • Inspect Personal Equipment - Equipment inspections are important to perform before every shift. Consider carrying the following equipment: − Back-up gun − Spare car keys, handcuff and shotgun keys − Two pairs of handcuffs − Extra ammunition − A spare flashlight VEHICLE STOP FACTORS Vehicle stops are covered extensively in Training Bulletin 145, "Vehicle Pullovers," and 146 "High Risk Vehicle Stops," and the safety techniques discussed there apply to single officer units. Additionally, single-officer units need to carefully consider certain specific risk factors before activating the light bar to effect a stop. Assess risk factors by asking the following questions: • Why are you making the stop? (Red light, possible DUI, possible felony invest, etc.) • What danger signs are present? • How many individuals are in the vehicle, are you comfortable you can maintain control over them? Included in this, what type of individuals are in the vehicle, gang members, college students, or, senior citizens? 147 – One Officer Patrol 345 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Where are you, a main street or a back alley? How is the lighting, is it dark or well lit? Are there businesses nearby by or gang or drug locations? • What are the occupants of the vehicle doing? Do they appear nervous or under the influence of alcohol or drugs? • What type of vehicle is it, a sedan, van, pick-up? Can you clearly see all of the occupants or are the windows tinted too dark? Do you feel comfortable approaching the vehicle without a cover officer? • Do you perceive the stop as a low risk stop, or citation only? If these questions are answered to your satisfaction and you make the stop, don't stop assessing factors as the stop progresses. • Are the vehicle occupants cooperative? Do they appear unusually nervous? • Do you observe evidence of criminal activity, drug paraphernalia, weapons, etc? The aforementioned signs are easily observable, particularly to an experienced officer, and there are innumerable other danger signs you may observe. The point is how do these danger signs affect your actions? Some officers will retreat while others will advance. As a one-officer unit, you must be continually aware of potential danger. What may have been routine as a two-officer unit could be hazardous for one-officer. Don't hesitate to ask for back-up if something about the stop makes you uncomfortable. If the traffic stop escalates to a detention for further investigation (e.g., 11550HS, Grand Theft Auto investigation), consider requesting back-up. If back-up is not available and the suspect appears cooperative, detain him/her handcuffed in the passenger seat of your patrol vehicle. Consider removing the patrol unit keys and setting the parking brake. Avoid making multiple suspect arrests without sufficient back-up and control. If you must deal with more than one occupant, control their movements by ordering each individual out of the vehicle, one at a time. If sufficient reasonable suspicion is present, pat down each occupant and handcuff them (you may want to carry flex cuffs). There may be an occasional safety exception, but it is always better to wait for back-up before you begin any type of searching. From the moment you decide to stop a vehicle, maintain constant observation of the driver and occupants until you have completed the stop. Use caution in your approach. Concentrate on what is going on around you and be aware of anything out of the ordinary. Use the driver's rear and side-view mirrors to observe the facial expression of the driver. If he/she displays fear, panic or over interest in what you are doing, use added precautions. Consider retreating back to your patrol vehicle and ordering the driver out. You should always think tactics and have an action plan prior to making the traffic stop. What you do in a critical situation will generally be a reaction to a perceived threat. Training plays an important role in your ability to handle a potentially life threatening encounter. Pedestrian Traffic Stops 147 – One Officer Patrol 346 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Visually scan the pedestrian for weapons prior to your approach • Attempt to approach the pedestrian from the rear • Attempt to keep something between you and the pedestrian to maximize reaction time, if required, until you are reasonably sure it is safe to approach • If the pedestrian's hands are in his/her pockets, direct the pedestrian to face away from you prior to removing their hands from their pockets. At this point consider changing positions to another position of cover. Ask the pedestrian to remove his/her hands from his pockets and hold them out to his/her side so you can maintain a visual on his/her hands • When conducting a warrant check, place the subject in a position of disadvantage (e.g., sitting on the curb near the patrol unit's front tire). • When dealing with multiple subjects consider requesting back up − Watch the subject's hands at all times − Keep the subject's from talking to each other − Allow or keep obstacles between you and the subjects until you need to close the distance − Exercise control of the stop through verbal commands. Do not assume anything For further see Training Bulletin 191, "Hazards of Approaching Suspects, Position and Interview." Communication Skills Most situations can be handled through effective communications. Advising a suspect of your actions while maintaining a professional demeanor will generally result in compliance. Using Tactical Communication Techniques may assist you in generating voluntary compliance. Occasionally, an officer is required to resort to more forceful commands to gain compliance. Command presence, self-confidence and clear and concise instructions will usually convince a suspect that you can manage the situation to conclusion. Every effort should be made to gain the suspect's compliance through verbal direction. However, without compliance, escalation of force may become necessary. • Use of Force - Officers are expected to use that force which is necessary to overcome a suspect's resistance. − The most compromising and dangerous situation that a single officer may become involved in is an incident that requires him/her to use force against a suspect. It is far more dangerous for the officer to engage in a struggle than it is to avoid the confrontation, even if back-up is en route. One on one, the officer has far more to lose than the suspect − Do not believe for a moment that you are fighting with an unarmed suspect. Once you engage in a physical altercation, your weapon becomes your greatest concern. How often do you hear of an officer who was killed with their own gun? 147 – One Officer Patrol 347 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents − If you think the traffic stop you are involved in may lead to a fight, back off and immediately request back-up or assistance. Maintain your distance from the suspect. If a confrontation escalates to a struggle, use every bit of force necessary to stop the suspect's attack. Be quick and forceful − Keep in mind that deadly force will be justified if the suspect: • Uses or attempts to use deadly force against you • Attempts to take your weapon • Repeatedly attacks you, and even if unarmed, you fear they will overpower and kill you Hot Calls/Crimes in Progress • Do not take independent action, wait for back-up • Be aware of available resources; k-9 units, motors, helicopter, plain cars and the hostage negotiation team • Drive safely and slow down, if you do not get there, you cannot help anyone • Remember the five "C's": Command, Control, Contain, Communication and Coordinate • The most important factor to remember in handling hot calls or crimes in progress, is to remain calm. Remaining calm will enable you to think and communicate clearly • As the handling unit, take control and coordinate assisting units. As an assisting unit, give an estimated time of arrival to allow the handling unit to assess the potential for danger. If you are required to move your location due to a tactical situation advise the handling unit • Remember, maintain discipline and continually evaluate each situation for changes requiring a different course of action REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 348 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 148 – Parking Citation Books REVISED January 2002 PARKING CITATION BOOKS Parking citations are an integral part of controlling the manner and time in which vehicles are parked in the City of Long Beach. The owner of a vehicle who has not paid their parking citations may not register their vehicle until all citations are paid. When filling out parking citations, it is extremely important to write the information clearly, accurately, and legibly. Parking Enforcement Section personnel must enter parking citation information into the computer and if the citation is illegible, the wrong registered owner may have a lien placed against their vehicle license plate at DMV and the City could be held liable. The instructions for filling out parking citations properly are as follows: • Date: Use the current date when issuing the citation • Time: Use military time only (e.g. 0900, 1300, etc.) • DMV: This is the filing code used by the Department of Motor Vehicles in checking for registration classification. Use one letter only, e.g. A= Automobile, C= Commercial, M= Motorcycle, L= Environmental, etc. Legibility Instructions • Print using all capital letters and black ink. Use heavy pressure so all copies are legible • Be careful in recording the date, DMV code, vehicle license, vehicle make, violation, and ID fields • Minor discrepancies can be corrected by lining out the error and inserting the correction. Do not write over the erroneous information • Be aware of problem characters and take extra care to ensure they are legible: – U, V, Y - Use square bottom 'U' to distinguish them from V's. Put a tail on Y's so they don't look like V's – C, O, 0, L, Q - Don't close your C's. Enter a slash across the number 0 to distinguish it from the letter O. Make L's with straight lines so they don't look like C's. Make Q's with a small tail so they don't look like the number 0 or the letter O – Z, 2, 7 - Enter a horizontal mark through the middle of the Z to distinguish it from the number 2. A number 7 should not be written with a horizontal mark through the middle – 5, S, - To distinguish a number 5 from an S, it is very important the number 5 is formed using two straight lines at a right angle – 1, I, J, L - Print the number one and the letters I, J and L carefully so they are not confused 148 – Parking Citation Books 349 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Registration File Codes A = Regular automobiles, historical and classical vehicles, members of the legislature and disabled persons B = Boats C = Commercial - pickups, vans, etc. E = Exempt - both automobiles and motorcycles F = Off highway vehicles H = Ham operator plates L = Environmental (personalized) plates M = Motorcycles P = Commercial trailers V = VIN and identification numbers T = Trailers, horseless carriages, press photographers X = Out of State license plates - all types of vehicles Vehicle Make Alfa Romeo ALFA American Motors AMC Audi AUDI BMW BMW Buick BUICK Cadillac CADI Chevrolet CHEV Chrysler CHRYS Citroen CITRON Datsun DATS Dodge DODGE Renault RENAU Rolls Royce ROL Saab SAAB Subaru SUBA Toyota TOYT Triumph TRIU Volkswagen VOLK Volvo VOLVO Fine Schedule Always take care to clearly and correctly record the proper bail or fine amount for the violation. Make sure your ticket book is up to date as fines change periodically. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 350 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 149 – Child Abuse REVISED September 2022 CHILD ABUSE INTRODUCTION The Child Abuse and Neglect Reporting Act was enacted to protect children from abuse and neglect. A child abuse investigation focuses on the criminal investigation and the physical and psychological needs of the child to prevent further harm. REPORTING One main goal of reporting child abuse is to ensure the child’s safety and well-being. The law requires that a mandated reporter ensure a report is generated whenever they, in their professional capacity or within the scope of their employment, have knowledge or observe a child whom the mandated reporter knows or reasonably suspects has been the victim of child abuse or neglect (CPC § 11165.7(a)). A mandated reporter who fails to report suspected or actual child abuse or neglect is guilty of a misdemeanor and may be found civilly liable for damages. Persons legally required to report child abuse have immunity from criminal or civil liability for reporting as required (CPC § 11172(a)). Officers should contact the Department of Children and Family Services (DCFS) to report an incident of child abuse within 36 hours (CPC § 11166). Officers should take a child abuse report regardless of jurisdiction unless the call can be immediately transferred to the agency with proper jurisdiction (CPC § 11165.9). If an officer has already contacted the family, it is the Department’s practice for the officer to take the report regardless of the ability to transfer the call to the proper jurisdiction immediately. It takes a lot of courage to disclose child abuse, and officers should make every attempt to investigate the incident. Re-directing victims and families of child abuse to report to another jurisdiction may discourage them from following through with the reporting. This may also allow the victim(s) to remain in the dangerous environment, where the abuse is likely to continue. Immediate intervention by law enforcement can ensure safety for the victim(s) of child abuse and apprehension of the suspect(s). WHAT IS CHILD ABUSE? California law defines child abuse as a physical injury inflicted by other than accidental means on a child by another person. It includes emotional abuse, sexual abuse, neglect, or abuse in or out of home care. Child abuse does not include a mutual fight between minors, reasonable and necessary force used by a peace officer, or spanking that is reasonable, age-appropriate, and does not expose the child to risk of serious injury. For further refer to CPC § 11165.6 and WIC § 300. 149 – Child Abuse 351 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Child abuse is categorized as sexual abuse, physical abuse, psychological abuse, or neglect. Sexual Abuse Child Sexual abuse offenders are frequently related to or known to the victim. Family members may not report sex crimes because of personal shame, misguided loyalty, fear of public exposure, embarrassment, or outright guilt. The child may not report the abuse to anyone because they are naively obedient, fear retaliation, do not want to hurt the family, or are unaware that an offense has been committed. Interviewing a victim of sexual abuse is a difficult task that calls for sensitivity and patience from the officer. A child’s sense of time is gained gradually as they mature and experience life. Depending on their age, a victim may have difficulty with dates and times. As you interview a child, try to find references they can relate to, such as school hours, holidays, special occasions, or parents’ working hours. These cases may represent long periods of chronic sexual abuse between the suspect and child. The child may maintain genuine affection for the offender, although they have negative feelings about the sex acts. A health care providers cannot disclose sexual assault allegations to a minor’s parents if they are 12 years old or older (CFC § 6927, HS §§123115(a)(1)). Victims of sexual assault have a right to confidentiality and law enforcement cannot disclose a person was a victim of sexual assault without their consent (CPC § 293). If a minor victim does not want their parent to be notified of a sexual assault or specific details of the investigation, officers should use discretion when determining if it is appropriate to inform the parents and err on the side of confidentiality. When making this decision, an officer should consider a victim’s safety and risk of being re-victimized. Physical Abuse Physically abused children may display characteristic injuries or traits that can act as indicators for an officer who suspects child abuse or neglect. However, the fact that a child has characteristic injuries does not necessarily mean they have been abused. Officers should familiarize themselves with the below-listed characteristics and traits when investigating child abuse, although it is not all-inclusive: • History of repeated injuries and/or delay in seeking treatment • An injury the parent cannot explain or discrepancies in the explanation of the injury • A child who has more than one injury or has injuries in various stages of healing • Bruises, especially widespread bruising • When children fall or collide with objects, bruising may occur on the front of the body or head where the bone is close to the surface. Children are less likely to have bruising injuries to soft tissue areas like the abdomen, throat, buttock, and thighs • Any fracture in a child under the age of one should be further investigated. • Fractures of the upper leg bones (seldom accidental in young children) 149 – Child Abuse 352 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Psychological Abuse All forms of child abuse involve psychological abuse. However, psychological abuse can occur by itself. The victim may be subjected to humiliating forms of discipline or ridiculed in front of friends, neighbors, or relatives. Unless the parent's behavior becomes socially unacceptable, a child experiencing psychological abuse may be overlooked. Law enforcement must rely on teachers, neighbors, and cooperative relatives to perform a thorough investigation. Neglect Lack of supervision is a common form of neglect. No specific age permits a child to be left without parental supervision. However, at the age of fourteen, a child is generally capable of staying alone temporarily. The investigating officer should always consider the number of children left alone when deciding. Questions like, “Can the oldest child care for the youngest?” should be considered. A decision regarding lack of supervision is always one of judgment. Unfit homes must be evaluated based on the totality of the circumstances. An untidy home may or may not constitute an unsuitable home. An officer should consider the severity of the situation and be mindful that a single aggravated condition listed below may or may not constitute neglect. However, the combination of conditions listed below strongly indicates neglect. • Cleanliness of the home - Infested with cockroaches, rats, spiders, or other vermin - Dirty or urine-soaked bedding - Human or animal feces present - Little food or spoiled food accessible to the children • Utilities in the home o Inadequate heating, electricity, or water o Plumbing does not work, i.e., sink, tub, or toilet clogged or inoperable o Unvented heaters o Bare electrical wires o Exits from the home are blocked, creating a fire hazard • Other dangerous conditions o Guns, knives, razor blades, drugs, drug paraphernalia, locks on the outside of bedroom/closet doors, or poisons are readily accessible to the children PROCEDURES If a child is hospitalized due to abuse, officers should contact the DCFS and advise them of the situation. If warranted, the DCFS will ensure the child is not placed back into the care and custody of an abuser. When called upon to investigate suspected child abuse, the officer should: • Arrange emergency medical treatment, if needed • If the child's safety is endangered, take them into protective custody • Notify the Child Abuse Detail if it meets the CART criteria per LBPD manual § 8.7.9.1 • If the child is capable, interview them away from their parents 149 – Child Abuse 353 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Examine the child for injuries - Remove clothing and check the body for old or new injuries, have a witness present during this exam - Take overall pictures of the child and their injuries. The officer should activate their Body Worn Camera (BWC) in unfit homes and take photographs. Photographs are often the most critical evidence in these cases. • Take photographs of the location and circumstances • Notify the Department of Children and Family Services at 1-800-540-4000 (Penal Code §11166(k)), unless abuse occurred at a licensed facility (E.g., Daycare/Preschool), then notify the California Department of Social Services (CDSS) Community Care Licensing at 1-844-538-8766 (Penal Code §11666.1) • File the appropriate crime reports and upload photographic evidence. Include complete statements from the victim, suspects, witnesses, and a detailed description of injuries and living conditions. The officer should describe unusual odors, unusual or excessive noises, inoperable appliances, lack of food, running water or other utilities, and any other factors that led them to believe child abuse or neglect occurred. CONCLUSION The primary purpose of a child abuse investigation is to protect the child. The secondary purpose is juvenile/family court action and possible criminal prosecution. A thorough initial investigation can ensure that a child is protected and/or removed from a dangerous situation and that the appropriate resources are provided for the child and family. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 354 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 150 – Flares and Flare Patterns REVISED April 2002 FLARES AND FLARE PATTERNS Flares are used to warn approaching traffic of a hazard in the roadway. The hazard may warrant the re-routing, diverting or stopping of highway traffic. The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to provide guidelines for the safe, correct use of flares. LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS Vehicle Code §2818 - “It is unlawful to traverse a flare pattern, cone pattern, or combination thereof, provided for the regulation of traffic, or provided in any situation where public safety personnel are engaged in traffic control or emergency scene management.” To successfully prosecute violators of this section, you will be required to prove that your flare pattern was understandable. A flare pattern that creates more hazards, rather than solving one, may open the Department up to civil liability. After voluntary assumption of a duty, one is liable if his/her failure to exercise due care increases the risk of harm, or the harm is suffered because of the other’s reliance upon the undertaking. HAZARDS • Do not place flares near combustible material (gas, oil, etc.) or in hazardous environmental conditions (grass fields, high winds) • Do not breathe flare fumes • Do not place flares where fumes may drift toward incapacitated individuals • Do not hold flares in such a way that when striking, (lighting) the splattering material from the flare may come in contact with skin or clothing • Do not place flares with other environmental concerns (rain spattering, Botts dots – a.k.a., round non-reflective raised pavement markers) • Do not channel vehicles into additional hazards Lighting Flares • Remove cap to expose strike plate • Hold at arm’s length • Contact and hold flare against strike plate • Turn face away from strike area • STRIKE FLARE AWAY FROM YOUR BODY • Do not hold flare longer than ten seconds 150 – Flares and Flare Patterns 355 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Extinguishing Flares • Pick up at non-burning end only if at least three inches remain • Tap/scrape the side of the burning end against pavement until extinguished • Do not throw (or kick) lit flare • Properly dispose of all unburned ends, do not leave on the street APPROPRIATE SITUATIONS FOR FLARE USE • Hazard expected to last sufficient time to warrant taking the time to place flares • Nighttime hazards on the shoulder or side of the road • Obstruction in a traffic lane (night or day) Flare Placement for Channeling Traffic • Give traffic advance notice, and a safe merge channel • The maximum spacing between channeling devices in a taper, should be equal in feet to the speed limit • Under emergency conditions, give as much warning as possible. Increase to these standards (below) as soon as sufficient resources are available Approach Speed (MPH) Taper Length (feet) Number of Cones/flares for taper Cone/flare spacing along taper (feet) 25 125 6 25 30 180 7 30 35 245 8 35 40 320 9 40 45 540 13 45 50 600 13 50 55 1000 21 50 • Cones may be used as a substitute for flares in daytime situations • Illuminated cones may be used as a substitute for flares in nighttime situations • Barricades may be used for long term situations FLARE PATTERNS Good traffic direction dictates that flare patterns be laid out in such a manner that motorists approaching, even at high speed, can instantly determine what is expected and react appropriately. For example, flares closely spaced in a straight line across a highway perpendicular to the centerline obviously indicate a closed highway. Closely spaced flares in a line starting at the left side of a lane and gradually moving right are obviously intended to channel traffic to the right. Flares scattered randomly across the highway may indicate a hazard, but they will not control traffic flow and may add to the confusion. To block a street completely: 150 – Flares and Flare Patterns 356 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Set flares across the entire width of the street well ahead of the hazard. If possible, block the street just after an intersection so traffic can be diverted onto the cross street with minimum confusion • Set two warning flares on each white line. Set the first warning flare 75 to 100 feet before the blockading flares to warn approaching drivers of the blockade and a second warning flare approximately 180 feet from blockade. Place blockading flares across the street a maximum of 15 feet (5 paces) apart. To direct traffic from one lane to another: • Set flares so oncoming traffic can detect and react to the new lane of traffic set by the flare pattern • Flares should be placed every ten yards and extend up the roadway far enough to give drivers ample time to adjust their speed and turn to maneuver in traffic. On Street or Freeway Emergency • Approach the emergency • Park the police vehicle between emergency and oncoming traffic if possible • Use all emergency lights on police vehicle including high beams • Determine the nature of the emergency • Place flares according to the hazards present (gasoline, fumes, etc) • If no unusual hazards or conditions exist, place the nearest flare approximately 100 feet (30 paces) behind the police vehicle Place additional flares approximately 15 yards (15 paces) apart to divert traffic. • Place 4 flares 15 yards (15 paces) apart parallel with traffic lane towards oncoming traffic. Place these flares out to the side of the emergency to allow a working area to the side of the emergency Blockading flares approx. 15' apart 1st warning flare 75-100' from blockade 2nd warning flare 180' from blockade 150 – Flares and Flare Patterns 357 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Place other flares tapering toward lane to be diverted. Place one flare for each 10 mph (or fraction thereof) of the speed limit of roadway at intervals of 15 yards (15 paces) • Flares burn for a duration of 15 minutes. If the flare pattern is to be used for a longer period of time, place a second flare near the end and over the top of the first. This will ignite the second flare as the first flare burns out. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau Emergency Police Vehicle 30 paces First four flares 15 yards (15 paces) 15 yards (15 paces) 30 Paces 358 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 151 – Licensed Health Facilities REVISED January 2002 LICENSED HEALTH FACILITIES Licensed health facilities include acute general hospitals, psychiatric facilities, nursing homes, board and care homes, convalescent centers and clinics. These facilities are licensed and regulated by the Health Facilities Division of the Los Angeles County Health Department. The Health Facilities Division is charged with the responsibility of insuring that patients are not abused or neglected and that the facilities are maintained and operated in a safe and clean manner in conformity with County regulations. The Health Facilities Division has the authority to cite violators or initiate criminal action against the facility operators and/or individual members of the staff. These actions by the Health Facilities Division may result in the closure of the facility and the possible imprisonment of the operators or staff members. When officers are called to licensed health facilities they may be required to investigate crimes, make arrests, or investigate the disappearance of a patient. This Training Bulletin will inform officers of their obligations and the action to be taken when criminal actions or other violations in licensed health facilities are encountered. Patients in licensed health facilities occasionally have been the victims of crimes. Officers encountering criminal activity in licensed health facilities are to take appropriate enforcement action. Enforcement by the Department is not altered merely because a crime occurred in a licensed health facility. UNSAFE OR UNSANITARY CONDITIONS Generally, it is not necessary for officers to be aware of the specific Health and Safety Code sections violated. For purposes of telephonic notification to the Long Beach Health Department (562 570-4132) an unsafe or unsanitary condition in the opinion of the observing officer usually is sufficient. Examples of these conditions are: rotting food, insects, rodents, fecal matter on floors or patients, hanging plaster and broken glass. An occurrence with which most officers are familiar is the lost adult. The ability of an adult to wander away from a facility may indicate that the facility does not exercise the proper supervision over its patients. This lack of supervision may place the patients in unsafe circumstances. Notification of these conditions should be made to the Health Department. The reporting of unsafe and unsanitary conditions should definitely be made in cases where there is neglect or mismanagement of the elderly or mentally ill. There are cases where nursing homes and board and care facilities may not keep accurate records, or may not keep track of patient's medical records. There are also cases where there are 151 – Licensed Health Facilities 359 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents chronic elopements from certain facilities. It is recommended that notifications to Adult Protective Services be made in cases involving the elderly. For cases involving board and care facilities serving the mentally ill, notify the County Department of Mental Health. Adult Protective Services can be reached at 1-(800) 992-1600 or (213) 738-2600 and the Department of Mental Health at 1-(800) 854-7771. NOTIFICATION TO HEALTH DEPARTMENT An officer who receives information that a person has been physically abused in a health facility shall, in addition to filing the appropriate crime report, telephonically notify the Long Beach Health Department, (562) 570-4132, as soon as practicable. In order for the Health Department to cite violators, revoke licenses, or initiate criminal prosecutions, the Department must be informed of the violations or criminal activity. For this reason and to aid in the protection of those unable to protect themselves, officers are to notify the Health Department of incidents where facility personnel are arrested, or a police report is taken as a result of being called to a health facility. Additionally, patient abuse or neglect, and unsafe or unsanitary conditions are to be reported to the Department. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 360 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 152 – DV Restraining Orders REVISED November 2021 DOMESTIC VIOLENCE RESTRAINING ORDERS INTRODUCTION The law provides for several types of restraining orders designed to protect victims of domestic violence, their children and family members. These orders are issued to stop a batterer from having contact, which includes, assaulting, threatening, and harassing the victim and those living with the victim. Protective orders do not provide a barrier of protection for victims; however, they give peace officers the ability to act if an order is violated. DOMESTIC VIOLENCE ORDERS Emergency Protective Order (EPO) – An EPO is an order issued by a judicial officer under Family Code §§ 6250 and 6241. EPOs restrict a restrained person from specified activities. A victim of domestic violence may need short-term, immediate protection after a batterer has been arrested or left a residence/location. An EPO is available 24 hours a day, even when court is in session, and can only be obtained by a peace officer. For further on how to obtain an EPO see TB 153 Emergency Protective Orders. Domestic Violence Temporary Restraining Order (DV TRO) • TRO – A victim in a civil action may request, directly with the courts, an ex parte restraining order. The most frequently obtained ex parte restraining order is a DV TRO. This order, issued by Civil Court, is a temporary restraining order (TRO) issued without prior notice or hearing, and is usually valid until an Order to Show Cause (OSC) hearing. • OSC – An OSC is a hearing, held to determine if an ex parte TRO is justified and meets the requirements for issuance of an Order After Hearing (OAH). • OAH – An OAH is the restraining order issued at the OSC hearing and is enforceable up to three years. Criminal Protective Order (CPO) - A criminal protective order is an order requested by the District Attorney or City Prosecutor, issued by the criminal court as a part of a criminal case, to prevent violence or intimidation by the defendant. These orders are issued to protect a victim or witness and are effective for the duration of criminal proceedings, which may include any sentence or probation issued to the defendant. Judges may order the defendant to stay away from the victim or witness in the criminal proceeding, however an order to stay away may not be a part of a CPO; therefore, officers should read the terms of the order closely to determine if a violation exists. 152 – DV Restraining Order 361 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents OTHER RESTRAINING ORDERS While domestic violence restraining orders are the most common orders presented to officers, there are other orders available. The following are other non-domestic violence restraining orders that officers may encounter: Family Law Act (FLA) Restraining Order - An FLA restraining order is an order issued during divorce or custody proceedings. Uniform Parentage Act (UPA) Restraining Order - A UPA restraining order may be issued to unmarried parents with a child in common. Civil Harassment Restraining Order and Injunction – A civil harassment restraining order is an order requested by one person (i.e., neighbor vs. neighbor) to prevent another person from a specific type of behavior or harassment. CONFIRMATION OF RESTRAINING ORDERS Whenever an individual advises an officer of the existence of a restraining order, officers need to verify the following: • The order is valid, • The order has been served, and • The terms and conditions of the order. The status of an order can be verified in the following ways: • The order is on file with the Records Division, • The order is in CARPOS, or • The protected person has a valid copy of the order. The following can be used to check the validity of the order: - A court stamp, - A case control number, - The expiration date, - The names of the protected and restrained parties, - The judge’s signature, - Proof of service. PROOF OF SERVICE A Proof of Service is a document signed under penalty of perjury that an adult who is not a party to the action has personally served a copy of the order to the individual listed as the restrained person. In order to enforce an order, officers need to confirm proof of service. Proof of service may be confirmed by one of the following: • The restraining order with proof of service is on file with our department, • The protected party presents a valid copy of the order with proof of service, • The order shows as issued and served in CARPOS. 152 – DV Restraining Order 362 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents When officers cannot verify proof of service or prior knowledge of the order by the restrained party, ensure the following is completed: • Inform the restrained party of the terms of the order, • Admonish the restrained party of the order, that the suspect is now on notice and any violation of the order will result in arrest, • Make an arrest if the restrained party continues to violate the order, • Document the officer’s name, date, and time of service, • Complete a Proof of Service form and submit it to the Records Division for entry into CARPOS. ARREST CHARGES FOR RESTRAINING ORDER VIOLATIONS Arrest and booking charges for a restraining order fall under the following California Penal Code Sections: • 273.6(a) Any intentional and knowing violation of a protective order is a misdemeanor. • 273.6 (d) A subsequent conviction for a violation of an order, occurring within seven years of a prior conviction for a violation of an order and involving an act of violence or “a credible threat” of violence. • 166 and §166(c)(1) A willful and knowing violation of a protective order or stay-away court order shall constitute contempt of court, a misdemeanor. Use this section for any Criminal Protective Order (CPO). OUT OF STATE ORDERS Certification by an out-of-state court is not necessary to enforce an out-of-state order. Out-of-state protective and restraining orders are valid and fully enforceable if an officer can confirm the following on a copy of the out-of-state order: • Court in which it was issued, • Judge’s signature, • Case number and expiration date, • Names of protected and restrained parties, • Listed prohibited actions, • Proof of service, shown either by the order indicating that the restrained person was present in court or a completed proof of service form. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 363 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 154 – DMV Re-Examination REVISED April 2001 DMV RE-EXAMINATION OF LICENSED DRIVERS The Department of Motor Vehicles may re-examine drivers who have been brought to their attention. Medical reasons are the primary cause for re-examination. Patrol officers and Accident Investigation Detail (AID) investigators assigned to Field Support Division (FSD) have been the primary sources of information on drivers who appear unable to drive competently. The Department of Motor Vehicles has developed a form to assist police personnel in reporting a driver who, in the officer’s opinion, should be re-examined. The forms may be obtained from AID. Completed forms shall be forwarded to the AID office. It shall be the responsibility of the Accident Investigation Detail to forward the form to the Department of Motor Vehicles El Segundo Office: 390 N. Sepulveda 2075, El Segundo, CA 90245. The following conditions must be present when considering completing a re-examine form: • The driver must have committed a violation of §'s 21000 through 23336 of the California Vehicle Code. The driver does not have to be cited or arrested for one of these sections • The driver must show evidence of incapacity. Incapacity is defined as a serious physical injury or illness, mental impairment, or disorientation which leads the officer to "reasonably believe" that a clear or potential danger or risk of injury to that person or others exists if allowed to continue driving • The incapacity must immediately affect driving safety Check the appropriate box on the form PRIORITY RE-EXAMINATION Serve the notice to the driver by giving them the pink copy at the time of the contract. The driver does not need to sign the form. Direct the driver to follow the instructions listed on the reverse of the form. REGULAR RE-EXAMINATION Can be completed at a later time. The completed form with all copies attached should be submitted to AID. 154 – DMV Re-Exam 364 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Examples of drivers who may require re-examination include: • A motorist who commits a number of violations that appear unintentional, has not been drinking, and has no explanation for his/her actions. • A motorist who appears not to have the faculties to safely control his/her vehicle INSTRUCTIONS FOR DRIVER The officer should tell the driver to: • Read the printed information on the form • Immediately telephone a Driver Safety Office listed on the back of the form for an appointment • Bring their copy of the form to a Driver Safety Office within five (5) work days and complete a re-examination or be suspended from driving REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 365 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 155 – Child Abductions REVISED October 2022 CHILD ABDUCTIONS AND ATTEMPTED CHILD ABDUCTIONS INTRODUCTION The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to provide a framework for competent, productive, and thorough child abduction or attempted child abduction investigations. FIRST RESPONDER The following checklist provides recommended actions, considerations, and activities for first responding officer(s): • Turn on body-worn camera(s) • Interview the reporting party • Interview the parent(s)/guardian(s) - Verify child custody status - Identify the child’s zone of safety. This refers to the geographical area the parents and child are comfortable with, for the child’s age and developmental stage. - Inquire if the child has access to the Internet and evaluate its role in the disappearance (e.g., Instagram, Snap Chat, social media accounts, e-mail, etc.) - Ascertain if the child has a cellular telephone or other electronic communication devices and if the location of the device is known. • Determine who was the last person to see the child and when/where they saw them - Interview the individual(s) who had the last contact with the child • Obtain a detailed description of the missing child, abductor, and any vehicle(s) used - Provide a detailed description to the Communications Center for broadcast and notification to surrounding agencies • Identify the circumstances of the disappearance - Make an initial determination of the type of incident (i.e., non-family abduction, family abduction, endangered runaway, lost, injured, or otherwise missing) • Secure the scene and area of the child’s home - Conduct an immediate, thorough, and legal search of the missing child’s home even if the child was reported missing from a different location ▪ Try to obtain a signed consent to search. If signed consent cannot be obtained, determine whether exigent circumstances exist or evaluate the need for a search warrant. ▪ Secure evidentiary items (including the child’s personal articles such as a hairbrush, diary, photographs, and items with the child’s fingerprints, footprints, or teeth impressions) ▪ Preserve items which may be used to locate and/or identify the child. 155 – Child Abductions 366 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents ▪ Evaluate the contents and appearance of the child’s room/residence; if possible, utilize your BWC and/or photograph these areas and any items of importance ▪ Determine if any of the child’s items are missing • Obtain a recent photograph of the missing child and/or the abductor • Determine the need for additional responding personnel - Brief and update all assisting personnel • Extend the search to surrounding areas, including vehicles and other places of concealment - Treat areas of interest as potential crime scenes - Identify surveillance or security cameras in the vicinity that may have captured footage of the incident • Interview other family members, neighbors, friends, and associates of the child/family separately. The following questions may help develop leads: - When and where did you last see the child? - Did the child mention being approached by anyone? - Does the child use chat apps on their cellphone? - What are the child’s social networking accounts, usernames, and passwords? - Has the child mentioned meeting anyone online? - What is your relationship to the child and/or abductor? - What do you think happened to the child? • Review sex-offender registry (Megan’s Law) to determine if individuals designated as sexual predators live, work, or might otherwise be associated with the area of the child’s disappearance. Additionally, consider calling in the on-call Homicide, Sexual Abuse Response Team (SART), and/or Child Abuse Response Team (CART) detective to review past lewd conduct in public reports and annoying or molesting a child reports in the abduction area. • Ensure information regarding the missing child is immediately entered into the National Crime Information Center’s (NCIC) Missing Person File, and any information about a suspected abductor is entered into the NCIC Wanted Person File. Carefully review NCIC categories before entering the case and be sure to use the Child Abduction flag whenever possible. • Ensure all required notifications are made to the appropriate detective detail based on the nature of the investigation (E.g., Homicide, Domestic Violence, Sex Crimes, Robbery, etc.) FIELD INVESTIGATOR • Obtain briefing from first responder and evaluate all available information and evidence collected - Verify the accuracy of all descriptive information, recent history of family dynamics, and other details developed during the preliminary investigation - Correct and investigate conflicting information and inconsistencies by witnesses and other individuals • Ensure the child’s latest medical records, dental records, and items suitable for DNA collection are secured • Utilize California Sex and Arson Registry (CSAR) database to investigate potential persons of interest in the area 155 – Child Abductions 367 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Conduct a criminal history background check on all principal suspects, persons of interest, witnesses, and participants in the investigation • In collaboration with the Press Information Officer (PIO), establish a phone hotline for receipt of tips and leads. Investigator can consider establishing an email address or other methods of receiving electronic leads. • Establish a system to track and prioritize leads to ensure each lead is reviewed and followed up. Consider support from the National Center for Missing and Exploited Children (NCMEC) for this role. • Continue to keep the Communications Center apprised of developing information for broadcast updates • Prepare a flyer/bulletin with the child/abductor’s photograph and descriptive information. Coordinate with Missing Persons personnel in conjunction with NCMEC and the PIO to distribute flyer in appropriate geographic regions. SUPERVISOR • Determine if the circumstances of the child’s disappearance meet the protocol in place for activation of an AMBER Alert and/or other immediate community notification • Determine if additional personnel are needed to assist in the investigation • Establish a command post away from the child’s residence and use the Incident Command System components to effectively run the operation - Assign a scribe to keep track of the incident, timeline, and to document efforts, including all places searched - Ensure coordination/cooperation among all law enforcement personnel involved in the investigation and search effort • Determine if additional assistance is necessary from: - State Missing Children’s Clearinghouse - FBI - Specialized Units - Surrounding agencies - NCMEC’s Project ALERT/Team Adam • Ensure all the required resources, equipment, and assistance necessary to conduct an efficient investigation have been requested and expedite their availability • Ensure all required department and other agency notifications are made, including NCMEC • Be available to make any decisions or determinations as they develop • Through the Press Information Officer (PIO), consider disseminating information appropriately to the public through media, television, and newspapers AMBER ALERTS AMBER Alert is a program managed by the California Highway Patrol that empowers law enforcement, the media, and the public to combat abduction by sending out immediate information that aids in a child's safe recovery. The AMBER Alert system broadcasts information to the public via radio, television, Internet, highway information signs, and cell phone networks to aid law enforcement in locating abducted children. Refer to the AMBER Alert policy section for further (Manual Section 8.2.13.9). 155 – Child Abductions 368 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents NATIONAL CENTER FOR MISSING AND EXPLOITED CHILDREN (NCMEC) The United States Congress created NCMEC as a non-profit entity to assist law enforcement in investigating cases involving missing and exploited children. NCMEC operates 24 hours a day with trained professionals, including current and retired law enforcement, and agents from all branches of the federal government who are subject matter experts in abduction investigations. Federal law requires notification to NCMEC on all child abductions. NCMEC has access to an extensive range of public and federal data systems. CONCLUSION Non-family child abduction cases do not occur with great frequency. However, statistics show that immediate and proper investigative steps enhance a successful recovery. RESOURCE The Investigative Checklist for First Responders may be printed and used as a guide when investigating missing or abducted children. Officers are not required to complete or submit this form at the conclusion of their investigation. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 369 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 156 Sexual Assault Investigations Part 1 REVISED March 2021 SEXUAL ASSAULT INVESTIGATIONS PART 1 INTRODUCTION This training bulletin educates officers on the psychology and techniques available to encourage victims to report sexual assault. These techniques may improve apprehension and conviction of offenders, while providing support and compassion to victims. BARRIERS TO PROSECUTION The trauma suffered by a sexual assault victim may be so severe that it creates a mental block, and a victim may be unable to recall details of the incident. Feelings of shame, guilt, fear, or degradation may make a victim unwilling to share the details of the assault. The victim may also be afraid to confront the assailant in court. We may hear people say that the victim brought about their own sexual assault by the company they keep, the places they frequent, the clothes they wear, or the way they walk or speak. Sexual assault victims may be aware of these attitudes which can contribute to their unwillingness to cooperate with an investigation. FIRST OFFICER CONTACT WITH THE SEXUAL ASSAULT VICTIM The first contact between an officer and the victim is critical. The first officer to have contact with a sexual assault victim may have a difficult assignment. An officer should identify themselves to the victim and attempt to reassure the victim of their safety and express empathy and compassion. The officer's decisions and demeanor can affect the physical and mental well-being of the victim. The officer needs to establish a relationship of trust and cooperation with the victim in order to identify, apprehend and prosecute the assailant. Officers conducting sexual assault investigations must convey that they are genuinely interested in the victim’s well-being. The officer must first decide if the victim's physical or mental condition requires immediate transport to a hospital for medical attention. Officers should not prejudge the victim based on statements or the conditions under which the sexual assault occurred. Sensitivity and professionalism are required when taking sexual assault reports. You should appear confident when taking the report, because your confidence will enhance the victim's feeling of safety and protection. If two officers respond, one officer should conduct the initial interview. The victim may be more comfortable discussing the incident one-on-one. The other officer should attempt to locate witnesses, interview neighbors, and survey the scene for evidence. As with any crime scene, officers should not touch or disturb the scene; they should take care not to 156 – Sexual Assault Investigations Part 1 370 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents destroy, alter or contaminate physical evidence like fingerprints, hairs, fibers, semen, soil, blood or other trace materials. Listen to the victim's account of the incident completely, then go back over the areas where clarification is needed. Patrol officers should remember that the investigators will have the time and the proper environment to help the victim recall further details. Do not display avid curiosity in the crime, and do not act or make comments in a way that the victim would interpret them as being "sexually oriented" - not even to be "humorous." Deception does occur, and the possibility of deception must be considered while these reports are being taken. However, never assume. No matter how inconsistent a victim's story may seem, officers must presume, until evidence is established to the contrary, that the victim is telling an accurate story. Victims of sex assault may be disoriented and may give inconsistent stories, especially in the first few hours after the crime has occurred. If a victim feels as if they cannot trust the police, then their trauma may be heightened, and the officer’s opportunity to help the victim may be eliminated. Officers may also ruin the opportunity to apprehend the subject. CONCLUSION Compassion and good judgment are the keys to investigating a sexual assault. Officers who allow the victim to maintain their dignity, by showing a sincere desire to help, will serve both the victim and society by ensuring a compassionate and effective investigation. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 371 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 157 Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2 REVISED April 2021 SEXUAL ASSAULT INVESTIGATIONS PART 2 INTRODUCTION The information in this training bulletin will assist officers in the investigation of sexual assaults. The techniques outlined below will help expedite the investigation while maintaining efficiency and compassion. INITIAL CONTACT WITH THE VICTIM The first contact between an officer and the victim is critical. The first responding officer(s) should use the following steps to assist the victim and ensure a complete investigation: • Provide emergency medical and crisis intervention assistance to the victim, • Secure and protect the crime scene, • Obtain a suspect description for immediate radio broadcast, • Gather physical evidence (i.e., victim's clothing, bedding or other items that may contain evidence), • Seek out and interview possible witnesses, • Obtain the initial information regarding the time and location of the offense, basic description of the suspect, modus operandi, vehicles used, and take appropriate action to locate the suspect. KEY INTERVIEW INFORMATION The following information is needed to ensure a complete investigation: Type of Sexual Assault • Sexual intercourse • Sodomy • Oral copulation by victim or suspect • Sexual assault with an object - includes anything other than a sex organ • Sexual battery • Spousal rape Suspect(s) • Complete description of the suspect's physical stature and the clothing the suspect was wearing at the time of the incident. • Was there more than one suspect? - Description of additional suspect(s) • Did the victim know the suspect? Explain relationship, if any 157 – Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2 372 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents - Boyfriend or ex-boyfriend - Casual acquaintance • Prior to this incident, had the victim ever seen the assailant? - Loitering near victim's home - At work, social function, school The Sexual Assault • Exact time of assault • Exact location of the offense - Victim's home (which room?) - Other residence or building - Vehicle (victim's or suspects) - Other area (street/park) • How did the suspect make initial contact with the victim? • What did the suspect say to the victim? (Actual words) - Prior to the incident - During the incident - Following the incident • Did the suspect produce a weapon? • Did the suspect use any article belonging to the victim, or located in the victim's home as a weapon? - Scarf, carving knife, belt, bottle - Other article • Did the suspect strike the victim? - Hands - Weapon • Did the suspect insert an object or fingers into the vagina or rectum of victim? • Did suspect actually penetrate the vagina or rectum of victim? • Did suspect perform oral copulation on victim or make victim copulate the suspect? • Did suspect ejaculate? - In vagina, rectum, or mouth of victim - On bed linen - On sofa - On clothing of victim - On carpet or floor • Did suspect disrobe? Did the victim disrobe? - Completely - Partially • If the assault occurred in the victim's home, - What articles did the suspect handle while in the home? - What rooms in the home did the suspect enter? • Did suspect threaten to return? • Is the victim wearing the same clothing that they were wearing at the time of the assault? - If the victim changed clothing, where is the clothing they were wearing at the time of the assault? - Did the victim wash? - Did the victim douche? 157 – Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2 373 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Did the victim injure the suspect? - Scratches/Cuts - Bites - If suspect was injured, did he/she shed any blood and if so where? A victim may not understand why officers need to know such specific details of the crime. Explain to the victim that this evidence can help convict the suspect. Explain that cooperation in detailing the actions of the suspect will be helpful in the search for physical evidence. If the victim has not washed, she should be told not to do so, since there may be blood, semen, hair, fibers or other trace materials beneath her fingernails and on her body that can be linked to the assailant through analysis at the crime laboratory. If she has douched before the arrival of the officer, and ultimately no semen is found in her vagina, this does not negate the crime of rape, for seminal fluid is not all that is necessary to show penetration. She may also have other signs of penetration. FORENSIC EXAM PROTOCOL If the victim is wearing the clothing that was worn at the time of the assault, they should be advised to bring a change of clothing to the examination location if able. The underpants worn after the assault shall be taken as evidence to be examined for seminal leakage; any other clothing worn during the assault may be taken as evidence if they show any evidence of force used such as blood, semen, rips, or tears. The officer's report should detail in their own words what occurred and may also contain observations of the emotional state of the victim, visible injuries, clothing tears or rips and general condition of the scene. If officers collect physical evidence from the scene or specimens from the hospital, this should be detailed in the crime and evidence reports. If other police personnel obtained physical evidence and photographs, the officer(s) should indicate their name(s) and DID#(s), and the time they took the photos. Finally, the officer will inform the victim of rape crisis services or similar social services available. Depending on the jurisdiction, such agencies may offer moral or legal support and may provide needed emotional counseling. The investigation follow-up team should also recommend counseling resources for the victim and victim's family. The rape hotline emergency number is (877) 943-5778. Officers should encourage the victim to call the Police Department if additional details are remembered at a later time. CONFIDENTIALITY Any employee of a law enforcement agency who personally receives a report from any person, alleging that the person making the report has been the victim of a sex offense, shall inform that person that their name will become a matter of public record, unless they request it remain confidential, per Government Code § 6254. CONCLUSION 157 – Sexual Assault Investigations Part 2 374 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Sex crimes are extremely sensitive, emotional and personal crimes that have a profound effect on the victims. The victim is likely to feel an overwhelming sense of helplessness, guilt, embarrassment, and anger. It is an officer's job to help the victim through this time of extreme crisis while performing the technical tasks that are required to locate, apprehend, and prosecute the suspect. To accomplish that job, sensitivity, knowledge and confidence are required of the officer. NOT concentrating on the psychological and technical skills needed for these investigations can lead to additional trauma and alienation for the victim. NOTE: The information contained in this bulletin is applicable to all sex crimes; however, it is crucial information in the following offenses: • PC 261 - Rape • PC 261.5 - Unlawful Sexual Intercourse • PC 285 - Incest • PC 286 - Sodomy • PC 288 - Crimes Against Children (Sexual) • PC 288a - Oral Copulation • PC 289 - Penetration by an Object • PC 243.4 - Sexual Battery • PC 262 - Spousal Rape REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 375 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 158 – Hazardous Materials, Wastes & Chemical Dumping REVISED February 2001 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, HAZARDOUS WASTES, AND CHEMICAL DUMPING PURPOSE The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to provide officers with a working knowledge of their responsibilities as First Responders to hazardous materials incidents and incidents of hazardous waste and chemical dumping. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INCIDENTS Hazardous Materials and Incidents Defined Numerous codes and statutes define and regulate hazardous materials. Basic definitions of what constitutes a hazardous material is any material or substance in a quantity or form that, when not properly controlled or contained, may pose an unreasonable risk to health, safety, property or the environment. A hazardous materials incident exists when a release or threatened release of one of these materials occurs. Police Officers and Hazardous Materials All police officers are First Responders for hazardous materials per Title 8 Section 5192 of the California Code of Regulations (CCR). Officers are trained at the awareness level and are expected to recognize the release or threatened release of hazardous materials. They are to take appropriate actions to isolate the incident and make the necessary notifications to obtain assistance. Officers do not have the training or resources to handle hazardous chemicals or to enter contaminated areas. First Responder Actions Upon recognition of a release or threatened release of hazardous materials, officers shall: • Isolate the area of release and deny entry to anyone, except those qualified for assessment, sampling, containment, cleanup or investigation of hazardous materials • Make notification to the Long Beach Fire Department via Police Communications • Notify a field supervisor of the incident • Note pertinent information to help other responders in dealing with the chemicals: -Placards -Labels -Shipping papers -Information from drivers, shippers, handlers 158 – Hazardous Materials 376 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Safety Safety is the primary concern for police officers at a hazardous materials incident. All officers should adhere to the following: • Stay upwind, uphill and upgrade from all spills or releases • Keep back far enough to avoid any exposure to chemicals • Do not attempt rescue of persons down in contaminated areas • Do not use flares for any incident involving potentially flammable materials • Do not eat, drink or smoke near incidents • Do not go into a hazardous material exposure area and sniff the air to see if it’s breathable Officers who believe they have been exposed to hazardous chemicals should notify incident command immediately. A proper chemical exposure and medical assessment is essential. Decontamination of personnel and equipment is required to prevent the spread of hazardous materials. The officer’s supervisor should also be notified to document the exposure and any treatment received. Hazardous Materials Incident Responsibilities Per a letter of agreement between the Long Beach Police Department and the Long Beach Fire Department, police officers who discover or arrive first at a hazardous materials incident will initiate incident command, follow First Responder Awareness actions, and pass command to the ranking fire officer upon their arrival. The Long Beach Police Department will support the Fire Department by: • Providing a supervisor to the Fire Department Command Post • Maintaining open entry routes for additional emergency responders • Providing vehicle and pedestrian perimeter control • Assisting in the evacuation of non-contaminated areas Hazardous Materials Incident Management The Long Beach Fire Department is responsible for hazardous materials incident management. Hazardous Materials Specialists are dispatched 24-hours a day by the Long Beach Fire Department Alarm Office. Incidents on freeways, on-ramps and off-ramps are the responsibility of the California Highway Patrol who acts as incident commander and arranges for cleanup through CalTrans. Incidents in navigable coastal waters, or at anchorage in these waters are the jurisdiction of the Unites States Coast Guard. Incidents significantly impacting inland waters are the responsibility of the California Department of Fish and Game. Releases of petroleum products to the waters of the State are the responsibility of the Oil Spill Program Emergency Response section of Fish and Game. All Long Beach agencies will provide support to other agencies in the management of hazardous materials incidents. 158 – Hazardous Materials 377 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Criminal Acts Articles 79 and 80 of the Uniform Fire Code regulate the general storage and use of hazardous materials. The Uniform Fire Code is adopted as part of the Long Beach Municipal Code and enforced by Inspectors of the Fire Department’s Fire Prevention Bureau. Title 49 of the Federal Code of Regulations regulates the transportation of hazardous materials. This law defines the parameters for shipping papers, placards, labels, containers and loading for hazardous materials transportation. In Long Beach, enforcement is done by the Traffic Division Commercial Enforcement Officers. HAZARDOUS WASTES AND CHEMICAL DUMPING Hazardous Wastes Defined Hazardous wastes are defined in Title 22 of the CCR. The criteria for hazardous wastes include federally listed wastes under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and chemicals that meet State of California criteria for ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity or toxicity. The regulations contain many exemptions and chemical testing by a certified laboratory is often required to determine the status of a waste chemical. Hazardous wastes often encountered include: gasoline, used motor oil, oil-based paint, leaded paint, asbestos, corrosives, pesticides, fumigants, solvents, paint strippers, photo chemicals and explosive oxidizers. When these or other chemicals are dumped or abandoned, the Fire Department and Department of Health and Human Services should be notified immediately. Hazardous Waste Enforcement in Long Beach In Long Beach, enforcement of Hazardous Waste Control Laws rests with the State of California chartered Certified Uniform Program Agency (CUPA). The Long Beach Department of Health and Human Services is the lead agency of the CUPA and the Long Beach Fire Department is a participating agency. The CUPA regulates the handling of hazardous wastes by businesses. The Fire Department’s Environmental Investigations Section provides the enforcement branch for the CUPA. Criminal Violations Officers responding to dispatches involving chemicals should be alert for potential criminal activity. Violations of Title 22 CCR are charged under the California Health and Safety Code. The subsections under 25189.5 H&S are for the illegal disposal, transportation, treatment and storage of hazardous waste. The sections can be charged as felonies or misdemeanors and carry maximum penalties of imprisonment in the state prison for 16, 24, or 36 months and fines of up to $125,000 per day of violation. These are “general intent” crimes. There is no requirement to show intent or malice. Disposal or transportation requires what amounts to a civil standard of proof (“reasonably should have known...”). Making a criminal case only requires a hazardous waste not be handled in compliance with Title 22 CCR. 158 – Hazardous Materials 378 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Due to the complexity of enforcement and resources required, investigations require hazardous materials specialists from the Long Beach Department of Health and Human Services and investigators from the Fire Department’s Environmental Investigations Section. Non-Hazardous Waste Many chemicals that do not meet the criteria for hazardous waste are still pollutants, hazardous substances or otherwise regulated. The Health and Safety Code prohibits dumping of used oil and latex paint into the trash, ground or waters of the State. The City’s Federal Storm Waters Discharge Permit sets limits on all discharges into the streets and storm drain system. With certain exceptions, the standard for discharge is potable (drinkable) water. Activities such as engine degreasing, washing out paint brushes and cement and stucco wash downs are prohibited. Officers discovering any chemical or pollutant discharge into the streets or storm drains should have the Fire Department or Long Beach Water Department Storm Drain Division notified immediately. Dumping waste matter into the street or upon private property without the owner’s consent is chargeable under the Penal Code. Violators of subsections of 374.3 PC can be cited or booked as infractions. These sections pertain to the dumping of non-hazardous wastes. Items commonly encountered that come under this section include cooking oil, fish guts, tires, trash, sewage, and construction waste. Officers should not use this section for any chemical dumping. Section 374.8 PC deals with dumping hazardous substances. These include some chemicals that are not hazardous wastes. Analytical samples are needed to determine if the suspect chemical comes under this section. Officers’ Actions Officers who encounter possible violations related to chemical dumping should first consider the hazards and take appropriate First Responder Awareness actions. Maintain the crime scene and call for appropriate resources such as the Long Beach Fire Department, the Long Beach Department of Health and Human Services or an Environmental Investigator through Fire dispatch. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 379 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity REVISED January 2003 DIPLOMATIC AND CONSULAR IMMUNITY INTRODUCTION The principle of diplomatic immunity is one of the oldest concepts of foreign relations. While customary international law continues to refine the concepts of diplomatic and consular immunity, the basic rules are present in the Diplomatic Relations Act of 1978 (22 USC 254) and embodied in many international treaties formally adopted by the United States. The rights and privileges granted by these treaties are enforceable in the courts of the United States and the US Government is legally bound to ensure that its states and municipalities respect such rights. Dealing with the concept of immunity poses particular problems for law enforcement officers who, by virtue of their oath and training, are unaccustomed to granting special privileges or concessions to individuals who break the law. In any event, law enforcement officers retain their fundamental responsibility to protect and police the orderly conduct of persons present in the territory of the United States. Law enforcement officers must understand the rules of immunity to avoid being overly generous in the application of its principles. DEFINITIONS Foreign Officials – See Page 9 for Immunity Status • “Diplomatic Officers/Agents” are the political representatives of a country. They are concerned with international relations and foreign policy • “Consular Officers” have principle duties related to protecting the interests of their nationals, promoting business for their country, issuing passports and performing other administrative or legal duties • “Honorary Consular Officers” are often citizens of the United States who are appointed honorary consular officers for the purpose of promoting the interests of those countries. They are not afforded the full ranges of immunities given a career consular officer and can be arrested for misdemeanor or felony crimes • “Official Guests” are foreign nationals invited as official guests by the United States government. They normally carry letters of introduction identifying their status HANDLING INCIDENTS The vast majority of persons entitled to privileges and immunities are judicious in their actions and aware of the significance attached to their actions as representatives of the 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity 380 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents sending state. It is not an exaggeration to say that police handling of incidents in this country may have a direct effect on the treatment of US diplomatic or consular personnel abroad. When you are called to the scene of a criminal incident involving a person who claims diplomatic or consular immunity, the first step should be to verify the status of the suspect. Should the person be unable to produce satisfactory identification and the situation should warrant an arrest or a detention, the individual should be informed that they would be detained until their identity can be confirmed. In all cases, including those in which the suspect provides a State issued identification card; the officer should verify the status with the US Department of State or in the case of the UN community, with the US mission to the United Nations. Once the status is verified, the officer should prepare their report, fully describing the details of the incident and if the individual enjoys personal inviolability, they cannot be handcuffed, except when that individual poses an immediate threat to safety nor can they be arrested or detained. Once all the information has been obtained, that person must be released and a copy of the report should be faxed or mailed to the US Department of State in Washington, DC. TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT Stopping a mission member or dependent and issuing a traffic citation for a moving violation does not constitute arrest or detention and is permitted. However, the subject may not be compelled to sign the citation. A copy of the citation and any other reports should be forwarded to the US Department of State as soon as possible. In serious cases, e.g., DUI, personal injury or accidents, telephonic notification to the US Department of State is urged. A field sobriety test should be offered if appropriate but the taking of these tests may not be compelled. If the individual is too impaired to drive safely, do not allow them to drive away until they recover sufficiently to drive. You may also summon a friend or relative to drive or you may call for a taxi. The property of a person enjoying full criminal immunity, including their vehicle, may not be searched or seized. Such vehicles may not be impounded or “booted” but may be towed the distance necessary to remove them from obstructing traffic or endangering public safety. If it is proved that their vehicle was stolen or used by unauthorized persons to commit a crime, the inviolability to which the vehicle would normally be entitled must be considered temporarily suspended and a normal search of the vehicle is permissible. CONCLUSION It is important that law enforcement authorities always treat foreign diplomatic and consular personnel with respect and with due regard for the privileges and immunities to which they are entitled under international law. Foreign diplomats who violate traffic laws should be cited. Allegations of serious crimes should be fully investigated and reported to the US Department of State. Law enforcement should never be inhibited in its efforts to protect the public welfare in extreme situations. LIST OF USEFUL TELEPHONE NUMBERS 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity 381 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents For information on diplomatic and consular personnel and personnel of international organizations other than the United Nations: • Current status of US Department of State Federal license tags, registrations, or other motor vehicle information – (202) 895-3532 Fax (202) 895-3646 • Current status of US Department of State driver license licenses and general licensing information – (202) 895-3521 • For reporting traffic incidents or accidents, issuance of citations, etc., involving foreign missions personnel – (202) 895-3521 Current status of: • Diplomatic agents and family members - (202) 647-1664 • Embassy administrative, technical, and service staff and families - (202) 647-1405 • Consular personnel and families - (202) 647-1404 • International Organizations - (202) 647-1402 Please send copies of incident reports and citations to: Diplomatic Security Service, Protective Liaison Division - Fax (202) 895-3613 After normal business hours all inquires should be made to the Diplomatic Security Watch Officer, Department of State (24-hour number) - (202) 647-7277 For information on United Nations Personnel Current status of: • Diplomatic agents and family members - (212) 415-4131 • UN Mission staff and family members - (212) 415-4168 • UN Secretariat employees - (212) 415-4131 or (212) 415-4168 • US Department of State license tags, registration, or other motor vehicle information - (212) 826-4500 After normal business hours information is available from the Communications Section of the US United Nations (24 hour number) - (212) 415-4444 Please send copies of police reports to: USUN Host Country - Fax (212) 415-4162 REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Office of the Chief of Police 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity 382 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity 383 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity 384 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity 385 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 161 – Diplomatic and Consular Immunity 386 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Diplomatic and Consular Privileges and Immunities from Criminal Jurisdiction (Summary of Law Enforcement Aspects) Category May be arrested or detained Residence may be entered subject to ordinary process May be issued traffic citation May be subpoenaed as witness May be prosecuted Recognized family member Diplomatic Diplomatic Agent No 1 No Yes No No Same as sponsor (full immunity and inviolability) Member of Administrative and Technical staff No 1 No Yes No No Same as sponsor (full immunity and inviolability) Service staff Yes 2 Yes Yes Yes No-for official acts. Otherwise, yes 2 No immunity or inviolability 2 Consular Career Consular Officers Yes, if for a felony and pursuant to a warrant 2 Yes 4 Yes No-for official acts. Testimony may not be compelled in any case No-for official acts. Otherwise, yes 2 No immunity or inviolability 2 Honorary Consular Officers Yes Yes Yes No-for official acts. Yes, in all other cases No-for official acts. Otherwise, yes No immunity or inviolability Consular Employees Yes 2 Yes Yes No-for official acts. Yes, in all other cases No-for official acts. Otherwise, yes 2 No immunity or inviolability 2 International Organizations International Organization Staff Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes No-for official acts. Yes, in all other cases No-for official acts. Otherwise, yes No immunity or inviolability Diplomatic Level Staff of Missions to International Organizations No 1 No Yes No No Same as sponsor (full immunity and inviolability) Support Staff of Missions to International Organizations Yes Yes Yes No-for official acts. Yes, in all other cases No-for official acts. Otherwise, yes No immunity or inviolability 1 Reasonable constraints, however, may be applied in emergency circumstances involving self-defense, public safety, or the prevention of serious crimes 2 This table presents general rules. Particularly in the cases indicated, the employees of certain foreign countries may enjoy higher privileges and immunities on the basis of special bilateral agreements. 3 A small number of senior officers are entitled to be treated identically to “diplomatic agents” 4 Note that the consular residences are sometimes located within the official consular premises. In such cases, only the official office space is protected from police entry 387 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 162 – CA Driver’s License and ID Card REVISED January 2003 CALIFORNIA DRIVER LICENSE & IDENTIFICATION CARD VERIFICATION PROCEDURES Every day, millions of Californians use their driver licenses or identification (DL/ID) cards for identification purposes. Each year, billions of dollars are lost nationwide because altered or forged licenses and identification cards are used with stolen or counterfeit credit cards to complete illegal transactions. In addition, use of bogus cards for proof of age by teenagers continues to rise. All consumers incur high personal and financial losses when DL/ID cards are used improperly. The use of security laminates on the face of the DL/ID card has significantly helped to prevent alteration attempts. The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to explain specific DL/ID security procedures and how to spot fake and/or altered cards. LEGISLATIVE SUPPORT §113 PC – Makes it a misdemeanor to manufacture or sell any false government documents such passports, immigration visas, employment authorization cards, birth certificates, driver's licenses, ID cards, or social security cards, with the intent to conceal the true citizenship or resident alien status of another person. §13004 VC - It is unlawful for any person: • To display or cause or permit to be displayed or have in his possession any canceled, fictitious, fraudulently altered, or fraudulently obtained identification card • To lend his identification card to any other person or knowingly permit the use thereof by another • To display or represent any ID card not issued to him as being his ID card • To photograph, photostat, duplicate, or in any way reproduce any ID card or facsimile thereof in such a manner that it could be mistaken for a valid ID card, or to display or have in his possession any such photograph, photostat, duplicate, reproduction, or facsimile unless authorized by the provisions of this code §14610 VC - It is unlawful for any person: • To display or cause or permit to be displayed or have in his possession any canceled, revoked, suspended, fictitious, fraudulently altered, or fraudulently obtained driver's license • To lend his/her driver's license to any other person or knowingly permit the use thereof by another 162 – CA Driver’s License and ID 388 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • To display or represent any driver's license not issued to him as being his license • To photograph, photostat, duplicate, or in any way reproduce any driver's license or facsimile thereof in such a manner that it could be mistaken for a valid license, or to display or have in his possession any such photograph, photostat, duplicate, reproduction, or facsimile unless authorized by the provisions of this code CALIFORNIA DL/ID CARDS: WHAT TO LOOK FOR • Look at the photo on the license or identification card. Compare it to the ghost photo and the person it identifies. Is it the same person? • Does the license or identification card describe the person presenting it, in terms of height, weight, color of eyes and hair and approximate age? • Ask for date of birth. Is it the same as on the license or identification card? • Check signatures. Do they match? • Is the document altered in any way? Has the photograph been altered or substituted? Look for glue lines or a bumpy surface next to photo or DOB. Uneven surfaces often indicate tampering. Compare the typeset for the DOB with other lettering on the ID, it should match Driver’s License and ID Security Card - Issued: Summer 2001 Features – Uses a two color, optical variable ink coated on the inside of the face of the laminate, in the configuration of the “California State Seal” and “DMV” Logo. Depending on the angle of the card, the images will appear either green or gold. The security feature is invisible to the naked eye. Utilizing ultraviolet technology that can only be seen through the use of an ultraviolet, “black light”, the image of the California State Flag can be seen across the bottom of the card. Image of the California State Flag 162 – CA Driver’s License and ID 389 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Another security feature is a fine line security printing that uses a series of colored concentric circles that are placed throughout the face of the card. This helps to protect the card from being color photocopied or scanned. The Driver License/Identification Card number is printed in red. Previous versions of the card show a green DL/ID card number. The back of the card contains a bar code, an encoded magnetic stripe, a writeable surface for a change of address, and laser printed restrictions, if appropriate. There have been no changes to the magnetic stripe or the bar code located on the back of the card from the previous card version Detecting Alterations to the Laminate – Attempts to remove the security laminate will distort the cards. Any alteration of data by writing or typing on top of the laminate will show clearly. Security Laminate Card - Issued March 1999 to July 2001 Features –optical variable gold ink coated on the inside of the face of the laminate. The “DMV” Logo and “California State Seal” are visible in the laminate by varying the angle of viewing under normal lighting conditions. Micro-printing of “California DMV” is embedded in the top line of the DMV Logo and can be viewed with a magnifying glass. A smaller less dense version of the main photo is on the face of the card. The DL/ID number is printed in red The back of the card contains a bar code, an encoded magnetic stripe, a writeable surface for change of address, and instructions, if appropriate 162 – CA Driver’s License and ID 390 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents “Provisional” and “Age 21” are highlighted with blue and red color bars, respectively. Driver license and Identification cards issued to persons under the age of 21 will have the photo on the right side of the card. The provisional driver license will include the interim issue date. Detecting Alterations in the Laminate – Attempts to remove the security laminate will distort the card. Any alteration of data by writing or typing on top of the laminate will show clearly. Photo Receipt – The Department will issue a “photo receipt” to applicants who are applying for a driver license requiring DMV tests. This photo receipt will be issued for DMV purposes only. This receipt is not a verified identification and must not be used as a license or permit to drive. 162 – CA Driver’s License and ID 391 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Hologram without Gridlines - Issued from: July 11, 1994 to June 30, 1999 Features – During processing, a security laminate featuring a thin two-channel hologram is bonded to the card. This laminate contains holographic images of the “California State Seal” and the “DMV” Logo, visible at certain angles, to verify the authenticity of the card. For both holograms, tilt the card away from you to view the “California State Seal.” The “DMV” Logo hologram can be viewed by turning the card at a 90 degree angle. Since May 1994, the phrases regarding “Provisional” and “Age 21” were highlighted with blue and red color bars, respectively. Identification cards and driver licenses issued to persons under age 21 will have the photo on the right side of the card. Detecting Alterations in the Holograms – Visible lines or breaks in the holographic image indicate attempts to alter the card, as do missing or mismatched portions of the image. Attempts to alter data by writing or typing on top of the laminate will show clearly. Attempts to lift and replace the laminate result in the appearance of a clearly visible “destruct pattern” that looks like a checker board in the holographic images of both the card surface and the laminate. Hologram with Gridlines - Issued from: December 20, 1990 to July 11, 1994 Features – An ultra-thin, transparent layer of plastic, imprinted with gridlines and holographic images of the “California State Seal” and the “DMV” Logo, is bonded to the 162 – CA Driver’s License and ID 392 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents card. For both holograms, tilt the card away from you to view the “California State Seal.” The “DMV” Logo hologram can be viewed by turning the card at a 90 degree angle. Since May 1994, the phrases regarding “Provisional” and “Age 21” were highlighted with blue and red bars, respectively. Identification cards and driver licenses issued to persons under the age of 21 have the photo on the right side of the card. Detecting Alterations in the Holograms with Gridlines – visible lines or breaks in the holographic image indicate attempts to alter the card, as do missing or mismatched portions of the image. Attempts to alter data by writing or typing on top of the laminate will show clearly. Reflective Security Laminate - Issued prior to: December 20, 1990 Features – During processing, an ultra-thin reflective film imprinted with the “California State Seal” and the word “California” is bonded to the license or identification card. An ordinary flashlight held closely to the driver license or identification card will allow you to view the reflective pattern of the “California State Seal” and the word “California.” 162 – CA Driver’s License and ID 393 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Altered Reflective Security Feature – Under normal light, an altered license on which a picture or birth date has been changed may be difficult to detect. A counterfeit license or identification card may appear to be valid. However, it’s easy to verify a California license or identification card with this security feature. A reflective viewer will clearly show the laminate but if you don’t have one, an ordinary flashlight held close to your eye allows for viewing the reflective pattern. This will enable you to detect any attempted alterations. REVIEW Responsibility Patrol Bureau 394 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 163 – Child Sexual Abuse Material REVISED September 2022 CHILD SEXUAL ABUSE MATERIAL (CSAM) INTRODUCTION This Training Bulletin provides officers with information regarding the investigation, discovery and handling of evidence in cases involving Child Sexual Abuse Material (CSAM). United States federal law defines child pornography as any visual depiction of sexually explicit conduct involving a minor. The National Center for Missing and Exploited Children (NCMEC) labels those images as Child Sexual Abuse Material (CSAM) to more accurately reflect what is depicted – sexual abuse. The acronym CSAM is the appropriate terminology to use when documenting what was previously known as Child Pornography. CSAM images are not only the documentation of sexual abuse, but when the files are shared across the internet, the survivors are re-victimized each time the image is viewed. “In a recent survey by the Canadian Centre for Child Protection, 67% of CSAM survivors said the distribution of their images impacts them differently than the hands-on abuse they suffered because the distribution never ends, and the images are permanent. It’s important to remember CSAM consists of much more than just images and video files. While CSAM is seen and transmitted on computers and through other technology, these images and videos depict actual crimes being committed against children. The human element, children at risk, must always be considered when talking about this offense that is based in a high-tech world.” (https://www.missingkids.org/theissues/csam) Many people falsely believe CSAM can only be accessed on the “Dark web.” CSAM has become easily accessible to anyone with an internet connection and the number of CSAM cases are steadily rising every year. Technology has made it simple to distribute and store large quantities of CSAM that previously would have been difficult to obtain. These crimes are often committed online using everyday platforms like social media, messaging applications, online gaming, and email. CSAM STATUTES & LEGAL DEFINITIONS Possession of CSAM Every person who knowingly possesses or controls any obscene matter knowing that the matter depicts a person under 18 years of age personally engaging in or simulating sexual conduct. Penal Code §311.11 163 – Sexually Exploited Children 395 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Distribution of CSAM Every person who knowingly sends or causes to be sent with the intent to distribute or to exhibit any obscene matter, knowing that the matter depicts a person under the age of 18 years personally engaging in or personally simulating sexual conduct. Penal Code §311.1 Sexual Conduct Sexual intercourse, penetration of the vagina or rectum by any object; masturbation for the purpose of sexual stimulation of the viewer; sadomasochistic abuse for the purpose of sexual stimulation of the viewer; exhibition of the genitals or the pubic or rectal area of any person for the purpose of sexual stimulation of the viewer; or defecation or urination for the purpose of sexual stimulation of the viewer. Penal Code §311.3 It is important to note that “sexual conduct” as defined by PC311.4 includes the phrase “for the sexual stimulation of the viewer,” which is based upon a reasonable person’s standards. A suspect’s personal or subjective sexual stimulation from erotica material will not cause the material to meet the legal definition of CSAM. Obscene Matter Matter, taken as a whole, that to the average person, applying contemporary statewide standards, appeals to the prurient interest, that, taken as a whole, depicts or describes sexual conduct in a patently offensive way, and that, taken as a whole, lacks serious literary, artistic, political, or scientific value. Penal Code §311 Erotica Some images do not meet the legal definition of CSAM but might be deemed erotica. Images deemed erotica may not depict sexual conduct, the exhibition of genitals or pubic or rectal areas, or an actual child, but still have the disturbing perception of CSAM. Although erotica is legal, the discovery of these types of files still has evidentiary value because it may indicate a suspect’s intent to possess or distribute CSAM. Erotica includes but is not limited to: Cartoon or animated images/videos of children engaged in sexual conduct, nudism, children wearing swimsuits, and sketches. INVESTIGATIONS INVOLVING CSAM Officers respond to various calls that may involve CSAM, require a field investigation and the collection of CSAM evidence. Some examples include but are not limited to: • Sexual abuse of a child • Child sex trafficking • Unsolicited obscene materials sent to children • Revenge porn • Indecent Exposure • Annoying and molesting children • Peeping Persons who commit these types of crimes often have an unnatural sexual interest in children. It is common for these suspects to collect, distribute, or produce CSAM as an 163 – Sexually Exploited Children 396 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents additional element of their crimes. Officers should take this into consideration when conducting their investigation, interviewing victims/suspect, and collecting evidence. For example, when questioning a victim of child sexual abuse, an officer should ask the victim if the suspect took pictures or videos during the abuse. EVIDENCE COLLECTION When CSAM comes to the attention of law enforcement, it is important to collect all devices containing CSAM, book it into evidence, and document the chain of custody. The device should be placed in airplane mode, remain on and if possible, kept charged. When possible, obtain the device passcode. This includes devices belonging to suspects, victims, witnesses, and other involved parties. The devices should not remain in their possession as they contain CSAM and to allow them to retain possession of the CSAM is a crime (PC §311.11). Images of CSAM are shared and duplicated quickly. Leaving even a single image in a person’s possession can lead to the image being intentionally or inadvertently memorialized online, creating further trauma to the victim. Devices containing CSAM should not be returned to the reporting party or the owner. Refer to Penal Code 312 or 502.01 for information of forfeiting and destroying CSAM, even if the incident is not filed. In these situations, officers need to understand Penal Code 312 and 502.01 and thoroughly explain to the Calling Party the importance of collecting their device and having it forensically examined to preserve the image or video depicting CSAM. The image(s) or video(s) will then have to be forensically wiped clear from the device. Owner’s consent or a search warrant is needed in this situation. Files containing CSAM should not be copied or shared with others. This includes situations where the calling party believes they are doing the “right thing” by trying to assist Law Enforcement in preserving evidence, by taking a photograph or a video of an image or video depicting CSAM. These directives also pertain to Law Enforcement. Officers should not do any of the following when collecting evidence depicting CSAM: • Do not use BWC’s or cell phones to photograph or video record evidence depicting CSAM. • Do not have a victim, witness, or suspect email or text evidence depicting CSAM to your personal or department issued devices. • Do not upload evidence depicting CSAM to Evidence.com. • Do not do any of the above, then delete image from device, and allow the person to keep the device. In addition to destruction of evidence, this does not ensure the image was removed from all locations on the device. Officers should be reminded that a search warrant or consent is required to search an electronic device. Furthermore, when a search warrant is written for an electronic device 163 – Sexually Exploited Children 397 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents there is additional information related to CalECPA that must be included in the search warrant, for information regarding the CalECPA requirements refer to California Senate Bill 178. If these requirements are not included in the search warrant any evidence located on the device can be suppressed at trial. LAWS REGARDING NOTIFICATION OF SUSPECT ARREST When a suspect with one of the below listed occupations is arrested for a crime subject to PC290 Sex Offender Registration, the assigned detail’s supervisor should ensure that the handling detective makes the following notifications: • Teachers and School Employees Public Schools – notify the governing board of the school district employing the person. PC291 • Teachers and School Employees, Private Schools – notify the private school authorities employing the teacher of the arrest. PC291.1 • Teacher or Instructor, Community College – notify the Office of the Chancellor of the California Community Colleges. PC291.5 • Attorneys and Medical Professionals – although law enforcement is not required to notify the California State Bar or California Board of Medicine of an arrest, officers should document if the suspect is an attorney or medical professional so the investigating detective can determine the appropriate notifications. ADDITIONAL RELEVANT TRAINING MATERIAL AND PENAL CODE SECTIONS Field officers should acquaint themselves with additional training material, and certain Penal Code sections regarding child abuse and child sexual abuse material: • Long Beach Police Department §8.6 – Vice Investigations • Long Beach Police Department §8.7 – Special Victims Investigations • Training Bulletin 149 – Child Abuse • Penal Code §311 to 312.7 – Possession / Distribution of Child Sexual Abuse Material- Obscene matter • Penal Code §313 to 313.5 – Harmful Matter • Penal Code §290 – Sex Offender Registration / Failure to Register The sexual exploitation of children is a serious problem facing our community. It is incumbent upon law enforcement personnel to be aware of this problem and actively investigate cases of this nature. Officers can contact Computer Crimes, Internet Crimes Against Children (ICAC) Detectives for CSAM specific evidence collection or if there is an investigation that involves CSAM, and the victim is not known. For investigative questions regarding any other crimes that has a CSAM nexus, officers should contact the appropriate detail (E.g., Child Abuse, Sex Crimes, or Vice). REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 398 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 164 – At-Risk Missing Person REVISED March 2021 AT-RISK MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS An officer’s initial response to a report of a missing person can have a profound effect on the outcome of the case and the wellbeing of the missing person. Upon arrival, an officer should first verify that an at-risk missing person incident exists. If the initial investigation suggests foul play or kidnapping, the Homicide Detail should be contacted. The Homicide Detail retains investigative authority over these incidents and coordinates their efforts with the Incident Commander and Missing Persons Detail. If it is determined the person is a victim of a parental abduction or child concealment where there is no evidence of an immediate threat to the child, the Child Abuse Detail should be notified. The Child Abuse Detail retains investigative authority over these incidents and coordinates their efforts with the Missing Persons Detail. INVESTIGATIVE CONSIDERATIONS The following investigative steps will help officers ensure that a thorough missing person’s investigation is complete: • Activate your body worn camera when approaching the scene. • Determine when, where, and by whom the missing was last seen. • Identify the circumstances surrounding the disappearance. • Interview the parents, guardian, witnesses, calling party and the individual(s) who last had contact with the missing person. • Broadcast updates of pertinent information, including detailed descriptive information regarding the suspect(s) and/or the suspect’s vehicle(s). • Ascertain if the missing person has a cellphone, any electronic communication device, or GPS device. • Determine if the missing person is a participant in tracking or location programs, such as LA Found. • Identify the missing person’s social media accounts. • If applicable, verify child custody status and examine valid court orders. • Secure a recent photograph or digital record of the missing person and abductor. • Make referrals to local counseling agencies. SEARCH CONSIDERATIONS • If exigency exists, search the home or building where the missing person was last seen. • If there is no exigency, obtain and document permission or obtain a search warrant. • Search residence and evaluate the contents and appearance of the Missing Person’s room/residence, if possible photograph and videotape these areas. 164 – At-Risk Missing Person Investigations 399 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Search the immediate area and extend the search to surrounding areas including vehicles and other places of concealment. • Treat areas of interest as potential crime scenes. • Identify possible surveillance or security cameras in the area. • Identify close friends or a trusted person the missing person is likely to contact. FIELD SUPERVISOR CONSIDERATIONS • Establish a command post away from the missing person’s residence. • Facilitate coordination/cooperation among all law enforcement personnel involved in the investigation and search effort. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 400 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 166 – Report of Property REVISED September 2003 THE REPORT OF PROPERTY INTRODUCTION All property taken into custody by police department employees during the course of their duties must be documented on a Report of Property, form PD 2240.009A (04/99), describing who, what, when, where and how the employee came into possession of the property. The Report of Property must be completed correctly, documenting a complete description of the property collected or seized and a complete listing of the person/persons from whom the property was obtained. All property must be delivered to the Property/Evidence Section or placed into the provided evidence lockers prior to going off duty. HOW TO USE THE REPORTS • The LBPD Property Report, form PD 2240.009(A) (04/99) is a two page NCR (carbon copy) form. Upon completion, the original copy (pink) is turned into the Records Division for filing and storage • The second copy (yellow) marked "receipt copy" shall be given as a receipt when needed or used as an information sheet for the Property Office when turning in any property. On the backside of the yellow receipt is general information for the public • The LBPD Property Report Continuation Page, form PD 2240.009(D) (08/96), will be used if there are more than four separate articles or items reported on Report of Property, form PD 2240.009A • LBPD Loss Report, form PD2240.009(B) (08/96), will be used in conjunction with all Incident/Crime Reports where there is a reported loss (i.e., Burglary, Theft, etc.) • Field officers filing field reports should provide the victim with blank PD 2240.009(B) forms if additional losses need to be mailed in. The officer should explain to the victim how to fill out the form and to use black ink if handwritten • These reports are NOT to be used when listing a bicycle or vehicle as stolen or recovered REPORTING PROPERTY DESCRIPTIONS Officers should make every attempt to obtain as much correct information as possible when completing the property form. 166 – Report of Property 401 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Item-# - Assign a number to the various articles referred to on each line. The item number helps to identify the articles in case it should become necessary to make future reference to the item without renaming or re-describing it each time • Involved date • Article - List the name or kind of article. – Jewelry: Watch, ring (include high school, wedding, men's, women's, etc.) – Camera – Television: Color or black and white, portable or console, size of screen – Credit cards: Include not only Mastercard and Visa, but from which bank and list the account number • Brand - List the manufacturer or trade name of the article (e.g., Bulova, Smith-Corona, Minolta, RCA, IBM, Sears, etc. • Model - The exact model is of importance when describing similar types of articles produced in different models (e.g., M-870, Accutron, 2200, SRT-102, M-24 Radio, M- 15, ladies, men's, etc.) • Serial # - Record the serial number (not model number) assigned on each article. • Owner applied # - When a serial number is unavailable and the property is marked with the victim's operator's license or social security number, list that number and indicate the type of number (SS# or DL#). Also list any name or initials that might be engraved • Quantity - List all articles of the same description along the same lateral column and indicate the number of items • Value (approximate if unknown) - Enter the market value of the article at the time the report is made. Total the column and place the total loss on the front of the Incident Report • Make (guns only) - the brand name of the gun, e.g. Remington, Smith and Wesson, etc. • Type-cat (guns) – Handgun: Semi-automatic, revolver, blank, derringer, flare, gas or air, percussion, single-shot – Rifle: Automatic action, bolt action, carbine, double barrel (side by side), flintlock, gas or air, lever action, percussion (caplock), pump action, recoilless, semi- automatic, single shot – Shotgun: Bolt action, double barrel (side-by-side), over and under, pump action, semi-automatic, single-shot • Caliber - the caliber of the gun • Material and color - Identify the type of material the article is made of (i.e., metal, cotton, silver, gold, leather or type of wood). Specify the combination of materials on items that consist of several different types of materials • Size - List the dimensions of the article as close as possible. • Color • Description • Remarks CONCLUSION A complete and correct report, including connecting report numbers, is a vital tool for each investigative detail. 166 – Report of Property 402 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 403 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 167 – Carotid Restraint THE CAROTID RESTRAINT REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 404 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 168 – Mexican Vehicle Registration REVISED August 2002 MEXICAN VEHICLE REGISTRATION Mexican customs, Department of Federal Vehicle Registry (Registro Federal de Vehiculos – RFV) is the original registry and titling agency for all vehicles sold in Mexico, and is responsible for: • Issuing titles • Assigning Registro Federal de Vehiculos numbers – Window decals – Registro Federal de Vehiculos VIN plates Individual Mexican States issue license plates and registration cards. National Plates - National plates are issued to Mexican manufactured vehicles or new vehicles that are imported into Mexico through a Mexican dealership. • The new National license plates have a white background with a green border and alphanumeric sequence • Old National license plates have a tan background and navy blue alphanumeric characters • There are 32 states in Mexico and the plates display an abbreviation of the country of origin: MEX, as well as the letter abbreviation for the state of issuance The three types of National plates issued are: • Commercial trucks or pickup truck license plates will display two letters and five numbers (example YW27520) • Commercial truck tractors and trailers will display one number, two letters, and four numbers (example 1AF1704) • National passenger plates start with three letters followed by a series of four numbers (example AGG1869) Frontier Plates – are issued to vehicles imported to any of the US – Mexico Border States. The plates are known as “Placas Fronezizas” and have a yellow background with the green alphanumeric characters. These plates also have the emblem of the state of issuance and a logo of the state’s pride. • Frontier plates are issued every five years but the registration fees must be paid every year. Month and year tabs are issued along with the new registration card at the time the fees are deposited 168 – Mexican Vehicle Registration 405 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Frontier zone: vehicles with these plates may travel only in the designated “Frontier Zone.” This zone starts at the US/Mexico Border to 20 kilometers into the interior of Mexico. A special permit must be obtained if traveling farther into the interior of Mexico The Frontier States that issue this plate are: Baja California BC Baja California Sur BCS Chihuahua CHIH Coahuila COAH Sonora SON Tamaulipas TAM Other Mexican License Plates • Commercial for Hire/Public Service Plates are issued to taxis and buses. They have a red background with black numbers and letters. The plates will display four numbers followed by three letters (example 2587ZLC) • Federal Public Service/Servico Publico Federal (SPF) plates should be displayed on commercial truck tractors, trailers, and buses for use on federal lands such as airports − Older issued SPF plates have a green background and white numbers and letters. These green plates are currently registered and circulating legally − The new SPF plates have a white background with black letters and numbers. The sequence will start with 3 numbers, 2 letters and a final number. (example 362HB7). These distinctive plates have a bar code on the upper part of the plate and a drawing of the type of vehicle authorized to display them Vehicle Registration Card – the registration cards change in format and color each year and are issued by the State Secretary of Finances. Vehicles should be registered between the months of January and June of every year. The registration cards will have information pertaining to the vehicle and the registered owner. Final Note Always run the VIN through the stolen Vehicle System (SVS) on a Mexican registered vehicle. There are many US stolen vehicles recovered this way because of the rampant use of Mexican fraudulent documents. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 406 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines REVISED August 2018 SEARCH AND SEIZURE GUIDELINES See Special Order - Electronic Device Searches 12-18-19 FOURTH AMENDMENT The United States and California Constitutions prohibit the unreasonable search and seizure of an individual’s home, person, or personal property. To prevent an unreasonable search, the Fourth Amendment makes it clear that law enforcement must possess a warrant to conduct a legal, reasonable search. Under the Fourth Amendment, a warrantless search is presumptively unreasonable and illegal. However, case law has created some exceptions to the warrant requirement. There are five situations in which officers may perform a search on an individual: • Officers receive consent from the person to be searched; • Officers are transporting a citizen in a police car; • Officers are executing a warrant to search a residence for drugs; • A search incident to arrest; • A non-consensual search when an officer reasonably believes the person to be searched is armed and dangerous. CONSENT SEARCHES The law classifies citizen contacts as consensual encounters, detentions or arrests. For an investigative stop or detention to be valid, you must have a reasonable suspicion of the following: • Criminal activity is afoot; and • The person detained is connected with that criminal activity. With reasonable suspicion, both the quality and quantity of the information you need is less than the probable cause needed to arrest or search. The Courts will look at the totality of the circumstances when deciding if your suspicion to detain was reasonable. Reasonable suspicion is not required for a consensual encounter. Merely approaching someone in public and engaging them in conversation is not a detention; it is permissible to ask for consent to search, although this may convert the consensual encounter into a detention. The Courts will evaluate your language, tone of voice and physical actions to determine if the encounter was consensual. TRANSPORTING A CITIZEN 169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines 407 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The Courts have ruled that if officers have a duty to transport a person, such as transporting a person from a freeway, away from a dangerous situation, after a traffic stop, then an officer has the right to search the person before they enter the car. If there is no duty to transport (no dangerous situation exists), and you are offering a ride, ensure that the individual knows that they may refuse the ride; however, they will be searched prior to transportation. If they accept the ride, a search is permitted. EXECUTING A SEARCH WARRANT ON A DRUG HOUSE Due to the dangerous nature of illegal drug trafficking, the Courts have ruled that officers who are executing a warrant to search a residence for drugs may, as a matter of routine, search the following people: • Anyone present when officers arrive to execute the warrant; • Any person who enters the residence while the search is being conducted, if the manner of their entry reasonably indicates the person is a resident or is otherwise closely associated with the residence, such as a person entering without knocking. SEARCHES INCIDENT TO ARREST When you have lawfully arrested a person that you intend to transport for booking, you may conduct a warrantless search of the suspect’s person, and the property and area within the suspect’s immediate control. A search under these conditions is considered a search incident (contemporaneous) to arrest, which means the search takes place at, or near, the time of arrest. A search incident to arrest should not be confused with an inventory search. An inventory search identifies property as part of the booking process. NON-CONSENSUAL SEARCHES -TERRY STOP VERSUS TERRY FRISK A Terry stop is different than a Terry frisk. A Terry stop involves the non-consensual seizure of an individual based on reasonable suspicion. For the seizure to be valid, an officer must have facts that would lead a reasonable person to conclude that a crime has been, is being, or is about to be committed, and the person being investigated is somehow involved; a non-consensual search during a Terry stop is not automatically permitted. In Terry v. Ohio, 392 US 1 (1968), the United States Supreme Court determined that an officer may conduct a Terry frisk, also referred to as a pat search. A Terry frisk is a limited search for weapons, based on reasonable suspicion that the individual, who has been lawfully detained, is presently armed and dangerous. This type of frisk does not require consent, but the officer must articulate specific facts that would lead a reasonable person to conclude the individual is armed and dangerous. A generalized, non-specific concern for officer safety is not sufficient for a Terry Frisk. According to POST Learning Domain 16, the following factors may support an officer’s reasonable suspicion to conduct a Terry Frisk: • A bulge in the subject’s clothing that is the size of a potential weapon; • The subject is wearing a heavy coat when it is warm; • The subject is appearing overly nervous; • The stop occurred in an area known for violence; • The subjects outnumber the officer(s); 169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines 408 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • The subject is stopped during nighttime. While conducting a Terry Frisk, an officer may search the subject's outer clothing and garments by feeling, crushing, or twisting the clothing for weapons or hard objects that can be used to hurt the officer. Without voluntary consent, reaching inside pockets or other areas is prohibited unless the object reasonably feels like a weapon or item that could be used as a weapon, or the subject’s clothing is so rigid or heavy that an officer could not rule out the possibility of a weapon. If an officer encounters an object they cannot immediately identify as a weapon, they may not reach into the subject’s pocket and must continue with the search. If during the frisk an officer immediately identifies an object as contraband, he or she may retrieve the object; otherwise, the officer may not further manipulate an area or object unless there is still concern it may be a weapon, or an item that may be used as a weapon. Reasonable suspicion to stop an individual does not automatically mean the officer has reasonable suspicion to frisk. An officer may have reasonable suspicion to stop an individual, but may lack the additional facts that would lead a reasonable person to conclude the individual is armed and dangerous. Without these additional facts, the officer may not conduct a limited search for weapons. DETERMINING IF A PERSON IS ARMED AND DANGEROUS Depending on the nature of the crime under investigation, the Courts have held that officers who are detaining a suspect automatically have grounds to search a suspect if the crime under investigation was closely associated with any of the following: • Violence - If there is reasonable suspicion to believe the detainee committed a crime of violence; e.g., the crime under investigation is a homicide, assault with a deadly weapon, shots fired, or robbery. • Possession of weapons - The suspect was detained for possession of a concealed or illegal weapon. • Burglary – Burglary suspects often carry weapons or tools, such as knives and screwdrivers which could be used as weapons. • Car theft - Car theft suspects often carry tools that could be used as weapons. • Vehicle Pursuits - All occupants following a pursuit. • Drug sales - Any person who is lawfully detained for drug sales because guns and violence are such an integral part of drug dealing. • Parole - If the detainee is on parole or searchable probation. The following circumstances require an officer to clearly articulate the reasons for the search: • Bulge - If a bulge is consistent with a weapon or if the person is attempting to conceal the bulge. • Hostile, agitated - A suspect's overt hostility toward an officer or highly agitated state is a strong indication that he or she constitutes a danger and may justify a search. • History of hostility - If a suspect, although not overtly hostile at the time, has a history of hostility toward officers a search may be justified. 169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines 409 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Under the influence - A suspect who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs may be considered dangerous if his behavior is unpredictable or he is otherwise unable to control himself. • Failure to comply - A detainee's failure to comply with an officer's commands may be an indication of hostility and may, depending on the circumstances, justify a search (bulky clothing, putting hands in pockets after being told not to, etc.). • Nervousness - A suspect's display of nervousness, including failure to make eye contact, has little or no relevance as an indicator of danger unless the nervousness is extreme or unusual. • Furtive gesture - The phrase furtive gesture is used to describe a movement by a suspect, usually of the hands or arms that reasonably appears to have been made in response to seeing an officer and was made in such a manner that it appeared the suspect hoped the gesture would go unnoticed. A furtive gesture is of concern because of the possibility that the suspect may be attempting to hide or retrieve a weapon, but a furtive gesture by itself does not justify a search. If a gesture is furtive, the officer must clearly articulate why the gesture was threatening. • Sudden movement - While the objective of a furtive movement is to go unnoticed, the objective of a sudden movement is speed and surprise. Whether the movement justifies a search depends on exactly what the suspect did, the surrounding circumstances, and the officer's reasonable interpretation of both. If an officer believes that a sudden movement was threatening, then an officer must clearly articulate why it was threatening. The following circumstances are relevant factors; however, they are looked at in the totality of the situation: • Size of suspect - The size of the suspect by itself does not justify a search, but is sometimes noted by the court as a relative circumstance. • Officers outnumbered by suspects – There is potentially increased danger to officers when they are outnumbered. • Possession of other potential weapon - e.g., baseball bat, hammer, flashlight. • Armed and dangerous companions – This is not necessarily enough for a search, but may help to justify one depending on the existence of other factors. • Assuming the position - A suspect's act of assuming a search position without being asked is suspicious and may imply consent. • Criminal history or gang affiliations - A search is warranted if the subject is a known gang member or has a known criminal history involving violence or weapons. • Detainee on probation - In the absence of search conditions, the fact that the suspect is on probation is a relevant circumstance. • High crime area - If a detention occurs in an area where crime, gang or drug problems are rampant, this is not enough by itself to justify a search, but is a relevant circumstance that will be considered with other circumstances. • Darkness, nighttime or deserted area – The fact that it may be nighttime, dark or the area deserted are relevant circumstances and important factors in assessing the totality of a situation. 169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines 410 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Tips from citizen informants – A tip is considered reliable if from an identified informant, based on the informant's personal knowledge and the information is provided as an act of good citizenship, not gain. • Tips from police informants – A search is admissible only if there is reason to believe the tip is reliable. • Anonymous tips – A search is admissible only if there is reason to believe the tip is reliable. VEHICLE OCCUPANTS The rules for conducting a search of a driver or passengers during a detention do not change because a vehicle stop has occurred. The Courts have ruled you can order a lawfully detained driver out of a vehicle. The same rule applies to passengers due to officer safety concerns. However, if you assert any additional authority over a passenger, you will have to convince the court that your action was reasonably necessary. The following circumstances may establish the need to search a vehicle occupant: • To ensure your safety or the safety of others; • To carry out your duties relating to initial detention; or • To investigate that the passenger was involved in criminal activity. SEARCHING THE OPPOSITE GENDER If you have reason to believe a person is a threat to your safety, you should search that person immediately. The gender of a person should have no impact on officer safety practices. REPORTING Arrests resulting solely from evidence found during a search should be thoroughly documented; including the reasonable suspicion resulting in the detention and facts that support conducting a search. CONCLUSION Officers take an oath to enforce the laws of the State and uphold the Constitution of the United States and California, both of which protect individuals against unreasonable searches and seizures. Enforcing the laws, which brings about officer safety concerns, yet respecting the rights of those whom you serve, is a careful balancing act. Reasonable suspicion may not be based, in whole or part, on broad profiles that cast suspicion on entire categories of people without any individualized suspicion of the person stopped. When the community perceives that searches are being conducted arbitrarily or discriminately, the result can be anger, suspicion, litigation, and lack of community support. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 411 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 170 – Searching Techniques REVISED May 2019 SEARCHING TECHNIQUES LEGAL ASPECTS A search occurs when a government officer infringes upon an expectation of privacy that society considers reasonable. (United States v. Jacobsen, 466 U. S. 109 (1984).) Warrantless searches are presumptively illegal. When an officer sees the need to search a person, that need must be articulated in facts. A subject may provide consent thereby lessening the need for probable cause. However, any non-consensual search requires probable cause, for further information refer to Training Bulletin 169 – Search and Seizure Guidelines. PRINCIPLES OF A SEARCH TECHNIQUE The purpose of any search technique is to provide an officer with an advantage over the subject being searched; completing a thorough search before handcuffing a person helps to provide that advantage. The following are two reasons why it is advisable to search before handcuffing: • Both of the officer’s hands are occupied when handcuffing a subject; one hand controls the subject, the other hand applies the handcuffs. The subject however has one free hand to resist or reach for a weapon. If the officer has not searched the subject this could become a deadly scenario. • There are times when an officer has the factual basis to search a subject but lacks probable cause to arrest. Handcuffing before searching could conceivably constitute an unlawful arrest. The exception to searching before handcuffing is when an officer places a subject into a prone position, or when an officer is involved in a physical altercation with a subject. Officers should not use the wall search or any variation because it allows a subject four points of balance instead of two. Prison inmates commonly rehearse techniques to assault a searching officer from a wall search. An officer should never be lulled into a false sense of security because a subject appears cooperative. A cooperative demeanor does not guarantee that a subject will not become combative or attempt to escape. Officers should use the following factors to decide which search technique to utilize: • The number of subjects involved in the event; • The size of the subject and amount of control needed to take the subject safely into custody; • The subject's and your emotional, mental, and physical limitations; 170 –Searching and Handcuffing 412 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • The type of offense and the degree of cooperation from the subject; • The time of day, location, and the weather conditions surrounding the contact; • The past criminal record of the subject, if known; • Instinct combined with the ability to articulate facts based on experience and training that cause you to take a specific action. SEARCH TECHNIQUES Officers should visually search all subjects for potential weapons before approach; look at the hands, bulges in clothing, or anything in the immediate area that could be used as a weapon. The search techniques described below are organized from the least to the greatest amount of control. THE CURSORY SEARCH A cursory search may be utilized when a subject is not suspected of a felony, is cooperative, and does not appear to be a danger to the officer. The cursory search is a low-profile search technique that provides an officer with the minimum amount of control over a subject. The cursory search is a quick, thorough search of the outer layer of clothing for easily accessible weapons. It therefore only covers those areas from the pant pockets up and draws as little attention to the subject as possible. An officer can use this search technique when they have a factual basis to search, but not necessarily to arrest. THE STANDING MODIFIED SEARCH The standing modified search is a sound, safe technique to use for most misdemeanor subjects. It offers more control over a subject than the cursory search and officers may utilize it when needing a greater degree of control. THE KNEELING SEARCH The kneeling search is similar in many ways to the standing modified search. However, the technique completely takes away the subject’s balance. The kneeling search is a viable technique when faced with multiple subjects or a dangerous situation. It is also a preferred technique to choose when lying a subject on the ground or floor is undesirable or impractical. Before making contact with the subject, officers should provide verbal directions to the subject from a position of cover and with gun drawn. If the circumstances prevent this precaution, the officer should position themselves a safe distance from the subject. An officer's gun should never be used as a pointer to give directions. THE PRONE SEARCH The prone technique affords the greatest advantage over a subject. It should be used by an officer when he or she knows or has good reason to believe a subject is dangerous. For this reason, the subject remains facing the officer throughout this technique. This position allows the officer to maintain a constant visual of the subject’s hands. Maximize your protection by maintaining a safe distance, with gun drawn, and if possible behind cover. An officer's gun should never be used as a pointer to give directions. SEARCHING THE OPPOSITE GENDER Officers should exercise good judgment when searching a member of the opposite gender. However, the gender of a subject should not impact officer safety practices. If a subject is a safety threat, officers should search that person immediately. 170 –Searching and Handcuffing 413 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Male officers may search female subjects if probable cause exists in the belief that the subject is concealing a dangerous weapon or contraband, and a search by a female officer is either impossible or impractical. Under such circumstances, a male officer may perform a search of the female subject to ensure the safety of the officer, the subject, or other persons. Examples of probable cause include, but are not limited to: • The crime being investigated involves force or a threat of force, or • There is an indication that a weapon was used, or • The subject is known to have carried a weapon in the past, and • The subject's clothing could reasonably conceal a weapon SYSTEMATIC SEARCH Each search technique is mechanically different. However, all searches should be conducted systematically. A systematic search performed the same way each time ensures that no area is missed. Remember to search the half of the body that you are near; you will switch and search the opposite side later. When you search, you should use your sense of touch; feel with your fingers, do not pat. Patting can desensitize your fingertips, making it harder to feel a well-concealed weapon under the clothing. If you find a weapon, alert your partner. If able retrieve the weapon, if not control the subject’s arm as you take him/her down into prone control. When weapons are found, continue to search; never assume a subject is carrying only one weapon. For a systematic search of a person, divide the body, as shown in Figure 1, into the following seven areas: 1) Front waistband; 2) Front pants pocket; 3) Up the front torso (stopping at the bra line for female subjects); 4) Down the side of the torso and sleeves; 5) Down the back; 6) Across the back waistband; 7) Back pants pocket. Figure 1: 170 –Searching and Handcuffing 414 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents TWIST LOCK A subject’s lower legs should be searched after handcuffing; searching the lower body before handcuffing would place an officer in an unbalanced and dangerous position. A situation may arise where a subject is not handcuffed and you have adequate cause to believe the subject is concealing a weapon in a lower extremity. In such a case, utilize a twist lock to search the lower body. A twist lock may also be used for searching cooperative, but unsanitary subjects. HANDCUFFING When handcuffing a subject, ensure that the handcuffs are checked for proper fit and are double locked. Handcuffs should not be so tight as to cause injury, but not loose enough to allow the subject to slip their wrists from the cuffs. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 415 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 174 – Photographic Lineups REVISED May 2020 PHOTOGRAPHIC LINEUPS INTRODUCTION California Penal Code § 859.7 requires all law enforcement agencies to adopt regulations for conducting photographic lineups with eyewitnesses. The law does not apply to field show-ups. DEFINITIONS Photographic Lineup – a procedure in which an array of photographs, including the suspect’s photograph and additional photographs of other persons not suspected of the offense, are displayed to an eyewitness to determine whether the eyewitness can identify the suspect (standard photographs or digital photographs from law enforcement database systems may be used). Filler – a person or a photograph of a person who is not suspected of an offense and is included in an identification procedure. Blind Administration – the administrator of an eyewitness identification procedure does not know the identity of the suspect. Blinded Administration – the administrator of an eyewitness identification procedure may know who the suspect is but does not know where the suspect’s photograph has been positioned in the identification procedure. Folder Shuffle Method – a system for conducting a photo lineup by placing photographs in folders, randomly numbering and shuffling the folders, then presenting the folders so the administrator cannot see or track which photograph is being presented to the eyewitness until after the procedure is completed. California Penal Code § 859.7 PC requires the following: • The eyewitness shall provide the suspect’s description prior to conducting the identification procedure, and as close in time to the incident as possible. • The investigator conducting the identification shall use a blind administration or a blinded administration procedure. • The investigator shall state in writing the reason why blind administration was not used if applicable. • Prior to any identification procedure, an eyewitness shall be instructed of the following: - The suspect may or may not be among the persons in the identification procedure. 174 –Photo Line-ups 416 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents - Do not feel compelled to make an identification. - An identification or failure to make an identification will not end the investigation. • An identification procedure shall be composed so the fillers generally fit the eyewitness’ description of the suspect. The suspect’s photograph should resemble their appearance at the time of the offense and not unduly stand out. • Writings or information concerning any previous arrest of the suspect shall not be visible to the eyewitness. • Only one suspect shall be included in any identification procedure. • All eyewitnesses shall be separated when viewing an identification procedure. • Nothing shall be said to the eyewitness that might influence the eyewitness’ identification of the suspect. • If the eyewitness identifies a person they believe to be the suspect, all of the following shall apply: - The investigator shall immediately inquire as to the eyewitness’ confidence level in the identification and record in writing, verbatim, what the eyewitness says. - Information concerning the identified person shall not be given to the eyewitness prior to obtaining the eyewitness’ statement of confidence level and documenting the exact words of the eyewitness. - The officer shall not validate or invalidate the eyewitness’ identification. • An audio and video recording shall be made of the identification procedure. • Whether it is feasible to make a video recording shall be determined on a case-by- case basis. When it is not feasible to make an audio and video recording, an audio recording alone may be used, and the investigator shall state in writing the reason a video recording was not feasible. ADMINISTERING THE PHOTOGRAPHIC LINEUP Officers and detectives can use either blind or blinded administration. In either case, the officer or detective administrating the photographic lineup should advise the victim/witness of the Photographic Lineup Admonishment (PD Form 3100.006) and ensure the form is signed and completed. Field officers should not conduct photographic lineups in the field without prior approval from the detective assigned to the case. A field officer investigating a new case that has not been filed and assigned to a detective detail, should first consult with a detective or sergeant from the investigative detail and a field supervisor for approval before proceeding with the photographic lineup. Non-sworn employees who are assigned to the Investigations Bureau and under the supervision of a sworn police officer/detective can assist in the creation of photographic lineups. Only sworn personnel should administer a photographic lineup. Once a photographic lineup is completed, the original lineup should be booked as evidence and a copy stored in the case file. PHOTOGRAPHIC LINEUP PREPARATION AND PROCEDURE 174 –Photo Line-ups 417 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Blind Administration The officer creates the photographic lineup by printing a photograph of the suspect and five filler photographs of other persons who generally fit the eyewitness’ description of the suspect. The suspect photograph should not unduly stand out. The photos can be full size, sized to fit on a single sheet of paper or sized for multiple photos on a single page. Once the photographic array is created, provide the array to another officer or detective who will then administer the identification procedure. This second officer/detective administering the lineup cannot know the identity of the suspect. Blinded Administration This method allows the administrator of the lineup to know the identity of the suspect but uses the folder shuffle method to randomize the location of the suspect within the photographic array. A blinded administration of the folder shuffle method is prepared using the following steps: 1. Use one suspect photograph and five filler photographs along with six file folders. The filler photographs should generally fit the eyewitness’ description of the suspect. The photograph of the person suspected as the perpetrator should, if practicable, resemble the appearance of the suspect at the time of the offense and not unduly stand out. 2. Affix one filler photo to a folder and number that folder #1. 3. Place the suspect’s photograph and four filler photographs into the remaining five separate folders. Shuffle the five folders so the administrator is unaware of which folder contains the suspect’s photograph, and then number those folders #2-#6 accordingly. 4. Instruct the witness by reading the Photographic Lineup Admonishment, per PD Form 3100.006, including that the suspect may or may not be contained in the photographs and that the administrator does not know which folder, if any, contains the suspect. 5. Without looking at the photographs in the folders, hand each of the six folders to the witness individually and in sequential order. The witness should look at the entire set of folders/photographs prior to selecting a photograph, if any. If the witness selects a photograph without looking at the entire series of folders/photographs, the administrator should remind the witness to look at all photographs. If the witness selects a photograph, the administrator should immediately inquire as to the witness’ confidence level in the identification. 6. Document and record the results of the procedure, including the date, time, and location of the lineup procedure, the name of the administrator, the names of all of the individuals present during the lineup, the number of photographs shown, the order in which the folders/photographs were presented, the witness’ level of confidence in their own words, and any additional information the administrator deems pertinent to the procedure. 174 –Photo Line-ups 418 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 7. Once complete, the lineup (photo array) should be considered evidence. The original should be booked as evidence and a copy stored in the case file. Once the identification procedure is complete, it is acceptable to mark directly on the photos (i.e. writing “#4” directly on the photo in folder 4). You may also affix the photos to the folders (staples, tape, etc.) if needed. If you write on the photos or affix the photos to their folders, ensure you document it in your report. If Blinded Administration is used for the identification procedure, it must be documented why it was used instead of Blind Administration. The law prefers that Blind Administration be the method of administering the lineup procedure. Blinded Administration should only be used when there is an articulable reason. Other Methods The law allows for other methods of administering photographic lineups. Other methods include any other procedure that achieves “neutral administration” and prevents the lineup administrator from knowing where the suspect’s photograph, as applicable, has been placed or positioned in the identification procedure. CONCLUSION Valid eyewitness identifications play an important role in enhancing the investigative process, in solving crimes and securing rightful convictions, and in exonerating those not involved in the crime. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigation Bureau 419 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 175 – LB Transit Bus Video Evidence Review & Collection REVISED November 2005 LONG BEACH TRANSIT BUS-RELATED VIDEO EVIDENCE REVIEW AND COLLECTION PROCEDURES INTRODUCTION Video cameras have been installed in over half of Long Beach Transit buses; plans are in progress to install video cameras on their remaining fleet. Video evidence from these cameras is recorded on a computer hard drive on the bus. This video evidence can be reviewed and collected as evidence for prosecuting bus- related crimes. The Chief of Police has approved the following procedures for the review and collection of Long Beach Transit bus-related video evidence. PROCEDURE Should a crime occur on, or relating to, a Long Beach Transit bus, first determine whether the bus was equipped with an on-board video surveillance system. If so, note the bus number and contact any on-duty Transit Enforcement Officer (Radio Designators “TC (Tom-Charles) 1 – 6. All Transit Enforcement Officers are designated contact points for Long Beach Transit and shall facilitate the review and collection of any applicable video evidence. In the absence of an on-duty Transit Enforcement Officer, the Transit Enforcement Detail Sergeant can be called on his Department-issued cellular phone (number on file with the Communications Division). The Transit Enforcement Detail Sergeant shall then facilitate the review and collection of any applicable video evidence. The Transit Enforcement Officers/Sergeant contacted for this purpose shall, in turn, contact the Long Beach Transit Administrator responsible for maintaining access to on- board video data collection systems, and request a review of the appropriate data. If the reviewed data proves to be of evidentiary value, the designated Long Beach Transit Administrator shall provide a DVD copy of the evidence to the requesting Transit Enforcement Officer. Transit Enforcement Officers receiving DVD-based evidence from Long Beach Transit shall complete the required Long Beach Transit forms and then book the DVD into evidence according to established Police Department evidence collection procedures. 175 – LB Transit Bus Video Evidence Review & Collection 420 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Transit Enforcement Officers booking such DVD evidence shall include in the evidence report the name, title and contact information of the Long Beach Transit Administrator providing the DVD. Long Beach Transit understands that the Administrator providing the DVD to Transit Enforcement Officers may be called to testify as a witness and has agreed to make the Administrator available for that purpose in any subsequent criminal court hearing. CONCLUSION The Long Beach Transit Enforcement Detail is working in partnership with Long Beach Transit to provide valuable bus-related video evidence for the purpose of successfully prosecuting bus-related crimes. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 421 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 177 – Reserve Police Officer Duties REVISED May 2004 RESERVE POLICE OFFICER DUTIES INTRODUCTION Reserve police officers are community members who chose to dedicate a portion of their time to community service by donating needed services to the Police Department to assist with the police mission. A reserve police officer for the City of Long Beach volunteers to work without financial compensation in order to supplement, not replace, sworn staffing levels in the furtherance of the Police Department mission. RESERVE LEVELS POST has also established levels of authority and minimum training requirements for reserve officers. Level I reserve officers possess the highest amount of authority and training requirements and Level III reserve officers have the least amount of authority and training requirements. HIRING STANDARDS Hiring standards shall be the same as for a full time regular police officer. Level III Reserve • Academy Training - Level III reserve police officers shall successfully complete a course prescribed by section 832 PC. Previously this certification was known as Module A of the Reserve Police Officers training course • Duties (PC 832.6 (a) (3)) - Level III reserve police officers shall carry out limited support duties not requiring general law enforcement powers in their routine performance. Level III reserve police officers must never be assigned to a position where there is an expectation of an arrest. A Level III shall be supervised in the “accessible vicinity” by a Level I reserve officer or a full-time regular police officer Duties include: – Traffic control and parking enforcement – Security at parades and sporting events – Report taking and evidence transportation – Other duties that are not likely to result in physical arrests – A Level III reserve officer may transport prisoners without immediate supervision Typically, Level III reserve police officers are assigned to such duties as technical and scientific services, search and rescue, administrative support and community public information. 177 – Reserve Police Officer 422 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Level II Reserve • Academy Training – Level II reserve police officers must successfully complete the course prescribed by POST for a Level II reserve police officer. Previously this certification was known as Module A & B of the Reserve Police Officer's Course. A level II reserve officer must satisfy the continuing professional training requirements • Duties (PC 832.6 (a) (2)) - The level II reserve police officer, upon completion of FTO training shall only work under the immediate supervision of a peace officer who has completed a Basic Training Course. The Basic Training Courses are the Basic Academy, the extended Basic Academy (Level I Reserve), or the module "D" and/or Level I modular courses Duties include: − Prevention and detection of crime − General enforcement of the laws − Without immediate supervision they may be assigned those limited duties authorized for a level III reserve police officer − Other duties assigned by COP Level I Reserve • Academy Training – Level I reserve police officers must successfully complete the course prescribed by POST for a Level I reserve police officer. Previously this certification was known as Modules A, B and C of the Reserve Police Officer's Course. Any Level I reserve police officer appointed after 1/1/97 must have completed the same basic training course as prescribed by POST for a full time police officer • Duties - Level I reserve police officers, upon completion of FTO training, will be assigned to the prevention and detection of crime and the general enforcement of the laws of this state and the City of Long Beach. Duties include: – Patrol - working as a partner with any full time police officer or Level I reserve police officer. A Level I reserve officer may work as a single officer patrol unit upon successful completion of the Single Officer FTO Program – Bicycle patrol – Detectives (adult and juvenile) – Vice – Traffic – Other duties assigned by COP CONCLUSION The Long Beach Reserve Unit stands ready and willing to assist any unit or member of the Long Beach Police Department in serving the citizens of Long Beach. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 423 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 178 – Court Appearances REVISED February 2001 COURT APPEARANCES INTRODUCTION Long Beach Police Department employees are required to know and understand the subpoena and court appearance procedures outlined in the Department Procedures Manual and the Police Officers’ Association Memorandum of Understanding (M.O.U.). Attendance at an adult or juvenile court or quasi-judicial hearing is considered an official duty when ordered by subpoena, or if directed by a commanding or court liaison officer. Employees hold sole responsibility for their appearance and testimony in court, and this duty must be taken seriously. DRESS CODE Ensure that you are punctual and properly dressed. When appearing during your off duty hours you must wear either a uniform or business attire, unless the prosecuting attorney requests that you wear specific clothing that is relevant to their case. When appearing during normal scheduled work hours, wear attire appropriate to your duty assignment. COURT CALL STATUS Sworn officers in an “off duty” status who are directed to “be there” or placed “on call” by the District Attorney, City Prosecutor, or the Court Affairs Sergeant will be compensated accordingly. For further reference officers should refer to the Police Officer’s Association M.O.U. Employees who are subpoenaed to court in Orange and Los Angeles Counties will be credited with driving time from the Public Safety Building to the court of appearance and return. For appearances out of Orange or Los Angeles Counties, the Court Affairs Sergeant will review travel arrangements and approve compensation for travel and court time in advance. Employees in a “be there” status will report to Court Affairs and sign in on or before the time stated on the subpoena. For each ½ hour an employee is late in reporting to court, not less than ½ hour will be deducted from the employee’s overtime. When an employee is already on duty and must appear in court, he/she will sign in at the Court Affairs Office, then check in personally with the District Attorney handling the case. An employee in an “on call” status who is notified to report to court will do so as soon as possible, but, no later than one hour after such notification. Presiding judges have been 178 – Court Appearances 424 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents known to impose body attachments and fines on officers who were late or failed to appear in court. After being notified to appear in court, the employee must go directly to Court Affairs and sign in. Employees attending court are in an on-duty status and are under the direct supervision of the Court Affairs Sergeant. COURT UNAVAILABLITY Any employee who finds it necessary to be excused from a court appearance must direct such requests to the Court Affairs Sergeant. If an employee is going to be on vacation or away at training, he/she must submit a vacation schedule or training schedule to the Court Affair’s Sergeant, listing cases that will occur during that time period and noting whether they are available or unavailable for court. Court Affairs must receive this information no later than one workweek prior to the scheduled vacation or training class. FILING FOR OVERTIME Employees filing “be there” overtime must submit overtime cards to the Court Affairs Office within 24 hours. “On call” overtime must be filed within 24 hours or on the first day upon returning to work after days off. “On call” hours are from 0930 to 1230 for A.M. and 1330 to 1630 for P.M. COURT CALENDAR The court calendar is posted daily outside the Court Affairs Office, located on the first floor of the Public Safety Building. The calendar is printed daily at 1700 hours for the following court day, and copies of the calendar are forwarded to the Business Desk at the main station. Each substation will print the court calendar after 1700 hours, making the following days calendar available for employees. It is the employee’s responsibility to check the calendar for the status of cases on a daily basis. Employees can check their court status either on the posted hard copy of the court calendar, or they can log on to the host connection and check the calendar electronically. The following is a list of court dispositions that will appear on the electronic court calendar: • Pending Appearance Required • Excused No Appearance Required • Resubmitted No Appearance Required • Copped No Appearance Required • Continued No Appearance Required • B/W (Bench Warrant) No Appearance Required • Pled No Appearance Required Continued/Trailed indicates the case was not presented on that date. If a date appears after this designation, it is the officer’s responsibility to check the calendar on that date as to appearance status. 178 – Court Appearances 425 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Once an officer’s case has been assigned to a courtroom, only the judge can excuse him/her. Officers will remain in the courtroom until a case disposition has been reached and/or the judge personally excuses the officer. TRIAL AND HEARING ATTENDANCE The following is a list of trial and hearing locations: • Misdemeanor Trials Superior Court • Felony Trials Superior Court • Preliminary Hearings Superior Court • Juvenile Hearings Superior Court, Room 245 o4 246 • Juvenile Traffic Hearings Superior Court, Room 20 • DMV Hearings Usually at DMV or telephonic hearing • Alcoholic Beverage Control Location indicated on notice to appear • Civil Trials/Arbitration Boards Location indicated on notice to appear • Parole Hearing Los Angeles County Jail • Probation Hearing Location indicated on notice to appear CONCLUSION Police Department employees must present themselves in a professional manner when appearing in court. Attitude, appearance and punctuality are three characteristics that portray a positive image of both the employee and the Police Department. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 426 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 179 – Communicable Diseases REVISED January 2023 COMMUNICABLE DISEASES INTRODUCTION The Long Beach Police Department (LBPD) strives to provide a safe and healthy work environment by establishing procedures and guidelines to limit the transmission of communicable diseases in the workplace. This training bulletin outlines communicable disease prevention and supplements the City’s Communicable Disease Prevention Program. Training Bulletin 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis will outline procedures to follow after an exposure has occurred. DEFINITIONS • Communicable Disease: A disease transmitted by direct or indirect human contact • Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): Equipment worn to minimize exposure to hazards that cause serious workplace injuries and illnesses, including but not limited to masks, protective eyewear, and coveralls TYPES OF EXPOSURE There are varying levels and types of exposure to communicable diseases. Airborne diseases and contagious skin diseases are generally more easily transmitted than bloodborne pathogens. Airborne Disease An exposure to an airborne disease (e.g., colds, influenza, tuberculosis) occurs when an infected person expels droplets or small particles in the air, through acts like coughing, sneezing, or talking and another person inhales the infected droplets. Bloodborne Pathogens An exposure to a bloodborne pathogen (e.g., Hepatitis B virus (HBV), Hepatitis C virus (HCV) and Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV)) occurs when there is direct contact with infected bodily fluids. This can occur through blood transfusions, needle sticks, human bites, or when blood contacts broken skin. Contagious Skin Disease An exposure to a contagious skin disease (e.g., scabies, MRSA, and ringworm) occurs when a person contacts the infected skin or contaminated surface. 427 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents COMMUNICABLE DISEASE PREVENTION PROCEDURES To reduce their risk of exposure, officers should: 1. Assume all subjects are potential carriers, even if they are not symptomatic. 2. Cover all cuts and abrasions with waterproof bandages. 3. Wear disposable gloves when handling a subject, clothing, equipment, or evidence suspected of being soiled with bodily fluids or other contagion. Leather gloves should not be worn. If they become contaminated, they must be disposed of in accordance with applicable laws pertaining to the disposal of biohazardous waste. 4. Wear proper PPE when an officer is contacting a contaminated subject. 5. Use authorized resuscitation masks with one-way valves whenever an officer performs CPR or respiratory resuscitation. 6. Handle all sharp instruments such as knives, scalpels, and needles with extraordinary care and consider them potentially infectious. a. Officers should not place their hands in areas (e.g., pockets, bags, containers, center consoles, etc.) where sharp instruments might be hidden. An initial visual search of the area should be conducted, and the officer can ask involved subjects if there are any sharp instruments hidden in these areas. b. Manipulation of needles should be minimized whenever possible, and should not be recapped, bent, broken, or removed from a disposable syringe. Needles should be placed in a puncture-resistant container when being collected for evidentiary or disposal purposes. 7. Not smoke, eat, drink, bite nails, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses near potentially contaminated areas or people. Transport and Custody When transporting a potentially infected subject, officers should: 1. Consider the availability of PPE and severity of offense when making the decision to arrest. 2. Limit suspect movement and the number of officers contacting the subject. 3. When possible, bandage or appropriately cover actively bleeding wounds and transport the subject separate from other subjects. 4. When officers transfer custody of a subject to another person, they should notify the person the subject is potentially infected with a communicable disease or has bodily fluids on their person. 5. After taking a suspect into custody and transporting them to booking, place the suspect directly in the temporary holding cell area for processing and have them change into uncontaminated clothing. When possible, a sign should be posted advising others the holding cell contains an infected or contaminated subject. 6. If officers suspect a subject is infected with an Airborne Disease, the officer and the subject should wear proper PPE. The subject should be instructed to follow proper hygiene etiquette, such as coughing into their elbow. 7. Document on the Arrestee Medical Screening Form a subject has a communicable disease or was contaminated with bodily fluids. 428 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Disinfection When an employee’s skin, clothing, or equipment is exposed to bodily fluids, contaminated clothing, or an infected subject they should use the applicable disinfectant procedure listed below: • After removal of protective gloves, officers should immediately and thoroughly wash their hands and any other unprotected skin surfaces with soap and water. Alcohol- based hand cleaning solutions or antiseptic towelettes should be used where soap and water are unavailable. • Lightly contaminated clothing should not be laundered at home. It is recommended that a third-party professional cleaning service launder the clothing. • Grossly contaminated clothing should be placed in a biohazards bag and removed for disposal by a licensed hazardous waste disposal company. • All disposable equipment or cleaning materials contaminated with bodily fluids should be bagged and removed for disposal by a licensed hazardous waste disposal company. • Non-Disposable equipment should be cleaned by first removing all visible bodily fluids with an absorbent cloth and then cleansed with a hospital-grade disinfectant. When a Department vehicle is used to transport an infected subject, a subject excreting bodily fluids, a subject wearing contaminated clothing, or if bodily fluids are spilled in the vehicle, the below listed disinfectant procedure should be followed: 1. Notify a supervisor and take the vehicle to fleet as soon as possible to be disinfected. 2. Post a sign on the vehicle indicating it is contaminated with an infectious disease while awaiting decontamination. 3. Clean vehicles by first removing all visible bodily fluids with an absorbent cloth and then cleanse it with a hospital-grade disinfectant. Supplies • Divisional Administrative Aides should ensure communicable disease supplies, including PPE, disinfectant, and first aid supplies are well stocked and stored in an easily accessible location. • Department vehicles should be stocked with communicable-disease supplies. • Employees who use the supplies carried in police vehicles should replenish them as they are used. • Employees should keep disposable gloves on their person while on patrol. Link to City of Long Beach List of Reportable Communicable Disease REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Business Operations Bureau 429 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis REVISED March 2023 EXPOSURE AND POST EXPOSURE PROPHYLAXIS PURPOSE The Department recognizes its responsibility to provide employees with medical care for job-incurred medical injuries and associated medical problems, which are considered injured on duty (IOD) incidents. An exposure to a bloodborne pathogen, airborne disease, or contagious skin disease may occur when contacting an individual who is a carrier of a communicable disease. All infections result from an exposure, but most exposures do not result in an infection. Training Bulletin 179 – Communicable Diseases outlines communicable diseases and exposure prevention. This Training Bulletin outlines the procedures to follow when an officer has had a communicable disease exposure. EXPOSURES TO BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS Employees who have experienced a possible exposure to a bloodborne pathogen should immediately be treated by medical personnel for potential exposure to bloodborne pathogens. The employee should be provided with the bloodborne pathogen post- exposure evaluation, follow-up, and counseling. Medical personnel will determine the significance of the exposure and which of the below described follow-up procedures are necessary. Post-Exposure Evaluation & Follow-up Following a report of an exposure incident, the employee and supervisor should refer to the City’s Exposure Control/Bloodborne Pathogens Program 5.01, specifically “5.6 Employees Shall” and “6.4 Exposure Incidents and Follow-ups.” A physician should evaluate and certify the significance of the exposure, including its nature and extent. A medical examination will be performed, and baseline blood samples should be drawn, with appropriate consents. If the employee declines medical testing, post-exposure evaluation and follow-up, a waiver (provided by the physician) must be signed. Efforts should be made to obtain consent from the source individual to obtain a blood sample and study. If the source individual refuses testing, legal alternatives may be sought. 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis 430 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Law Enforcement Personnel Bloodborne Exposure California Penal Code §7510(a), (b), and (c) as well as California Health and Safety Code §121060 and 121060(a)(2) gives law enforcement the right to request blood be drawn from a source individual after they have been exposed to blood or bodily fluids as defined by 121060.1. An officer who believes that they have come into contact with the bodily fluids of an infected person should report the incident through the completion of the “Report of Request and Decision for HIV Testing” (State of California, Health and Welfare Agency, DHS 8459 [11/89]). These forms are available at Occupational Health, or the contract hospital. Utilizing this form, the officer, upon seeking medical attention, may request an HIV test of the person who is the subject of the report. The report should include the names of witnesses to the incident, names of the persons involved in the incident and, when feasible, any statements taken. The officer should forward the completed form to Occupational Health as soon as possible. Note: Refer to Manual § 7.1.13.9 Blood Sample Without Consent for further on procedures for obtaining a blood sample. If after reviewing Manual § 7.1.13.9 an employee determines the need for a court ordered blood sample they may utilize the Peace Officer’s Petition and Request for Search Warrants within attachments A and B of this training bulletin. EXPOSURES TO AIRBORNE DISEASE OR CONTAGIOUS SKIN DISEASE Employees who have experienced a possible exposure to an airborne or contagious skin disease listed on the Department of Health and Human Services Reportable Disease List, or other serious airborne and/or contagious skin disease not listed, should seek medical treatment as needed. WORKER’S COMPENSATION DOCUMENTATION (IOD) The Department has an obligation to provide employees with medical care for job- incurred injuries and illnesses. This obligation applies to any communicable disease that is contracted while the employee is working. All reported incidents will be managed by the Department safety liaison who will coordinate with Occupational Health and Workers Compensation to ensure appropriate medical treatment and follow-up is provided. Employee Responsibilities The employee has specific legal and medical responsibilities to the City when claiming an on-the-job exposure to a communicable disease. For further detail refer to Job- Incurred Injuries (IOD) § 6.6.15 and Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome (AIDS) Training § 6.8.15. When an employee has an exposure, they should: 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis 431 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Report any known contact with a carrier of a communicable disease to their immediate supervisor. • Report to Occupational health: − For Bloodborne pathogen exposures, the employee should report immediately to Occupational Health, the contract hospital or, in an emergency, to the nearest hospital, to provide a “base line” blood sample to establish that the infection did not exist prior to the exposure date and to be offered prophylactic treatment. Refusal to provide a blood sample may result in the City of Long Beach declining to cover medical expenses as outlined under the Worker’s Compensation Rules and Regulations. − For Airborne or contagious skin disease exposures, the employee should Report to Occupational Health to for screening and relevant treatment options. Supervisor Responsibilities The supervisor should: • Respond to the scene of the employee exposure • Ensure the exposed employee is transported, without delay, to obtain medical treatment, if necessary • Complete all appropriate documentation, including the Employee’s Claim for Workers Compensation Benefits and related forms • Notify the Watch Commander • Bloodborne Pathogen specific exposures: − Should ensure that the source individual’s status is ascertained, but leave the actual questioning of the individual to medical personnel − If the individual’s communicable disease status is not known, and a blood sample will be needed, follow the procedures outlined in 7.1.13.9 Blood Sample Without Consent Watch Commander Responsibilities The Watch Commander should ensure the incident is documented in the Watch Commander’s Log. RECORD KEEPING The Department should maintain written records of all job-incurred communicable diseases exposures. The records should be maintained in accordance with federal regulations, in a secured area with restricted access and in conformance with applicable privacy laws. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES Employees should reference the following resources for additional information: 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis 432 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Department Manual Section 6.6.15 Injuries - Job-Incurred (IOD) • Department Manual Section 6.8.15 Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome (AIDS) – Training • City Policy and Procedures Exposure Control/Bloodborne Pathogens Program 5.01 • City Injured Workers Procedures Manual REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Business Operations Bureau Attachment A, Peace Officer’s Petitions Attachment B, Request for Search Warrants 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis 433 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Attachment A - Peace Officer’s Petition ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ (Name of Petitioner, Name, Address, and Phone Number of Employing Agency) ___________________________________ ___________________________________ (Title of Court) PEOPLE OF THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, ) CASE NO. ) Plaintiff, ) PEACE OFFICER'S PETITION ) FOR ORDER TO TEST vs. ) ACCUSED'S BLOOD ) (HEALTH & SAFETY CODE) Defendant. ) (SECTION 121060) TO THE COURT: I declare under penalty of perjury that the following is true and accurate to the best of my knowledge and belief: 1. My name is ________________________________________________________, (print or type name) and I am a _________________________________________________________. (describe status as peace officer) 2. On ____________________________________________________ the defendant, (date and time) __________________________________________________________ interfered (name) with my official duties by biting, scratching, spitting or transferring blood or other bodily fluids to me and has been so charged. During the commission of this offense offense, ________________________________________________________ was (identify the bodily fluid involved) transferred from the accused to me. 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis 434 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 3.The facts, in brief, supporting my petition and relating to the possible transfer of bodily fluid are as follows: ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ (Use additional pages if necessary, police reports may be attached.) 4. On the basis of the facts set forth in this petition, and attachments hereto, and the Court documents in this case and pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 121060, I request that the Court grant this petition for an order to test the accused’s blood for medically-accepted indications of exposure to or infection by human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), HIV-related conditions, and such other communicable diseases as the Court deems appropriate. __________________________ _____________________________ (date) (Petitioner’s Signature) ORDER FOR HEARING Good cause appearing, therefore, a hearing on the above petition is set for _______________________ at ____________ in Division/Department ____________, (date) (time) of the above-entitled court. __________________________ _____________________________ (date) (Judge) ______________________________ 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis 435 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Attachment B - Request for Search Warrant ______________________________ ______________________________ ______________________________ (Name, Address, and Phone Number of Victim) ___________________________________ ___________________________________ (Title of Court) PEOPLE OF THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, CASE NO. ) Plaintiff, ) REQUEST FOR SEARCH ) WARRANT TO TEST vs. ) DEFENDANT'S BLOOD ) (PENAL CODE SECTION) Defendant. ) ( 1524.1) TO THE COURT: I declare under penalty of perjury that the following is true and accurate to the best of my knowledge and belief: 1.My name is ________________________________________________________, (print or type name) and I am a victim in the above entitled case. 2.The offense(s) charges in this case is (are) _________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ 3.During the commission of the charged offense(s), ___________________________ (describe bodily fluid) was transferred from the defendant, ________________________________, to me. (Name) 4.[This paragraph applies only if defendant has been held to answer. Otherwise, it should be stricken.] The defendant was held to answer at a Preliminary Hearing in this case in_________________________________________ on __________________. (Court) (date) 5. (This paragraph applies only if the charged offense is a misdemeanor or if a preliminary hearing has not yet been heard.] The facts, in brief, showing commission of the charged offense(s) is(are) as follows: 180 – Exposure and Post Exposure Prophylaxis 436 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ (Use additional pages if necessary, police reports and additional affidavits may be attached.) 6. The transfer of bodily fluid took place in the following manner: __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ (Use additional pages if necessary, police reports and additional affidavits may be attached.) 7. On the basis of these facts, the Court documents in this case, and other affidavits filed in support of this request, and pursuant to Penal Code Section 1524.1, by this writing I request this Court issue a search warrant for the purpose of testing the defendant’s blood for the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), component of HIV and antibodies of HIV. __________________________ _____________________________ (date) (Signature) ORDER FOR HEARING ON SEARCH WARRANT REQUEST Good cause appearing, therefore, a hearing on the above request is set for _______________________ at ____________ in Division/Department ____________, (date) (time) of the above-entitled court. __________________________ _____________________________ (date) (Judge) 437 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 182 – Elder/Dependent Adult Abuse REVISED September 2022 ABUSE OF AN ELDER OR DEPENDENT ADULT PURPOSE The State of California enacted statutes designed to address neglect, sexual, physical, financial, and emotional abuse of dependent adults and elders. The law requires mandated reporters to ensure a report is generated in all incidents of suspected physical abuse against elders and dependent adults. This training bulletin guides officers when conducting a comprehensive investigation and producing a written report. DEFINITIONS AND LEGAL STATUTES The following definitions will assist officers when conducting investigations of alleged elder and dependent adult abuse: • Elder or dependent adult abuse - physical abuse, neglect, financial abuse, abandonment, isolation, abduction, or other treatment with resulting physical harm, pain, or mental suffering; or the deprivation by a care custodian of goods or services that are necessary to avoid physical harm or mental suffering. (Welfare and Institutions Code § 15610.07; Penal Code § 368.5 and 368.6 “Senior and Disability Justice Act”) • Dependent adult - any person age 18-64 with physical or mental limitations restricting his or her ability to carry out normal activities or restricting his or her ability to protect his or her rights. • Elder – any person aged 65 or older. • Fiduciary abuse – taking, secreting, or appropriating an elder/dependent adult’s money or property by a person having care or custody of the elder/dependent adult. Also applied to a person standing in a position of trust to the elder/dependent adult, for any use or purpose not in the due and lawful execution of the trust. • Health Care Practitioner – a person who engages in acts that are the subject of licensure or regulation under Division 2 of the Business and Professions Code – Healing Arts • Isolation – this can involve false imprisonment or physical/mental constraints, which prevent an elder/dependent adult from activities including receiving mail, telephone calls, or contact with family, friends, concerned persons, or other visitors. Isolation does not constitute abuse when the caretaker is following orders from a doctor as part of medical care. • Mental suffering –fear, agitation, confusion, severe depression, or other forms of serious emotional distress resulting from threats, harassment, or other forms of abuse. 182 – Elder/Dependant Adult Abuse 438 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Neglect – when a person who has care or custody of an elder/dependent adult fails to provide reasonable care, including failure to assist in personal hygiene, the provision of food, clothing, or shelter, medical/mental health care, or protection from safety hazards. • Physical Abuse – assault, battery, unreasonable physical constraints, prolonged deprivation of food or water, sexual assault, use of physical/chemical restraints, or use of psychotropic medication for punishment or beyond what was ordered by a medical professional. §15656 WIC or §368(b)(1) PC - a person who knows or reasonably should know that a person is an elder or dependent adult and who, under circumstances or conditions likely to produce great bodily harm or death, willfully causes or permits any elder or dependent adult to suffer, or inflicts thereon unjustifiable physical pain or mental suffering, or having the care or custody of any elder or dependent adult, willfully causes or permits the person or health of the elder or dependent adult to be injured, or willfully causes or permits the elder or dependent adult to be placed in a situation in which his or her person or health is endangered. §368(d) PC – a person, who is not a caretaker, who violates any provision of the law proscribing theft or embezzlement, forgery, or fraud, or who violates §530.5 PC proscribing identity theft, concerning the property or personal identifying information of an elder or dependent adult, and who knows or reasonably should know that the victim is an elder or dependent adult. §368(e) PC – a caretaker of an elder or dependent adult who violates any provision of law proscribing theft, embezzlement, forgery, or fraud, or who violates section §530.5 PC proscribing identity theft, concerning the property or personal identifying information of that elder or dependent adult. PROCEDURES When called upon to investigate suspected elder/dependent adult abuse, the officer should: • Arrange emergency medical treatment, if needed • Notify the Child Abuse Detail if it meets the CART criteria per LBPD manual § 8.7.9.1 • If the elder/dependent adult’s safety is endangered, work with adult protective services for safe placement. • If the elder/dependent adult is capable, interview them away from the caregiver • Examine the elder/dependent adult for injuries. - Remove clothing and check the body for old or new injuries, have a witness present during this exam - Take pictures of injuries, wounds, and bruises • Make appropriate agency notifications, as described below • File the appropriate electronic incident reports and upload photographic evidence. Include complete statements from the victim, suspects, witnesses, and a detailed description of injuries or living conditions. The officer should describe unusual odors, unusual or excessive noises, inoperable appliances, lack of food, running water, or 182 – Elder/Dependant Adult Abuse 439 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents other utilities, and any other factors that led them to believe elder/dependent adult abuse or neglect was occurring. REQUIRED NOTIFICATIONS Law enforcement is mandated to notify certain agencies of physical abuse or neglect involving an elder or dependent adult (§15630 WIC). The following agencies shall be notified, as soon as practical, in the following circumstances: • The Department of Public Social Services, Adult Protective Services (APS), must be notified when the alleged abuse occurred in a private home or hospital. - 24-Hour Elder Abuse Hotline 1-800-992-1660 • The “Long Term Care Ombudsman Coordinator” must be notified when the alleged abuse occurred in a long-term care facility. - Long Term Care Ombudsman Coordinator 1-800-334-9473 • The Los Angeles County Department of Mental Health can be notified when the alleged abuse occurred in a State Mental Hospital. - Los Angeles County, Department of Mental Health 213-738-4888 or 800-700- 9996 • The appropriate licensing agency must be notified when a health care practitioner is accused of committing the alleged abuse or neglect. For example: - Physicians: Notify State Medical Board online at File a Complaint | MBC (ca.gov) or by calling 1-800-633-2322 - Nurses: Notify the Board of Nursing online at The Complaint Process (ca.gov) or by mail at Board of Registered Nursing, Attn: Complaint Intake, PO Box 944210, Sacramento, CA 94244-2100, or by Fax: (916) 574-7693. For questions contact 916-557-1213 REPORTING In all incidents of alleged elder/dependent adult physical abuse, an officer should file an electronic incident report, even if the victim does not desire prosecution. The officer should also complete the Report of Suspected Dependent Adult/Elder Abuse form (SOC 341) in all incidents of alleged elder/dependent adult physical abuse. The officer will forward a copy of the Dependent Adult/Elder Abuse form (SOC 341) to the concerned agency. The officer should document the required notifications in the electronic incident report and Section I of the Dependent Adult/Elder Abuse form (SOC 341), including the date and time of the notification and the name and phone number of the contacted official(s). When APS is the agency contacted, the officer should also document the address of the regional office that will handle the incident. The offense listed in the electronic incident report shall reflect the appropriate criminal violation and the narrative statement should indicate if the incident involved an elder or a dependent adult. 182 – Elder/Dependant Adult Abuse 440 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents A report is still required, when a specific criminal violation cannot be identified, or the victim or other facts do not substantiate the informant’s allegations. In such cases, a Report of Suspected Dependent Adult/Elder Abuse form (SOC 341) should also be submitted. CONFIDENTIALITY All reports regarding the suspected abuse of an elder or dependent adult are confidential. The information in the reports should only be released to individuals with a legal reason for access; including but not limited to protective service agencies, The Long-Term Care Ombudsman Coordinator, law enforcement agencies, and a District Attorney in a criminal prosecution. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 441 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jim McDonnell, Chief of Police 186 – Communicating with the Deaf or Hard of Hearing REVISED June 2012 COMMUNICATING WITH PEOPLE WHO ARE DEAF OR HARD OF HEARING OVERVIEW It is the policy of the Long Beach Police Department to ensure that a consistently high level of service is provided to all community members, including people who are deaf or hard of hearing. LBPD has specific legal obligations under the Americans with Disabilities Act and the Rehabilitation Act to communicate effectively with people who are deaf or hard of hearing. To carry out these policies and legal obligations, LBPD instructs its officers and employees as follows: • People who are deaf or hard of hearing are entitled to a level of service equivalent to that provided to any other person. • The LBPD will make every effort to ensure that its officers and employees communicate effectively with people who are deaf or hard of hearing. • Effective communication with a person who is deaf or hard of hearing involved in an incident, whether as a victim, witness, suspect, or arrestee, is essential in ascertaining what actually occurred, the urgency of the matter, and type of situation. • The type of aid required for effective communication depends upon an individual’s usual method of communication, while factoring in the nature, importance, and duration of the communication. Officers should defer to the expressed choices of the individual unless: ▪ Another equally effective way of communicating exists, given the circumstances, length, complexity, and importance of the communication, as well as the communication skills of the deaf or hard of hearing person. ▪ Doing so would fundamentally alter the nature of the law enforcement activity in question. • In many circumstances, oral communication supplemented by gestures and visual aids or an exchange of written notes will be an effective means of communicating with people who are deaf or hard of hearing. In other circumstances, a qualified sign language or oral interpreter may be needed. The more lengthy, complex, and important the communication, the more likely that a qualified interpreter will be required for effective communication. For example: ▪ If there has been an incident and the officer is conducting witness interviews, a qualified sign language interpreter may be required to communicate effectively with someone whose primary means of communication is sign language. A qualified oral interpreter may be required to communicate effectively with someone who has been trained to speech read (read lips). 186 – Communicating with the Deaf or Hard of Hearing 442 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents ▪ If a person is asking an officer for directions to a location, gestures or an exchange of written notes will likely be sufficient to communicate effectively. Information received from people who are deaf or hard of hearing who are involved in incidents is just as important to the law enforcement process as the information received from other people. Officers must not draw conclusions about incidents unless they fully understand, and are understood by all involved, including people who are deaf or hard of hearing. ON-CALL INTERPRETIVE SERVICES The LBPD Communications Section maintains a list of sign language and oral interpreting services that are available and on-call 24-hours per day and willing to provide interpretive services. When it is determined that an interpreter is needed, the requesting officer will obtain supervisor approval before requesting an interpreter from the Communications Center. If approved, the supervisor will notify the Watch Commander and ensure that an entry is made in the Watch Commander’s Log. Officers should keep in mind that a qualified interpreter must be able to interpret impartially, therefore a family member, child, or friend of the individual may not be qualified to render the necessary interpretation because of factors such as professional, emotional, or personal involvement, or considerations of confidentiality. Additionally, be aware that a “qualified” interpreter may be certified, but a certified interpreter is not necessarily “qualified.” For example, the interpreter may not be a good communications match for the deaf person (e.g., where the deaf person uses Signed English and the interpreter uses American Sign Language) or for the situation (e.g., where the interpreter is unfamiliar with law enforcement vocabulary). TELETYPEWRITER (TTY)/TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICE FOR DEAF PEOPLE (TDD) Where warranted, officers must provide persons who are deaf or hard of hearing the opportunity to place telecommunications calls. These calls may be made using a teletypewriter (TTY), also known as a telecommunications device for deaf people (TDD). Officers must also accept telephone calls placed by persons who are deaf or hard of hearing through the Telecommunications Relay Service. TTY/TDD devices are located at 400 West Broadway, Main Business Desk, as well as the 4th and 6th floor jails. The device is portable and officers can request it from the jail supervisor when it is needed. It will work with pay phones in the station and also with house phones. If an officer needs to use a TTY/TDD device with a juvenile subject/suspect, the device must be used in an area other than booking or the jail because juveniles may not have contact with adult inmates. VIDEO RELAY SERVICE (VRS) 186 – Communicating with the Deaf or Hard of Hearing 443 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Video Relay Service (VRS) allows a subject to communicate through sign language via video conferencing, which is relayed by an interpreter to a third party. LBPD has two VRS systems, one located at 400 West Broadway, on the first floor lobby and one on the 6th floor men’s jail. CALIFORNIA RELAY SERVICE (CRS) The California Relay Service (CRS) enables a person who uses a text telephone device to communicate by phone with a person who does not use a text telephone device. The service also works in reverse, allowing a non-text telephone user to call a person using a text telephone device. A CRS operator can be reached toll-free by dialing 7-1-1. Additional information about the services provided by CRS is available online at http://www.ddtp.org/. People who are deaf or hard of hearing must not be charged for the cost of auxiliary aids or services needed for effective communication. TECHNIQUES FOR OFFICERS TO COMMUNICATE EFFECTIVELY Officers may utilize the following auxiliary aids, when available, to communicate effectively: • Gestures • Visual aids • Notepad and pen or pencil • Computer or typewriter • Assistive listening system or device • Teletypewriter (TTY) or telecommunications device (TDD) • Qualified oral or sign language interpreter including VRS and CRS Officers must review and have a working knowledge of the publication Communicating with People Who Are Deaf or Hard of Hearing: ADA Guide for Law Enforcement Officers. This document reviews how officers should communicate effectively in the types of situations officers will encounter. This publication is available online at http://www.ada.gov/lawenfcomm.htm. For further, refer to LBPD policy section 7.3.4.1 COMMUNICATING WITH PEOPLE WHO ARE DEAF OR HARD OF HEARING. REVIEW Responsibility Support Bureau 444 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 187 – Tactical Communication REVISED January 2001 TACTICAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES INTRODUCTION The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to identify the principles of Tactical Communication. Tactical Communication, formerly Verbal Judo, emphasizes the mastery of communication by re-directing behavior with words. Tactical Communication consists of tactics based on the principle of non-resistance and turning aside aggression to achieve a positive goal. Tactical Communication does not suggest that physical force is never necessary. Force is sometimes quite necessary and proper. However, at times, words can be more powerful than force when correctly used. Talking a combative subject into custody is preferred, rather than having to subdue him/her with physical force. Tactical Communication The principles of Tactical Communication are based on the principles of physical judo, and some of the tactics of Tactical Communication parallel judo. • Use language in a professional manner (no profanity). Officers often use profanity as a bluff or intimidation because they lack confidence in their tactical skills • Use words to achieve professional objectives • Stay in contact with the audience, the people you are communicating with • Keep the communication on target. Don’t allow subjects to change the focus of your investigation • Redirection of verbal abuse rather than reacting to verbal abuse • Achieve maximum efficiency and maximum effectiveness with minimum effort THE RHETORICAL PERSPECTIVE Effective rhetoric can be an officer's most useful tool in the field. Loosely defined as effective communication, rhetoric is exercised numerous times each day by every officer on duty, whether in civil or criminal matters. An officer's ability to select the appropriate means of communication, often under surprising and stressful circumstances, is the measure of good police work and good public relations. The rhetorical perspective consists of perspective, audience, voice, purpose and organization. PERSPECTIVE (your point of view, your knowledge) 187 – Tactical Communication 445 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • KNOW what you are talking about • CONTROL your emotions and biases Causes of Complaints The feelings produced by anger are the primary reason complaints are made and lawsuits filed. Avoid making remarks that will cause this anger and redirect the remarks made toward you that might cause you to become angry. Categories of conduct that can cause anger include: • Embarrassment/loss of dignity • Belittlement/being talked down to • Rudeness/discourtesy • Misunderstanding/lack of explanation • Verbal abuse/name calling Action based on these categories may arouse a strong feeling of displeasure and belligerence. If you do less to stimulate these acts, you will have fewer complaints and lawsuits. If you redirect the verbal attacks upon you, you will establish more control through your professionalism and will have a great opportunity to acquire the voluntary compliance of the person with whom you are dealing. AUDIENCE (other person) • READ the audience • Utilize methods to reduce complaints • Be considerate to people. This will maximize your investigative and law enforcement effectiveness Eliminate anger and negative threats by you and your audience and you will increase or enhance: • Consent • Confessions • Cooperation Make people want to give you their voluntary compliance by being considerate, sympathetic, and by displaying human kindness. Let people retain their personal dignity and self-respect and you will receive consent, confession and cooperation in return. Tactical Explanation When using force in the field, you must consider not only the effects on the suspect but also the effects on those who will judge you. Your use of force will be judged not only by the witnesses but also by the courts. You want both on your side, not against you. You have to give them reasons to understand why force was needed. You have to convince them that the use of force was reasonable and unavoidable. This is when you use a tactical explanation. 187 – Tactical Communication 446 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • When dealing with a combative suspect, make it a point to solicit cooperation. Identify yourself as a police officer even when in uniform. Use phrases like "Sir, please cooperate." Or “Sir, you are under arrest, don’t resist.” Repeat these statements both for the suspect and the audience • Say them loud enough for witnesses to hear • If you are in a team arrest situation, you can designate one officer to be the "talker", soliciting cooperation • Make sure there is no doubt in anyone's mind that you have made every effort to gain voluntary compliance with the law and your requests • Once the arrest is made and the suspect is safely in custody, a short explanation to the crowd or witnesses about what they just witnessed is usually appropriate This tactical explanation and solicitation for cooperation is critical when working a plainclothes assignment. A good example would be a vice-officer arresting a combative prostitute. Witnesses who would normally be alarmed at this scenario are now provided the insight as to what is actually occurring. A tactical explanation may: • Provide insight to witnesses as to the purpose of your actions • Keep potentially hostile witnesses from making distorted perceptions • Help prevent citizen complaints • Help counter or explain a suspect’s complaint • Establish good public relations by supporting potentially helpful witnesses Remember: • People see the event differently than you do • Scenes change as you enter the situation • People watch you perform your duty • Audiences are made, not found. (You make people what you want them to be) VOICE (tone, pace) Voice is part of the total role adopted by professionals and it must be consistent with the assumed role. PURPOSE Obtain your desired results, i.e., cooperation, professionally. ORGANIZATION How you want the encounter to unfold, from beginning to middle to end. You order it, given your "reading" of the encounter and your resulting behavior. Example: "The Eight Step Vehicle Stop" • Greeting • Identify yourself • State reasons for stop 187 – Tactical Communication 447 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Ask if there is any legal justification for their actions • Request driver's license • Request vehicle registration and proof of insurance • Decision stage (citation or warning) • Close* * If you cite the individual, ask him/her to "Drive Safely". If you warn the individual, say, "Have a good day". The advantages of employing the principles of the "Eight Step Vehicle Stop" are: • Creates command presence • Deflects argument • Adds assessment time • Sounds good • Looks good CONCLUSION Practice positive personal contacts and being nice. Limit your stress. Limit your liability. Increase your effectiveness. Increase your own personal safety. Researchers have interviewed numerous suspects who have disarmed and killed a police officer. The primary reason for this was the fact that the officer was verbally abusive towards the suspect. The officer called the suspect names, and quite simply, made him angry. Cooperation achieved through professional behavior, without the use of force and without any one being injured, is the end result and a positive effect of directing behavior with words. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 448 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 191 – Hazards of Approaching Suspects REVISED August 2019 HAZARDS OF APPROACHING SUSPECTS: POSITION OF INTERVIEW AND POSITION OF ADVANTAGE APPROACHING A SUBJECT Police officers must be aware of the daily dangers they might encounter and avoid complacency while working in a patrol function. The following are the six major hazards to be aware of when approaching a subject: • Hands – A subject's hands can telegraph hostile behavior or hold a weapon. - Where are the subject’s hands? - Are they in a pocket(s), concealed in an area where they cannot be seen, or are they where you can see them? - Is there anything in them? - Is the subject clenching their fists, preparing to strike? • Weapons – Complete a visual search of the subject for weapons, and for bulges in their clothing that may reveal a concealed weapon, or other items in the nearby area which may be used as a weapon. - Many common objects may be used as weapons, e.g., pool cues, beer bottles, chairs, etc. • Friends, Relatives, Associates – Be aware of and consider anyone in the immediate area as a potential threat during contacts and/or arrests. - Friends, relatives, or associates may come to the assistance of a subject. • Escape Routes – Subjects often have better knowledge of escape routes in their neighborhood. - Try to foresee a subject's avenues of escape and plan accordingly. – For safety, plan your own escape route in the event the situation escalates into an armed confrontation. – Use extreme caution when involved in foot pursuits. – It can be dangerous to split up from a partner and act independently; use caution and good judgment. • Footing – Be aware of what you are standing on or near. - Wet grass, loose asphalt, concrete, curbs, stairs, etc., can cause you to slip or trip as well as provide an object to be pushed over during a confrontation. - Be aware of how slippery a surface might be if you must run on or arrest a combative subject on it. • Cover and Concealment – Cover is anything you can use as a protective barrier which can stop a bullet, while concealment is anything that will hide you from view. 191 – Hazards of Approaching Subjects 449 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Cover alone may be the most important factor in keeping you alive if the situation escalates into an armed confrontation. - Examples of cover include vehicles, trees, buildings, and brick or cement walls. - Examples of concealment include shrubs, bushes, doorways, and vehicles. POSITION OF INTERVIEW The position of interview is a defensive position that provides you a degree of safety when interviewing a subject. If you find it is necessary to search, make an arrest, or elicit cooperation, you can quickly move into a position of physical control. Consider the following four important aspects of the position of interview: 1) Distance – Remain slightly more than the subject’s arm’s length away. • This distance gives you time to react to a threat while providing a margin of safety. • If you can touch the subject, or the subject can touch you, then you are too close. • You should be able to see the subject from head to toe. 2) Balance – An unbalanced stance makes you vulnerable to being knocked down. • A balanced stance keeps your weapon away from the subject reducing the opportunity for a subject to grab or take your weapon. • The following are components of a balanced stance: - Even distribution of weight between both legs; - Knees unlocked to facilitate a quick and efficient movement in any direction; - Feet positioned shoulder-width apart to provide strength, balance, and mobility in any direction; - Lead foot (weak side) should point towards the subject, and the rear foot (strong side) should point out at a 45 to 60-degree angle, back and away from the subject. 3) Awareness – Be aware of your surroundings, the subject, and the entire situation; this can also be referred to as situational awareness. − Do not narrow your field of vision by focusing only on the subject's face. Using peripheral vision to detect movement is more effective if you look toward the subject’s shoulder and chest area. − Use the sun to your advantage. Maneuver yourself so the sun or bright light is to your back and shining in the eyes of the suspect. 4) Gun Side Away – Keep your gun side away from the subject. • Be aware of where your gun is in relation to where a subject(s) is standing; remember situational awareness. POSITION OF ADVANTAGE The position of advantage is a reasonably safe position from which you can make an arrest or defend yourself. It is a position from which you can quickly and effectively apply different physical control holds. The following steps will assist you in holding a position of advantage: • Position yourself in physical contact with the subject; • Use a light touch, not a grab; by grasping too firmly, you might provoke an undesired response; • Stand to the side and slightly to the rear with your strong side closest to the subject; 191 – Hazards of Approaching Subjects 450 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Utilize a well-balanced stance as described in the interview position; • Position your strong hand, closest to the subject, open in an "L" shape and placed just above the subject's elbow; • Position your weak hand across the subject's lower forearm just above the wrist joint. CONCLUSION There is a potential for danger with every contact. The position taken by an officer will vary according to the type of situation. The most common position used by an officer during contact is the position of interview. The lowest level of hands-on physical control is the position of advantage. Memorize the six major hazards; always place yourself in a position that is to your advantage and avoid complacency, even when a contact looks routine. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 451 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 192 – Foot Pursuits REVISED February 2021 FOOT PURSUITS Foot pursuits may be dangerous to officers, suspects, and the community. Foot pursuits require sound tactics and officer safety awareness. Officers must continuously balance the objective of apprehending the suspect with the risk and potential for injury to all involved. The Decision to Pursue Officers may initiate a foot pursuit of any individual the officer reasonably believes is about to engage, is engaging, or has engaged in criminal activity. Mere flight by a person should not serve as the sole justification to engage in a foot pursuit. Prior to engaging in a foot pursuit, do a mental risk assessment; are the risks of engaging in a foot pursuit worth it compared to the potential danger to the community, and officers should the suspect go free? Factors to consider in your assessment include but are not limited to the following: • Is the suspect armed? • What was the offense committed? • Where is the location of the foot pursuit? • Can the suspect be apprehended later?? The suspect has a distinct advantage, since they choose the route, may live in and be familiar with the area, may be younger, and more appropriately dressed to run. Officers should expect and prepare for a potential ambush while in foot pursuit of a suspect; avoid going over obstacles at the same location as the suspect. The same precautions apply to rounding building corners. Officers should listen, slice the pie around the corner or take a quick peek to minimize exposure. While chasing a suspect, officers should watch for hazards like dogs, clotheslines, sprinkler heads, or other obstacles. It is recommended partners stay together and avoid splitting up unless extenuating circumstances dictate capture over officer safety. Consider setting a perimeter when a suspect flees on foot. When setting up a perimeter, using the four C's can increase the safety of those involved and the likelihood of apprehending the suspect. The four C’s include the following: • Communicate, • Control, • Coordinate, and • Contain. Communicate 192 – Foot Pursuits 452 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents During a foot pursuit, an officer is responsible for broadcasting the progress in a timely manner. Prior to broadcasting, collect your thoughts and attempt to control your voice so your transmission and the information is clear to responding units. It is important to broadcast the following information if you are in a foot pursuit: 1. Officer’s location, 2. Number and location of suspects, 3. Direction of travel, 4. Suspect description, 5. Type of crime, 6. Where additional units should respond, and 7. Type of weapon, if armed. Control Control your own actions to reduce the chance of having an unintentional discharge. Proper physical control and arrest techniques should be utilized in overcoming a suspect's resistance. Penal Code 835(a) states officers must use reasonable force. Control the area to prevent danger to the public and prevent outside help from reaching the suspect. This includes isolating pedestrian and vehicular traffic until deemed safe by the Incident Commander. After the foot pursuit and the scene is safe, the path of the pursuit should be retraced to locate possible discarded evidence. Coordinate Consider using the Air Support Unit, the Police Service Dog Unit, and additional Department resources with the coordination of the perimeter. Assisting units should drive carefully and immediately begin to think of positioning into a perimeter location. Radio traffic should be kept to a minimum, if able assist using the KDT. Contain Immediate containment using a perimeter is essential to prevent the suspect's escape. During containment, officers should consider good cover, avenues for escape, geography, natural barriers, and the number of officers available to assist. The Incident Commander should continuously assess the totality of the circumstances to determine continuing the operation. Officers must be physically and mentally prepared to apprehend a fleeing suspect. Blindly chasing a suspect can give away any tactical advantage and greatly increases the likelihood of injury. The safety of all involved greatly increases when officers work as a team, employ sound tactics, and maintain regular physical exercise. As you go about your workday, strive to avoid the following ten fatal errors which have killed experienced officers: 1. Attitude – Maintain a positive will-to-survive attitude. Do not allow outside distractions to affect your performance. 2. Tombstone Courage – No one doubts you are brave, but in every situation where time allows, wait for backup. 3. Not Enough Rest – To do your job you must be alert and well rested for your shift. 192 – Foot Pursuits 453 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents 4. Taking A Bad Position – There is no such thing as a routine call or stop. Always position yourself, or your vehicle, so as to have the tactical advantage. 5. Danger Signs – Recognize red flags and danger signs and react to them. Trust your instincts. 6. Failure to Watch the Hands – It is the hands that kill; control them. 7. Relaxing too Soon – Always be alert and observant. The routine can become life threatening in seconds. 8. Improper Use or No Handcuffs – Once you have made the arrest, handcuff the prisoner properly. 9. No Search or Poor Search – There are many places a suspect can hide weapons. Your failure to search properly will be used against you and other officers. 10. Dirty or Inoperative Weapon – Maintain your equipment in good working order and be proficient with your shooting skills. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 454 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Wally Hebeish, Chief of Police 195 – Vessel Collision Responses REVISED February 2022 VESSEL COLLISION RESPONSES INTRODUCTION This Training Bulletin provides standardized vessel collision response guidelines set forth by the State of California, Department of Boating and Waterways (DBAW) and the Long Beach Police Department. The jurisdiction of the City of Long Beach extends to the breakwater. The jurisdiction of the State of California extends approximately three-miles seaward from the mainland and around the perimeter of each of the oil islands. RESPONSIBLE DEPARTMENTS Long Beach Police Department (LBPD) – Uniformed patrol Long Beach Fire Department – Marine Safety Division (LBFD MSD) REPORTING GUIDELINES Vessel Collisions All recreational vessel collisions are reportable to the Department of Boating and Waterways, which include any of the following vessels: • Motorized vessels • Sailboats or sailboards • Rowboats or rafts • Canoes or kayaks • Any other non-motorized recreational vessel • Inner tubes only if operated with paddles • Water skiing/wakeboarding, tubing or kite boards RESPONSIBILITIES Long Beach Police Department Personnel When LBPD personnel are the first to arrive at the scene of a vessel collision, they should evaluate risk to life, property, and the environment. When the collision is a reportable collision involving one of the vessels listed above, police personnel should contact the LBFD MSD. 195 – Vessel Collision Responses 455 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Once notified, the LBFD MSD is responsible to investigate all recreational vessel collisions and file all necessary reports. When requested, Long Beach Police personnel may assist with the collision investigation and file any necessary supplemental reports (e.g., a dead body report, BUI report). All copies of supplemental reports filed should be given to the handling MSD unit. LBPD personnel may assist involved parties with an exchange of information when there is minor property damage and/or no complaint of injury. A report should be taken by MSD when requested by a citizen. Marine Safety Division Personnel The Marine Safety personnel handling the incident should assume the responsibility of all immediate notifications and coordinating a thorough investigation. Collisions Outside City Limits When an incident occurs outside the Long Beach City limits the responding jurisdictional agency should take over responsibility for the incident. LBPD personnel who respond to the scene may assist the outside agency if requested to do so and with approval from the field Sergeant or Watch Commander. The agencies adjacent to the City of Long Beach are: • Los Angeles Port Police (Westside) • US Coast Guard (Outside the Federal Breakwater) • Orange County Sheriff Harbor Patrol (Eastside on water) • Seal Beach Police Department (Eastside aground) • Los Angeles Sheriff Department (Federal Breakwater to three miles seaward) Incident Command/Assumption of Command The first unit on scene should assume command as Incident Commander. The Incident Commander should identify the incident location and coordinate with other responding units. The Incident Commander should remain in command until relieved by the proper jurisdictional agency who will be responsible for the investigation and reporting. Under extenuating circumstances, it may become necessary for the next available responding unit to assume command. Incident Scene Assessment The first unit on scene should identify the search/scene area by the location of the involved vessels and by witness accounts. Buoys should be used to mark the scene. The initial scene assessment should be sent to Communications, who will notify LBFD. Initial notifications are made to facilitate the immediate deployment of search and rescue units. The initial information needed includes the following: • Type and number of vessels involved • Approximate number of victims/survivors • Latitude/longitude, Global Positioning System (GPS) • On-scene sea conditions/weather • Additional resources/agencies needed (e.g., LBPD Dive Team or LBFD Dive Team) 195 – Vessel Collision Responses 456 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents As persons are removed from the water, they should be evaluated for medical treatment. When necessary, LBFD MSD, will respond to treat and transport any patients to the nearest designated EMS transfer point. When dispatched to a collision that has occurred within one-hour of the dispatch time, all efforts should be made to rescue the submerged victim, determine life status, and render medical aid. Fatalities When a subject has been submerged for over one-hour or when death has been determined, the deceased should not be moved (for further see LBPD Manual § 7.1.21.4 Death Determination). LBPD will be responsible to contact the LA County Medical-Coroner's office. Recovery of the body should be at the direction of the LA County Coroner. NOTE: It may be necessary to move the deceased in the event the scene is unsafe, or the deceased is creating a hazard. If the deceased must be moved due to an emergent situation, field personnel may relocate the deceased to a safer location. The recovery location should be documented using a GPS plotted position. All efforts should be taken to prevent loss or contamination of any potential evidence. LBFD Dive Team Response The LBFD Dive Team should be notified of any search and rescue operations within one hour of the reported incident. LBPD Dive Team Response The LBPD Dive Team should be notified under the following circumstances: • Evidence collection • Body recoveries • Underwater investigations Preservation of Evidence/Salvage of Wreckage When responding to vessel collisions, evaluate the circumstances and environmental factors such as location, weather, and water conditions surrounding damaged vessels at the collision site. It may be necessary to tow, impound or secure the damaged vessel to prevent the loss of the vessel and/or evidence. There may be situations where LBFD, LBPD or the US Coast Guard is requested to assist with the towing of a vessel. Hazardous Material (Hazmat)/Environmental Emergencies When hazardous materials are spilled into the water, notify the Field Sergeant or Watch Commander and the LBFD. The LBFD routinely makes the appropriate notifications to the following agencies: • US Coast Guard, LA/LB • California Department of Fish and Wildlife • Offices of Emergency Services (OES) • City of Long Beach, Health Department 195 – Vessel Collision Responses 457 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • City of Long Beach, City Attorney's Office Boating Accident Investigation Team (BAIT) Response BAIT is a joint effort with members of the LBFD, MSD, and the LBPD Collision Investigations Detail (CID). On all BAIT responses, evidence collection is handled by responding team members and the LBPD Crime Lab. All necessary precautions should be taken to preserve the integrity of potential evidence. BAIT Response The MSD initiates a BAIT notification when an LBFD MSD Rescue Boat Operator responds to any of the following incidents: • Fatality (or death appears imminent) • Missing person from a vessel • When any injured party (complaint of pain, or more serious) is transported to a medical facility by paramedics or private vehicle • Suspicion of criminal intent involving vessel flooding, swamping, capsizing or sinking • Suspicion of arson involvement in a vessel fire or explosion • Substantial damage to a vessel and or property requiring additional investigative resources • Hit and Run (Harbor and Navigation Code 656.1 Damage to Property) with or without suspect information • City property damage or potential liability to a public agency BAIT Members Upon notification the BAIT members should contact the LBFD, MSD, Operations Captain who will assist in coordinating the response and any additional resources needed. The on-call detective from LBPD CID may evaluate the information provided by LBFD, MSD and determine their need to respond. BAIT can assist Marine Safety personnel with the accident scene and investigation, which may include one or more of the following: • Interviewing suspects, witnesses and victims • Arrest/booking of suspects • Follow-up notifications • Coordinating with other city departments and outside agencies • Collection of evidence • Impound of vessels involved • Monitoring salvage operation • Filing supplemental reports REVIEW REPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 458 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 196 – Vessel Report REVISED January 2021 VESSEL REPORT The California Department of Motor Vehicles defines a "vessel" as over eight feet in length and sail-powered or motor-driven (regardless of length) that is not documented by the U.S. Coast Guard. A vessel is described as a watercraft used, or capable of being used, as a means of transportation on water except a seaplane on water. This includes motorboats, amphibious vehicle/vessels, inflatable vessels with motors, shuttlecraft, jet skis or wet bikes. The Vessel/Boat Trailer Report Form (PD Form 2310.010) is used to report theft, recovery, and storage or impound of boats regardless of value. The officer taking a vessel report should contact the Auto Stats desk as soon as possible to enter the boat’s description, registration number, and hull number into the Stolen Vehicle System (SVS). Information for Stolen Vessel Reports There are three general types of vessels: power, sail, and other (kayaks, row boats, or other hand propelled vessels). Hull types include mono (single hull) or multi (catamarans, trimarans, or other multihull vessels). The Hull Identification Number (HIN) is the equivalent of a vehicle identification number (VIN). The HIN number is almost always stamped or engraved on the starboard (right) edge of the transom (back of the boat). If the vessel is registered with the DMV, it will have a CF number on the forward part of the vessel and on the vessel’s certificate of number. If the boat is homemade, the number issued by DMV will begin with the letters CFZ. Other states will have a different two-letter prefix. If the vessel is documented with the United States Coast Guard (USCG), it will have a documentation number issued by the USCG. This number will be three inches high and permanently affixed on a bulkhead or other clearly visible interior structural part of the boat. The USCG documentation number usually begins with one letter followed by six numbers. Generally, larger vessels or vessels engaged in international travel will be documented with the USCG issued numbers, while smaller pleasure boats have CF numbers. Typically, both documented and non-documented (registered with a CF/CFZ number) boats have a vessel name. The vessel name is usually located on the stern transom (rear) 196 – Vessel Reports 459 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents of the boat. Most vessels have a home port where the boat is moored. The home port is usually displayed below the vessel name, on the transom. Federal law requires that all boat manufacturers place the HIN in an alternate hidden location on the boat. This hidden location varies by manufacturer. Authorization for storage: refer to Harbors and Navigation (H&N) Code Section 523, LBMC Section 16.08.300(D), and VC Section 22651. Situations Requiring Multiple Reports If the stolen boat was on a trailer, a separate vehicle report is filed for the trailer. The vessel and auto theft reports should be cross-referenced with the appropriate supplemental report numbers. The detective assigned to the case of a stolen boat on a trailer should investigate both the trailer and vessel reports. In some cases, a boat may be stolen from a slip that contains a smaller dinghy-type boat on board. When a vessel is stolen, which has a separate dinghy on board, an additional vessel report form should be filed if the dinghy has a Hull Identification Number (HIN). Another possible situation might be a ski boat on a trailer, which also has a rack containing one or more jet skis. Since a jet ski has its own registration and HIN, a separate vessel report for each jet ski is filed, in addition to the vessel/trailer report for the ski boat and trailer. Officers are reminded that it is not uncommon for boat owners to place small boats in incorrect dinghy racks or boat slips. Lost vessels should not be entered into the Stolen Vehicle System, so discretion is required in assessing the situation. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigation Bureau 460 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 197 – Officer & Employee Involved Traffic Collisions REVISED June 2002 OFFICER/EMPLOYEE INVOLVED TRAFFIC COLLISIONS INTRODUCTION During the year 2001 there were 161 employee involved traffic accidents. In 100 of those traffic accidents, Department employees were found to be at fault. Employees operating Department vehicles are charged with a higher degree of responsibility than the general public, in order to enhance officer/citizen safety and protect public and private property. Definition of Collision The Department adheres to the State Wide Integrated Traffic Records System and complies with the California Highway Patrol Collision Investigation Manual (CIM). The CIM defines collision: as "an unintentional event that produces damage or injury. The word injury includes 'fatal injury'. 'Accident' and 'collision' are synonymous, interchangeable words describing the event. CAUSE OF COLLISION The primary factor in a majority of employee involved traffic collisions has been determined to be inattention on the part of the employee. The collisions have usually occurred as a result of the employee/driver trying to do more that devoting full attention to the task of driving, e.g., using the radio, KDT, tunnel vision, or looking at something other than the roadway. This is not to suggest that employees habitually drive in a careless manner. It is understood that many job duties require multitasking at times when it is not always possible to pull over and do one thing at a time. Most employee involved collisions can be prevented by driving defensively and being alert to potential danger on the roadway. The most common primary collision factors in the officer involved traffic accidents were Vehicle Code Sections: 1. 22350 Speed 2. 22106 Unsafe Backing 3. 22107 Turning Movements Police Vehicle Accidents - (Ref 7.4.1 through 7.4.2 of the Long Beach Manual) When an employee is involved in a collision, a reporting patrol unit and supervisor shall be dispatched to the scene. The supervisor shall assume command of all operations at the scene of a collision and assure that a complete and thorough investigation is 197 – Employee Involved Traffic Collisions 461 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents conducted. The supervisor shall be responsible for the personal delivery of a copy of the Supervisor's Report of Collision (PD Form SF-48 Rev 3/97) to the Patrol Bureau Deputy Chief's office before the end of watch. A copy shall also be forwarded to the Division Commander of the personnel involved and to the Chief of Police. The report shall outline the following information: • The names and photo numbers of personnel involved • The events leading up to the collision • Injuries to police personnel and other individuals • Damage to police equipment and other property • Name of the City Attorney's Office investigator who responded, or statement that the investigator declined to respond • Supervisor's conclusion regarding the cause of the collision The supervisor shall forward the original of the Supervisor's Report of Collision to the Accident Investigation Detail, along with the original traffic collision report. The supervisor shall cause the City Attorney's Office investigator to be notified. Whenever possible, officers shall leave the accident scene "as is" until arrival of the investigator so that photographs can be taken. Collisions Failing to Meet Minimum Reporting Criteria If a collision occurs but there is no damage or injury, no report is required. It is requested that a memorandum be forwarded to the Accident Investigation Detail Sergeant giving a brief description of the event. Included shall be the names of all passengers in the vehicles. The Accident Investigation Detail will have the responsibility of forwarding this information to the City Attorney's Office. Use of Safety Belts in Department Vehicles Employees and all others operating or riding in Department vehicles shall wear the provided two and three point safety belts. Two-point belts (lap belts) shall be worn when three-point safety belts are not provided. Employees intending to drive or ride in a Department vehicle shall ensure that all occupants are using the available safety belts before the vehicle is operated. Note: A Department vehicle is any motor vehicle which is under the direction and control of the Police Department, including privately-owned vehicles used for City business. Safety belts shall be adjusted so they provide maximum protection with reasonable comfort. Safety belts shall be inspected at the start of each watch. Any Department vehicle equipped with an unserviceable safety belt shall be removed from service. When a potentially dangerous tactical situation is perceived or anticipated, the safety belt may be removed to allow adequate time for safe response to the situation. Officer discretion is allowed per CVC §27315(g). During special operations, the safety belt may 197 – Employee Involved Traffic Collisions 462 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents be removed when, in the belted employee's judgment, wearing the safety belt might adversely affect the special operation or endanger the employee. Examples: • Officers may remove their safety belts immediately prior to arriving at the location of an emergency call so they can quickly leave their vehicles upon arrival • Officers may remove their safety belts immediately prior to stopping a suspect. However, officers should be careful not to remove their safety belts prematurely and thus risk being without safety belt protection during a pursuit REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 463 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 198 – Parolees REVISED April 2021 PAROLEES Parole is the early supervised release of an inmate from state prison. If the inmate qualifies, they are released to either state supervised parole or county-level supervision also known as Post Release Community Supervision (PRCS). The type of supervision is determined by the California Penal Code. The more serious and violent offenders and high-risk sex offenders are released to state parole and the non-serious, non-violent, and non-sex offenders are released under PRCS. Currently, the law requires that parolees be returned to the county that was the last legal residence of the offender prior to incarceration. A parolee may be returned to another county if that would be in the best interest of the public. The Division of Adult Parole Operations (DAPO) carefully reviews each case and makes decisions on an individual basis. Offenders released from prison to state supervised parole are assigned a parole agent in the community where the offender will be living. California Department of Corrections and Rehabilitation (CDCR) parole offices are located throughout California. STATE PAROLE CONDITIONS All prison inmates are assigned a CDCR number for identification purposes while in custody and while on parole. CDCR numbers consist of six digits, one to two letters of the alphabet, followed by four to five numbers (e.g., A12345 or AA1234). All California parolees are in the National Crime Information Center (NCIC) system and a warrant check will indicate if the subject is on parole via the Supervisor Release File (SRF). Prior to the release from state prison, adult offenders must sign a CDCR Form 1515 Notice and Conditions of Parole acknowledging a clear understanding of all conditions while in the community. These conditions serve as both instructions and an agreement between the State of California and the parolee. Parolees shall not violate any of the conditions of their parole or violate any law or they may be subject to arrest and/or incarceration in a county jail or returned to state prison, pursuant to regardless whether new charges are filed. Conditions listed on the CDCR Form 1515 include General Conditions as well as Special Conditions which are imposed based on individual case factors discovered during the commission of the felony conviction. Special conditions may include no contact with the victim or victim’s family or that the parolee may not be allowed within 35 miles of the victim’s actual residence if the crime was a violent felony. 198 – Parolees 464 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents General Conditions of Parole include: • Forfeiture of the right to extradition hearing if apprehended outside of the State of California. • If another jurisdiction has a lodged detainer against the parolee, CDCR may release custody to that jurisdiction. • A parolee’s residence and any property under their control are subject to search or seizure by a probation officer, an agent or officer of CDCR or any Peace Officer at any time with or without a search warrant, with or without cause. • Report in advance any changes or anticipated changes in residence or employment. • Report on the next business day upon release from custody following an arrest. • Follow all parole agent instructions. • Shall not travel more than 50 miles from their residence of record without agent approval. • Shall not leave the county of legal residence for more than 48 hours without agent approval. • Shall not leave the State of California without written approval by the assigned parole agent. • Shall not own, use, or have access to firearms, anything that looks like a firearm, bullets, or any other weapons. • Shall not engage in conduct prohibited by law. PAROLE OFFICE The Adult State Parole Office for Long Beach is located at the Compton Parole Complex at 322 W. Compton Blvd., City of Compton, and consists of three units: • Long Beach Unit I • Long Beach Unit II • Long Beach Unit IV Special Services Unit – SSU The SSU is an additional law enforcement and investigative branch of the Office of Correctional Safety which supports the CDCR’s investigative and security interests. They have Special Agents statewide who assist parole agents with surveillance, violent or armed suspect arrests, and to relocate or apprehend parolees at large. They have extensive weapons training and are well armed to regain control of halfway houses in hostage or takeover situations. The SSU is the primary liaison with local, county, state and federal law enforcement agencies, especially involving prison gang information and incidents. PAROLEE ARRESTS AND VIOLATIONS If a parolee commits a crime, they are automatically in violation of parole. Regardless of whether the crime is a felony or misdemeanor, a parole hold may be placed in the interest of public safety at the time of booking. A parolee who does not identify themself or gives a false name to an officer, is in violation of their parole in addition to Penal Code §148.9(a) (false ID to a peace officer). 198 – Parolees 465 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Even if a parole violation is not obtained at that time, the parolee should still be arrested for all law violations. Document all misconduct for parole, including uncooperative behavior. This thoroughness by the officer may lead to a parole violation in the future. Parolee at Large (PAL) Warrants In the event that a parolee’s whereabouts are unknown to the assigned parole agent, an absconding parole supervision warrant is issued by the Los Angeles County Superior Court. Once the warrant is signed by the Los Angeles Superior Court, the parolee is considered a parolee at large (PAL) and is subject to arrest by any peace officer under Penal Code §3000.08. Parole Agent Directed Arrests A parole agent may request an officer to arrest a pre-PAL parolee. This is a parolee who is wanted by their agent, but there is not a warrant in the system. When arresting a pre- PAL parolee, the officer must obtain direction from the parole agent to effect an arrest, and the agent must place a hold on the subject at the time of booking, or as soon as possible. This includes arrests at the parole office when parole agents request our assistance with potentially violent or intoxicated parolees, multiple arrest situations, parolees wanted on a new LBPD case, or other special circumstances. Officers should respond quickly to these requests before the parolee escapes into the general public. Parolees and Possession of Weapons The most common parole violation that affects law enforcement, other than criminal conduct, is weapons possession or access to weapons by parolees. Conditions of parole specific to possession of weapons are posted on the CDCR website and are listed to the parolee as follows: • Obligation to not be around guns, or anything that looks like a real gun, bullets, or any other weapons. • Obligation to not have a knife with a blade longer than two inches except as a kitchen knife. Kitchen knives must be kept in your kitchen. • Knives you use for work are allowed only when approved by your parole agent, but they can only be carried while you are at work or going to and from work. You must ask for a note from your parole agent that approves carrying the knife while going to and from work and you must carry the note at all times. • You must not own, use, or have access to any weapon that is prohibited by the California Penal Code. If you contact a parolee in possession of a knife with a blade longer than two inches, place them under arrest and contact the parole agent to obtain a hold. A photograph of the knife next to a ruler should be included in the report to show the length of the knife. The knife should be booked into evidence and the violation of Penal Code §3056 (revocation of parole) should be charged. Constructive possession (access) of a weapon for a parolee includes nearby and not only on their person (e.g., in a vehicle, in a bicycle seat, on the ground by the parolee’s feet where a parolee may access the weapon or item in question). 198 – Parolees 466 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents PAROLE HOLDS AND NOTIFICATIONS Officers must be able to articulate the criminal offense that would cause the violation of parole by the parolee and/or parole violation that would endanger public safety if the parolee is allowed to remain in the community. When a parolee is arrested for committing a crime, the open charge should be listed first and Penal Code §3056 as an additional charge on the booking sheet. After acquiring the booking number, the arresting officer should call the Sacramento Adult Parole Operations to request a parole hold. Obtaining a parole hold puts the arrested parolee on a “no bail” status, preventing them from bailing out of jail. Only a parole agent, parole supervisor or AOD can authorize a no bail parole violation. The following information is needed to obtain a parole hold or when a parolee is arrested on a parole warrant: 1. Name of parolee 2. Date of birth 3. Physical description 4. LBPD agency identification (“LBD0”) 5. Booking desk phone number 6. Arresting officer name and DID number 7. Booking number of arrestee 8. How subject was verified as a parolee (e.g., subject knew his CDC#) If an arrest on a parole warrant is made, confirm the warrant is valid with Sacramento Control request the hold be forwarded to the Booking Sergeant. If an officer arrests a parolee on a warrant other than a parole warrant, the CDCR I.D. Warrants Unit should be called to request a 3056 PC hold on the parolee. NOTE: It is important for the officer to ensure the booking desk receives the parole hold, or the parolee will be released if no other criminal charges are pending. After Hours Parole Holds In order to get a parole hold or an abstract of the warrant after 1700 hours and prior to 0800 hours, officers need to contact the CDCR I.D. Warrants Unit and request the Agent of Record (AOR). If the AOR is unavailable, their immediate parole supervisor may be contacted via I.D. Warrants. In the event that neither the agent nor the immediate supervisor can be located, the Parole Administrator of the Day (AOD) may be contacted to authorize a parole hold. Officers may also request an abstract of the warrant to be faxed to their agency via I.D Warrants. PAROLE SEARCHES Search conditions of a parolee are an additional tool that can be used by officers to assist in detentions and criminal investigations. When feasible, the Agent of Record for that specific parolee should be contacted before the search. Penal Code §3067(d) states, “It is not the intent of the Legislature to authorize law enforcement to conduct searches for the sole purpose of harassment.” 198 – Parolees 467 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Officer Safety All contacts with parolees should be considered high risk. Parolees are often in excellent physical condition and are also aware of police tactics. Some have trained to disarm police officers or to escape from handcuffs by using paper clips hidden in clothes. When confronting a parolee, weapon retention should be of utmost concern. HALFWAY HOUSE Halfway houses are transitional living facilities for inmates who are allowed to serve the end of their sentences in the community in lieu of confinement in state prison. There is strict adherence to the rules of the house including random drug and alcohol testing, participation in individual and group sessions, check in and out requirements, and curfew hours. One such facility in Long Beach is the Male Community Re-Entry Program (MCRP) located at 2233 E. 69th St. Per CDCR regulations, certain inmates are excluded from entry into a halfway house, such as gang members, violent offenders, 290 PC registrants, or persons convicted of narcotic sales, weapons possession, or prior escape. If an inmate violates an administrative requirement, the inmate may be sent back to state prison for 120 days and they could be disqualified from future halfway house placement. If any new law violations occur, the inmate is arrested, sentenced, then turned over to the prison for additional administrative violation prosecution. Sometimes the House Agent requests assistance with an arrest, and officers should respond quickly before the inmate escapes into the general public. The primary section for arrests from halfway houses is Penal Code §5054.1 (return of prisoner to prison). If the charge is escape with force from a halfway house, use Penal §4530(a)(escape). POST RELEASE COMMUNITY SUPERVISION PRCS is a form of supervision provided to an offender who has been released from a California Department of Corrections and Rehabilitation (CDCR) institution to the jurisdiction of a county agency, pursuant to the Post Release Community Supervision Act of 2011. Penal Code §3451 states that all persons released from prison on or after October 1, 2011, after serving a prison term for a felony and, if eligible, upon release from prison shall be subject to supervision provided by a county agency. Once released to PRCS, the offender is discharged from CDCR which no longer has jurisdiction of the offender. The offender is then under the supervision of the assigned county agency. CONCLUSION Field officers come into contact with parolees in the field on a daily basis. Knowledge of parole procedures and parolee conditions of release is instrumental in detentions and 198 – Parolees 468 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents arrests of parolees stemming from field criminal investigations. Law enforcement officers must remain vigilant to locate and monitor parolees as potential repeat offenders in the community. When an officer contacts a parolee who is not arrested, a completed Field Interview Card should be turned in so the information is documented. AUDIT RESPONSIBILITY Investigation Bureau 469 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 200 – Mandatory Helmet Law REVISED May 2002 MANDATORY HELMET LAW INTRODUCTION The California Mandatory Helmet Law applies to all persons who drive or ride on a motorcycle, motor-driven cycle or motorized bicycle while on the highways of the State of California. THE LAW • §27803 CVC (a) A driver and any passenger shall wear a safety helmet meeting the requirements established pursuant to §27802 when riding on a motorcycle, motor- driven cycle, or motorized bicycle – (b) It is unlawful to operate a motorcycle, motor-driven cycles, or motorized bicycle if the driver or any passenger is not wearing a safety helmet as required by subdivision (a) – (c) It is unlawful to ride as a passenger on a motorcycle, motor driven cycles, or motorized bicycle if the driver or any passenger is not wearing a safety helmet as required by subdivision (a) – (d) This section applies to persons who are riding on motorcycles, motor driven cycles, or motorized bicycles operated on the highways – (e) For the purpose of this section, "wear a helmet" or "wearing a helmet" means having a safety helmet meeting the requirements of §27802 on the person's head that is fastened with the helmet straps and is of a size that fits the wearing person's head securely without excessive lateral or vertical movement An approved helmet is a motorcycle helmet that meets the United States Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards meet or exceed DOT standards. Snell Foundation standards meet and exceed both DOT and ANSI standards. To be legally sold in California, all motorcycle helmets must meet DOT standards. DEFINITIONS The legal definition of a motorcycle can be found under California Vehicle Code sections 400, 405, and 406. The definitions are as follows: • §400CVC - A Motorcycle - is any motor vehicle other than a tractor having a seat or saddle for the use of the rider and designed to travel on not more than three wheels in contact with the ground and weighing less than one thousand five hundred pounds, 200 – Helmet Law 470 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents except that four wheels may be in contact with the ground when two of the wheels are a functional part of side car • §405CVC - A Motor-Driven Cycle - is any motorcycle with a motor which produces less than 15 gross brake horsepower, and every bicycle with a motor attached. A motor-driven cycle does not include a motorized bicycle, as defined in §406CVC • §406CVC - A Motorized Bicycle or Moped - is any two or three wheeled device having fully operative pedals for propulsion by human power, or having no pedal if powered solely by electrical energy, and an automatic transmission and a motor which produces less than 2 gross brake horsepower and is capable of propelling the device at a maximum speed of not more than 30 miles per hour on level ground. • §407.5CVC (a) A Motorized Scooter - is any two-wheeled device that has handle bars, is designed to be stood or sat upon by the operator, and is powered by an electric motor that is capable of propelling the device with or without human propulsion. For purposes of this section, a motorcycle, as defined in §400, a motor-driven cycle, as defined in §405, a motorized bicycle or moped, as defined in §406, or a toy, as defined in §108550 of the Health and Safety Code, is not a motorized scooter − (b) A device meeting the definition in subdivision (a) that is powered by a source other than electrical power is also a motorized scooter NOTE: In order to operate a motorized scooter the operator, among other requirements, must wear an approved bicycle helmet. Failure to do so is a violation of §21235(c)CVC. The bicycle helmet must meet ANSI, Snell Foundation, or American Society for Testing Materials Standards. CONCLUSION Since California initiated the Helmet Law in 1992, the instances of death or severe head trauma to motorcycle riders have dramatically declined. Continued support by citing violators will allow this trend to continue, resulting in lessening of head injuries and its economic impact upon society. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 471 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 201 – Recognizing and Handling Alzheimer’s Victims REVISED December 2001 RECOGNIZING AND HANDLING ALZHEIMER'S VICTIMS INTRODUCTION Field officers are frequently confronted with persons who suffer from a variety of mental illnesses. Often times, persons who are suffering from Alzheimer's Disease demonstrate behavior that may be misinterpreted as criminal in nature, or dismissed as some other form of mental illness. This Training Bulletin is intended to assist the field officer in correctly identifying Alzheimer's patients, thus enabling the officer to provide appropriate assistance to those in need. BACKGROUND Alzheimer's Disease affects a person's short-term memory. Because of this, the person may be able to easily recall information from years past, but may not recall current information such as his or her address. Alzheimer's patients exhibit a variety of behaviors that may be construed as violations of the law. With a little careful questioning, an officer should be able to develop sufficient information to ascertain that the person's behavior was a manifestation of his/her illness, rather than a criminal act. Alzheimer's normally affects persons 65 years of age or older, but has been known to manifest itself as early as age 40. Below are common behaviors associated with Alzheimer's and suggestions for dealing with persons you encounter who suffer from the disease. PROCEDURES Wandering: Wandering may occur at any time of the day, however it is most common after dark. Alzheimer's sufferer's often become lost, even in front of their homes. Since short-term memory is affected, they may forget where they are and where they are going. Often times, the Alzheimer's patient will remember an address and phone number from years past, but will not realize that they have since moved. Perhaps motivated by embarrassment or fear, Alzheimer's victims will often make up stories to explain their behavior, or will become agitated and refuse your assistance. Should you be unable to determine the identity of the Alzheimer's sufferer or return him/her to their residence, there are a few options or resources available to assist in this effort. The Alzheimer's Association, a volunteer group, has a 0830 to 1730 hours information and referral number (323) 938-3370. This group has the names of missing Alzheimer's sufferer and makes arrangements for public broadcasts giving descriptions and requesting the public's help in locating persons reported to them. 201 – Alzheimers Victims 472 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Alzheimer's Disease is listed as a mental disorder under the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders. This, combined with facts and observations that would indicate the person is gravely disabled, will allow officers to file an application for a 72- hour hold under 5150 W&I Code. Unusual Sexual Behaviors: Alzheimer's may be a factor in inappropriate public sexual behavior or indecent exposure. Patients may remove clothing, if too warm, or may urinate in public. When confronted with situations of this nature, it is best to avoid rebuking or lecturing the subject. If possible, distract the individual with dialogue or find a task to keep him/her occupied. Shoplifting: Alzheimer's patients may forget to pay for merchandise, or that payment is required. When accused of shoplifting, Alzheimer's sufferers may accuse the store staff of stealing from them. Picking items up and carrying them about is a common behavior of Alzheimer's victims. When responding, attempt to include the Alzheimer's victim in your discussion with the store personnel. Speak slowly, taking things one step at a time. Driving Under the Influence: Many symptoms of alcohol intoxication and Alzheimer's are similar. Both conditions diminish brain function, which may manifest itself as confusion, disorientation or a blank facial expression. If the odor of alcohol is not present, consider Alzheimer's as a possible explanation for the circumstances. Check for a medical alert bracelet and if the driving is erratic, notify the patient's family if at all possible. Consider having the individual reevaluated by the Department of Motor Vehicles for his/her driving privilege. Other Behavior Typical of Alzheimer's: Victims may frequently exhibit confusion and/or disorientation, rendering them unable to mentally process what is going on to sort out the obvious. Anger and agitation may manifest themselves, as well as a difficulty in judging the passage of time. Alzheimer's victims may perceive their family members as strangers or accuse them of theft. Short-term memory is affected while long-term memory may remain intact. Alzheimer's victims may have difficulty processing language normally, resulting in the expression of incomplete thoughts or repetition of phrases over and over. Often the person suffering from Alzheimer's will forget the name of common objects or family members and friends. If the subject recognizes this they may try to cover for themselves by getting you to say the name of the person or object by saying things like "you know what (or who) that is?" Hints on Handling Alzheimer's Victims: Keep the tone of your contact as subdued and non-threatening as possible. Avoid overloading the subject with too much information or too many questions at a time. If possible, avoid the use of restraints (remember to keep safety in mind). When speaking to persons you suspect are affected by Alzheimer's, speak slowly, in a low tone of voice and employ simple language. Identify yourself and inform the subject why you are contacting him/her. Ask only one question or give only one direction at a time. There should be orientation questions asked of the subject, such as: 201 – Alzheimers Victims 473 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Do you know what city you are in? • What day is it? • What month is it? • What year is it? • Who is the president? • If we left right now, what would you do? Try to keep the conversation in a positive light; avoid scolding or chastising. Avoid instructions that require more that one action in sequence and attempt to keep distractions to a minimum. Most importantly, keep the contact friendly. Maintain eye contact while conversing and bear in mind that you are dealing with an individual who is in need of your professional help. If the person's home is found, questions should be asked if arrangements are being made for in-home or long term care. There also may be a need for the family or care facility to get the patient some type of identification bracelet that is not easily removed so that they can be identified if found. As police officers we may not be able to mandate these suggestions but we can definitely use our influence to help safeguard Alzheimer's patients and make our jobs easier in the future. A MET unit may also be able to provide assistance if the beat unit or dispatched unit has difficulty finding the patient's home or if the patient is considered gravely disabled or a danger to themselves or others. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 474 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 204 – Field Shotgun Inspections REVISED February 2002 Reviewed January 2020 FIELD SHOTGUN INSPECTION BACKGROUND In the past, officers have checked the operation of the shotgun firing pin by disassembling the barrel and dry firing the gun to feel if the firing pin functioned properly. Dry firing of a shotgun, with the barrel on or off, may cause firing pin failure, which cannot be detected until inspected by the Department Armorer. Officers shall not dry fire shotguns. The appropriate method (proper technique) to field check shotguns is as follows: • Check the shotgun safety. Place safety in the on (safe) position. • Check the chamber visually and confirm it is empty. This is accomplished by activating the slide release and pulling the slide halfway to the rear. If loaded, remove the round by slowly pulling the slide far enough to the rear to clear the round. If done slowly, this will not eject a round from the magazine into the port. • Push the follower (loading port) up into the chamber area as the slide is pulled fully to the rear. One round will eject out the bottom of the loading port. Remove the remaining rounds by pressing the right shell latch inside the loading port. Do not rack each round through the chamber to clear the shotgun. • With an empty shotgun and the slide to the rear, look down the barrel and check for obstructions. • Place the slide in the forward position with the safety on and pull the trigger. If the weapon fires (audible click), the safety is not functioning. Return the shotgun to the Department Armorer at the range. • To check the smoothness of the slide operation, hold down the slide release while operating the slide. Do not fire the weapon and rack the slide for this check. Repeated dry firing may cause weapon failure. • Recheck the safety. With the safety in the on (safe) position, reload the shotgun. Place four shotgun rounds (00 buck) into the magazine tube, leaving the chamber empty. The internal hammer shall be in the cocked position making it necessary to use the slide release to operate the shotgun. CONCLUSION The aforementioned shotgun inspection technique is intended to ensure that shotguns will function properly when required. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 475 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 205 – Proper Handling of Prisoners Property REVISED July 2000 PROPER HANDLING OF PRISONER PROPERTY PURPOSE The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to provide accountability for prisoner’s property when booked into the jail. Booking Upon arrival in booking, every officer transporting a prisoner will collect any property belonging to that prisoner. Each officer shall confirm that they have included any property that may have been retained in the field, together with property removed from the prisoner, and place into the plastic trays provided in booking. After completing the booking work sheet, the searching officer shall note each item in the plastic tray on the booking work sheet under the title of prisoner property. These items shall then be placed into a clear plastic bag. Search and Property Inventory • It is recommended that only one officer begin and complete the searching procedure in order to avoid any missed areas • All property removed from a prisoner shall be noted on the booking worksheet • All loose property will be placed in the provided, clear plastic bag. Property that does not fit into the clear plastic bag will be sent to fifth floor property room with the appropriate property report being filed and appropriate notation made on the booking worksheet • All shoelaces shall be removed from the prisoner’s shoes and placed into the clear plastic bag • No lighters, matches, open packs of cigarettes or tobacco products shall be placed in the plastic bag (unopened, sealed packs of cigarettes or tobacco products are the only exception) • All batteries shall be removed from pagers and cell phones, they should not just be turned off • Jewelry shall be identified on the booking sheet and placed in the special envelopes provided • All medication shall be placed into the plastic bag, NO medication, prescription or otherwise is to be brought to the jail • Special items such as collectible coins, currency, food stamps or checks shall be placed into the plastic bag with the loose property Cash 205 – Proper Handling of Prisoner’s Property 476 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • All money belonging to the prisoner shall be placed into the provided envelope after being counted by the searching officer • The searching officer shall ask the prisoner if he/she has any money concealed on their person • The searching officer shall complete the required information located on the outside of the envelope and then give the envelope to the booking supervisor • The booking supervisor shall ensure that the cash count is accurate, initial and seal the envelope with clear tape • The booking supervisor shall return the envelope to the searching officer who will retain it until the envelope is sealed into the plastic bag • The searching officer will ensure that the prisoner’s booking number is written on the cash envelope • The searching officer must also write the amount of cash on the booking sheet and be sure all counts listed are the same on the booking worksheet, on the cash envelope and on the final booking face sheet Sealing the Bag • All loose property, including the jewelry envelope, will go into the lower portion of the plastic bag • The pink copy of the completed booking slip shall be placed in the lower portion of the bag in a manner that the prisoner’s name, booking number and money deposited, can be read. The lower portion will be sealed • The cash envelope shall be placed in the top portion of the bag and sealed separately from the loose property • It is the booking supervisor’s responsibility to ensure that the money is counted properly and that the plastic bag is sealed correctly before the bag is placed into the safe Any property that does not fit into the plastic bag, for example, large back packs, large purses, etc., will be inventoried and placed into the fifth floor property room. The correct property form will be filed with a receipt copy being placed in the plastic bag to ensure that the prisoner can locate his/her property when released. When a prisoner’s bicycle is placed into property, a property report will be filled out, a copy attached to the bike and a copy placed in the prisoner’s plastic bag. Bicycles do not remain at the station; they are taken to the bicycle warehouse. Paperwork indicating the bicycle has been stored is necessary for the subject to locate the bike when he/she is released. Any property or money that is kept as evidence also needs to be indicated on the booking sheet. It is the responsibility of every searching officer to be certain prisoner’s property is correctly collected and stored. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Support Bureau 477 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 211 – Unloading Firearms REVISED September 2004 Reviewed January 2020 UNLOADING FIREARMS INTRODUCTION This Training Bulletin shall provide officers with knowledge relative to the safe unloading operations for the most common types of weapons they may encounter. A loaded firearm can be an instrument of death, if not handled carefully. Accidents with firearms are always the result of neglecting the basic rules of firearms safety. Officers should never attempt to unload an unfamiliar firearm. Approached in a knowledgeable and responsible manner, firearms can be handled in a safe manner. OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES Loaded firearms recovered in the field should not be transported until every effort has been made to unload and render the firearm safe. Officers who find firearms they are unfamiliar with have the responsibility of: • Requesting assistance from another officer who is familiar with that firearm; i.e. an officer who has completed firearm safety classes, specialized training with firearms, etc. • Calling the range during business hours for assistance, phone # (562) 570-5974 There are rare circumstances when a LOADED FIREARM cannot be unloaded in the field, and the range is closed. The following procedures shall apply: • The officer shall notify the range expert on-call to respond to the scene (Communications center will have the list of experts) • In the event no experts from the list are available: notify the on-call Property supervisor to respond to the station to receive the firearm into Property • During a Homicide Investigation, in the unlikely event a loaded firearm needs to be transported, it will become the responsibility of a Homicide Detective Semi-Automatic Handgun (cocked or uncocked) Handle the firearm in a safe location and keep it pointed in a safe direction toward a surface that will absorb an accidental discharge; i.e. grass, dirt, sand. • Hold firearm in your strong hand, keeping your finger clear of the trigger 211 – Unloading Firearms 478 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Remove the magazine by depressing the button on the side of the frame or grip, or release the lever on bottom of the magazine well. Do not unload the magazine. Keep the loaded magazine separate from the firearm, inside a paper envelope or bag. Do not mark the magazine. NOTE: The magazine is the most frequent location where fingerprints are found • Grab the rear portion of the slide (which is the upper moveable portion) with your weak hand and pull the slide straight back quickly and firmly to eject any ammo in the barrel. (Visually check the chamber for any stuck rounds) Properly package the removed round. Make a note on the package to identify which chamber the round came from for later ballistics analysis. If firearm has a slide stop on the left side, push the slide stop up and this will keep the slide open. If the slide is open and a round is still in the chamber, keep the slide open and tilt the firearm up to shake it out. (Refer to Training Bulletin 48 "Packaging of Evidence") Some assault type firearms (Mac 10-11, Tech 9) may have a fixed firing pin. If the bolt is open and the magazine is in place when the trigger is pulled, the firearm will discharge. This is referred to as an open bolt system. REVOLVER HANDGUN Handle the firearm in a safe location and keep it pointed in a safe direction toward a surface that will absorb an accidental discharge; e.g., grass, dirt, sand. • Mark the position of the chamber with a pencil to the left and right of the chambered round (see example below). This allows ballistics experts to reconstruct the exact position of the cylinder • To open the cylinder push the cylinder release button (forward) for Smith/Wesson and to the (rear) for Colt models • Carefully remove the rounds (both live and expended) systematically and package them individually in coin envelopes or paper, marking what position they were in the cylinder. Package and identify the rounds removed from the cylinder for later ballistics analysis (see example below) EXAMPLES: Illustration A Illustration B Top break-open type revolvers have latches located in or near the rear sight. Some types of small caliber revolvers require the cylinder pin be taken out to remove the cylinder. 211 – Unloading Firearms 479 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Some single action revolvers have a loading gate on the right side, rear of the frame (Colt and Ruger). By opening the loading gate, the cylinder can be rotated to unload the chambers. On other models, the hammer must be in the half-cocked position to rotate the cylinder. Unload the chambers by rotating the cylinder with the barrel in an upward position. Some models have an ejector rod that must be pulled or removed to open the cylinder. RIFLE/SHOTGUN (Military and Civilian) There are several different types of rifles/ shotguns which may have a detachable or non- detachable magazine; e.g., single shot, break open, bolt action, semi-auto, pump, lever action. Single-Shot/Break-Open Rifle/Shotgun The lever will usually be located to the rear of the hammer, which swings right or left. Moving this lever will allow the rifle or shotgun to be broken open and the round removed. If the hammer is cocked the firearm will engage a safety mechanism to prevent the firearm from opening. The hammer must be Safely disengaged to allow the firearm to be opened. Bolt Action Rifle/Shotgun If bolt-action rifle/shotgun does not contain any magazine well, the mere opening of the bolt (usually in a up and back motion) should remove any rounds from the chamber. If the firearm contains a magazine well, manually remove the rounds from the magazine leaving the bolt open. DO NOT cycle the bolt to remove the rounds. If the bolt will not open, locate the safety mechanism and move it. This may unlock the bolt. Some firearms have a button in front of the trigger guard to release the magazine floor plate, which allows the rounds to fall out. Semi-Automatic Rifle/Shotgun Most semi-automatic firearms contain a detachable magazine. Remove the magazine first by locating and depressing the magazine release button or lever. Operate the cocking handle and or bolt to remove any live rounds from the chamber. Pump-Type Rifle Put the safety on. Remove the magazine, if present. Depress the slide release button, slowly open the slide, remove any live rounds. Rifle .22 Caliber: If the rifle has a magazine tube under the barrel or in the stock, put the safety on, remove the magazine tube from the rifle and tilt the weapon down if the magazine tube is under the barrel, or up if the magazine is in the stock. Push the slide release, if present. Slowly open the slide and remove any live rounds. Exposed Hammer-type .22 Caliber: You must lower the hammer on the firing pin to operate the slide-action. Pump-Type Shotgun Put the safety on. Depress the release button, pull the slide back (to rear) and remove any live ammunition. Leave the bolt open. Depress the shell carrier to the up position. Depress the shell stop, which is located inside the loading port, and remove the ammunition (870 Remington). If unable to remove the ammunition from the magazine tube in this manner, ensure the safety is on and operate the slide manually, removing any live ammunition. 211 – Unloading Firearms 480 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Lever-Action Rifle Some lever-action rifles have a detachable magazine that can be removed by depressing the magazine release button. Other models may have a tubular magazine underneath the barrel. Some lever action firearms will have a detachable magazine that can be removed by depressing the magazine release button. Others may have a tubular magazine underneath the barrel. On lever actions with removable magazines, the magazine must first be removed. Pull the lever down, which will open the bolt and remove any rounds from the chamber. Rifles that do not have a detachable magazine require the lever to be returned to the up position. Re-open the bolt by pulling down the lever to expose any other live rounds lying on top of the shell carrier. Lift the rounds out by hand and continue this process until the firearm is empty. REVIEW Responsibility Support Bureau 481 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jerome Lance, Chief of Police 212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employees REVISED September 2001 NOTIFICATION TO SCHOOL AUTHORITIES OF THE ARREST OF SCHOOL EMPLOYEES PURPOSE The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to establish policy and procedure relative to the notification of school authorities when a school employee is arrested for specific offenses. California State Law requires that school authorities be notified both verbally and in writing when a school employee is arrested for certain offenses. POLICY It is the responsibility of the Police Department, upon the arrest of a school employee for any of the following offenses, to see to it that appropriate notifications to school authorities are made. (Authorizing codes and specific offenses begin on page 3) • When a school employee is arrested for a sex offense as defined in Education Code §44010 • When a school employee is arrested for a sex offense which requires registration (290 PC) • When a school employee is arrested for an offense which requires registration as a substance abuser (11590 HS) • When a school employee is arrested for drug paraphernalia as it relates to LSD (11364 HS) Notification requirements apply to the following school employees (§291 PC): • Employees of any public school in the state: both teachers and non-teachers • Teachers employed in any private school in the state • Teachers employed in any community college district in the state Patrol Officer Responsibilities • Notify Booking Sergeant • Note in the arrest report that the arrestee is a school employee and note the name of the sergeant notified Booking Sergeant Responsibilities • Notify the Watch Commander • If the arrest occurred during normal business hours the Booking Sergeant will complete the telephonic notifications as follows: 212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee 482 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • If the school employee is a teacher or non-teacher in any of the public schools of this state, the booking sergeant shall immediately notify the superintendent of schools of the school district employing the teacher or non-teacher • If the individual arrested is employed as a teacher in any private school of this state, the booking sergeant shall immediately notify the private school authorities employing the teacher • If the school employee is a teacher in any community college district in the state, the booking sergeant shall notify the superintendent of the community college district employing the teacher. (The list of persons to be notified begins on page 6) Watch Commander Responsibilities • Make the necessary Watch Log entries and notify the Duty Chief if necessary Handling Detective Responsibilities • Make appropriate telephonic notifications for arrests that occurred outside of normal school business hours • Make appropriate notifications if at any time during the investigation it becomes known that the individual arrested is a school employee and notification has not yet been made • If the school employee is a teacher in any of the public schools of this state, the handling detective shall notify, in writing, the Commission for Teacher Credentialing and the superintendent of schools in the county where the person is employed • If the school employee is a non-teacher in any of the public schools of this state, the handling detective shall notify, in writing, the governing board of the school district employing the person • If the individual arrested is employed as a teacher in any private school of this state, the handling detective shall notify, in writing, the private school authorities employing the teacher • If the school employee is a teacher in any community college district, the handling detective shall notify, in writing, the Office of the Chancellor of the California Community Colleges REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee 483 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents AUTHORIZING CODE SECTIONS Penal Code §291 Notice of Arrest of Public School Employee • Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the offenses enumerated in section 290 or in subdivision 1 of section 261, or section 44010 of the Education Code of any school employee, shall do either of the following: • If the school employee is a teacher in any of the public schools of this state he /she shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of schools of the school district employing the teacher and shall immediately give written notice of arrest to the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing and to the superintendent of schools in the county wherein the person is employed. • If the school employee is a non-teacher in any of the public schools of this state, he/she shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of schools of the school district employing the non-teacher and shall immediately give written notice of the arrest to the governing board of the school district employing the person. Penal Code §291.1 Notice of Arrest of Private School Teacher • Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the offenses enumerated in Section 290 of any person who is employed as a teacher in any private school of this state, shall immediately give written notice of the arrest to the private school authorities employing the teacher. The sheriff or chief of police shall immediately notify by telephone the private school authorities employing such teacher. Penal Code §291.5 Notice of Arrest of Community College Instructor • Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the offenses enumerated in Section 290 or in subdivision (1) of Section 261 of any teacher or instructor employed in any community college district shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of the community college district employing the teacher or instructor and shall immediately give written notice of the arrest to the Office of the Chancellor of the California Community Colleges. Health and Safety Code §11591 Notification to School Authorities of Arrest of School Employee • Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the controlled substance offenses enumerated in Section 11590, (Drug offenses requiring registration) or Section 11364, insofar as that section relates to paragraph (12) of subdivision (d) of Section 11054, (Paraphernalia related to LSD) of any school employee, shall do either of the following: • If such school employee is a teacher in any of the public schools of this state he /she shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of schools of the school district employing the teacher and shall immediately give written notice of arrest to the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing and to the superintendent of schools in the county wherein the person is employed. • If such school employee is a non-teacher in any of the public schools of this state, he/she shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of schools of the 212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee 484 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents school district employing the non-teacher and shall immediately give written notice of the arrest to the governing board of the school district employing the person. • If such school employee is a teacher in any private school of this state, he/she shall immediately notify by telephone the private school authorities employing such teacher and shall give written notice of the arrest to the private school authorities employing the teacher. Health and Safety Code §11591.5 Notice to Community College Authorities of Arrest of Instructor • Every sheriff or chief of police, upon the arrest for any of the controlled substance offenses enumerated in Section 11590, (Drug offenses requiring registration) or Section 11364, insofar as that section relates to paragraph (9) of subdivision (d) of Section 11054, (Paraphernalia related to Diethyl tryptamine, an hallucinogenic substance) of any teacher or instructor employed in any community college district shall immediately notify by telephone the superintendent of the community college district employing the teacher or instructor and shall immediately give written notice of the arrest to the Office of the Chancellor of the California Community Colleges. CODE SECTIONS REQUIRING NOTIFICATION 290 PC – Registration of Sex Offender 261(a)(1) PC – Rape of mentally, developmentally or physically disabled person 11590 HS – Registration of Controlled Substance Offenders 11364 HS – Possession of drug paraphernalia as it relates to LSD Education Code §44010 “Sex Offense” means any one or more of the offenses listed below: • Any offense defined in Penal Code Sections 220, 261, 261.5, 262, 264.1, 266, 266(j), 267, 285, 286, 288, 288a, 289, 311.3, 311.4, 313.1, 647(b), 647.6, or former Section 647a, subdivision (a), (b) or (c) of Section 243.4 subdivisions (b), (c) and (d) of section 311.2, or subdivision (a) or (d) of Section 647 • Any offense defined in Section 314 of the Penal Code committed on or after September 15, 1961 • Any offense involving lewd and lascivious conduct under Section 272 of the Penal Code committed on or after September 15, 1961 • Any attempt to commit any of the above-mentioned offenses • Any offense committed or attempted in any other state which, if committed or attempted in this state, would have been punishable as one or more of the above- mentioned offenses • Any conviction for an offense resulting in the requirement to register as a sex offender pursuant to section 290 of the Penal Code • Commitment as a mentally disordered sex offender 290 PC (a)(1)(A) Every person described in paragraph (2), for the rest of his/her life while residing in California, shall be required to register with the Chief of Police of the city in which he/she is residing. 212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee 485 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The following persons shall be required to register pursuant to paragraph one: Paragraph (2) Any person who, since July 1,1944, has been or is hereafter convicted in any court in this state or in any federal or military court of a violation of section 207 or 209 committed with intent to violate section 261,286,288,288a,or 289, section 220, except assault to commit mayhem, Section 243.4 paragraph (1) (2) (3) (4) or (6) of subdivision (a) of section 262 involving the use of force or violence for which the person is sentenced to the state prison, Section 264.1, 266, 266c,subdivision (b) of 266h subdivision (b) of Section 266I,266j,267,269,285,286,288,288a,288.5,or 289, subdivision (b)(c) or (d) of section 311.2, Section 311.3, 311.4, 311.10, 311.11, or 647.6, former Section 647a, subdivision (c) of Section 653f, subdivision 1 or 2 of Section 314, any offense involving lewd or lascivious conduct under section 272, or any felony violation of Section 288.2; or any person who since that date has been or is hereafter convicted of the attempt to commit the above mentioned offenses. (B) Any person released, discharged, or paroled from a penal institution where he or she was confined because of the commission or attempted commission of one of the offenses described above. (C) Any person who has been or is hereafter determined to be a mentally disordered sex offender. (Per Article 1 Chapter 2 of Part 2 of Division 6 of the Welfare and Institutions Code.) Any person who has been found guilty in the guilt phase of a trial for an offense for which registration is required by this section but who has been found not guilty by reason of insanity in the sanity phase of the trial. (D) Any person found at the time of conviction to have committed the offense as a result of sexual compulsion or for the purposes of sexual gratification. (E) Any person convicted of any offense not specifically listed but the court found that at time of conviction that the person committed the offense as a result of sexual compulsion of for the purposes of sexual gratification. • 207PC-Kidnapping • 209PC-Kidnapping for ransom, reward or extortion • 261PC-Rape • 286PC-Sodomy • 288PC-Sex offense or lewd act against child or dependent adult • 288aPC-Unlawful oral copulation • 289PC-Penetration by foreign object • 220PC-Assault with intent to commit mayhem or sex crimes • 243.4PC-Sexual battery • 264.1PC-Conspiracy to commit sexual assault • 266PC-Seduction for purposes of prostitution • 266cPC-Consent to sexual act induced by fear • 266h(b)PC-Pimping, victim is a minor • 266iPC-Pandering, victim is a minor 212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee 486 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • 266jPC-Furnishing child for lewd purposes • 267PC-Abduction of minor for purposes of prostitution • 269PC-Aggravated sexual assault of a child • 288.5PC-Continuous sexual abuse of a child • 311.2PC Trafficking in obscene matter- subdivisions (b) depicting persons under 18 yrs. (c) the intent to distribute or exchange with person under 18yrs. or (d) sends or cause to be sent with the intent to distribute or exchange with a person under the age of 18 • 311.4PC-Employment of minor for purposes of traffic in obscene matter • 311.10PC-Advertising depictions of sexual conduct by minors • 311.11PC-Possession of depictions of sexual conduct by minors • 647.6PC-Molesting a minor • 653f(c)-Solicits another person to commit a crime, with the intent that the crime be committed, rape, sodomy, oral copulation, any by force and violence • 314PC Section 1 and 2-Indecent exposure; obscene exhibitions • 288.2PC Furnishing harmful matter to minor for purposes of seduction • 272PC Contributing to the delinquency of a minor LIST FOR REQUIRED NOTIFICATION TO SCHOOL AUTHORITIES OF ARREST OF SCHOOL EMPLOYEES LONG BEACH UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT Superintendent of Schools 1515 Hughes Way Long Beach, CA 90810 (562) 997-8000 Board of Education Assistant Superintendent – Human Resources Services 1515 Hughes Way Long Beach, CA 90810 (562) 997-8257 COMMISSION ON TEACHER CREDENTIALING Division of Professional Practices 1900 Capital Avenue Sacramento, Ca 95814 (916) 445-0243 CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY, LONG BEACH Vice President of Administration and Finance 1250 Bellflower Blvd. Long Beach, Ca 90840 (562) 985-1658 LONG BEACH COMMUNITY COLLEGE 212 – Notification to School Authorities of the Arrest of School Employee 487 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Administrative Dean – Human Resources 4901 E. Carson St. Long Beach, Ca 90808 (562) 938-4397 Office of the Chancellor of the California Community Colleges Program Assistant, Faculty and Staff Development Human Resources Division 1102 ‘Q’ Street Sacramento, CA 95814 (916) 445-6240 or 8752 488 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Jim McDonnell, Chief of Police 213 – 14602.6 CVC – 30 Day Impounds REVISED July 2013 SECTION 14602.6 CVC – 30-DAY IMPOUNDS INTRODUCTION Since 1995, the Long Beach Police Department has utilized a powerful tool to keep unlicensed drivers, or drivers with a suspended or revoked license, off the road. California Vehicle Code (CVC) 14602.6 allows a peace officer to impound a violator's vehicle for 30 days at the owner's expense. Section 14602.6 CVC, is not a mandatory towing or impound section, however it is a useful tool to keep irresponsible drivers off the road. Officers should use common sense and discretion when enforcing this section, and should consider if the driver was forced to operate a vehicle because of an emergency. Section 14602.6 CVC - "Whenever a peace officer determines that a person was driving a vehicle while his or her driving privilege was suspended or revoked, … or … without ever having been issued a driver's license, the peace officer may either immediately arrest that person and cause the removal and seizure of the vehicle or, if the vehicle is involved in a traffic collision, cause the removal and seizure of the vehicle without the necessity of arresting the person … A vehicle so impounded shall be impounded for 30 days." ELEMENTS • The officer must have probable cause to stop the vehicle • The driver must be operating the vehicle, or the officer has reason to believe the driver was operating the vehicle; e.g., at the scene of an accident, a subject admits to driving, or witness statements • The driver must be arrested; a traffic citation is a form of arrest o EXCEPTION: At the scene of an accident, especially where the driver is incapacitated, the officer need not cite or arrest the driver for the impoundment to be valid; however, if the driver is available and able to sign a citation, one should be issued LICENSE STATUS The Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) driver's license history (LICENSE STATUS) indicates if a license is suspended or revoked. KNOWLEDGE OF REVOCATION/SUSPENSION – NOTIFICATION If a driver’s license shows suspended or revoked, "action ended" may appear on the driver's license history. The driver must reapply for his/her license to remove the 213 – Thirty Day Impounds 489 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents suspension. The status of the license is considered suspended or revoked until the license is reinstated. VERBAL OR PERSONAL SERVICE NEEDED If “verbal or personal service needed” appears on the driver's license history, complete DMV Form #DL-310, Verbal Notice by Peace Officer, DMV or Court Employee. If a driver has not been served, the vehicle may only be towed using 22651(p) CVC. As with any vehicle impound or storage, a Long Beach Police Department Vehicle Report, PD Form 2310.010, must be completed to include the following: • In the box for “TOW AUTH. (SECTION),” write “14602.6 CVC” • In the box for "PERSON/BUSINESS," the driver's name, physical description, and date of birth are mandatory; if the driver has an operator's license, even if the license is from another state or country, the number is required in the appropriate space • Attach a copy of the issued citation As with any Vehicle Report, immediately notify Auto Stats regarding the impoundment. Provide the driver's license number and vehicle information directly to Auto Stats either in person or telephonically. Auto Stats is required to obtain a copy of the driver's license history and attach it to the Vehicle Report. 14602.6 CVC vs. 22651(p) CVC • Do not impound rental cars; use 22651(p) CVC and store the vehicle • If the driver has a valid driver’s license for another class of vehicle, use 22651(p) CVC; if a passenger with a valid driver's license is in the vehicle, the vehicle should be released to the subject with the valid license • If a driver's license is suspended because child support payments were not paid, then use 22651(p) CVC, which means the registered owner must have a legally licensed driver and show proof of insurance to get the car; this can happen the same day of the tow • If the driver has an expired license, no matter how long it has been expired use 22651(p) CVC • If the driver has an expired out of state or out of country license, use 22651(p) CVC even if they have established residency in California NOTE: If the vehicle is stopped in close proximity to the registered owner’s house, or in the registered owner’s driveway, the vehicle should not be towed for either section. However, the driver should still be cited for appropriate section (Community Caretaker Doctrine, Miranda v. City of Cornelius, 2006 and People v. Williams, 2007). PROCEDURE • Write an “X” in the box for “14602.6” to indicate a vehicle is being impounded under this section and write 14602.6 CVC as the reason for the tow 213 – Thirty Day Impounds 490 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • DO NOT place a hold on a vehicle unless there is another crime involved, e.g., 20002 CVC, 23153 CVC, 212.5 PC, hold for prints, VIN inspection, etc; the impound hold for 14602.6 CVC will be automatic • You must complete the top section of page two of the Long Beach Police Department Vehicle Report to indicate additional impound information; indicate if the driver received permission from the registered owner to drive the vehicle, if the registered owner knew the driver was unlicensed, and if the driver knew he/she did not have a license or that it was suspended or revoked • Ensure the narrative articulates and justifies the seizure, include any additional information the officer finds pertinent, such as prior contacts, other related crimes, if the registered owner gave the keys to the driver or whether the registered owner asked if the driver had a valid license, and the relationship between the registered owner and the driver RELEASE OF VEHICLE TO OWNER To obtain the release of the vehicle by Towing Operations, the owner is required to do the following: • Obtain a release from Accident Investigations (AID) by having the driver obtain a valid CDL and providing proof of insurance on the vehicle • Provide identification • Register the vehicle in his/her name, if the vehicle was recently purchased • Provide a driver who is licensed, if the registered owner does not have a valid license • Pay all fees associated with the 14602.6 CVC 30-day impound to the City of Long Beach SEIZING VEHICLES AT DUI CHECKPOINTS Governor Jerry Brown signed Assembly Bill 353 in October 2011. AB353 states, “… a peace officer or any other authorized person shall not cause the impoundment of a vehicle at a sobriety checkpoint if the driver’s only offense is a violation of 12500 CVC.” This does not change the authority to impound a vehicle being driven by a subject with a suspended or revoked driver's license for 14602.6 CVC. If the registered owner is not present at the time of the offense, then AB353 requires, “… a law enforcement officer to make a reasonable attempt to identify the registered owner of the vehicle in order to release the vehicle to the registered owner if he or she is a licensed driver or to a licensed driver authorized by the registered owner.” Officers must also allow the registered owner or another licensed driver, acting as an agent for the registered owner, to drive the vehicle from the checkpoint. Per 22651 CVC, if a licensed driver is not available, the vehicle can be legally parked with the permission of the registered owner, or towed if the registered owner or appointed agent cannot be reached. The name and driver's license number of the individual the vehicle was released to must be written on the officer’s copy of the citation. Vehicles which have not been claimed by the registered owner, or an agent of the registered owner, may be towed from the scene, but must be released as soon as the registered owner or agent claim the vehicle if they possess a valid license, proof of registration and current insurance. 213 – Thirty Day Impounds 491 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents The above applies only to vehicles stopped at DUI checkpoints, not vehicles stopped at any other time or location. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 492 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 216 – Computer Crimes REVISED May 2003 COMPUTER CRIMES Introduction The transition from manual records to computer/electronic records, in the personal, business and criminal environment, has created a major impact on law enforcement and the way investigations are conducted. Computer crime is not limited to network intrusion, security issues and the creation of, and distribution of viruses. Computers in criminal matters are most often found in traditional crimes, such as, forgery/fraud, child pornography, bookmaking, homicide, sex crimes, and narcotics. In the past, most records pertaining to criminal matters were kept on paper, which made identification and seizure of evidence relatively simple. However, computer/electronic evidence can be invisible to the untrained officer or detective. Recognizing potential sources of computer/electronic evidence is important, but may not be readily apparent. The court system now requires specially trained investigators to secure, recover and present computer/electronic evidence. Procedures Computer/electronic evidence shall only be accessed and searched by authorized Long Beach Police Department detectives, who have the proper training and equipment. The following procedures shall be adhered to when officers or detectives discover potential computer/electronic evidence at a scene. • Secure the computer and the immediate area. Do not allow anyone access to the computer or the immediate area. Secure all visible computer disks, manuals, records and peripherals (printers, scanners, fax machines, modems, CD-ROM drives, PDAs, etc.). If circumstances require you to identify a specific computer operator, all items seized should be preserved for latent print processing • Do not touch, power-on, power-off or attempt to look at the contents of the computer, or any other computer/electronic device in question. Any interaction with the computer or electronic device can alter vital evidence files, dates and times • Contact the Computer Crimes Detail personnel immediately. Detectives are available during regular business hours at extension 8-7223 and after hours via the Communications Center • Computer equipment should not be exposed to static electricity. Prior to handling any computer equipment, the officer should “neutralize” themselves by touching a metal 216 – Computer Crimes 493 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents object or surface. Use paper packaging for evidence storage. Do not use plastic of any kind • Collect and tag each item of equipment. If possible, photograph the physical conditions of the computer and all relative computer/electronic equipment and their connections • Package the equipment in a manner to safeguard against physical jarring that may cause damage. Do not paper clip, staple or place any adhesive (i.e. Evidence or masking tape) on computer disks or cables • Do not transport any computer/electronic equipment in the trunk of police cars equipped with radios or MDTs. This exposes the computer/electronics to electro- magnetic fields resulting in corruption of evidence. Transport equipment in the front or rear seats • Forward a copy of the Incident Report and Property Report to the Detective Division, Computer Crimes Detail • In many cases personnel from the Computer Crimes Detail will respond to and assist officers or detectives in the field. It will remain the responsibility of the officer or detective on scene to maintain, inventory and place into evidence all items seized, to ensure a proper chain of custody Summary The likelihood that an officer or detective will encounter computer/electronic evidence or be called upon to seize this evidence is drastically increasing. The unintentional destruction or corruption of computer/electronic evidence is a vital concern. When assistance is needed contact the Computer Crimes Detail at extension 8-7223, during business hours, or via the Communications Center after hours. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 494 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Anthony Batts, Chief of Police 218 – Sex Offender Status – Megan’s Law REVISED March 2004 SEX OFFENDER STATUS – COMMUNITY & INDIVIDUAL NOTIFCATION (MEGAN'S LAW) INTRODUCTION On September 27, 1996, Federal Legislation, Section 290 PC (Megan's Law) became effective. Megan's Law allows law enforcement to inform members of the community of the identity and addresses of certain convicted sex offenders. BACKGROUND The law addresses several issues; however, two portions are of primary importance: • A CD-ROM computer disc will be made accessible to the public. (Refer to General 97/02, "Sex Offender Identification Information (Megan's Law)," or upon insertion into the Department Manual, Section 8.5.11.1) • Community or individual notification of sex offender status may be made by law enforcement agencies The Department of Justice has the responsibility of classifying registered sex offenders into the following categories: • High Risk Offenders: "Serious offenders" who have additionally been identified as having a higher risk of re-offending, and may pose a greater danger to the public • Serious Offenders: A serious offender is a registrant convicted of a felony offense (except those listed in the "other" category), or of misdemeanor child molestation • Other Offenders: Other offenders are those convicted of misdemeanors (except 647.6 PC and 288(c) PC), and those felons convicted of 314.1 PC, pornography-related offenses, and 262 PC Information on "Other Offenders" may not be released to the public. RELEASE OF INFORMATION ON "SERIOUS OFFENDERS" BY FIELD OFFICERS Field officers may inform individual members of the public regarding a "High Risk Offender's" or "Serious Offender's status, after obtaining approval, under the following conditions per California PC Section 290(m)(1). • A field officer must have a reasonable suspicion • Based on information, which has come to his/her attention 495 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • That a person might become a victim of a serious offender, and the offender; • Is likely to encounter the person When these conditions are met, registration information on "High Risk Offender" may be released to individual members of the public by field officers without restriction, after obtaining approval from a field supervisor. Sex Crime Detail detectives will handle community notification. Under the authority of California Penal Code Section 290.4(a)(4), the person being notified shall read and sign the attached "Megan's Law Field Disclosure" form, PD Form 3114.001(A)(B), stating the information is being provided to protect the public, and in any misuse of the information may result in a 5-year sentence enhancement against the person who misuses the information. Officers in the field may verify an offender's registration status and classification any time by accessing CLETS, Violent Crime Information Network, or by contacting the Department of Justice directly. For any further assistance needed during business hours, contact the Sex Crimes Detail. If registered sex offender information is released, the releasing field officer shall document the notification by filing an "Incident Report," entitled "SEX OFF-NOTI" (Sexual Offender Notification). The officer shall identify the offender, method of verifying offender status, identification of supervisor who approved the notification, and identification and address of the person or business notified. The "Incident Report" should also include a brief description of the circumstances surrounding the notification. This "Incident Report" and the "Megan's Law Field Disclosure" form shall be maintained together in the Records Section and copies of both forms shall be forwarded to the Sex Crimes Detail upon receipt by Records Section personnel. Both forms shall be maintained together in the Records Section and Records Section personnel shall forward copies of both forms to the Sex Crimes Detail upon receipt. Both forms shall be maintained in Department files for a minimum of five years. COMMUNITY NOTIFICATIONS The Long Beach Police Department believes an informed public is a safer public. Therefore, the police department may notify the communities in which "High Risk Offenders" live and work. Sex Crimes detectives have the responsibility for evaluating each high risk offender regarding suitability for community notification. The sex registration contact detective will present registrants who appear suitable for community notification to the Detective Division Commander for approval. Upon approval, community notification will normally be made at a community education meeting. Depending on the offender's victim preferences, notification will also be made to public and private schools, day care centers, women or fraternal groups, the Parks Department, or other community organizations whose members are likely to encounter the offender. 496 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Community notification bulletins are prepared by the Sex Crimes Detail and approved by the Detective Division Commander. The bulletins do not include the address of the offender, but may include a hundred block. The bulletins may also include statements as to the offender's past victim, modus operandi, description, alias, and authority for distribution of the bulletin as well as general information as to sex offenders. The bulletin will also contain the statement, "Do Not Duplicate," to prevent mass posting of the bulletin. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigation Bureau 497 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 221 – Tire Deflation Device REVISED June 2017 TIRE DEFLATION DEVICE PURPOSE The purpose of this Training Bulletin is to outline the use of and identify strategic locations for tire deflation device deployment. When suspect vehicles cross a tire deflation device, hollow spikes are embedded into the tires, causing the tire to deflate at a controlled rate. Even though the suspect vehicle has one or more of its tires deflated, the suspect may continue to drive; however, the ability of the suspect to operate the vehicle at high speeds is greatly reduced, if not eliminated. INTRODUCTION A tire deflation device is used to assist in terminating vehicle pursuits. Pursuits, by their very nature, are dynamic. When authorized, the deployment of a tire deflation device serves as a tool for trained officers. Once a supervisor authorizes the deployment of a tire deflation device, all units are authorized to deploy a tire deflation device. Each patrol substation has been issued a limited number of tire deflation devices and is responsible for ensuring the availability of the devices. DRIVING PATTERNS Fleeing drivers often follow a common pattern: • They tend to make right turns because it is the path of least traffic resistance; • They tend to stay on major thoroughfares, rather than becoming boxed in on narrow streets; • They tend to select freeways as an avenue of quick escape; • They tend to head to familiar locations; - If the suspect is the registered owner of the fleeing vehicle, the path to his or her address should be considered a possible route. PROPER PLACEMENT • The most important decision for proper placement is officer safety; - Pursuing officers should maintain a safe distance at the deployment location; • A location must be picked with proper cover for the deploying officer; - A vehicle should not be used for cover when deploying a tire deflation device; • If the pursuit is a low speed pursuit, concealment of the police vehicle is strongly encouraged; • When deploying the device, remember that the device can be pulled easily towards the deploying officer, but it cannot be pushed away from the officer; EFFECTIVE DEPLOYMENT 221 – Tire Deflation Device 498 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents Officers deploying tire deflation devices should familiarize themselves with their beats and area to know optimal locations for deployment. In order for the tire deflation device to be the most effective the following is recommended: • The deploying officer must be in a position to observe the suspect vehicle and other traffic; • Tire deflation devices must be on flat, solid ground, such as pavement or concrete; • Avoid using tire deflation devices on wet surfaces, gravel or loose pavement; • Deploy the tire deflation device before intersections or driveways into businesses; • Give consideration for traffic flow in the immediate area, upcoming intersections, high-use driveways, school zones, and pedestrian traffic. GENERAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS • Never wrap the cord of the tire deflation device around your hand or any other portion of your body; • Do not enter the roadway if pursuing vehicles have not passed; • Do not bend the tire deflation device; • Do not dismantle or try to repair the tire deflation device. COMMUNICATION Effective deployment of the tire deflation device requires proper communication. The following information should be communicated when deploying a tire deflation device: • Advise all officers of deployment location; • Pursuing units shall provide frequent location, direction and speed updates; • When possible, deploying personnel should notify the dispatcher of the placement and exact location of spike strips; - The Communications Center will be responsible for notification of such locations to our units and any foreign jurisdiction involved; • Once the tire deflation device is deployed, broadcast this information so pursuing units are aware the pursuit may terminate within a relatively short period of time and distance; • Notification by the pursuing unit, as to the number of tires deflating (if any) is needed to help the supervisor: − Make an informed decision whether to allow more units to the termination site; − Decide whether or not to request additional resources (K-9 unit, allied agencies if out of city, etc.); − Evaluate information on the effectiveness of the tire deflation device and decide whether to continue to use additional tire deflation devices. DEPLOYMENT ON FREEWAYS Generally, freeway entrances and exits should be covered first. Deployment of tire deflation devices on the freeway is not prohibited, however the following consideration should be given prior to freeway deployment: • Freeways have multiple lanes and a tire deflation device can only cover one lane; • Concealment on the freeway is more difficult, although bridge pillars are excellent sources, as well as providing cover for the deploying officer; • Speeds on the freeway tend to be much greater than on surface streets, which decreases the time to recognize the suspect vehicle and make an evaluation when to deploy the tire deflation device; 221 – Tire Deflation Device 499 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Some freeway on-ramps have dual entrances that allow vehicles to enter and merge into one on-ramp; - The best position for deployment would be after the two entrances merge. • Some freeway off-ramps diverge into two exits in opposite directions; - The best position for deployment would be on the exit ramp before the lanes bifurcate. POST DEPLOYMENT INSPECTION Use of a tire deflation device shall be documented in the Supervisor’s Vehicle Pursuit Review and is to include documentation of the following: • Location of deployment, direction of travel, lanes covered, and any other pertinent information; • Name of the officer(s) who deployed the tire deflation device and whether or not the suspect vehicle traversed the tire deflation device; • Injury or death to suspect(s), civilian, or police personnel; • Civilian or patrol vehicles which have traversed a tire deflation device. The Patrol Division where the deploying officer is assigned is responsible for turning in any used tire deflation device(s) to the Collision Investigation Detail before a replacement is issued. TRAINING Training is necessary for officers to develop and maintain the skills necessary for proper usage. Training also serves as a periodic inspection of the equipment on a continual basis to ensure the devices are in proper working order. REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Patrol Bureau 500 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents LONG BEACH POLICE DEPARTMENT TRAINING BULLETIN Robert G. Luna, Chief of Police 222 – Hate Crimes REVISED July 2019 HATE CRIMES AND HATE OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS The Long Beach Police Department investigates reported or observed incidents of violence or threats directed at an individual, institution or business, motivated by race, ethnicity, national origin, religion, disability, gender or sexual orientation. HATE CRIME Penal Code § 422.55(a) defines a hate crime as a criminal act committed in whole or in part, because of one or more of the following actual or perceived characteristics of the victim: 1) Disability 2) Sex 3) Nationality 4) Race or ethnicity 5) Religion 6) Sexual orientation 7) Association with a person or group with one or more of these actual or perceived characteristics Examples of hate crimes include, but are not limited to: • Interfering with, oppressing or threatening any other person in the free exercise or enjoyment of any right or privilege secured by the Constitution or laws because of one or more of the actual or perceived characteristics of the victim (Penal Code § 422.6); • Defacing a person’s property because of one or more of the actual or perceived characteristics of the victim (Penal Code § 422.6(b)); • Terrorizing a person with a swastika or burning cross (Penal Code § 11411); • Vandalizing a place of worship (Penal Code § 594.3). Any crime might be a hate crime depending on the perpetrator's motivation. For example, if a robbery is committed due to the victim's sexual orientation, the patrol officer can simply notify the on-call Violent Crimes detective and file a 212.5 (C) PC - ROBBERY report including all the elements that supported the incident's classification as a hate crime. The District Attorney's Office will decide whether to add the enhancement of 422.6 PC - HATE CRIME. Patrol officers need not be concerned with filing a separate report for a hate crime. 222 – Hate Crimes 501 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents HATE OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENT A hate or bias-motivated incident does not rise to the level of a hate crime as defined by the penal code. A hate or bias-motivated incident is not categorized as a hate crime because it lacks a criminal act. For example, a note reading, “I HATE HOMOSEXUALS” is posted on the door of a residence occupied by a homosexual. That act would be classified as a bias-motivated incident, not a hate crime, because although there was a bias motivation there was no criminal act. If the words, “I HATE HOMOSEXUALS” were spray painted on the same door, that act would be considered a hate crime because it involved a criminal act and a bias motivation. ADDITIONAL GUIDELINES FOR HATE CRIME DETERMINATION • Graffiti must be racial, ethnic, religious, or homophobic in nature, such as swastika, KKK, Nazi, or other hate group symbol or slogans, or involve the use of epithets. • Any assault against a person, in the absence of other apparent motivation, when initiated with racial, ethnic, religious, or homophobic epithets, shall be considered a hate crime. HUMAN DIGNITY COORDINATOR The office of the Human Dignity Coordinator is a liaison between the Police Department and the community. The Violent Crimes Sergeant will notify the Human Dignity Coordinator when hate crimes occur. The purpose of the office is to: • Make the victim(s) aware of available resources; • Educate the public about hate crimes; • Seek to reduce hate crimes; • Assist in the investigation of hate crimes; • Promote harmony between different groups in different communities. PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION The point of first contact is critical in the handling of hate crimes. The initial responding officer must be sensitive to the distinguishing characteristics of hate crimes, so that the victim and the incident are treated appropriately. • If a motive is unclear, or if the incident appears to have overtones of bigotry, ask questions in a sensitive manner. • Sample questions could include: "Do you have any reason to believe this incident may have been motivated by race, religion, gender, disability, ethnicity, nationality, or sexual orientation?” • If the incident is an obvious hate crime or seems to have components of it, reassure the victim of the Department's concern over such incidents and intention to help, and provide the victim with How to Report & Protect Yourself Against Hate Crimes. Inform the victim that these crimes receive a separate designation and special attention. • Give priority to the needs and feelings of the victim. Reassure them, especially concerning threats to their safety or the likelihood of a recurrence. 222 – Hate Crimes 502 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents • Ask the victim about possible suspects. Encourage them to express their feelings, which may provide useful information about motives, potential perpetrators, etc. If there no possible suspects, note proximity to local schools and history of hate groups in the area. • Ask the victim and other parties present if they are aware of other incidents in the area. If the crime was one of vandalism or graffiti, look around the neighborhood for other incidents REVIEW RESPONSIBILITY Investigations Bureau 222 – Hate Crimes 503 | P a g e Return to the Table of Contents